TANDBERG Voyager E5788 Reference Manual

ST.RE.E10137.3
Issue 3
ENGLISH (UK)
REFERENCE GUIDE
Voyager E5784 and E5788
HD DSNG Encoder
Software Version 3.9.0
E5784/E5788 Encoder
Preliminary Pages
ENGLISH (UK)
ITALIANO
READ THIS FIRST!
LEGGERE QUESTO AVVISO PER PRIMO!
If you do not understand the contents of this manual
DO NOT OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT.
Se non si capisce il contenuto del presente manuale
NON UTILIZZARE L’APPARECCHIATURA.
Also, translation into any EC official language of this manual can be
made available, at your cost.
È anche disponibile la versione italiana di questo manuale, ma il costo è
a carico dell’utente.
SVENSKA
NEDERLANDS
LÄS DETTA FÖRST!
LEES DIT EERST!
Om Ni inte förstår informationen i denna handbok
ARBETA DÅ INTE MED DENNA UTRUSTNING.
Als u de inhoud van deze handleiding niet begrijpt
STEL DEZE APPARATUUR DAN NIET IN WERKING.
En översättning till detta språk av denna handbok kan också anskaffas,
på Er bekostnad.
U kunt tevens, op eigen kosten, een vertaling van deze handleiding
krijgen.
PORTUGUÊS
SUOMI
LEIA O TEXTO ABAIXO ANTES DE MAIS NADA!
LUE ENNEN KÄYTTÖÄ!
Se não compreende o texto deste manual
NÃO UTILIZE O EQUIPAMENTO.
Jos et ymmärrä käsikirjan sisältöä
ÄLÄ KÄYTÄ LAITETTA.
O utilizador poderá também obter uma tradução do manual para o
português à própria custa.
Käsikirja voidaan myös suomentaa asiakkaan kustannuksella.
FRANÇAIS
DANSK
AVANT TOUT, LISEZ CE QUI SUIT!
LÆS DETTE FØRST!
Si vous ne comprenez pas les instructions contenues dans ce manuel
NE FAITES PAS FONCTIONNER CET APPAREIL.
Udstyret må ikke betjenes
MEDMINDRE DE TIL FULDE FORSTÅR INDHOLDET AF DENNE
HÅNDBOG.
Vi kan også for Deres regning levere en dansk oversættelse af denne
håndbog.
En outre, nous pouvons vous proposer, à vos frais, une version
française de ce manuel.
DEUTSCH
ΕΛΛΗΝΙΚΑ
LESEN SIE ZUERST DIESEN HINWEIS!
∆ΙΑΒΑΣΤΕ ΠΡΩΤΑ ΑΥΤΟ!
Sollte Ihnen der Inhalf dieses Handbuches nicht klar verständlich sein,
dann
BEDIENEN SIE DIESE GERÄTE NICHT!
Αν δεν καταλάβετε το περιεχόµενο αυτού του βοηθήµατος/εγχειριδίου
ΜΗΝ ΛΕΙΤΟΥΡΓΗΣΕΤΕ ΑΥΤΟΝ ΤΟΝ ΕΞΟΠΛΙΣΜΟ.
Επίσης, αυτό το εγχειρίδιο είναι διαθέσιµο σε µετάφραση
σε αυτή τη γλώσσα και µπορείτε να το αγοράσετε.
Eine Übersetzung des Handbuches in diese Sprache ist gegen
Berechnung lieferbar.
ESPAÑOL
LEA ESTE AVISO PRIMERO!
Si no entiende el contenido de este manual
NO OPERE ESTE EQUIPO.
Podemos asimismo suministrarle una traducción de este manual al
(idioma) previo pago de una cantidad adicional que deberá abonar
usted mismo.
This document and the information contained in it is the property of
TANDBERG Television Ltd and may be the subject of patents
pending and granted. It must not be used for commercial purposes
nor copied, disclosed, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or
transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise), whether in whole or in part,
without TANDBERG Television’s prior written agreement.
 2004 - 2006 TANDBERG Television Ltd. All rights reserved.
Issue 3 first published in 2006 by:
TANDBERG TELEVISION LTD
REGISTERED ADDRESS:
UNIT 2 STRATEGIC PARK,
COMINES WAY,
HEDGE END, SOUTHAMPTON,
HAMPSHIRE,
SO30 4DA
Registered Company Number 03695535
Page ii
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preliminary Pages
List of Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction to the Basic Encoder
Gives a general description of the equipment and its main features and
functions. Identifies the controls, indicators and connectors on the front
and rear panels.
Chapter 2: Installing the Equipment
Provides a guide to the suitability of an installation and gives detailed
procedures for the preparation and installation of the equipment. Also
details the external connectors and provides important safety
information.
Chapter 3: Options and Upgrades
This chapter describes the options and upgrades available for the
E57xx series of Encoder models.
Chapter 4: Operating the Equipment Locally
Describes local control in detail. Provides the power-up/power-down
procedures and other general operating/control/set-up procedures.
Chapter 5: Web Browser Interface
Details how to access and use the Web Browser Interface for a range of
diagnostic and other utilities.
Chapter 6: Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Details routine maintenance tasks to be performed by the operator and
provides general servicing advice and fault-finding information. Provides
information regarding warranty and maintenance available from Customer
Services. Gives relevant disposal information.
Annex A: Glossary
Annex B: Technical Specification
Annex C: Language Abbreviations
Annex D: Creating and Downloading a Logo
Annex E: Band Plans
Annex F: Audio Modes
Annex G: Accuracy of Frequency Sources
Annex H: Use of Remux Card in ATSC
Annex I: EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders
Annex J: Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVBSubtitles Input
Annex K: PRO MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx
Encoders
Annex L: Alarm List
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page iii
Preliminary Pages
About this Reference Guide
This Reference Guide provides instructions and information for the
installation and operation of the Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG
Encoder.
This Reference Guide should be kept in a safe place for reference for the
life of the equipment. It is not intended that this Reference Guide will be
amended by the issue of individual pages. Any revision will be by a
complete reissue. Further copies of this Reference Guide can be ordered
from the address shown on page viii. If passing the equipment to a third
party, also pass the relevant documentation.
Issues of this Reference Guide are listed below:
Issue
Date
Software Version
Comments
1
Apr 2004
3.3.0
Initial release.
2
Mar 2005
3.6.0
Up-issue for new functionality and options
3
Jan 2006
3.9.0
Includes functionality of SVs 3.7.0, 3.8.0 and 3.9.0.
New option modules.
The following documents are also associated with this equipment:
•
•
•
•
ST.TS.SNMP.E10074:
Simple Network Management Protocol
ST.TS.E10074
Remote Control Protocol
ST.AN.1094:
Video Noise Reduction and Compression
ST.AN.1110:
Near Loss-less MPEG Concatenation
Without Helper Signals
•
ST.AN.BW.E10074:
Variable Bandwidth Feature of E57xx
Encoders
Nomenclature
The terms RS-232 and RS-422 have been superseded by EIA-232 and
EIA-422. However, because the original names are inscribed on the
Encoder the original terms are used in the text of this Reference Guide.
Page iv
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preliminary Pages
Acknowledgements
General
All best endeavours have been made to acknowledge registered
trademarks and trademarks used throughout this Reference Guide. Any
notified omissions will be rectified in the next issue of this Reference
Guide. Some trademarks may be registered in some countries but not in
others.
Registered trademarks and trademarks used are acknowledged below and
marked with their respective symbols. However, they are not marked
within the text of this Reference Guide.
Registered Trademarks
AC-3®, Dolby Digital® and Pro Logic® are registered trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
DTS® is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc
Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
Motorola® is a registered trademark of Motorola Inc.
Musicam® is a registered trademark of Thomson and Télédiffusion de
France (TDF), Europe, and is a registered trademark of CCS (now Musicam
USA Incorporated), USA.
Wegener® is a registered trademark of Wegener Communications Inc.
XILINX® is a registered trademark of Xilinx Inc.
Trademarks
Pozidriv™ is a trademark of European Industrial Services.
Reflex™ is a trademark of TANDBERG Television.
Windows NT™ is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
STREAMS™ is a trademark of TANDBERG Television.
NDS™ is a trademark of NDS Limited.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page v
Preliminary Pages
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
Heed Warnings
All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be
adhered to. The manufacturer can not be held responsible for injuries or
damage where warnings and cautions have been ignored or taken lightly.
Read Instructions
All the safety and operating instructions should be read before this product
is operated.
Follow Instructions
All operating and use instructions should be followed.
Retain Instructions
The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future
reference.
WARNINGS...
WARNINGS GIVE INFORMATION WHICH, IF STRICTLY OBSERVED, WILL PREVENT PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH, OR DAMAGE TO PERSONAL PROPERTY OR THE ENVIRONMENT. THEY
ARE BOXED AND SHADED FOR EMPHASIS, AS IN THIS EXAMPLE, AND ARE PLACED
IMMEDIATELY PRECEDING THE POINT AT WHICH THE READER REQUIRES THEM.
CAUTIONS...
Cautions give information which, if strictly followed, will prevent damage to equipment or other goods.
They are boxed for emphasis, as in this example, and are placed immediately preceding the point at
which the reader requires them.
NOTES...
Notes provide supplementary information. They are highlighted for emphasis, as in this example, and
are placed immediately after the relevant text.
EMC Compliance
This equipment is certified to the EMC requirements detailed in Annex B,
Technical Specification. To maintain this certification, only use the leads
supplied or if in doubt contact Customer Services.
Page vi
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preliminary Pages
Contact Information
TANDBERG Television Customer Services
Support Services
Our primary objective is to provide first class customer care that is tailored
to your specific business and operational requirements. All levels are
supported by one or more service performance reviews to ensure the
perfect partnership between TANDBERG Television and your business.
Warranty
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest
standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service Support
For stand-alone equipment, then TANDBERG Television BASIC
Advantage is the value for money choice for you. BASIC provides you
with year-by-year Service long after the warranty has expired.
For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage.
These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income
through enlisting the help of TANDBERG Television support specialists.
VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution. This provides a
package specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational.
Call TANDBERG Sales for more details.
Where to Find Us
Europe, Middle East
and Africa:
+44 (0) 23 8048 4455
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8048 4467
[email protected]
Americas:
+888 671 1268 (US and Canada)
+678 812 6255 (Outside of mainland US)
[email protected]
China:
+86 10 6856 0260 (Beijing)
+852 2530 3215 (Hong Kong)
[email protected]
Australia/NZ:
Internet Address:
+61 2 8923 0450
[email protected]
http://www.tandbergtv.com
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page vii
Preliminary Pages
Technical Training
Training Courses
TANDBERG Television provides a wide range of training courses on the
operation and maintenance of our products and on their supporting
technologies. TANDBERG can provide both regularly scheduled courses and
training tailored to individual needs. Courses can be run either at your
premises or at one of our dedicated training facilities.
Where to Find Us
For further information on TANDBERG Television's training programme
please contact us:
International Telephone:
International Facsimile
+44 23 8048 4229
+44 23 8048 4467
E-mail Address:
Internet Address
[email protected]
http://www.tandbergtv.com
Customer Services and Technical Training Postal Address
Tandberg Television
Unit 2
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Return of Equipment
If you need to return equipment for repair, please contact the Customer
Services Helpdesk on +44 (0) 23 8048 4455. A Returns Authorisation
Number (RAN) will be issued and full details of the unit will be logged.
Please ensure the RAN number is clearly marked on the packaging of the
unit. The unit should then be sent to the following address:
Tandberg Television – Customer Services
Unit 1
Strategic Park
Comines Way
Hedge End
Southampton
Hampshire
SO30 4DA
United Kingdom
Technical Publications
If you need to contact TANDBERG Television Technical Publications
regarding this publication, e-mail: [email protected].
Page viii
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 1
1. Introduction to the Basic Encoder
Contents
1.1 Scope of This Reference Guide................................ 1-3
1.1.1 Who Should Use This Reference Guide....... 1-3
1.1.2 Build Version ................................................ 1-3
1.1.3 What Equipment is Covered by This
Reference Guide .......................................... 1-3
1.2 Role of the Encoder in a System .............................. 1-4
1.2.1 Typical System ............................................. 1-4
1.2.2 DSNG Systems ............................................ 1-5
1.3 Summary of Features................................................ 1-5
1.3.1 Video Encoding ............................................ 1-5
MPEG-2 Encoding........................................ 1-5
Multi-pass Encoding ..................................... 1-5
Video Encoding Modes................................. 1-6
Video Inputs.................................................. 1-6
Video Input Types......................................... 1-6
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection
and Handling (EDH) (SD Only)..................... 1-6
Video Encoding Functions............................ 1-6
Motion Estimation ......................................... 1-7
Variable Video Bit-rate.................................. 1-7
Coding Resolutions ...................................... 1-8
Internal Frame Synchroniser ........................ 1-8
Output on Video Loss ................................... 1-8
1.3.2 Audio Encoding ............................................ 1-9
General......................................................... 1-9
Audio Inputs.................................................. 1-9
Audio Channels ............................................ 1-9
MPEG Encoding Modes ............................. 1-10
Dolby Digital (AC-3) Encoding Modes ........ 1-10
Test Tones.................................................. 1-10
Audio Variable Bit-rate................................ 1-10
Dolby Digital (AC-3).................................... 1-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) Line
Processing Modes (SD) ..............................1-10
Introduction .................................................1-10
VBI in Picture ..............................................1-11
VBI User Data .............................................1-11
VBI in PID....................................................1-11
Teletext Extraction ......................................1-11
High Definition (HD) Closed Captions and
Teletext .......................................................1-12
Data Channels ............................................1-12
Outputs .......................................................1-12
IF/L-band Modulation ..................................1-12
Control and Monitoring................................1-12
Options and Upgrades ................................1-12
1.4 Guided Tour.............................................................1-13
1.4.1 Enclosure ....................................................1-13
1.4.2 Front Panel Description ..............................1-13
Front Panel Display, Navigation Keys,
Softkeys, Keyboard.....................................1-13
Power Supply Stand-by Switch...................1-13
1.4.3 Rear Panel Description ...............................1-14
Introduction .................................................1-14
Page 1-1
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
List of Figures
Figure 1.1: Encoder Front View..................................................... 1-4
Figure 1.2: Typical DSNG Encoder Configuration ........................ 1-5
Figure 1.3: Stand-by Switch ........................................................ 1-13
Figure 1.4: Encoder Front Panel Indicators ................................ 1-14
List of Tables
Table 1.1: Build Version ................................................................ 1-3
Table 1.2: Equipment Model Descriptions..................................... 1-4
Table 1.3: Video Bit-rate Range ................................................... 1-7
Table 1.4: Front Panel Indicators ................................................ 1-13
Page 1-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
1.1
Scope of This Reference Guide
1.1.1
Who Should Use This Reference Guide
This Reference Guide is written for operators/users of the E5784 and
E5788 HD DSNG Encoders to assist in the installation, operation and
day-to-day care. These Encoders are referred to throughout this Reference
Guide as ‘Encoder(s)’ unless there is a specific difference, where they will
be referred to by the model number.
The Encoders can operate with Standard Definition (SD) and High
Definition (HD) modes. Where only one is applicable to an option then the
relevant SD or HD is indicated.
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ONLY
TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO
SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved replacements may affect the equipment
specification and invalidate any warranties.
This Reference Guide does not include any maintenance information or
procedures which would require the removal of covers.
1.1.2
Build Version
This Reference Guide has been written to cover the functionality in
Table 1.1.
Table 1.1: Build Version
E5784, E5788
Build Version
3.9.0 and later
The Build version indicates the status of the Encoder and refers to an
overall number that encompasses all the various software/firmware
versions of video, audio, etc. in the Base Board.
The current Build version can be found in the Build Menu (see Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally, Figure 4.9). This number should be
quoted in all correspondence with TANDBERG Television.
1.1.3
What Equipment is Covered by This Reference Guide
Each model of Encoder comprises an enclosure with a Base Board and
Modulator fitted as standard. The E5784-IF and E5788-IF are fitted with a
IF Satellite Modulator; the E5784-LBAND and E5788-LBAND is fitted with
an L-Band Modulator.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
Figure 1.1: Encoder Front View
There are four vacant slots for option modules. These slots can be
occupied by any combinations of modules shown in Chapter 3, Options and
Upgrades.
Table 1.2: Equipment Model Descriptions
Model
Number
Marketing
Code
Description
E5784 Encoder
M2/VOY/E5784-IF
MPEG-2 HD DSNG Encoder with 4:2:0 video encoding and IF output
satellite modulator.
E5784 Encoder
M2/VOY/E5784-LBAND
MPEG-2 HD DSNG Encoder with 4:2:0 video encoding and L-Band
output satellite modulator.
E5788 Encoder
M2/VOY/E5788-IF
MPEG-2 HD DSNG Encoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 video encoding and IF
output satellite modulator.
E5788 Encoder
M2/VOY/E5788-LBAND
MPEG-2 HD DSNG Encoder with 4:2:0/4:2:2 video encoding and
L-Band output satellite modulator.
1.2
Role of the Encoder in a System
1.2.1
Typical System
The Encoder is a transportable digital exciter designed specifically for
mobile contribution applications. It is compact and lightweight, fully
MPEG-2 and DVB or ATSC compliant and has high performance for the
transmission of studio-quality video material. The equipment is designed
to be suitable for both flyaway use (within an appropriate flight case) and
truck installation.
The Encoder has two video encoders (HD and SD), two stereo audio
encoders (dual standard MPEG-1 (layer 2)/Dolby Digital (AC-3)1),
composite video decoder, CA2, data input and general purpose VBI
extraction and encoding circuitry. It also contains a satellite modulator.
High quality 4:2:0 or 4:2:23 video encoding is ensured by the inclusion of
digital noise reduction techniques4 and many other proprietary algorithms
as well as standard MPEG compression techniques.
Video can be input to the unit in serial digital component (SDI) format or
composite analogue (PAL/NTSC). There is also a logo overlay facility
allowing broadcasters to trademark material.
1
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is only available when software option M2/ESO2/AC3 is purchased.
CA relates to RAS and BISS. RAS and BISS are only available when software options M2/ESO2/RAS and
M2/EDCOM2/BISS are purchased. A E57xx Encoder may be fitted with both RAS and BISS options but only one
scrambling format can be used at any one time.
3
4:2:2 is only available when software option M2/ESO2/422 and M2/ESO2/HD422 is purchased.
4
Noise reduction is only available when software option M2/ESO2/NR and M2/ESO2/HDNR is purchased.
2
Page 1-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
The audio functionality supports multiple sampling frequencies, bit-rates
and coding modes. Audio can be input in balanced analogue, digital
AES/EBU input as a discrete channel or embedded on serial digital video.
Various coding standards are supported, including Linear PCM. Additional
audio channels can be accommodated by purchasing an option module.
Unit functionality can be further extended with option modules (see
Chapter 3, Options and Upgrades).
1.2.2
DSNG Systems
Up-link equipment
(including Up-converter
and High Power
Amplifier)
Tx
Down-link equipment
(including Low Noise
Block and
Down-converter)
Rx
IF
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
ALTEIA
Modulator
Encoder
BER STATUS
ALARM
REMOTE CNTRL
AUTHORIZED
LOCK
STATUS
MULTIFUNCTIONAL DISPLAY
TT1280
Satellite Receiver
VIDEO
AUDIO
ASYNC
DATA
SYNC DATA
DSNG Encoder
Figure 1.2: Typical DSNG Encoder Configuration
1.3
Summary of Features
1.3.1
Video Encoding
MPEG-2 Encoding
The Encoder processes a broadcast-standard video signal into a
compressed encoded bit-stream in accordance with:
•
The MPEG-2 Main profile @ Main level (MP@ML) specification
(ISO/IEC 13818)
•
The MPEG-2 4:2:25 profile @ Main Level (422P@ML) specification
(ISO/IEC 13818)
•
The MPEG-2 levels Main profile @ High Level (MP@HL) and 422P@HL5
Multi-pass Encoding
Encoders having software option M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS enabled are capable
of multi-pass encoding.
5
4:2:2 is only available in HD in the E5788 Encoder when an HD licence is purchased and in SD when software option
M2/ESO2/422 is purchased.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-5
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
An improvement in performance is achieved by using additional video
compression hardware at the front end of the video encoder. A
pre-processor analyses the incoming video signal 'ahead of time'. This
enables important statistical parameters to be derived about the video
signal before the 'final' encoding takes place. This additional analysis is
used to generate more accurate bit-rate predictions and so further
increase the efficiency gains achieved by Reflex.
The video signal in a Multi-pass Encoder is analysed and compressed at
several pre-processing stages before the actual encoding takes place.
Video Encoding Modes
Either the 4:2:0 or 4:2:25 video encoding modes can be selected. The
coding mode selected affects the compression techniques, encoder delay
and rate control.
Video Inputs
The standard video inputs are:
•
SDI - Serial Digital Interface - ITU-R BT.656-4, part 3 (D1 serial
format) – SMPTE 259 (component only)
•
•
Composite Analogue (PAL/NTSC)
HD SDI – High definition serial digital interface (SMPTE 292M)
Video Input Types
The video input types which are supported are:
•
•
625-line composite PAL-B, -D, -G, -H or -I (ITU-R BT. 624-4)
•
Serial digital (ITU-R BT.656-4, part 3) input (D1 serial format) and
(ANSI/SMPTE 259M) (component only)
•
•
Internal test pattern function
525-line composite NTSC-M (with and without pedestal) or PAL-M
(ITU-R BT. 624-4)
480p59/60, 576p50, 720p50, 720p59/60 (SMPTE 296M), 1080i25,
1080i29/30 (SMPTE 274M), 1080pSF/25, 1080pSF/24 and
1080pSF/23.976.
Serial Digital Video Input Error Detection and Handling (EDH)
(SD Only)
The serial digital video input supports error detection and handling (EDH)
as defined by the specification SMPTE RP 165-1994, ‘Error Detection
Checkwords and Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for
Television’.
Video Encoding Functions
The standard video encoding functions include:
•
•
•
•
Page 1-6
Support for all MP@ML and 422P@ML5 standard coding modes
Support for some MP@HL and 422P@HL standard coding modes
Selectable bit-rate operation, <1.5 Mbit/s - 90 Mbit/s (see Table 1.3)
Support for various video picture resolutions (HD and SD)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
•
An internal frame synchroniser (see Internal Frame Synchroniser on
Page 1-8)
•
•
Support for Active Format Descriptor (AFD)
•
•
Built-in patented adaptive noise reduction circuitry6
•
The ability to generate internal video test patterns. These can be
moving, with the ability to load two frames (SD only)
•
With software option M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS enabled, a multi-pass
encoding mode is available which results in more efficient use of
bandwidth
•
Support for ZigZag scan which statistically produces the same or more
efficient coding on most slow moving material
Support for a variety of Group of Pictures (GOP) structures with a
variable number of B frames
A logo overlay facility whereby the Encoder is able to overlay
broadcasters trademarks/logos onto the active video
Motion Estimation
For SD fully Exhaustive motion estimation is used. It takes a macro block
of 16 pixels x 16 pixels and then performs an exhaustive search without
subsampling.
For HD a hierarchical motion estimation scheme is used. It creates a
hierarchical set of pictures, each layer containing a vertically and
horizontally sub-sampled version of the picture in the layer above. The
motion estimation search begins in the lowest layer that contains the
coarsest image. An exhaustive search of this layer produces an initial
location for the best match.
This location is then used as the start point for an exhaustive search in the
next layer up in the hierarchy. This higher layer image is more detailed, so
the new search acts to refine the previous search to produce a more
accurate location for the best match.
This process of locating the best match, then exhaustively re-searching
about this location in a higher layer is repeated until all the available
layers have been searched. The final search is in the original full resolution
image and is at ½ picture element (pel) accuracy.
Variable Video Bit-rate
The MPEG-2 compression algorithm uses adaptive field/frame coding,
forward and backward predictive processing with motion estimation and
compensation to reduce the bit-rate to the range shown in Table 1.3.
Table 1.3: Video Bit-rate Range 7
Video Encoding Mode
6
7
4:2:0 (SD)
4:2:0 (HD)
4:2:2 (SD)
4:2:2 (HD)
0.256 Mbit/s - 15 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s - 90 Mbit/s
For 480 and 576 the
minimum is 2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s - 50 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s - 90 Mbit/s
For 480 and 576 the minimum is
2 Mbit/s
Noise reduction is only available when software option M2/ESO2/NR or M2/ESO2/HDNR is purchased.
The video bit-rate depends on the Multiplexer bit-rate which is set.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-7
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
NOTE…
Lower bit-rates can be achieved, in HD mode, when used in Statistical Multiplexing equipment.
Coding Resolutions
To provide optimum picture quality over the full range of supported
bit-rates, the encoded picture resolution is controlled automatically
according to the video bit-rate. Alternatively, the user can override this
and select manual control, if desired. Coding resolutions are shown in
Annex B, Technical Specification.
Internal Frame Synchroniser
An internal frame synchroniser is provided to accommodate slight
differences between the incoming frame rate and that generated by the
stable reference8 used by the Encoder.
Output on Video Loss
The Encoder can be software-configured to show, in the event of video
input loss, either:
•
•
•
•
8
A test pattern (with or without ident text) (SD only)
A freeze frame (with or without ident text) (SD only)
Display Stored OSD (Only available if the Encoder has an OSD loaded).
Cut to a black screen (HD default)
To ensure broadcast quality it is recommended that the studio reference is fed to HYSNC.
Page 1-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
1.3.2
Audio Encoding
General
Audio can be encoded to:
•
•
MPEG-1 Audio (layer 2) standard (sampling rate 32 kHz or 48 kHz).
Dolby Digital (AC-3)9 (sampling rate 32 kHz or 48 kHz)10.
Output bit-rate is selectable in the range 32 kbit/s - 384 kbit/s (dependent
on configuration) for MPEG-1 Audio (layer 2) and 56 kbit/s - 640 kbit/s
(dependent on configuration) for Dolby Digital (AC-3) coding mode
selectable between 1/0 and 2/0.
•
Dolby Digital (AC-3) pre-encoded audio (IEC 61937 specification) in
pass-through mode is also available (it only operates at 48 kHz). This
is where an audio stream has already been encoded externally, prior to
entering the Encoder.
•
•
•
•
Linear PCM (Direct)10 [SMPTE 302M].
Linear PCM (Via SRC) [sample rate converter]
Dolby E Pass-through10.
DTS Pass-through10.
NOTES…
1. See Annex F, Audio Modes for details of setting up the audio.
2. MPEG-1 audio sampling rate is fixed at 48 kHz when controlled from the front panel.
Audio Inputs
The standard audio input is:
•
AUDIO IN – 15-way male D-type - software selectable balanced
analogue or digital AES/EBU, with AES/EBU on left only. A break-out
cable is supplied which plugs into this connector and provides a more
convenient means of connecting the audio inputs via five connectors.
There are four XLR female connectors, with the fifth cable being a BNC
which provides an AES/EBU 75 Ω digital reference output.
•
Alternatively, audio can be input embedded as AES/EBU on the serial
digital interface (SDI – HD or SD). In this mode a maximum of four
stereo pairs can be extracted from any two Data Identifiers (DIDs).
Audio may be converted to either of the standard output sampling
frequencies, 32 kHz or 48 kHz, by use of the built-in asynchronous
sample rate converters. This applies only to audio which is not
pre-encoded.
Audio Channels
The Encoder Base Board is capable of processing two stereo pairs, from
any of the following11:
•
•
•
SDI Embedded source (HD or SD)
Digital source AES/EBU
Analogue source, termination impedance 600 Ω or 20 kΩ
9
Dolby Digital (AC-3) is only available when software option M2/ESO2/AC3 is purchased.
To achieve lip sync in all modes the audio option M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 must be used.
11
See Annex F, Audio Modes for details of setting up the audio.
10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-9
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
These signals may be processed using the encoding modes in the following
section.
MPEG Encoding Modes
The two stereo pairs may be configured in various encoding modes:
•
•
Single mono: either the left or the right channel is encoded.
•
Stereo: A stereo pair is coded as two mono signals - the two signals
are output as stereo at the receiving end.
•
Joint stereo: A stereo pair is coded taking advantage of the stereo
nature of the channels - the two signals are output as stereo at the
receiving end. Available in MPEG-1 (layer 2) only.
•
Audio Description Service
Dual mono: the left and right signals are encoded and carried in the
transport stream as a single Packetised Elementary Stream (PES) data
stream. The way that the left and right signals are output from the
Receiver is dependent on how the routing is set up on the Receiver.
Both the left and the right may be output, or the left only, or the right
only. This is typically used for multilingual services. Available in
MPEG-1 (layer 2) and Linear PCM.
Dolby Digital (AC-3) Encoding Modes
•
•
1/0: centre
2/0: left and right
Test Tones
The equipment can be configured to generate a test tone for alignment
purposes. Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for level and
frequency.
Audio Variable Bit-rate
MPEG-1 audio output bit-rate (see Annex B, Technical Specification) is
selectable in the range 32 kbit/s -384 kbit/s (dependent on configuration).
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio encoding incorporates digital normalisation,
preprocessing (filtering), dynamic range compression and the addition of
bit-stream information.
Dolby Pro Logic audio can be carried as stereo audio through the Encoder
as long as a suitably high bit-rate is selected (see Annex B, Technical
Specification).
1.3.3
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI) Line Processing
Modes (SD)
Introduction
The Encoder has three modes for processing VBI lines.
NOTE…
A maximum of eight VBI lines per field may be extracted. This limit does not apply to Teletext.
Page 1-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
VBI in Picture
By selecting the VBI in Picture extended active picture format available in
the MPEG 4:2:2 specification the Encoder compresses and transmits the
VBI data as part of the active picture. This mode requires up to 3 Mbit/s of
extra bit-rate, depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI
present.
NOTES…
1. VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to
some distortion. Most analogue VBI types are robust against this type of distortion but others,
e.g. video index, are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG coding/decoding
in VBI in Picture mode. VITS test signal and ghost cancellation signal will become corrupted.
2. VBI in Picture is not supported when 3:2 Pulldown is active.
VBI User Data
Closed Caption data, together with other formats such as VITC and AFD,
can be transmitted in the user data field of the video or relevant part of
the video stream.
VBI in PID
The Encoder has the ability to extract and transmit a wide variety of VBI
line formats. Circuitry on the front end of the equipment incorporates a
number of general purpose line grabbers so that known formats of VBI
data can be extracted.
The following VBI data formats are supported:
•
Line 21 (field 1 and field 2) data Services EIA-608 (Closed Caption and
V-chip)
•
•
Neilson AMOL 1, Neilson AMOL 11
•
Programme Delivery Control (PDC), via ITU-R system B Teletext
extension data packets of type 8/30, format 2 and Line 16 Video
Programme System (VPS). Video Programming Teletext (VPT) and VPS
are trade names
•
•
•
Wide Screen Signalling (WSS) (line 23) ETS 300 294
VITC12 (EBU and SMPTE)
VITC extraction from line 16 or 22 for 625-line systems (EBU
definitions), or line 14 for 525-line systems is supported.
Video Index (for Pan Scan, Aspect Ratio and Active Format Descriptor)
The supported VBI line number range is 10-22 and 272-285 for 525
lines and 6-22 and 318-334 for 625 lines
Teletext Extraction
The Encoder supports internal Teletext data extraction (Teletext drop)
from the VBI of a video input and formats this data into a transport
packet, as specified in the DVB specification EN300-472. The Encoder can
extract up to 18 lines of Teletext from each field of the video frame.
12
VITC: Only timecode is extracted.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-11
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
Line filters can be invoked to selectively disable any individual lines in this
range. The filters are provided to allow the user to ensure that
non-Teletext lines (e.g. ITS lines) are not erroneously extracted. The
extracted Teletext lines are formatted into PES packets according to the
DVB specification. The Teletext PES packets are time-stamped to allow
correct alignment of subtitling captions with decoded video.
The following Teletext services are extractable:
•
•
•
1.3.4
System B (WST) Teletext
Video Programming Teletext (VPT), PDC (Packet 8/30 format 2)
Inverted Teletext
High Definition (HD) Closed Captions and Teletext
High Definition mode only supports Closed Caption and Teletext insertion.
AFD information can also be signalled in the video user data – signalled by
contact closure.
1.3.5
Data Channels
The basic Encoder supports two data channels, an asynchronous RS-232
and a synchronous RS-442. These are provided as data pipes only, they
are not time-stamped.
A menu entry is available which ensures transport stream formatting
conforms to the Wegener RS232 data format for carriage of general data.
The Encoder supports, via a menu option, the carriage of DCIIText packets
and ensures transport stream formatting is in accordance with the
Motorola specification.
1.3.6
Outputs
Three ASI-C (copper) outputs supplying a DVB and ATSC MPEG-2
transport stream are supplied as standard.
1.3.7
IF/L-band Modulation
The satellite modulator fitted within the E5784/E5788 is capable of QPSK
modulation in accordance with EN 300 421 (DVB-S), and is also capable of
8PSK and 16QAM modulation in accordance with EN 301 210 (DVB-DSNG).
The Encoder is available with either IF outputs, or L-band outputs. The IF
output frequency can be tuned between 50 MHz and 180 MHz in 1 kHz
steps. The L-band output frequency can be tuned between 950 MHz and
1750 MHz in 1 kHz steps. The maximum symbol rate is 66 Msym/s.
1.3.8
Control and Monitoring
Remote control of the Encoder is via the Ethernet network running the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) protocol or via the
RS-232/RS-485 remote control port.
Alternatively, Local control is implemented through the front panel keypad
and display.
1.3.9
Options and Upgrades
Options and Upgrades are described in Chapter 3, Options and Upgrades.
Page 1-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
1.4
Guided Tour
1.4.1
Enclosure
The enclosure can be freestanding or mounted in a 19-inch rack. All inputs
and outputs are via rear panel connectors.
1.4.2
Front Panel Description
Front Panel Display, Navigation Keys, Softkeys, Keyboard
The Encoder provides a keypad and softkeys to access and input data.
There are two LED indicators, located on the left of the front panel (see
Figure 1.4).
The front panel display and navigation keys/softkeys/keyboard are used as
a local control method to set up and configure the Encoder (see Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally). They can also be used as a quick
method for accessing the status of the equipment.
Table 1.4: Front Panel Indicators
Indicator
Colour
Description
Alarm
Red
This LED is lit when an alarm condition has been detected by the Encoder.
Power
Green
This LED is lit when power is being received by the Encoder.
Power Supply Stand-by Switch
The use of this switch puts the Encoder into stand-by mode. It powers
down the supply rails of the display and internal circuits within the unit.
The switch type avoids accidental powering-down of the Encoder. For
normal use ensure that the I is always at the top (see Figure 1.3).
WARNING…
THIS IS NOT A MAINS SWITCH AND DOES NOT ISOLATE THE ENCODER FROM THE POWER
SUPPLY.
On position
Stand-by position
Figure 1.3: Stand-by Switch
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 1-13
Introduction to the Basic Encoder
Power Supply
Stand-by Switch
Alarm (red)
Softkeys, to select
options
Power (green)
Figure 1.4: Encoder Front Panel Indicators
1.4.3
Rear Panel Description
Introduction
The Encoder provides connectors at the rear panel (see Chapter 2,
Installing the Equipment). All, except the power connector, are physically
located on the separate modules which comprise the Encoder.
Page 1-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 2
2. Installing the Equipment
Contents
2.1 Introduction ............................................................... 2-3
2.1.1 Read This First! ............................................ 2-3
2.1.2 General......................................................... 2-3
2.1.3 Site Requirements ........................................ 2-3
Power Supplies............................................. 2-3
Environment ................................................. 2-3
Lightning Protection...................................... 2-3
2.1.4 EMC Compliance Statements ...................... 2-3
EN 55022 / AS/NZS 3548............................. 2-3
FCC .............................................................. 2-4
2.2 Preliminary Checks ................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Mechanical Inspection .................................. 2-4
2.2.2 Moving the Equipment Safely....................... 2-4
2.3 Installing the Equipment............................................ 2-4
2.3.1 Fixing Method ............................................... 2-4
2.3.2 Cable Routing............................................... 2-5
2.3.3 Equipment Access........................................ 2-5
2.3.4 Ventilation..................................................... 2-5
2.4 AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing ............... 2-7
2.4.1 AC Power Supply ......................................... 2-7
2.4.2 Power Cable and Earthing............................ 2-7
General......................................................... 2-7
Protective Earth/Technical Earth .................. 2-8
Connecting the Encoder to the AC Power
Supply........................................................... 2-8
2.5 Signal Connections For the Basic Unit...................... 2-9
2.5.1 Introduction................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Connecting Up the Basic Encoder.............. 2-10
2.5.3 Power Supply ............................................. 2-11
2.5.4 Technical Earth........................................... 2-11
2.5.5 Video Inputs................................................ 2-11
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
SDI IN (Standard Definition)........................2-11
HD SDI INPUT (High Definition) .................2-11
H SYNC.......................................................2-12
COMP VIDEO .............................................2-12
2.5.6 Audio Inputs ................................................2-12
2.5.7 ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3 Outputs .......................2-13
2.5.8 Control Interfaces........................................2-13
Connection ..................................................2-13
Ethernet #1 and #2......................................2-14
Alarm...........................................................2-14
Remote Control ...........................................2-15
2.5.9 Data.............................................................2-15
RS-232 Connector ......................................2-15
RS-422 Connector ......................................2-16
2.5.10 Satellite Modulator IF Output ......................2-17
IF Out (Main) ...............................................2-17
IF Out (Monitor)...........................................2-17
2.5.11 Satellite Modulator L-Band Output ..............2-17
L-Band In.....................................................2-17
L-Band Out (Main).......................................2-18
L-Band Out (Monitor) ..................................2-18
Up-Converter Power ...................................2-18
2.6 Powering Up/Down..................................................2-18
2.6.1 Before Powering Up ....................................2-18
2.6.2 Powering Up................................................2-19
2.6.3 Powering Down ...........................................2-19
2.7 Setting the Encoder IP Address ..............................2-19
2.7.1 Methods of Changing the Encoder IP
Address .......................................................2-19
2.7.2 From the Front Panel Menus ......................2-19
List of Figures
Figure 2.1: Fitting the Encoder into a Rack ................................... 2-5
Page 2-1
Installing the Equipment
Figure 2.2: Air Path Through the Enclosure .................................. 2-6
Figure 2.3: IF Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors....... 2-9
Figure 2.4: L-Band Rear Panel Component Parts and
Connectors................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2.5: Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit................ 2-10
Figure 2.6: Changing the Encoder IP Address............................ 2-19
List of Tables
Table 2.1: Supply Cable Wiring Colours........................................ 2-7
Table 2.2: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours..................... 2-8
Table 2.3: SDI Connector ............................................................ 2-11
Table 2.4: HD SDI In Connector.................................................. 2-11
Table 2.5: H SYNC Connector .................................................... 2-12
Table 2.6: COMP VIDEO Connector........................................... 2-12
Table 2.7: Audio In Connector..................................................... 2-13
Table 2.8: ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3 Connectors................................. 2-13
Table 2.9: Ethernet Connector .................................................... 2-14
Table 2.10: Alarm Connector....................................................... 2-14
Table 2.11: Remote Control Connector (RS-232/ RS-485)......... 2-15
Table 2.12: RS-232 Data Connector (Base Board) Asynchronous ............................................................ 2-15
Table 2.13: RS-422 Data Connector (Base Board) Synchronous .............................................................. 2-16
Table 2.14: IF Out Connector (Main)........................................... 2-17
Table 2.15: IF Output Connector (Monitor).................................. 2-17
Table 2.16: L-Band In Connector ................................................ 2-17
Table 2.17: L-Band Out (Main) Connector .................................. 2-18
Table 2.18: L-Band Out (Monitor) Connector .............................. 2-18
Page 2-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.1
Introduction
2.1.1
Read This First!
The Encoder must be handled carefully and thoughtfully to prevent safety
hazards and damage. It is usually supplied as part of a system installed by
TANDBERG Television engineers. In any case, ensure the personnel
designated to install the unit have the appropriate skills and knowledge. If
in any doubt, contact Customer Services.
Follow the instructions for installation and only use installation accessories
recommended by the manufacturers.
2.1.2
General
Installation of the Encoder is normally performed by TANDBERG Television
personnel. This chapter provides configuration and connection information
for planning installations, checking the final set-up in the event of a fault,
modifying the requirements or moving the equipment to another location.
In the event of problems, contact Customer Services.
2.1.3
Site Requirements
Power Supplies
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
Environment
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full specification.
Do not install this product in areas of high humidity or where there is
danger of water ingress.
Lightning Protection
WARNING…
IF THE ENCODER HAS BEEN SUBJECT TO A LIGHTNING STRIKE OR POWER SURGE WHICH
HAS STOPPED IT WORKING, DISCONNECT THE POWER IMMEDIATELY. DO NOT REAPPLY
POWER UNTIL IT HAS BEEN CHECKED FOR SAFETY. IF IN DOUBT, CONTACT TANDBERG
TELEVISION CUSTOMER SERVICES.
Where appropriate, ensure this product has an adequate level of lightning
protection. Alternatively, during a lightning storm or when it is left
unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the supply
outlet and disconnect the output equipment. This prevents damage to the
product due to lightning and power line surges.
2.1.4
EMC Compliance Statements1
EN 55022 / AS/NZS 3548
This equipment is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be
required to take adequate measures.
1
The EMC information was correct at the time of manufacture. The EMC tests were performed with the Technical earth
attached.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-3
Installing the Equipment
FCC
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own
expense.
2.2
Preliminary Checks
2.2.1
Mechanical Inspection
When taking delivery of an Encoder, check the equipment items delivered
against the enclosed delivery note. Inspect the equipment for damage in
transit. If in doubt, contact Customer Services (see Preliminary Pages).
NOTE…
Do not remove the covers of this equipment as doing so may invalidate any warranties, cause a safety
hazard and/or affect the EMC performance. It may also invalidate any safety tests. Check with
Customer Services beforehand.
2.2.2
Moving the Equipment Safely
Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand,
bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious
injury and serious damage to the product. Use only with a
cart, stand, bracket or table recommended by TANDBERG
Television.
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick
stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and
cart combination to overturn.
Do not move or carry the equipment whilst it is still connected to the
supply or other leads, is live or is in operation.
2.3
Installing the Equipment
2.3.1
Fixing Method
The Encoder can be operated mounted in a 19-inch rack. Ensure that it is
firmly and safely located and has an adequate through-flow of air.
Slide the Encoder onto the chassis supports and affix to the rack by means
of an M6 x 18 mm panhead screw in each corner (see Figure 2.1).
Do not use this product as a support for any other equipment.
Page 2-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
Location of screws to attach
Encoder to rack.
Same at the opposite side of the
Encoder.
Figure 2.1: Fitting the Encoder into a Rack
2.3.2
Cable Routing
Power supply cables should be routed so that they are not likely to be
walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them. Pay particular
attention to cables at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where
they exit from the appliance.
Do not run a.c. power cables in the same duct as signal leads.
2.3.3
Equipment Access
WARNING...
BERYLLIUM COPPER FINGER STRIPS ARE USED IN THIS EQUIPMENT TO SEAL THE
ENCLOSURE FOR EMI PROTECTION. THIS ARRANGEMENT IS PERFECTLY SAFE DURING
NORMAL OPERATION. DO NOT FILE THE STRIPS OR OTHERWISE CAUSE THEM TO PRODUCE
DUST OR PARTICLES. ANY CUTS CAUSED BY THE STRIP SHOULD BE TREATED
APPROPRIATELY.
Ensure that the Encoder is installed in such a way as to allow access to the
rear of the unit and the connectors.
2.3.4
Ventilation
WARNING...
NEVER PUSH OBJECTS OF ANY KIND INTO THIS EQUIPMENT THROUGH OPENINGS AS THEY
MAY TOUCH DANGEROUS VOLTAGE POINTS OR SHORT-OUT PARTS THAT COULD RESULT IN
A FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK. NEVER SPILL LIQUID OF ANY KIND ON THE PRODUCT.
CAUTIONS...
1. Openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product
and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. This product
should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register. This product should not be placed in
a built-in installation such as a rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the instructions have
been adhered to.
2. Do not install equipment so that the air intake of one aligns with the outlet on another. Provide
baffles and adequate spacing.
3. The fans contained within this unit are not fitted with a dust/insect filter. Pay particular attention to the
environment in which it is to be used.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-5
Installing the Equipment
The unit is designed for stationary or fixed use only. Ensure it is firmly and
safely located and has an adequate through-flow of air. Allow at least
50 mm free air-space at each side of the equipment. Units in racks can be
stacked without ventilation panels between. Racks containing stacked
equipment may need to be forced-air cooled to reduce the operating
ambient temperature. For stacking constraints contact Customer Services.
It is important not to block the front air intake on the bottom-left corner of
the front panel (see Figure 2.2).
Warm air out
Cool air in
Cool air in
(front – via bottom vent)
Figure 2.2: Air Path Through the Enclosure
NOTE…
Cooling arrangements in current models may differ to those shown.
Page 2-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.4
AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing
2.4.1
AC Power Supply
CAUTION...
This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your business, consult a qualified electrical engineer or
your local power company.
See Annex B, Technical Specification for a full power supply specification.
There are no links or switches to be altered for operation from different
a.c. supplies.
2.4.2
Power Cable and Earthing
General
Check that the a.c. power cable is suitable for the country in which the
Encoder is to be used.
WARNINGS...
1. IF THE MOULDED PLUG FITTED TO THE MAINS CABLE SUPPLIED WITH THIS UNIT IS NOT
REQUIRED, PLEASE DISPOSE OF IT SAFELY. FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY ENDANGER LIFE
AS LIVE ENDS MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE REMOVED PLUG IS INSERTED INTO A MAINS
OUTLET.
2. POWER-SUPPLY CORDS SHOULD BE ROUTED SO THAT THEY ARE NOT LIKELY TO BE
WALKED ON OR PINCHED BY ITEMS PLACED UPON OR AGAINST THEM, PAYING
PARTICULAR ATTENTION TO CORDS AT PLUGS, CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES, AND THE
POINT WHERE THEY EXIT FROM THE APPLIANCE.
The unit is supplied with three, detachable mains-supply cables fitted with
moulded plugs suitable for the USA, UK or Europe.
The wires in the mains cable are coloured in accordance with the wire
colour code shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1: Supply Cable Wiring Colours
UK
(BS 1363)
EUROPE
(CEE 7/7)
USA
(NEMA 5-15P)
Earth:
Green-and-yellow
Green-and-yellow
Green
Neutral:
Blue
Blue
White
Live:
Brown
Brown
Black
If the colours do not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the
terminals in a locally supplied plug, proceed as in Table 2.2 (included for
reference).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-7
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.2: Non Standard Supply Cord Wire Colours
Wire Colour (UK)
Action
green-and-yellow
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or the safety earth
symbol or coloured green or green-and-yellow.
blue
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured black.
brown
...must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured red.
Protective Earth/Technical Earth
1.
2.
WARNINGS...
THIS UNIT MUST BE CORRECTLY EARTHED THROUGH THE MOULDED PLUG SUPPLIED.
IF THE LOCAL MAINS SUPPLY DOES NOT HAVE AN EARTH CONDUCTOR DO NOT
CONNECT THE UNIT. CONTACT CUSTOMER SERVICES FOR ADVICE.
BEFORE CONNECTING THE UNIT TO THE SUPPLY, CHECK THE SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
IN ANNEX B.
The unit has a Technical earth terminal (marked with ) located at the
rear panel. Its use is recommended. This is NOT a Protective earth for
electric shock protection. The terminal is provided to:
1. Ensure all equipment chassis fixed within a rack are at the same
Technical earth potential. To do this, connect a wire between the
Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack.
2. Eliminate the migration of stray charges when connecting between
equipment.
WARNING...
IF THE TERMINAL SCREW HAS TO BE REPLACED, USE A M5 X 12mm LONG POZIDRIV
PANHEAD. USING A LONGER SCREW MAY CAUSE A SAFETY HAZARD.
Connecting the Encoder to the AC Power Supply
WARNINGS...
1. DO NOT OVERLOAD WALL OUTLETS AND EXTENSION CORDS AS THIS CAN RESULT IN A
RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK.
2. AS NO MAINS SWITCH IS FITTED TO THIS UNIT, ENSURE THE LOCAL AC POWER SUPPLY
IS SWITCHED OFF BEFORE CONNECTING THE SUPPLY CORD.
3. THE ENCODER IS NOT FITTED WITH AN ON/OFF SWITCH. ENSURE THAT THE
SOCKET-OUTLET IS INSTALLED NEAR THE EQUIPMENT SO THAT IT IS EASILY
ACCESSIBLE. FAILURE TO ISOLATE THE EQUIPMENT PROPERLY MAY CAUSE A SAFETY
HAZARD.
To connect the unit to the local a.c. power supply:
Page 2-8
1.
Ensure the local a.c. supply is switched OFF.
2.
Ensure the correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to both the
equipment and the a.c. power cable.
3.
Connect the a.c. power lead to the Encoder mains input connector and
then to the local mains supply.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.5
Signal Connections For the Basic Unit
2.5.1
Introduction
All signal connectors are located at the rear panel of the Encoder. For a
detailed interface specification see Annex B, Technical Specification.
Always use the specified cables supplied for signal integrity and compliance
with EMC requirements (see Annex B, Technical Specification).
Only those connectors used are labelled in Figure 2.3 and Figure 2.4.
Ethernet
1 and 2
RS-232 Data
Alarm
ASI
Outputs
Remote
Control
RS-422 Data
Audio In and Audio
Reference Out
H Sync
Composite Video
SDI In
Technical
Earth
Option Slot 6
Option Slot 1
HD SDI Input
IF Out Monitor
IF Out Main
Figure 2.3: IF Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors
Remote
Control
RS-422 Data
Alarm
ASI
Outputs
Ethernet
1 and 2
RS-232 Data
Audio In and Audio
Reference Out
H Sync
SDI In
Composite Video
Technical
Earth
Option Slot 6
Option Slot 1
HD SDI Input
L-Band
In
L-Band Out
Main
L-Band Out
Monitor
Figure 2.4: L-Band Rear Panel Component Parts and Connectors
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-9
Installing the Equipment
2.5.2
Connecting Up the Basic Encoder
Once the unit has been installed in its intended operating position, it is
ready to be connected up to the rest of the system equipment
(see Figure 2.5), providing it too has been installed (see Section 2.5,
Figure 2.5 for pin-out details of the connectors).
Encoder
Output
Video Input
SD Serial Digital Interface
SDI IN
ASI OUT 1
DVB/ATSC Transport stream output
HD Serial Digital Interface
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
DVB/ATSC Transport stream output
H SYNC
ASI OUT 3
DVB/ATSC Transport stream output
Studio Black and Burst
Analogue composite video
COMP VIDEO
Alarm
ALARM
Audio Input
Audio input
Alarm and Monitoring
AUDIO IN
AES/EBU Reference
Modulator (IF)
Control
10BaseT
ETHERNET #1
10BaseT
ETHERNET #2
RS-232/RS-485
REMOTE CONTROL
OUT MAIN
OUT MONITOR
L-BAND IN
RS-422 data input
L-BAND OUT MAIN
RS-232 DATA
Monitor Output
Modulator (L-band)
Data
RS-232 data input
Main Output
L-BAND OUT MONITOR
L-Band In
L-Band Monitor Output
L-Band Main Output
RS-422 DATA
Figure 2.5: Equipment Connections for the Basic Unit
Do not move or install equipment whilst it is still attached to the mains
supply. Ensure ESD precautions are observed whilst interconnecting
equipment.
NOTE…
See Chapter 3 for information relating to Options and Upgrades.
Page 2-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.5.3
Power Supply
Section 2.4, AC Mains Operating Voltage and Earthing provides details of
power supply connection, Protective earthing and safety. Read all the
instructions carefully and take note of all warnings and cautions.
2.5.4
Technical Earth
Connect the Encoder's Technical earth to a suitable point.
2.5.5
Video Inputs
SDI IN (Standard Definition)
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides a serial digital video
input to the unit. See Chapter 4, Operating the
Equipment Locally, Video Input Option for the types of
video and selection method. This input is terminated in
75 Ω.
The serial input supports error detection and handling (EDH) as defined by
the specification SMPTE RP 165-1994, ‘Error Detection Checkwords and
Status Flags for Use in Bit Serial Digital Interfaces for Television’.
For more information about EDH refer to Annex I, EDH Capability for E57xx
Encoders.
Table 2.3: SDI Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Video Input
Screen
Ground
Impedance
75 Ω
HD SDI INPUT (High Definition)
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides a high
definition serial digital video input to the unit.
Table 2.4: HD SDI In Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Video Input
Screen
Ground
NOTE…
Up to four channels of embedded audio can be carried in the serial video stream. These are chosen
using the Audio Source and Embedded Src 12 (audio channels 1 and 2) or Embedded Src 34
(audio channels 3 and 4) option menus.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-11
Installing the Equipment
H SYNC
Studio Black and Burst should be fed to the 75 Ω BNC
connector (H SYNC). This will then genlock the
Encoder to the Studio system. This method may be
required with some audio formats, or for locking
Encoders to an evolution 5000 Multiplexer. For details
on the genlocking system see Annex F, Audio Modes.
Table 2.5: H SYNC Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Video Input
Screen
Ground
Impedance
75 Ω
COMP VIDEO
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides a high quality
analogue video input to the unit. See Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally, Video Input Option
for the types of video and selection method.
NOTE…
The input is differential to prevent 50 Hz/60 Hz hum.
Table 2.6: COMP VIDEO Connector
2.5.6
Pin
Signal
Centre
Video Input
Screen
Video Input Return
Impedance
75 Ω
Audio Inputs
Connect the audio cable to the AUDIO IN
connector. The 15-way, D-type male connector is
used in different ways according to the audio input
and the encoding configuration selected.
The connector provides two stereo pairs. They may be independently
configured as either analogue or digital. The left channel is used to input
digital audio.
The Encoder is supplied with a break-out cable which plugs into this
connector, and provides a more convenient means of connecting the audio
signals via five connectors. There are four XLR female connectors, with the
fifth cable being a BNC which provides an AES/EBU 75 Ω digital reference
output.
Page 2-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
Table 2.7: Audio In Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Analogue
Digital
1
Left Channel A (+)
AES/EBU (A) (+)
2
Signal
Analogue
Digital
9
Left Channel A (-)
AES/EBU (A) (-)
Not connected
10
Right Channel A (+)
3
Right Channel A (-)
11
Not connected
4
Left Channel B (+)
12
Left Channel B (-)
5
Not connected
13
Right Channel B (+)
6
Right Channel B (-)
14
Not connected
7
AES/EBU (B) (+)
AES/EBU
Reference (Signal)
8
15
AES/EBU (B) (-)
AES/EBU
Reference (Ground)
Not connected
NOTES…
1. In analogue mode termination is either 20 kΩ or 600 Ω.
2. In AES/EBU mode termination is 110 Ω.
3. When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Ω termination.
4. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
5. In order to comply with EMC regulations, use the audio break-out cable supplied with the unit.
2.5.7
ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3 Outputs
Connect the Multiplexer or Modulator ASI cable to the
appropriate ASI OUT connector, using good quality
75 Ω coaxial cable (for example, BBC PSF 1/3).
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides the output from the Encoder.
Table 2.8: ASI OUT 1, 2 and 3 Connectors
2.5.8
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Control Interfaces
Connection
Operation of the Encoder from a TANDBERG Television control system is
via the Ethernet network running the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP) protocol. Connect the ETHERNET connector to the
controller (for example, MEM). Local control is implemented through the
front panel keypad and display. See Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment
Locally for details of how to access the front panel menus.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-13
Installing the Equipment
Ethernet #1 and #2
An 8-way, RJ-45 connector provides a 10BaseT
Ethernet interface for communications with the MEM
for control and monitoring. The Encoder has a single
switched Ethernet channel. Ethernet#1 is selected as
default at power-up. If a carrier is not detected on
Ethernet#1 then the input switches to Ethernet#2.
This gives a redundant Ethernet control via two hubs.
Table 2.9: Ethernet Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Tx Out (+)
4-5
Not connected
2
Tx Out (-)
6
Rx In (-)
3
Rx In (+)
7-8
Not connected
Alarm
If required, connect an external status monitoring
device to the ALARM connector.
A 9-way, D-type male connector provides an alarm
relay interface which can be used to send a signal to
remote equipment.
When there are no active alarms or fails, the relays are energised. They
are de-energised when there is an active alarm or active fail. Thus, a loss
of power will be signalled as an alarm and fail.
Table 2.10: Alarm Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Signal
1
Ground
6
Fail (NO)
2
Fail (common)
7
Fail (NC)
3
Alarm (NO)
8
Alarm (common)
4
Alarm (+) (NC)
9
Reset 2 (internally grounded)
5
Reset 1 (internally pulled
to 3.3 V via 10 kΩ)
Fail
Common
Fail (NC)
3.3 V
Fail (NO)
10 kΩ
Alarm
Common
Alarm (NC)
Alarm (NO)
Reset 1
Reset 2
NOTE…
NC = Normally Closed, NO = Normally Open, and refers to the relay contacts. Refer to Annex B for
details of the relay contact rating.
Page 2-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
Remote Control
A 9-way, D-type male connector provides an
RS-232/RS-485 port for remote control of the
Encoder (see Serial Protocol Option). This
connector is wired as a DTE.
Table 2.11: Remote Control Connector (RS-232/ RS-485)
Remote (DTE)
Encoder (DTE) Remote Control
Signal Name
Signal Direction
Pin
Signal Name
1
Not connected
Transmit Data
2
Received Data (RS-232)
Received Data
3
Transmit Data (RS-232)
4
Not connected
Signal Ground
5
Signal Ground
Transmit Data B
6
Received Data B (RS-485)
Received Data A
7
Transmit Data A (RS-485)
Received Data B
8
Transmit Data B (RS-485)
Transmit Data A
9
Received Data A (RS-485)
NOTES…
1. Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS-232 and RS-485
specification. A is positive and B is negative.
2. A null modem connection must be used when connecting DTE together.
2.5.9
Data
RS-232 Connector
RS-232 data is available on the Base Board.
Table 2.12: RS-232 Data Connector (Base Board) - Asynchronous
Remote (DTE) Male
Encoder RS-232 (DTE) Female
Signal Name
Pin
1
1
Not connected
Received Data
2
2
Received Data
Transmit Data
3
3
Transmit Data
4
4
Not connected
5
5
Signal Ground
6
6
Not connected
7
7
Not connected
8
8
Not connected
9
9
Not connected
Signal Ground
Signal Direction
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Pin
Signal Name
Page 2-15
Installing the Equipment
NOTES…
1. Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS-232 specification.
2. Remote pin numbers only apply to a 9-way D-type connector.
3. 25-way connectors have Received Data on pin 3 and Transmit Data on pin 2 (see RS –232
specification).
4. XON/OFF flow control may be used with this port.
RS-422 Connector
A 15-way, D-type female connector
provides an RS-422 synchronous, serial
communications data input interface.
Table 2.13: RS-422 Data Connector (Base Board) - Synchronous
Remote (DTE)
Signal Name
Transmit Data A
Transmit Clock A
Encoder RS-422 (DCE)
Signal Direction
Pin
Signal Name
1
Not connected
2
Transmit Data A
3
Not connected
4
Not connected
5
Not connected
6
Not connected
7
Transmit Clock A
Signal Ground
8
Signal Ground
Transmit Data B
9
Transmit Data B
10
Not connected
11
Not connected
12
Not connected
Transmit Clock B
13
Not connected
14
Transmit Clock B
15
Not connected
NOTE…
Signal names are with respect to a DTE in accordance with the RS-422 specification. A is positive and
B is negative.
Page 2-16
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.5.10 Satellite Modulator IF Output
IF Out (Main)
75 Ω BNC socket provides an IF output.
Table 2.14: IF Out Connector (Main)
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω Female
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
IF OUT MAIN
Pin-outs
IF Output
Ground
Centre
Screen
IF Out (Monitor)
75 Ω BNC socket provides an IF output used for
monitoring.
Table 2.15: IF Output Connector (Monitor)
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω Female
Type
Analogue
Connector designations
IF OUT MONITOR
Pin-outs
IF Output
Ground
Centre
Screen
2.5.11 Satellite Modulator L-Band Output
L-Band In
50 Ω SMA female connector provides an L-band input to
allow another L-band signal to be summed with the
modulator output.
Table 2.16: L-Band In Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
50 Ω SMA Female
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
L-Band In
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-17
Installing the Equipment
L-Band Out (Main)
50 Ω SMA female connector provides the main L-band
output. This can also provide +24 Vdc at up to 500 mA
to power an up-converter.
Table 2.17: L-Band Out (Main) Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
50 Ω SMA Female
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
L-Band Out Main
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
CAUTION…
The modulator provides d.c. power to drive an up-converter. Do not connect equipment to the main
output which might be damaged by d.c. power without protecting with a suitable d.c. block.
L-Band Out (Monitor)
75 Ω F-type female provides an L-band monitoring
output which is –30 dB relative to the main output.
Table 2.18: L-Band Out (Monitor) Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω F-type Female
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
L-Band Out Monitor
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Up-Converter Power
An LED is illuminated when the +24 Vdc up-converter power on the main
output is switched on.
2.6
Powering Up/Down
2.6.1
Before Powering Up
Before powering up the Encoder, check that:
1. The unit has been installed in a suitable location.
2. The unit has been connected to external equipment and power supply,
as required.
3. The power supply has been checked and a good earth provided.
4. The correct fuse type and rating has been fitted to the equipment and,
for the a.c. supply version, the a.c. power cable.
Page 2-18
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Installing the Equipment
2.6.2
Powering Up
To power up the Encoder:
1. Turn on the local power supply. The Encoder executes a series of
power-up initialisation and self-test routines.
2. Confirm that the green Power LED is lit and that the red Alarm LED is
unlit.
3. Ensure that the Stand-by switch is set to On (see Chapter 1,
Introduction, Figure 1.8).
After the boot period the Encoder Input Monitor screen is displayed.
NOTES…
1. The fans on the Encoder can be temperature controlled so may not be on if the ambient
temperature is low. Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for more information.
2. During initialisation invalid PIDs may appear momentarily in the transport stream.
2.6.3
Powering Down
To power down the Encoder remove the power supply connection at the
rear of the unit.
2.7
Setting the Encoder IP Address
2.7.1
Methods of Changing the Encoder IP Address
If, for any reason, the IP address has to be changed, this can be achieved
via the front panel menus (see Section 4.7.4 Remote Control Menu). The
user may also set the network mask.
NOTE…
The new IP address is only accepted after the Encoder is repowered.
2.7.2
From the Front Panel Menus
To access the IP Address option from the front panel menus, press the IP
Address softkey in the Remote Control Menu. Edit the IP address via the
keypad and then press the Enter softkey.
IP Address
← Left
→ Right
Encoder IP Address :
`172.16.248.91’
—
Enter ●
O
O
+
Update using softkeys
Quit ●
Figure 2.6: Changing the Encoder IP Address
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 2-19
Installing the Equipment
BLANK
Page 2-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 3
3. Options and Upgrades
Contents
3.1 What’s Available........................................................ 3-3
3.1.1 Option Functions .......................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Limitations on Number of Option Modules ... 3-4
Overview....................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Limitations on Use of Option Modules.......... 3-4
3.1.4 How to See Which Options are
Fitted/Enabled .............................................. 3-4
3.2 Basic Interoperable Scrambling System - BISS
(M2/EDCOM2/BISS) ................................................. 3-5
3.3 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2) ............................................... 3-6
3.3.1 Overview....................................................... 3-6
3.3.2 Assembly ...................................................... 3-6
Rear Panel.................................................... 3-6
Audio In Connector....................................... 3-7
3.4 Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)................................................ 3-8
3.4.1 Overview....................................................... 3-8
3.4.2 Assembly ...................................................... 3-8
Rear Panel.................................................... 3-8
AES x Connector .......................................... 3-9
AES REF Connector..................................... 3-9
3.5 Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)........................ 3-10
3.5.1 Overview..................................................... 3-10
3.5.2 Assembly .................................................... 3-10
Rear Panel.................................................. 3-10
DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connectors ............ 3-11
DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector ........................ 3-11
3.5.3 Stages of Remultiplexing............................ 3-11
3.5.4 Function of Remultiplexer........................... 3-13
3.5.5 Using the Remultiplexer ............................. 3-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
ATSC Remultiplexing..................................3-14
Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow......3-14
What to do if Overflow Occurs ....................3-15
3.6 SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US) .................................................3-16
3.6.1 Overview .....................................................3-16
3.6.2 Assembly.....................................................3-16
Rear Panel ..................................................3-16
SMPTE 310 1, 2 and 3 Connectors ............3-17
ASI OUT 1, 2 Connectors ...........................3-17
3.7 ATM Network Interface Option Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155_…) .......................................3-18
3.7.1 Overview .....................................................3-18
3.7.2 Assembly.....................................................3-18
3.7.3 Common Connectors ..................................3-18
DVB-ASI Copper Input................................3-18
DVB-ASI Copper Output .............................3-18
10BaseT Ethernet Connector .....................3-19
3.8 STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) .......................................3-19
3.8.1 Assembly.....................................................3-19
3.8.2 Multimode Fibre Optic Connector ...............3-20
3.9 STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)...........................3-21
3.9.1 Assembly.....................................................3-21
3.9.2 Monomode Fibre Optic Connector..............3-21
3.10 M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Module.......................3-22
3.10.1 Assembly.....................................................3-22
3.10.2 Connectors..................................................3-23
3.11 M2/EOM2/ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Module ....................3-23
Page 3-1
Options and Upgrades
3.11.1 Assembly.....................................................3-23
3.11.2 Connectors..................................................3-24
3.12 M2/EOM2/ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical Module.....3-24
3.12.1 Assembly.....................................................3-24
3.12.2 Connectors..................................................3-25
3.13 IP Output Card (M2/EOM2/IP) IP Card ProMPEG FEC (M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)......................3-26
3.13.1 Overview .....................................................3-26
3.13.2 Support for Pro MPEG FEC........................3-26
3.13.3 Smallcasting Mode......................................3-26
3.13.4 Assembly.....................................................3-27
Rear Panel ..................................................3-27
ASI In ..........................................................3-27
RS-232 Control ...........................................3-27
ASI Out .......................................................3-27
Ethernet Output...........................................3-28
3.14 G.703 Interface Card Option (M2/EOM2/G703) ......3-29
3.14.1 Overview .....................................................3-29
3.14.2 Assembly.....................................................3-29
Rear Panel ..................................................3-29
OUT Connector...........................................3-29
IN Connector...............................................3-30
RS-232 Connector ......................................3-30
3.15 GPI Card (M2/EOM2/GPI).......................................3-30
3.15.1 Overview .....................................................3-30
3.15.2 Assembly.....................................................3-31
3.15.3 Connector ...................................................3-31
3.16 Software Options.....................................................3-32
3.16.1 Standard Definition......................................3-32
M2/ESO2/NR ..............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/VBR ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/422 .............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/RAS ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/ACON .........................................3-32
M2/ESO2/AC3.............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/SM38PSK...................................3-32
M2/ESO2/SM316QAM................................3-32
M2/ESO2/LSYM..........................................3-32
M2/ESO2/MHP............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/DTS ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA ..............................3-33
M2/ESO2/DPI..............................................3-33
M2/ESO2/EthernetData ..............................3-33
3.16.2 High Definition.............................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HDNR .........................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HDVBR.......................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HD422 ........................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS.................................3-33
Page 3-2
List of Figures
Figure 3.1: Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2) .................................................. 3-6
Figure 3.2: Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3: Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX).......................... 3-10
Figure 3.4: Block Diagram – One Stage of Remultiplexing......... 3-12
Figure 3.5: Block Diagram – Two Stages of Remultiplexing ....... 3-12
Figure 3.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram.................................... 3-13
Figure 3.7: SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs Option
Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US).................................................... 3-16
Figure 3.8: ATM Network Interface Module, Multimode
Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) ............................. 3-20
Figure 3.9: ATM Network Interface Module, Monomode
Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM).............................. 3-21
Figure 3.10: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS34
ATM PDH/E3 Module)................................................ 3-22
Figure 3.11: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS45
ATM PDH/DS3 Module) ............................................. 3-24
Figure 3.12: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS155E
ATM STM-1 Electrical Module) .................................. 3-25
Figure 3.13: IP Output Protocol Stack......................................... 3-26
Figure 3.14: G.703 Interface Card Option M2/EOM2/G703........ 3-29
Figure 3.15: General Purpose Interface M2/EOM2/GPI ............. 3-31
List of Tables
Table 3.1: Hardware Option Module Positions.............................. 3-3
Table 3.2: Software Options.......................................................... 3-4
Table 3.3: Audio In Connector....................................................... 3-7
Table 3.4: Audio In Connector....................................................... 3-9
Table 3.5: DVB ASI In Connector................................................ 3-11
Table 3.6: DVB ASI Out Connector............................................. 3-11
Table 3.7: SMPTE 310 Connector .............................................. 3-17
Table 3.8: ASI Out Connector ..................................................... 3-17
Table 3.9: DVB-ASI Copper Input Connector................................ 3-18
Table 3.10: DVB-ASI Copper Output Connector ........................... 3-19
Table 3.11: Ethernet Connector .................................................. 3-19
Table 3.12: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector............................. 3-20
Table 3.13: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector ........................... 3-22
Table 3.14: PDH/E3 Connector................................................... 3-23
Table 3.15: PDH/DS3 Connector ................................................ 3-24
Table 3.16: SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Electrical Connector .. 3-25
Table 3.17: ASI In Connector ...................................................... 3-27
Table 3.18: ASI Out Connector ................................................... 3-28
Table 3.19: RJ-45 Connector ...................................................... 3-28
Table 3.20: Out Connector .......................................................... 3-29
Table 3.21: In Connector............................................................. 3-30
Table 3.22: GPI Connector.......................................................... 3-31
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.1
What’s Available
3.1.1
Option Functions
The basic Encoder functionality can be enhanced with the inclusion of
options, hardware and software.
Each hardware option module consists of a horizontally mounted PCB with
rear panel connector space (except the M2/EDCOM2/BISS which has no
external connectors and does not occupy an option slot). At reset, the
software of the Encoder detects which modules are fitted and configures
them as necessary. The modules can be fitted into the positions indicated
in Table 3.1.
When the appropriate software option has been purchased it is enabled in
the Encoder, which resets and displays the appropriate menu items. See
Table 3.2 for the software options.
Table 3.1: Hardware Option Module Positions
Marketing Code
Name
Slot No.
Max No. of Cards
BISS1 scrambling option - Mode 0, 1 and BISS-E
only - with secure key entry
—
M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2
Additional Audio + Linear PCM
1
1
M2/EOM2/ADVAUD
Advanced Audio Coding Card
1
1
M2/EOM2/REMUX
Remux Option Module
1
1
M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT
SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
6
1
M2/EOM2/SSI-US
SMPTE 310 (SSI) Output
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM
STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface Module
(SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Multimode Optical)
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM
STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface Module
(SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Monomode Optical)
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS34
PDH/E3 Module
6
1
M2/EOM2ATMS45
PDH/DS3 Module
6
1
M2/EOM2ATMS155E
STM-1 Electrical Module
6
1
M2/EOM2/IP
IP Output Card
6
1
M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC
IP Card Pro-MPEG FEC
3, 5 or 6
1
M2/EOM2/G703
G.703 Interface Card
6
1
M2/EOM2/GPI
GPI Card
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
1
Daughter Card Options
M2/EDCOM2/BISS
Hardware Options
NOTE…
Empty option slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
1
BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS-E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April
2001.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-3
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.2: Software Options
Marketing Code
Name
SD Options
M2/ESO2/NR
Noise Reduction - three levels of professional-grade adaptive noise reduction.
M2/ESO2/VBR
Reflex and VBR - automatic variable bit-rate at a fixed quality setting for optimum bandwidth
usage in stand-alone or Reflex statistical multiplexing modes.
M2/ESO2/422
MPEG-2 422P@ML - for professional editing quality pictures, 1.5 Mbit/s to 50 Mbit/s.
M2/ESO2/RAS
RAS (Remote Authorisation System) - allows material to be protected from illegal viewing
using TANDBERG Television’s proprietary scrambling system.
M2/ESO2/ACON
Auto Concatenation - aligns the Encoder to the previous Encoder’s GOP structure to
significantly reduce coding artefacts caused by successive coding and decoding.
M2/ESO2/AC3
Dolby Digital (AC-3) - enables Dolby AC-3 stereo encoding.
M2/EOS2/SM38PSK
8PSK Modulation (applicable to E5784 or E5788-LBAND).
M2/EOS2/SM316QAM
16QAM Modulation (applicable to E5784 or E5788-LBAND).
M2/EOS2/LSYM
Low symbol Rate Capability.
M2/ESO2/MHP
MHP Timing Events
M2/ESO2/DTS
DTS Audio
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA
NABTS and GEMSTAR 2.0 VBI extraction
M2/ESO2/DPI
SCTE35 DPI
M2/ESO2/EthernetData
Enables the Data C – Ethernet data option
HD Options
3.1.2
M2/ESO2/HDNR
HD Noise Reduction
M2/ESO2/HDVBR
Reflex and VBR - automatic variable bit-rate at a fixed quality setting for optimum bandwidth
usage in stand-alone or Reflex statistical multiplexing modes.
M2/ESO2/HD422
MPEG-2 422P@ML - for professional editing quality pictures.
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS
Upgrades the Encoder to operate in multipass mode in a reflex group.
Limitations on Number of Option Modules
Overview
If the Remux option is not fitted then there can be a maximum of two
option modules.
If the Remux option module is fitted there can be a maximum of one other
option module.
Base Board
HD Encoder Module
Option Slot 1
3.1.3
Option Slot 6
IF or L-Band Modulator
Limitations on Use of Option Modules
Although both BISS (M2/EDCOM2/BISS) and RAS (M2/ESO2/RAS) may be
present in the Encoder, only one may be used at a time.
3.1.4
How to See Which Options are Fitted/Enabled
The Encoder has a number of hardware and software options (see Table 3.1
and Table 3.2). To see which are fitted/enabled refer to the Build Menu
(see Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally, Figure 4.9).
Page 3-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.2
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System - BISS
(M2/EDCOM2/BISS)
With the appropriate configuration, the Encoder can use the Basic
Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS2) to scramble the outgoing
transport stream. This system has been developed by the European
Broadcasting Union (EBU) as an open scrambling system.
BISS has these main levels of operation: Mode 1, Mode 2 and Mode 3.
Mode 0 corresponds to no scrambling. BISS-E is also available.
BISS Mode 1 operation uses a fixed value for the control word to scramble
the services in the transport stream from the Encoder. To descramble the
transmission, the Decoder needs to have the matching control word value.
NOTES…
1. This option module is installed as a daughter card to the Base Board, with no external
connectors and does not use an option slot.
2. The BISS software must also be enabled in the Encoder (see Customer Services).
BISS scrambling (when fitted) is enabled and controlled via the Setup/Mux
Menu (see Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally, Section 4.10.14).
2
BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS-E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April
2001.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-5
Options and Upgrades
3.3
Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2)
3.3.1
Overview
The Additional Audio option module supplements the audio encoding
functionality of the Encoder. This module supports audio standards
MPEG-1 (layer 2), Dolby Digital (AC-3), Linear PCM, Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Pass-through, Dolby E Pass-through and DTS Pass-through. The module
can take in audio as either stereo analogue or digital AES/EBU (on left
channel only) via a 15-way D-type connector provided on its rear panel.
Alternatively, any two of the four pairs of embedded AES/EBU channels
extracted from the video can be routed to the module for encoding. This
option supports all the standard bit-rates and encoding modes associated
with each compression standard.
M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 supports 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB and 24 dB audio clip
level.
The Audio Menu associated with this option is described in Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally, Section 4.9. In the Audio Setup Menu
additional options are displayed for Audio XA and Audio XB, where X is the
option slot number where the module is fitted.
Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for details of Encoder locking to ensure
correct performance.
3.3.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
AUDIO IN
Additional Audio
Option
Additional Audio
Option
Mono 1 / Stereo 1 Right
Mono 2 / Stereo 1 Left
Mono 3 / Stereo 2 Right
Mono 4 / Stereo 2 Left
Pins 7, 15
Pins 3, 10
Pins 1, 9
AES/EBU Digital A
Pins 1, 9
AES/EBU Digital B
Pins 4, 12
AES/EBU
reference
Pins 6, 13
Pins 4, 12
Digital Audio Inputs
NOTE…
The AES/EBU reference signal is provided for backwards compatibility only. When using E57xx
Encoders use the reference signal provided by the Base Board.
Figure 3.1: Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option (M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2)
Page 3-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
Audio In Connector
Connect the audio cable to the AUDIO IN
connector. The 15-way, D-type male connector
is used in different ways according to the audio
input and the encoding configuration selected.
The connector provides two stereo pairs. They may be independently
configured as either analogue or digital. The left channel is used to input
digital audio.
Table 3.3: Audio In Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Analogue
Digital
1
Left Channel A (+)
AES/EBU (A) (+)
2
Signal
Analogue
Digital
9
Left Channel A (-)
AES/EBU (A) (-)
Not connected
10
Right Channel A (+)
3
Right Channel A (-)
11
Not connected
4
Left Channel B (+)
12
Left Channel B (-)
5
Not connected
13
Right Channel B (+)
6
Right Channel B (-)
14
Not connected
AES/EBU
Reference (Output
Signal)
7
8
AES/EBU (B) (+)
15
AES/EBU (B) (-)
AES/EBU
Reference (Ground)
Not connected
NOTES…
1. In analogue mode termination is either 20 kΩ or 600 Ω.
2. In AES/EBU mode termination is 110 Ω (default).
3. When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Ω termination.
4. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
CAUTION…
To ensure EMC compliance, use the audio connector supplied with the Encoder.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-7
Options and Upgrades
3.4
Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)
3.4.1
Overview
The Advanced Audio Coding option module supplements the audio
encoding functionality of the Encoder to enable it to be used as a drop-in
replacement for other Encoders. It can encode four stereo audio pairs
(two-channels) or one multi-channel (six-channels - multichannel MPEG-2
AAC (ISO/IEC 13818-7) (LC)) and one stereo pair (two-channels). No
other combination of channel inputs is permitted.
The module can receive up to four simultaneous, independent AES3-2003
inputs on four 75 Ω BNC co-axial AES3 inputs (compliant to AES-3id-2001)
located at the Encoder’s rear panel. It can also accept four AES3 inputs
from the Encoder’s backplane to permit the use of embedded audio. Each
input supports 16, 20 and 24-bit resolutions and 48 kHz sampling and is
capable of passing 16, 20 and 24 bit samples to the audio encoders. 24 or
20 bit input samples can be rounded to 16 bits.
The module accepts a PCR clock of 27 MHz in the form of a 3 wire serial
interface. The inputs are synchronised to the system reference clock
through the use of phase locked sample-rate converters prior to encoding.
3.4.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
A
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4
AES REF
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
SDI IN
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Additional Audio Option
Four stereo audio pairs
(two-channels)
or one multi-channel (six-channels)
and one stereo pair (two-channels).
27 MHz Reference Signal
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4
AES REF
Figure 3.2: Advanced Audio Coding Option (M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)
The Additional Audio Coding option module comprises Assembly S14048
and Card S13600. See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
Page 3-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
AES x Connector
Connect the audio input cables to the appropriate AES input
connectors.
Each connector accepts a single stereo pair. They may be independently
configured or form part of an multi-channel input.
AES REF Connector
This connector allows the connection of a 27 MHz studio
timing reference.
Table 3.4: Audio In Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Analogue
Digital
1
Left Channel A (+)
AES/EBU (A) (+)
2
Signal
Analogue
Digital
9
Left Channel A (-)
AES/EBU (A) (-)
Not connected
10
Right Channel A (+)
3
Right Channel A (-)
11
Not connected
4
Left Channel B (+)
12
Left Channel B (-)
5
Not connected
13
Right Channel B (+)
6
Right Channel B (-)
14
Not connected
AES/EBU
Reference (Output
Signal)
7
8
AES/EBU (B) (+)
15
AES/EBU (B) (-)
AES/EBU
Reference (Ground)
Not connected
NOTES…
1. In analogue mode termination is either 20 kΩ or 600 Ω.
2. In AES/EBU mode termination is 110 Ω (default).
3. When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Ω termination.
4. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
CAUTION…
To ensure EMC compliance, use the audio connector supplied with the Encoder.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-9
Options and Upgrades
3.5
Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)
3.5.1
Overview
The Remux option module is capable of accepting up to three separate
transport streams via ASI connectors, and one transport stream from the
host Encoder. The maximum permissible data rate of each input transport
stream is 50 Mbit/s. Some or all of the services in the input transport
streams are then multiplexed together to produce a Multiple Channels Per
Carrier (MCPC) output at up to 65 Mbit/s. For a specification of this
interface see Annex B, Technical Specification
3.5.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
DVB-ASI OUT is disabled.
CAUTION…
When remultiplexing, be aware that both PIDs will be remapped according to the Host Encoder input
used.
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
Encoder
[Host]
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
The output is a multiplex of the
Output Transport Stream  three input transport streams of
Output Transport Stream  the Remux option and the
Output Transport Stream  transport stream produced by the
host Encoder.
Remux Option
Input Transport Stream 1
Input Transport Stream 2
Input Transport Stream 3
DVB ASI IN 1
DVB ASI IN 2
DVB ASI IN 3
DVB ASI OUT 1
Output is disabled
Figure 3.3: Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)
Page 3-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connectors
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an input to the unit.
Table 3.5: DVB ASI In Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
NOTE…
When connecting the inputs, always start from DVB ASI IN 1 and work upwards.
DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an output from the unit.
Table 3.6: DVB ASI Out Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
NOTE…
This output is disabled.
3.5.3
Stages of Remultiplexing
The Remultiplexer is capable of combining four inputs. Three inputs are in
the form of ASI feeds to the rear panel, the fourth input is fed from the
host Encoder (or primary Encoder). This basic configuration, using a single
stage of remultiplexing, means that four Encoder services (or streams) can
be combined together in the output. Figure 3.4 shows a typical satellite
system using one stage of remultiplexing.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-11
Options and Upgrades
Up-link equipment
(including
Up-converter and
High Power
Amplifier)
Contributing
Encoders
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Tx
Primary (Master)
Encoder with
Remux
Service 2
ASI
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Service 3
ASI
ASI
Service 4
Service 1
IF Output
NOTE…
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
IF Output contains 4 services:
Service 1 + Service 2 + Service 3 + Service 4.
Figure 3.4: Block Diagram – One Stage of Remultiplexing
Similarly, if two stages of remultiplexing are introduced, thirteen Encoders
can be combined, providing up to thirteen services in the remultiplexed
output. This is the maximum number of services that can be provided
using this system, see Figure 3.5.
Contributing
Encoders
Service 3
ASI (x3)
Service 4
ASI (x4)
Service 2
Tx
Service 5
Encoder
with Remux
Contributing
Encoders
Service 7
Up-link equipment
(including
Up-converter and
High Power
Amplifier)
Encoder
with Remux
Encoder
with Remux
ASI (x3)
Service 8
ASI (x4)
Service 6
Service 1
IF Output
NOTE…
Service 9
IF Output contains 13 services.
Contributing
Encoders
Service 11
Service 12
Encoder
with Remux
ASI (x3)
Service 10
ASI (x4)
Service 13
Figure 3.5: Block Diagram – Two Stages of Remultiplexing
Page 3-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.5.4
Function of Remultiplexer
It is the function of the Remultiplexer to combine the locally generated
host services with the externally supplied input services, connected via ASI
inputs to the rear of the unit. If the Service ID (DVB) or Program Number
(ATSC), PIDs or service names, of two or more of the services clash, the
Remultiplexer can remap the Service ID or program number, remap PIDs,
and alter the service names to resolve the clash.
If a new service is detected on any input, and it clashes with an existing
service, it is the new service’s Service ID or Program Number, PIDs, or
Service Name that are remapped to resolve the conflict. Service names are
made unique by the addition of a number, for example ‘Default Service’
may be renamed ‘Default Service [2]’.
The way the Remultiplexer deals with user requests to remap PIDs
depends on its mode of operation.
If the user attempts to move/remap a PID to a PID already being used,
the Remultiplexer allows this to happen, and automatically remaps the
element that was on that PID.
Host Mux
Video
Video
Encoder
Audio
Audio
Encoder
Host
Mux
Rate
ASI Driver
ASI Output
Dual Port
Ram
Remultiplexer
Remux
ASI
Input
Remux
ASI
Input
Output
Bit-rate
Modulator
QPSK
IF Output
Remux
ASI
Input
Figure 3.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-13
Options and Upgrades
3.5.5
Using the Remultiplexer
Set the output bit-rate to the required value in the Setup/Mux Menu.
Connect transport streams that are to be combined (remultiplexed) with
the host Encoder’s services to the ASI inputs on the rear of the unit.
NOTE…
It is possible to remultiplex any DVB or ATSC compliant transport stream but at the time of publication,
only transport streams generated by TANDBERG Television equipment are guaranteed to work when
fed to the Remultiplexing module.
The equipment will automatically detect the services on these inputs. The
list of detected services is displayed in the Setup/Mux Menu.
Each service can be individually switched ‘Off’, ‘On’, or ‘On with
scrambling’. If the service is set to ‘Off’, then there is no trace of the
service in the output transport stream. New services can be set to default
to either Off or On. If it was connected to the Remultiplexer the last time
the Encoder was powered, then it assumes its previous state.
It is possible to remultiplex transport streams that have already been
scrambled by BISS encryption, but it is not possible to remultiplex
transport streams that have already been scrambled using RAS encryption.
Also it is not possible to scramble a service that has already been
scrambled.
3.5.6
ATSC Remultiplexing
The Remultiplexer can work with ATSC compliant transport streams. It
remaps the services following the ATSC program paradigm.
The Encoder can be configured to generate the PSIP for the output
transport stream. It generates the minimum number of tables to give an
ATSC compliant output transport stream, i.e. Event Information Tables
(EIT) 0, 1, 2 and 3, the System Time Table (STT), the Rating Region Table
(RRT), the Master Guide Table (MGT), and either the Cable Virtual Channel
Table (CVCT) or the Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (TVCT), depending
on the delivery descriptor set. It will not pass through any tables that are
present on the ASI input transport streams.
Alternatively, an external PSIP generator can be connected to one of the
Remultiplexer inputs and the remultiplexer programmed to pass through a
range of PIDs, thus inserting the PSIP into the output transport stream.
For more information about using the Remux card in ATSC with internal
and external PSIP see Annex H, Use of Remux Card in ATSC.
3.5.7
Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow
Overflow is the condition in which the total of the contributing service
bit-rates, (including the host mux), exceeds the output bit-rate of the
primary remultiplexing unit.
NOTE…
Only useful packets (e.g. video, audio and data, etc) count towards the bit-rate of the contributing
service bit-rates, not null packets.
Page 3-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
The easiest way to configure the bit-rates to avoid overflow, is as follows:
1. Divide the 188 byte output bit-rate of the primary (master)
remultiplexing unit, (this can be found in the Setup/Mux/Remux
Module/Output Bit-rate), by the number of contributing services
(including the primary service). Such that:
O/P Rate (188) / N = Host Rate (188)
[Where N = number of services to be combined including
primary]
2. Then set the Host Rates (188) of each contributing unit and the master
unit to equal the calculated Host Rate.
If the above procedure is followed, an equal bit-rate is allocated to each
contributing unit. By setting the host rates, the video and audio bit-rates
will be automatically adjusted to suit.
The amount of spare bit-rate and input bit-rate that has been used in the
Remultiplexer can be monitored using the bar graph indicators in the
Setup/Mux/Remux Module Menu.
3.5.8
What to do if Overflow Occurs
If an ‘Overflow Error’ is indicated on the equipment, then the incoming
contributing bit-rate exceeds the outgoing bit-rate. To avoid corruption
reduce the incoming bit-rate by either removing services, (turn the service
Off or remove the ASI input), or reduce the bit-rate of the incoming
service.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-15
Options and Upgrades
3.6
SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US)
3.6.1
Overview
The modules allow the Encoder to output MPEG-2 transport streams in the
following formats: ASI (optical) and SMPTE 310M - 1998 (electrical).
There are two ASI multimode optical outputs which conform to the DVB
document A010 (Section 4.4 and Annex B) and three copper SI Outputs
which conform to the SMPTE Standard 310M Level 2.
NOTE…
Level 2 performance is exceeded but not as far as that of level 3.
M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT has both ASI/SSI capability whilst the
M2/EOM2/SSI-US has only SSI.
3.6.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
These option modules can only be installed in slot 3 or 6.
CAUTION…
The SMPTE 310 output cannot be used with the M2/ESO2/RAS RAS Scrambling mode.
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream outputs are still
Output Transport Stream available.
SMPTE 310/ASI
Output Option
(Slot 3 or 6)
SMPTE 310 1
SMPTE 310 2
SMPTE 310 3
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
Synchronous Serial Output 1
Synchronous Serial Output 2 19.392658 Mbit/s only
Synchronous Serial Output 3
Asynchronous Serial Output 1
40 Mbit/s max
Asynchronous Serial Output 2
Figure 3.7: SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US)
Page 3-16
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
SMPTE 310 1, 2 and 3 Connectors
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an SMPTE 310
compliant synchronous serial (SSI) output for the unit.
Table 3.7: SMPTE 310 Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
ASI OUT 1, 2 Connectors
Provides a DVB compliant ASI optical output at 270 Mbit/s.
Table 3.8: ASI Out Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
ASI OUT 1, 2
Wavelength
1300 nm Multimode (MMF)
NOTE…
The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components from
ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit and
whenever the interface is not in use.
WARNING…
LED: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTE…
The Class 1 LED warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-17
Options and Upgrades
3.7
ATM Network Interface Option Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155_…)
3.7.1
Overview
The ATM3 Network Interface Module allows the Encoder to transmit and
receive MPEG-2 transport streams over broadband telecommunications
networks (B-ISDN) using ATM.
There are different variants of the ATM Network Interface Module. The
module comprises an ATM Network Interface (common to all models) and
a Physical Layer Module suitable for the application required. Refer to
Table 3.1 for details of the variants.
Menus associated with the ATM Modules are described in Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally.
3.7.2
Assembly
To provide the interface to the B-ISDN Telecommunications network, the
Physical Layer Module must be installed according to the type of network
required. These are described in Section 3.8, STM-1 OC3 Multimode
Physical Interface Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) on page 3-19 and
Section 3.9, STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM) on page 3-21.
The S11906 has the following connectors: DVB-ASI Copper Input,
DVB-ASI Copper Output and the Ethernet Connector. They are present on
all variants of the ATM Module.
3.7.3
Common Connectors
DVB-ASI Copper Input
A BNC, female 75 Ω connector provides a DVB-PI
compliant copper connection at a fixed line transmission
rate of 270 Mbit/s.
Table 3.9: DVB-ASI Copper Input Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
DVB ASI-C IN
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω socket
Pin-outs:
Centre
Shield
Signal
Ground/Chassis
DVB-ASI Copper Output
A BNC, female 75 Ω connector provides a DVB-PI
compliant copper connection at a fixed line transmission
rate of 270 Mbit/s.
3
ATM is the abbreviation for Asynchronous Transfer Mode.
Page 3-18
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.10: DVB-ASI Copper Output Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
DVB ASI-C OUT
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω socket
Pin-outs:
Centre
Shield
Signal
Ground/Chassis
10BaseT Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet is used to connect the ATM card to a local
control LAN and for engineering access. Connect the
Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 (10BaseT) connectors on the
equipment.
Table 3.11: Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Type
RJ-45
Connector designation
Ethernet
Location
At rear panel
Pin:
(Unused pins not connected)
Pin 1  Tx Out (+)
Pin 2  Tx Out (-)
Pin 3  Rx In (+)
Pin 6  Rx In (-)
3.8
STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM)
3.8.1
Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-19
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
HD SDI IN
AUDIO IN
ASI OUT 2
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network Interface
Module Multimode
Optical
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MULTIMODE)
IN
OUT
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
DVB ASI–C
ASI-C Input
Local Control
IN
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Output
ETHERNET
Figure 3.8: ATM Network Interface Module, Multimode Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM)
3.8.2
Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LED: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTES…
1. The Class 1 LED warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
2. The B-ISDN network that is supported is the SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Multimode Optical.
This port is available on the S8063 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to an SDH or SONET
B-ISDN network, at a fixed line transmission
rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex
device.
Receive
Transmit
Table 3.12: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MULTIMODE)
Wavelength
1300 nm Multimode (MMF)
NOTE…
The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components from
ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit and
whenever the interface is not in use.
Page 3-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.9
STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)
3.9.1
Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network Interface
Module Monomode
Optical
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
Local Control
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MONOMODE)
IN
OUT
DVB ASI–C
IN
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Output
ETHERNET
Figure 3.9: ATM Network Interface Module, Monomode Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)
3.9.2
Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LASER: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTES…
1. The Class 1 LASER warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
2. The B-ISDN network that is supported is the SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Monomode Optical.
3. The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components
from ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit
and whenever the interface is not in use.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-21
Options and Upgrades
This port is available on the S8067 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to an SDH or SONET
B-ISDN network, at a fixed line transmission
rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex
device.
Receive
Transmit
Table 3.13: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
3.10
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MONOMODE)
Wavelength
1300 nm Monomode / Singlemode (SMF)
M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Module
3.10.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDIN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network PDH/E3
Interface Module
Input from PDH/E3 B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-E3
OUT
Output to PDH/E3 B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.10: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS34 ATM PDH/E3 Module)
Page 3-22
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.10.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11366 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a PDH/E3 network at
a transmission rate of 34.368 Mbit/s. This is a
full duplex service.
IN
OUT
Table 3.14: PDH/E3 Connector
3.11
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-PDH-E3
M2/EOM2/ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Module
3.11.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
DS-3 is the third level in the PDH multiplex hierarchy found in North
America. DS-3 has a bandwidth of 44.736 Mbit/s and carries seven DS-2
channels of 6.312 Mbit/s, these in turn carry four DS-1 signals of
1.544 Mbit/s.
There are currently four different ways to transmit ATM cells over DS-3.
They are:
•
•
•
•
C-bit parity ADM
C-bit parity PLCP
M23 ADM
M23 PLCP
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-23
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
ASI OUT 1
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network PDH/DS3
Interface Module
Input from PDH/DS3 B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-DS3
OUT
Output to PDH/DS3 B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.11: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS45 ATM PDH/DS3 Module)
3.11.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11365 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a PDH/DS3 network
at a transmission rate of 45 Mbit/s. This is a
full duplex service.
IN
OUT
Table 3.15: PDH/DS3 Connector
3.12
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-PDH-DS3
M2/EOM2/ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical Module
3.12.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
NOTE…
Be aware that the BNC connector positions on this module are reversed when compared to the same
connectors on the E3 and DS3 modules.
Page 3-24
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network STM-1/E
Interface Module
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-DS3
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.12: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS155E ATM STM-1 Electrical Module)
3.12.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11367 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a SDH STM-1/SONET
STS-3c network at a transmission rate of
155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex service.
OUT
IN
Table 3.16: SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Electrical Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-SDM-STM1/E
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-25
Options and Upgrades
3.13
IP Output Card (M2/EOM2/IP)
IP Card Pro-MPEG FEC
(M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)
3.13.1 Overview
The IP Output card provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, out of which
the transport stream generated by the Encoder can be output in UDP
packets at up to 50 Mbit/s.
The mapping of MPEG-2 transport stream packets into IP data frames is
done according to the protocol stack shown in Figure 3.13.
NOTE…
More support has been given in V2.8.x of the IP Output Card in V3.6.x of the Encoder. This is
accessed using menu items on the IP menu tree from the front panel, telnet and web interfaces.
● The IP output can be turned off using the IP Output menu item.
● A Line Mode menu item allows the setting to be either ‘Fixed’ or ‘Auto’.
MPEG- 2
Transport
Stream
MPEG-2/DVB Layer
TCP/UDP
UDP – User Datagram Protocol
Transport Layer - IP
Link Layer – 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Figure 3.13: IP Output Protocol Stack
Between one and seven MPEG-2 transport stream packets can be put in
each UDP packet. The data link layer is Ethernet according to
IEEE 802.3/802.3u (auto-sensing 10/100 Mbit/s, twisted pair, via RJ-45
connector).
3.13.2 Support for Pro MPEG FEC
This option sets the parameters and protocol required to send video over
IP.
3.13.3 Smallcasting Mode
In this mode, the transport stream can be transmitted to four specified IP
addresses.
Page 3-26
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
NOTE…
The maximum multiplexer output rate, which can be reliably streamed to each IP address, is reduced
for each extra destination address that is added. i.e. if two destinations are specified, the maximum
rate for each address is half of that for one address, and so on.
3.13.4 Assembly
Rear Panel
ASI In
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an ASI input.
NOTE…
This connector is not used.
Table 3.17: ASI In Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC Female
Connector designation
ASI IN
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
RS-232 Control
A 3.5mm socket provides a debug interface.
NOTE…
This connector is for TANDBERG Television use only.
ASI Out
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an ASI output.
NOTE…
This connector is not used.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-27
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.18: ASI Out Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC Female
Connector designation
ASI OUT
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Ethernet Output
An RJ-45 connector provides a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port.
Table 3.19: RJ-45 Connector
Page 3-28
Item
Specification
Connector Type
RJ-45
Connector designation
10/100 BT
Pin-out
1
Tx Out (+)
2
Tx Out (-)
3
Rx In (+)
4
Not Connected
5
Not Connected
6
Rx In (-)
7
Not Connected
8
Not Connected
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.14
G.703 Interface Card Option
(M2/EOM2/G703)
3.14.1 Overview
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
The G.703 Interface Card provides a G.703 adapted Encoder Transport
Stream Output at a maximum rate of either:
•
•
DS-3 at 44.736 Mbit/s
E3 at 34.368 Mbit/s
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
3.14.2 Assembly
Rear Panel
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
SDI IN
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
G.703 Interface
Card Option
RS232
OUT
IN
TANDBERG Debug Interface
Output (Transmit side of G.703 connection)
Input (Receive side of G.703 connection)
NOT NORMALLY CONNECTED
Figure 3.14: G.703 Interface Card Option M2/EOM2/G703
OUT Connector
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides a G.703
transport stream output.
Table 3.20: Out Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-29
Options and Upgrades
IN Connector
NOTE…
This is not normally connected.
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides a G.703
transport stream input.
Table 3.21: In Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
RS-232 Connector
A 3.5 mm socket provides a TANDBERG debug interface.
3.15
GPI Card (M2/EOM2/GPI)
3.15.1 Overview
The GPI Card connector allows various specific Encoder functions to be
controlled using contact closure inputs. In addition, contact closure outputs
are available for future use.
Page 3-30
•
8 Contact Closure Inputs (intended to operate at TTL level signals)
with input protection. The controlled functions are software assigned.
•
2 Contact Closure Outputs which can be either open circuit or
connected to the common output. Each output has inverted or noninverted contacts
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.15.2 Assembly
Encoder
(1U Slot: 1, 2
2U Slot: 1, 2, 4, 5)
HD SDI
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
HD SDI IN
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
AUDIO IN
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
GPI
Card Option
Contact Closure Inputs and Outputs
- 2 Contact Closure Outputs
- 8 Sensed Inputs
GPI
Figure 3.15: General Purpose Interface M2/EOM2/GPI
3.15.3 Connector
Table 3.22: GPI Connector
Item
Specification
Item
Specification
Connector Type
15-way D-type Male
Connector designation
GPI
1
Input 0
Pin-out
2
Pin-out
9
GND
Input 1
10
Output 1 NI
3
Input 2
11
Output 1 Common
4
Input 3
12
Output 1 I
5
Input 4
13
Output 2 NI
6
Input 5
14
Output 2 Common
7
Input 6
15
Output 2 I
8
Input 7
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-31
Options and Upgrades
3.16
3.16.1
Software Options
Standard Definition
M2/ESO2/NR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include noise reduction
mode. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/VBR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include variable bit-rate.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/422
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include 4:2:2 video
encoding mode. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/RAS
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include RAS mode.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/ACON
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include auto
concatenation. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/AC3
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide Dolby Digital (AC-3)
audio. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/SM38PSK
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide 8PSK modulation.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/SM316QAM
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide 16QAM modulation.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/LSYM
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to work at low symbol rates
(300 ksym/s minimum). Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/MHP
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide MHP timing Events.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/DTS
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide DTS Audio. Contact
Customer Services for details.
Page 3-32
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide NABTS and
GEMSTAR 2.0 VBI extraction. Contact Customer Services for details
M2/ESO2/DPI
This purchasable licence key allows the GPI purchasable option module to
provide an SCTE35 splicing. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/EthernetData
This purchasable licence key enables the reception of fully formed
188-byte transport packets coming in as UDP datagrams on the Encoder’s
Ethernet port.
3.16.2 High Definition
M2/ESO2/HDNR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include noise reduction
mode for HD. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/HDVBR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include variable bit-rate
for HD. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/HD422
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include 4:2:2 video
encoding mode for HD. Contact Customer Services for details and to check
that you have the relevant hardware required.
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to operate in multipass
mode in a reflex group. Contact Customer Services for details.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-33
Options and Upgrades
BLANK
Page 3-34
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 3
3. Options and Upgrades
Contents
3.1 What’s Available........................................................ 3-3
3.1.1 Option Functions .......................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Limitations on Number of Option Modules ... 3-4
Overview....................................................... 3-4
3.1.3 Limitations on Use of Option Modules.......... 3-4
3.1.4 How to See Which Options are
Fitted/Enabled .............................................. 3-4
3.2 Basic Interoperable Scrambling System - BISS
(M2/EDCOM2/BISS) ................................................. 3-5
3.3 Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2) ............................................... 3-6
3.3.1 Overview....................................................... 3-6
3.3.2 Assembly ...................................................... 3-6
Rear Panel.................................................... 3-6
Audio In Connector....................................... 3-7
3.4 Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)................................................ 3-8
3.4.1 Overview....................................................... 3-8
3.4.2 Assembly ...................................................... 3-8
Rear Panel.................................................... 3-8
AES x Connector .......................................... 3-9
AES REF Connector..................................... 3-9
3.5 Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)........................ 3-10
3.5.1 Overview..................................................... 3-10
3.5.2 Assembly .................................................... 3-10
Rear Panel.................................................. 3-10
DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connectors ............ 3-11
DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector ........................ 3-11
3.5.3 Stages of Remultiplexing............................ 3-11
3.5.4 Function of Remultiplexer........................... 3-13
3.5.5 Using the Remultiplexer ............................. 3-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
3.5.6
3.5.7
3.5.8
ATSC Remultiplexing..................................3-14
Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow......3-14
What to do if Overflow Occurs ....................3-15
3.6 SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US) .................................................3-16
3.6.1 Overview .....................................................3-16
3.6.2 Assembly.....................................................3-16
Rear Panel ..................................................3-16
SMPTE 310 1, 2 and 3 Connectors ............3-17
ASI OUT 1, 2 Connectors ...........................3-17
3.7 ATM Network Interface Option Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155_…) .......................................3-18
3.7.1 Overview .....................................................3-18
3.7.2 Assembly.....................................................3-18
3.7.3 Common Connectors ..................................3-18
DVB-ASI Copper Input................................3-18
DVB-ASI Copper Output .............................3-18
10BaseT Ethernet Connector .....................3-19
3.8 STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) .......................................3-19
3.8.1 Assembly.....................................................3-19
3.8.2 Multimode Fibre Optic Connector ...............3-20
3.9 STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)...........................3-21
3.9.1 Assembly.....................................................3-21
3.9.2 Monomode Fibre Optic Connector..............3-21
3.10 M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Module.......................3-22
3.10.1 Assembly.....................................................3-22
3.10.2 Connectors..................................................3-23
3.11 M2/EOM2/ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Module ....................3-23
Page 3-1
Options and Upgrades
3.11.1 Assembly.....................................................3-23
3.11.2 Connectors..................................................3-24
3.12 M2/EOM2/ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical Module.....3-24
3.12.1 Assembly.....................................................3-24
3.12.2 Connectors..................................................3-25
3.13 IP Output Card (M2/EOM2/IP) IP Card ProMPEG FEC (M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)......................3-26
3.13.1 Overview .....................................................3-26
3.13.2 Support for Pro MPEG FEC........................3-26
3.13.3 Smallcasting Mode......................................3-26
3.13.4 Assembly.....................................................3-27
Rear Panel ..................................................3-27
ASI In ..........................................................3-27
RS-232 Control ...........................................3-27
ASI Out .......................................................3-27
Ethernet Output...........................................3-28
3.14 G.703 Interface Card Option (M2/EOM2/G703) ......3-29
3.14.1 Overview .....................................................3-29
3.14.2 Assembly.....................................................3-29
Rear Panel ..................................................3-29
OUT Connector...........................................3-29
IN Connector...............................................3-30
RS-232 Connector ......................................3-30
3.15 GPI Card (M2/EOM2/GPI).......................................3-30
3.15.1 Overview .....................................................3-30
3.15.2 Assembly.....................................................3-31
3.15.3 Connector ...................................................3-31
3.16 Software Options.....................................................3-32
3.16.1 Standard Definition......................................3-32
M2/ESO2/NR ..............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/VBR ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/422 .............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/RAS ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/ACON .........................................3-32
M2/ESO2/AC3.............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/SM38PSK...................................3-32
M2/ESO2/SM316QAM................................3-32
M2/ESO2/LSYM..........................................3-32
M2/ESO2/MHP............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/DTS ............................................3-32
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA ..............................3-33
M2/ESO2/DPI..............................................3-33
M2/ESO2/EthernetData ..............................3-33
3.16.2 High Definition.............................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HDNR .........................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HDVBR.......................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HD422 ........................................3-33
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS.................................3-33
Page 3-2
List of Figures
Figure 3.1: Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2) .................................................. 3-6
Figure 3.2: Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)................................................... 3-8
Figure 3.3: Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX).......................... 3-10
Figure 3.4: Block Diagram – One Stage of Remultiplexing......... 3-12
Figure 3.5: Block Diagram – Two Stages of Remultiplexing ....... 3-12
Figure 3.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram.................................... 3-13
Figure 3.7: SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs Option
Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US).................................................... 3-16
Figure 3.8: ATM Network Interface Module, Multimode
Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) ............................. 3-20
Figure 3.9: ATM Network Interface Module, Monomode
Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM).............................. 3-21
Figure 3.10: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS34
ATM PDH/E3 Module)................................................ 3-22
Figure 3.11: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS45
ATM PDH/DS3 Module) ............................................. 3-24
Figure 3.12: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS155E
ATM STM-1 Electrical Module) .................................. 3-25
Figure 3.13: IP Output Protocol Stack......................................... 3-26
Figure 3.14: G.703 Interface Card Option M2/EOM2/G703........ 3-29
Figure 3.15: General Purpose Interface M2/EOM2/GPI ............. 3-31
List of Tables
Table 3.1: Hardware Option Module Positions.............................. 3-3
Table 3.2: Software Options.......................................................... 3-4
Table 3.3: Audio In Connector....................................................... 3-7
Table 3.4: Audio In Connector....................................................... 3-9
Table 3.5: DVB ASI In Connector................................................ 3-11
Table 3.6: DVB ASI Out Connector............................................. 3-11
Table 3.7: SMPTE 310 Connector .............................................. 3-17
Table 3.8: ASI Out Connector ..................................................... 3-17
Table 3.9: DVB-ASI Copper Input Connector................................ 3-18
Table 3.10: DVB-ASI Copper Output Connector ........................... 3-19
Table 3.11: Ethernet Connector .................................................. 3-19
Table 3.12: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector............................. 3-20
Table 3.13: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector ........................... 3-22
Table 3.14: PDH/E3 Connector................................................... 3-23
Table 3.15: PDH/DS3 Connector ................................................ 3-24
Table 3.16: SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Electrical Connector .. 3-25
Table 3.17: ASI In Connector ...................................................... 3-27
Table 3.18: ASI Out Connector ................................................... 3-28
Table 3.19: RJ-45 Connector ...................................................... 3-28
Table 3.20: Out Connector .......................................................... 3-29
Table 3.21: In Connector............................................................. 3-30
Table 3.22: GPI Connector.......................................................... 3-31
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.1
What’s Available
3.1.1
Option Functions
The basic Encoder functionality can be enhanced with the inclusion of
options, hardware and software.
Each hardware option module consists of a horizontally mounted PCB with
rear panel connector space (except the M2/EDCOM2/BISS which has no
external connectors and does not occupy an option slot). At reset, the
software of the Encoder detects which modules are fitted and configures
them as necessary. The modules can be fitted into the positions indicated
in Table 3.1.
When the appropriate software option has been purchased it is enabled in
the Encoder, which resets and displays the appropriate menu items. See
Table 3.2 for the software options.
Table 3.1: Hardware Option Module Positions
Marketing Code
Name
Slot No.
Max No. of Cards
BISS1 scrambling option - Mode 0, 1 and BISS-E
only - with secure key entry
—
M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2
Additional Audio + Linear PCM
1
1
M2/EOM2/ADVAUD
Advanced Audio Coding Card
1
1
M2/EOM2/REMUX
Remux Option Module
1
1
M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT
SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
6
1
M2/EOM2/SSI-US
SMPTE 310 (SSI) Output
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM
STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface Module
(SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Multimode Optical)
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM
STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface Module
(SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Monomode Optical)
6
1
M2/EOM2/ATMS34
PDH/E3 Module
6
1
M2/EOM2ATMS45
PDH/DS3 Module
6
1
M2/EOM2ATMS155E
STM-1 Electrical Module
6
1
M2/EOM2/IP
IP Output Card
6
1
M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC
IP Card Pro-MPEG FEC
3, 5 or 6
1
M2/EOM2/G703
G.703 Interface Card
6
1
M2/EOM2/GPI
GPI Card
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
1
Daughter Card Options
M2/EDCOM2/BISS
Hardware Options
NOTE…
Empty option slots must be fitted with a blanking plate.
1
BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS-E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April
2001.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-3
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.2: Software Options
Marketing Code
Name
SD Options
M2/ESO2/NR
Noise Reduction - three levels of professional-grade adaptive noise reduction.
M2/ESO2/VBR
Reflex and VBR - automatic variable bit-rate at a fixed quality setting for optimum bandwidth
usage in stand-alone or Reflex statistical multiplexing modes.
M2/ESO2/422
MPEG-2 422P@ML - for professional editing quality pictures, 1.5 Mbit/s to 50 Mbit/s.
M2/ESO2/RAS
RAS (Remote Authorisation System) - allows material to be protected from illegal viewing
using TANDBERG Television’s proprietary scrambling system.
M2/ESO2/ACON
Auto Concatenation - aligns the Encoder to the previous Encoder’s GOP structure to
significantly reduce coding artefacts caused by successive coding and decoding.
M2/ESO2/AC3
Dolby Digital (AC-3) - enables Dolby AC-3 stereo encoding.
M2/EOS2/SM38PSK
8PSK Modulation (applicable to E5784 or E5788-LBAND).
M2/EOS2/SM316QAM
16QAM Modulation (applicable to E5784 or E5788-LBAND).
M2/EOS2/LSYM
Low symbol Rate Capability.
M2/ESO2/MHP
MHP Timing Events
M2/ESO2/DTS
DTS Audio
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA
NABTS and GEMSTAR 2.0 VBI extraction
M2/ESO2/DPI
SCTE35 DPI
M2/ESO2/EthernetData
Enables the Data C – Ethernet data option
HD Options
3.1.2
M2/ESO2/HDNR
HD Noise Reduction
M2/ESO2/HDVBR
Reflex and VBR - automatic variable bit-rate at a fixed quality setting for optimum bandwidth
usage in stand-alone or Reflex statistical multiplexing modes.
M2/ESO2/HD422
MPEG-2 422P@ML - for professional editing quality pictures.
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS
Upgrades the Encoder to operate in multipass mode in a reflex group.
Limitations on Number of Option Modules
Overview
If the Remux option is not fitted then there can be a maximum of two
option modules.
If the Remux option module is fitted there can be a maximum of one other
option module.
Base Board
HD Encoder Module
Option Slot 1
3.1.3
Option Slot 6
IF or L-Band Modulator
Limitations on Use of Option Modules
Although both BISS (M2/EDCOM2/BISS) and RAS (M2/ESO2/RAS) may be
present in the Encoder, only one may be used at a time.
3.1.4
How to See Which Options are Fitted/Enabled
The Encoder has a number of hardware and software options (see Table 3.1
and Table 3.2). To see which are fitted/enabled refer to the Build Menu
(see Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally, Figure 4.9).
Page 3-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.2
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System - BISS
(M2/EDCOM2/BISS)
With the appropriate configuration, the Encoder can use the Basic
Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS2) to scramble the outgoing
transport stream. This system has been developed by the European
Broadcasting Union (EBU) as an open scrambling system.
BISS has these main levels of operation: Mode 1, Mode 2 and Mode 3.
Mode 0 corresponds to no scrambling. BISS-E is also available.
BISS Mode 1 operation uses a fixed value for the control word to scramble
the services in the transport stream from the Encoder. To descramble the
transmission, the Decoder needs to have the matching control word value.
NOTES…
1. This option module is installed as a daughter card to the Base Board, with no external
connectors and does not use an option slot.
2. The BISS software must also be enabled in the Encoder (see Customer Services).
BISS scrambling (when fitted) is enabled and controlled via the Setup/Mux
Menu (see Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally, Section 4.10.14).
2
BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS-E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April
2001.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-5
Options and Upgrades
3.3
Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option
(M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2)
3.3.1
Overview
The Additional Audio option module supplements the audio encoding
functionality of the Encoder. This module supports audio standards
MPEG-1 (layer 2), Dolby Digital (AC-3), Linear PCM, Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Pass-through, Dolby E Pass-through and DTS Pass-through. The module
can take in audio as either stereo analogue or digital AES/EBU (on left
channel only) via a 15-way D-type connector provided on its rear panel.
Alternatively, any two of the four pairs of embedded AES/EBU channels
extracted from the video can be routed to the module for encoding. This
option supports all the standard bit-rates and encoding modes associated
with each compression standard.
M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 supports 12 dB, 15 dB, 18 dB and 24 dB audio clip
level.
The Audio Menu associated with this option is described in Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally, Section 4.9. In the Audio Setup Menu
additional options are displayed for Audio XA and Audio XB, where X is the
option slot number where the module is fitted.
Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for details of Encoder locking to ensure
correct performance.
3.3.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
AUDIO IN
Additional Audio
Option
Additional Audio
Option
Mono 1 / Stereo 1 Right
Mono 2 / Stereo 1 Left
Mono 3 / Stereo 2 Right
Mono 4 / Stereo 2 Left
Pins 7, 15
Pins 3, 10
Pins 1, 9
AES/EBU Digital A
Pins 1, 9
AES/EBU Digital B
Pins 4, 12
AES/EBU
reference
Pins 6, 13
Pins 4, 12
Digital Audio Inputs
NOTE…
The AES/EBU reference signal is provided for backwards compatibility only. When using E57xx
Encoders use the reference signal provided by the Base Board.
Figure 3.1: Additional Audio and Linear PCM Option (M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2)
Page 3-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
Audio In Connector
Connect the audio cable to the AUDIO IN
connector. The 15-way, D-type male connector
is used in different ways according to the audio
input and the encoding configuration selected.
The connector provides two stereo pairs. They may be independently
configured as either analogue or digital. The left channel is used to input
digital audio.
Table 3.3: Audio In Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Analogue
Digital
1
Left Channel A (+)
AES/EBU (A) (+)
2
Signal
Analogue
Digital
9
Left Channel A (-)
AES/EBU (A) (-)
Not connected
10
Right Channel A (+)
3
Right Channel A (-)
11
Not connected
4
Left Channel B (+)
12
Left Channel B (-)
5
Not connected
13
Right Channel B (+)
6
Right Channel B (-)
14
Not connected
AES/EBU
Reference (Output
Signal)
7
8
AES/EBU (B) (+)
15
AES/EBU (B) (-)
AES/EBU
Reference (Ground)
Not connected
NOTES…
1. In analogue mode termination is either 20 kΩ or 600 Ω.
2. In AES/EBU mode termination is 110 Ω (default).
3. When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Ω termination.
4. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
CAUTION…
To ensure EMC compliance, use the audio connector supplied with the Encoder.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-7
Options and Upgrades
3.4
Advanced Audio Coding Option
(M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)
3.4.1
Overview
The Advanced Audio Coding option module supplements the audio
encoding functionality of the Encoder to enable it to be used as a drop-in
replacement for other Encoders. It can encode four stereo audio pairs
(two-channels) or one multi-channel (six-channels - multichannel MPEG-2
AAC (ISO/IEC 13818-7) (LC)) and one stereo pair (two-channels). No
other combination of channel inputs is permitted.
The module can receive up to four simultaneous, independent AES3-2003
inputs on four 75 Ω BNC co-axial AES3 inputs (compliant to AES-3id-2001)
located at the Encoder’s rear panel. It can also accept four AES3 inputs
from the Encoder’s backplane to permit the use of embedded audio. Each
input supports 16, 20 and 24-bit resolutions and 48 kHz sampling and is
capable of passing 16, 20 and 24 bit samples to the audio encoders. 24 or
20 bit input samples can be rounded to 16 bits.
The module accepts a PCR clock of 27 MHz in the form of a 3 wire serial
interface. The inputs are synchronised to the system reference clock
through the use of phase locked sample-rate converters prior to encoding.
3.4.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
A
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4
AES REF
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
SDI IN
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Additional Audio Option
Four stereo audio pairs
(two-channels)
or one multi-channel (six-channels)
and one stereo pair (two-channels).
27 MHz Reference Signal
AES 1
AES 2
AES 3
AES 4
AES REF
Figure 3.2: Advanced Audio Coding Option (M2/EOM2/ADVAUD)
The Additional Audio Coding option module comprises Assembly S14048
and Card S13600. See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
Page 3-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
AES x Connector
Connect the audio input cables to the appropriate AES input
connectors.
Each connector accepts a single stereo pair. They may be independently
configured or form part of an multi-channel input.
AES REF Connector
This connector allows the connection of a 27 MHz studio
timing reference.
Table 3.4: Audio In Connector
Pin
Signal
Pin
Analogue
Digital
1
Left Channel A (+)
AES/EBU (A) (+)
2
Signal
Analogue
Digital
9
Left Channel A (-)
AES/EBU (A) (-)
Not connected
10
Right Channel A (+)
3
Right Channel A (-)
11
Not connected
4
Left Channel B (+)
12
Left Channel B (-)
5
Not connected
13
Right Channel B (+)
6
Right Channel B (-)
14
Not connected
AES/EBU
Reference (Output
Signal)
7
8
AES/EBU (B) (+)
15
AES/EBU (B) (-)
AES/EBU
Reference (Ground)
Not connected
NOTES…
1. In analogue mode termination is either 20 kΩ or 600 Ω.
2. In AES/EBU mode termination is 110 Ω (default).
3. When the Encoder is powered down the digital channel is selected with 110 Ω termination.
4. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
CAUTION…
To ensure EMC compliance, use the audio connector supplied with the Encoder.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-9
Options and Upgrades
3.5
Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)
3.5.1
Overview
The Remux option module is capable of accepting up to three separate
transport streams via ASI connectors, and one transport stream from the
host Encoder. The maximum permissible data rate of each input transport
stream is 50 Mbit/s. Some or all of the services in the input transport
streams are then multiplexed together to produce a Multiple Channels Per
Carrier (MCPC) output at up to 65 Mbit/s. For a specification of this
interface see Annex B, Technical Specification
3.5.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
DVB-ASI OUT is disabled.
CAUTION…
When remultiplexing, be aware that both PIDs will be remapped according to the Host Encoder input
used.
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
Encoder
[Host]
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
The output is a multiplex of the
Output Transport Stream  three input transport streams of
Output Transport Stream  the Remux option and the
Output Transport Stream  transport stream produced by the
host Encoder.
Remux Option
Input Transport Stream 1
Input Transport Stream 2
Input Transport Stream 3
DVB ASI IN 1
DVB ASI IN 2
DVB ASI IN 3
DVB ASI OUT 1
Output is disabled
Figure 3.3: Remux Option (M2/EOM2/REMUX)
Page 3-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
DVB ASI IN 1, 2 and 3 Connectors
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an input to the unit.
Table 3.5: DVB ASI In Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
NOTE…
When connecting the inputs, always start from DVB ASI IN 1 and work upwards.
DVB ASI OUT 1 Connector
A 75 Ω BNC connector provides an output from the unit.
Table 3.6: DVB ASI Out Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
NOTE…
This output is disabled.
3.5.3
Stages of Remultiplexing
The Remultiplexer is capable of combining four inputs. Three inputs are in
the form of ASI feeds to the rear panel, the fourth input is fed from the
host Encoder (or primary Encoder). This basic configuration, using a single
stage of remultiplexing, means that four Encoder services (or streams) can
be combined together in the output. Figure 3.4 shows a typical satellite
system using one stage of remultiplexing.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-11
Options and Upgrades
Up-link equipment
(including
Up-converter and
High Power
Amplifier)
Contributing
Encoders
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Tx
Primary (Master)
Encoder with
Remux
Service 2
ASI
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
Service 3
ASI
ASI
Service 4
Service 1
IF Output
NOTE…
VIDEO (ANALOGUE)
VIDEO (DIGITAL)
AUDIO
SYNC DATA
ASYNC DATA
IF Output contains 4 services:
Service 1 + Service 2 + Service 3 + Service 4.
Figure 3.4: Block Diagram – One Stage of Remultiplexing
Similarly, if two stages of remultiplexing are introduced, thirteen Encoders
can be combined, providing up to thirteen services in the remultiplexed
output. This is the maximum number of services that can be provided
using this system, see Figure 3.5.
Contributing
Encoders
Service 3
ASI (x3)
Service 4
ASI (x4)
Service 2
Tx
Service 5
Encoder
with Remux
Contributing
Encoders
Service 7
Up-link equipment
(including
Up-converter and
High Power
Amplifier)
Encoder
with Remux
Encoder
with Remux
ASI (x3)
Service 8
ASI (x4)
Service 6
Service 1
IF Output
NOTE…
Service 9
IF Output contains 13 services.
Contributing
Encoders
Service 11
Service 12
Encoder
with Remux
ASI (x3)
Service 10
ASI (x4)
Service 13
Figure 3.5: Block Diagram – Two Stages of Remultiplexing
Page 3-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.5.4
Function of Remultiplexer
It is the function of the Remultiplexer to combine the locally generated
host services with the externally supplied input services, connected via ASI
inputs to the rear of the unit. If the Service ID (DVB) or Program Number
(ATSC), PIDs or service names, of two or more of the services clash, the
Remultiplexer can remap the Service ID or program number, remap PIDs,
and alter the service names to resolve the clash.
If a new service is detected on any input, and it clashes with an existing
service, it is the new service’s Service ID or Program Number, PIDs, or
Service Name that are remapped to resolve the conflict. Service names are
made unique by the addition of a number, for example ‘Default Service’
may be renamed ‘Default Service [2]’.
The way the Remultiplexer deals with user requests to remap PIDs
depends on its mode of operation.
If the user attempts to move/remap a PID to a PID already being used,
the Remultiplexer allows this to happen, and automatically remaps the
element that was on that PID.
Host Mux
Video
Video
Encoder
Audio
Audio
Encoder
Host
Mux
Rate
ASI Driver
ASI Output
Dual Port
Ram
Remultiplexer
Remux
ASI
Input
Remux
ASI
Input
Output
Bit-rate
Modulator
QPSK
IF Output
Remux
ASI
Input
Figure 3.6: Remultiplexer Block Diagram
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-13
Options and Upgrades
3.5.5
Using the Remultiplexer
Set the output bit-rate to the required value in the Setup/Mux Menu.
Connect transport streams that are to be combined (remultiplexed) with
the host Encoder’s services to the ASI inputs on the rear of the unit.
NOTE…
It is possible to remultiplex any DVB or ATSC compliant transport stream but at the time of publication,
only transport streams generated by TANDBERG Television equipment are guaranteed to work when
fed to the Remultiplexing module.
The equipment will automatically detect the services on these inputs. The
list of detected services is displayed in the Setup/Mux Menu.
Each service can be individually switched ‘Off’, ‘On’, or ‘On with
scrambling’. If the service is set to ‘Off’, then there is no trace of the
service in the output transport stream. New services can be set to default
to either Off or On. If it was connected to the Remultiplexer the last time
the Encoder was powered, then it assumes its previous state.
It is possible to remultiplex transport streams that have already been
scrambled by BISS encryption, but it is not possible to remultiplex
transport streams that have already been scrambled using RAS encryption.
Also it is not possible to scramble a service that has already been
scrambled.
3.5.6
ATSC Remultiplexing
The Remultiplexer can work with ATSC compliant transport streams. It
remaps the services following the ATSC program paradigm.
The Encoder can be configured to generate the PSIP for the output
transport stream. It generates the minimum number of tables to give an
ATSC compliant output transport stream, i.e. Event Information Tables
(EIT) 0, 1, 2 and 3, the System Time Table (STT), the Rating Region Table
(RRT), the Master Guide Table (MGT), and either the Cable Virtual Channel
Table (CVCT) or the Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (TVCT), depending
on the delivery descriptor set. It will not pass through any tables that are
present on the ASI input transport streams.
Alternatively, an external PSIP generator can be connected to one of the
Remultiplexer inputs and the remultiplexer programmed to pass through a
range of PIDs, thus inserting the PSIP into the output transport stream.
For more information about using the Remux card in ATSC with internal
and external PSIP see Annex H, Use of Remux Card in ATSC.
3.5.7
Setting Bit-rates and Avoiding Overflow
Overflow is the condition in which the total of the contributing service
bit-rates, (including the host mux), exceeds the output bit-rate of the
primary remultiplexing unit.
NOTE…
Only useful packets (e.g. video, audio and data, etc) count towards the bit-rate of the contributing
service bit-rates, not null packets.
Page 3-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
The easiest way to configure the bit-rates to avoid overflow, is as follows:
1. Divide the 188 byte output bit-rate of the primary (master)
remultiplexing unit, (this can be found in the Setup/Mux/Remux
Module/Output Bit-rate), by the number of contributing services
(including the primary service). Such that:
O/P Rate (188) / N = Host Rate (188)
[Where N = number of services to be combined including
primary]
2. Then set the Host Rates (188) of each contributing unit and the master
unit to equal the calculated Host Rate.
If the above procedure is followed, an equal bit-rate is allocated to each
contributing unit. By setting the host rates, the video and audio bit-rates
will be automatically adjusted to suit.
The amount of spare bit-rate and input bit-rate that has been used in the
Remultiplexer can be monitored using the bar graph indicators in the
Setup/Mux/Remux Module Menu.
3.5.8
What to do if Overflow Occurs
If an ‘Overflow Error’ is indicated on the equipment, then the incoming
contributing bit-rate exceeds the outgoing bit-rate. To avoid corruption
reduce the incoming bit-rate by either removing services, (turn the service
Off or remove the ASI input), or reduce the bit-rate of the incoming
service.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-15
Options and Upgrades
3.6
SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs
Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US)
3.6.1
Overview
The modules allow the Encoder to output MPEG-2 transport streams in the
following formats: ASI (optical) and SMPTE 310M - 1998 (electrical).
There are two ASI multimode optical outputs which conform to the DVB
document A010 (Section 4.4 and Annex B) and three copper SI Outputs
which conform to the SMPTE Standard 310M Level 2.
NOTE…
Level 2 performance is exceeded but not as far as that of level 3.
M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT has both ASI/SSI capability whilst the
M2/EOM2/SSI-US has only SSI.
3.6.2
Assembly
Rear Panel
These option modules can only be installed in slot 3 or 6.
CAUTION…
The SMPTE 310 output cannot be used with the M2/ESO2/RAS RAS Scrambling mode.
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream outputs are still
Output Transport Stream available.
SMPTE 310/ASI
Output Option
(Slot 3 or 6)
SMPTE 310 1
SMPTE 310 2
SMPTE 310 3
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
Synchronous Serial Output 1
Synchronous Serial Output 2 19.392658 Mbit/s only
Synchronous Serial Output 3
Asynchronous Serial Output 1
40 Mbit/s max
Asynchronous Serial Output 2
Figure 3.7: SMPTE 310 (SSI) and ASI Optical Outputs Option Modules (M2/EOM2/ASI-OPT) and
(M2/EOM2/SSI-US)
Page 3-16
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
SMPTE 310 1, 2 and 3 Connectors
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an SMPTE 310
compliant synchronous serial (SSI) output for the unit.
Table 3.7: SMPTE 310 Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
ASI OUT 1, 2 Connectors
Provides a DVB compliant ASI optical output at 270 Mbit/s.
Table 3.8: ASI Out Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
ASI OUT 1, 2
Wavelength
1300 nm Multimode (MMF)
NOTE…
The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components from
ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit and
whenever the interface is not in use.
WARNING…
LED: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTE…
The Class 1 LED warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-17
Options and Upgrades
3.7
ATM Network Interface Option Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155_…)
3.7.1
Overview
The ATM3 Network Interface Module allows the Encoder to transmit and
receive MPEG-2 transport streams over broadband telecommunications
networks (B-ISDN) using ATM.
There are different variants of the ATM Network Interface Module. The
module comprises an ATM Network Interface (common to all models) and
a Physical Layer Module suitable for the application required. Refer to
Table 3.1 for details of the variants.
Menus associated with the ATM Modules are described in Chapter 4,
Operating the Equipment Locally.
3.7.2
Assembly
To provide the interface to the B-ISDN Telecommunications network, the
Physical Layer Module must be installed according to the type of network
required. These are described in Section 3.8, STM-1 OC3 Multimode
Physical Interface Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM) on page 3-19 and
Section 3.9, STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface Module
(M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM) on page 3-21.
The S11906 has the following connectors: DVB-ASI Copper Input,
DVB-ASI Copper Output and the Ethernet Connector. They are present on
all variants of the ATM Module.
3.7.3
Common Connectors
DVB-ASI Copper Input
A BNC, female 75 Ω connector provides a DVB-PI
compliant copper connection at a fixed line transmission
rate of 270 Mbit/s.
Table 3.9: DVB-ASI Copper Input Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
DVB ASI-C IN
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω socket
Pin-outs:
Centre
Shield
Signal
Ground/Chassis
DVB-ASI Copper Output
A BNC, female 75 Ω connector provides a DVB-PI
compliant copper connection at a fixed line transmission
rate of 270 Mbit/s.
3
ATM is the abbreviation for Asynchronous Transfer Mode.
Page 3-18
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.10: DVB-ASI Copper Output Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
Analogue
Connector designation
DVB ASI-C OUT
Connector type
BNC 75 Ω socket
Pin-outs:
Centre
Shield
Signal
Ground/Chassis
10BaseT Ethernet Connector
The Ethernet is used to connect the ATM card to a local
control LAN and for engineering access. Connect the
Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 (10BaseT) connectors on the
equipment.
Table 3.11: Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Type
RJ-45
Connector designation
Ethernet
Location
At rear panel
Pin:
(Unused pins not connected)
Pin 1  Tx Out (+)
Pin 2  Tx Out (-)
Pin 3  Rx In (+)
Pin 6  Rx In (-)
3.8
STM-1 OC3 Multimode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM)
3.8.1
Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-19
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
HD SDI IN
AUDIO IN
ASI OUT 2
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network Interface
Module Multimode
Optical
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MULTIMODE)
IN
OUT
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
DVB ASI–C
ASI-C Input
Local Control
IN
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Output
ETHERNET
Figure 3.8: ATM Network Interface Module, Multimode Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM)
3.8.2
Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LED: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTES…
1. The Class 1 LED warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
2. The B-ISDN network that is supported is the SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Multimode Optical.
This port is available on the S8063 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to an SDH or SONET
B-ISDN network, at a fixed line transmission
rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex
device.
Receive
Transmit
Table 3.12: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MULTIMODE)
Wavelength
1300 nm Multimode (MMF)
NOTE…
The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components from
ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit and
whenever the interface is not in use.
Page 3-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.9
STM-1 OC3 Monomode Physical Interface
Module (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)
3.9.1
Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network Interface
Module Monomode
Optical
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
Local Control
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MONOMODE)
IN
OUT
DVB ASI–C
IN
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Output
ETHERNET
Figure 3.9: ATM Network Interface Module, Monomode Optical (M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM)
3.9.2
Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LASER: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT
DO NOT LOOK INTO THE APERTURE.
LOOKING INTO THE APERTURE COULD CAUSE DISCOMFORT TO YOUR EYE.
NOTES…
1. The Class 1 LASER warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
2. The B-ISDN network that is supported is the SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Monomode Optical.
3. The module is supplied with a protective sealing cap, which protects the optical components
from ingress of dust and foreign bodies. The protective sealing cap should be fitted during transit
and whenever the interface is not in use.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-21
Options and Upgrades
This port is available on the S8067 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to an SDH or SONET
B-ISDN network, at a fixed line transmission
rate of 155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex
device.
Receive
Transmit
Table 3.13: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
3.10
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MONOMODE)
Wavelength
1300 nm Monomode / Singlemode (SMF)
M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Module
3.10.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDIN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network PDH/E3
Interface Module
Input from PDH/E3 B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-E3
OUT
Output to PDH/E3 B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.10: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS34 ATM PDH/E3 Module)
Page 3-22
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.10.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11366 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a PDH/E3 network at
a transmission rate of 34.368 Mbit/s. This is a
full duplex service.
IN
OUT
Table 3.14: PDH/E3 Connector
3.11
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-PDH-E3
M2/EOM2/ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Module
3.11.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
DS-3 is the third level in the PDH multiplex hierarchy found in North
America. DS-3 has a bandwidth of 44.736 Mbit/s and carries seven DS-2
channels of 6.312 Mbit/s, these in turn carry four DS-1 signals of
1.544 Mbit/s.
There are currently four different ways to transmit ATM cells over DS-3.
They are:
•
•
•
•
C-bit parity ADM
C-bit parity PLCP
M23 ADM
M23 PLCP
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-23
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
ASI OUT 1
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network PDH/DS3
Interface Module
Input from PDH/DS3 B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-DS3
OUT
Output to PDH/DS3 B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.11: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS45 ATM PDH/DS3 Module)
3.11.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11365 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a PDH/DS3 network
at a transmission rate of 45 Mbit/s. This is a
full duplex service.
IN
OUT
Table 3.15: PDH/DS3 Connector
3.12
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-PDH-DS3
M2/EOM2/ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical Module
3.12.1 Assembly
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
For details of the DVB-ASI Copper Input, DVB-ASI Copper Output and
Ethernet Connector refer to Section 3.7.3, Common Connectors on
page 3-18.
NOTE…
Be aware that the BNC connector positions on this module are reversed when compared to the same
connectors on the E3 and DS3 modules.
Page 3-24
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
Encoder
Video In
HD SDI
Audio In
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream  The Host Encoder
Output Transport Stream  outputs are still
Output Transport Stream  available.
ATM Network STM-1/E
Interface Module
Input from SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
IN
ATM-PDH-DS3
OUT
Output to SDH or SONET B-ISDN Network
ASI-C Input
IN
DVB ASI–C
OUT
ASI-C Output
Local Control
ETHERNET
Figure 3.12: Rear Panel Connectors (M2/EOM2/ATMS155E ATM STM-1 Electrical Module)
3.12.2 Connectors
This port is available on the S11367 physical
layer option module. It provides a
bi-directional interface to a SDH STM-1/SONET
STS-3c network at a transmission rate of
155.520 Mbit/s. This is a full duplex service.
OUT
IN
Table 3.16: SDH STM-1/SONET STS-3c Electrical Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
BNC
Connector designation
ATM-SDM-STM1/E
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-25
Options and Upgrades
3.13
IP Output Card (M2/EOM2/IP)
IP Card Pro-MPEG FEC
(M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)
3.13.1 Overview
The IP Output card provides a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, out of which
the transport stream generated by the Encoder can be output in UDP
packets at up to 50 Mbit/s.
The mapping of MPEG-2 transport stream packets into IP data frames is
done according to the protocol stack shown in Figure 3.13.
NOTE…
More support has been given in V2.8.x of the IP Output Card in V3.6.x of the Encoder. This is
accessed using menu items on the IP menu tree from the front panel, telnet and web interfaces.
● The IP output can be turned off using the IP Output menu item.
● A Line Mode menu item allows the setting to be either ‘Fixed’ or ‘Auto’.
MPEG- 2
Transport
Stream
MPEG-2/DVB Layer
TCP/UDP
UDP – User Datagram Protocol
Transport Layer - IP
Link Layer – 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Figure 3.13: IP Output Protocol Stack
Between one and seven MPEG-2 transport stream packets can be put in
each UDP packet. The data link layer is Ethernet according to
IEEE 802.3/802.3u (auto-sensing 10/100 Mbit/s, twisted pair, via RJ-45
connector).
3.13.2 Support for Pro MPEG FEC
This option sets the parameters and protocol required to send video over
IP.
3.13.3 Smallcasting Mode
In this mode, the transport stream can be transmitted to four specified IP
addresses.
Page 3-26
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
NOTE…
The maximum multiplexer output rate, which can be reliably streamed to each IP address, is reduced
for each extra destination address that is added. i.e. if two destinations are specified, the maximum
rate for each address is half of that for one address, and so on.
3.13.4 Assembly
Rear Panel
ASI In
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an ASI input.
NOTE…
This connector is not used.
Table 3.17: ASI In Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC Female
Connector designation
ASI IN
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
RS-232 Control
A 3.5mm socket provides a debug interface.
NOTE…
This connector is for TANDBERG Television use only.
ASI Out
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides an ASI output.
NOTE…
This connector is not used.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-27
Options and Upgrades
Table 3.18: ASI Out Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC Female
Connector designation
ASI OUT
Pin-outs
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Ethernet Output
An RJ-45 connector provides a 10/100BaseT
Ethernet port.
Table 3.19: RJ-45 Connector
Page 3-28
Item
Specification
Connector Type
RJ-45
Connector designation
10/100 BT
Pin-out
1
Tx Out (+)
2
Tx Out (-)
3
Rx In (+)
4
Not Connected
5
Not Connected
6
Rx In (-)
7
Not Connected
8
Not Connected
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.14
G.703 Interface Card Option
(M2/EOM2/G703)
3.14.1 Overview
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
The G.703 Interface Card provides a G.703 adapted Encoder Transport
Stream Output at a maximum rate of either:
•
•
DS-3 at 44.736 Mbit/s
E3 at 34.368 Mbit/s
See Table 3.1 for the slots that it can be installed in.
3.14.2 Assembly
Rear Panel
Encoder
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
HD Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
COMP VIDEO
SDI IN
ASI OUT 1
ASI OUT 2
HD SDI IN
ASI OUT 3
AUDIO IN
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
G.703 Interface
Card Option
RS232
OUT
IN
TANDBERG Debug Interface
Output (Transmit side of G.703 connection)
Input (Receive side of G.703 connection)
NOT NORMALLY CONNECTED
Figure 3.14: G.703 Interface Card Option M2/EOM2/G703
OUT Connector
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides a G.703
transport stream output.
Table 3.20: Out Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-29
Options and Upgrades
IN Connector
NOTE…
This is not normally connected.
A 75 Ω female BNC connector provides a G.703
transport stream input.
Table 3.21: In Connector
Pin
Signal
Centre
Signal
Screen
Ground
RS-232 Connector
A 3.5 mm socket provides a TANDBERG debug interface.
3.15
GPI Card (M2/EOM2/GPI)
3.15.1 Overview
The GPI Card connector allows various specific Encoder functions to be
controlled using contact closure inputs. In addition, contact closure outputs
are available for future use.
Page 3-30
•
8 Contact Closure Inputs (intended to operate at TTL level signals)
with input protection. The controlled functions are software assigned.
•
2 Contact Closure Outputs which can be either open circuit or
connected to the common output. Each output has inverted or noninverted contacts
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
3.15.2 Assembly
Encoder
(1U Slot: 1, 2
2U Slot: 1, 2, 4, 5)
HD SDI
Analogue Composite Video
Serial Digital Interface
Audio Input
HD SDI IN
COMP VIDEO
ASI OUT 1
SDI IN
ASI OUT 2
AUDIO IN
ASI OUT 3
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
Output Transport Stream
GPI
Card Option
Contact Closure Inputs and Outputs
- 2 Contact Closure Outputs
- 8 Sensed Inputs
GPI
Figure 3.15: General Purpose Interface M2/EOM2/GPI
3.15.3 Connector
Table 3.22: GPI Connector
Item
Specification
Item
Specification
Connector Type
15-way D-type Male
Connector designation
GPI
1
Input 0
Pin-out
2
Pin-out
9
GND
Input 1
10
Output 1 NI
3
Input 2
11
Output 1 Common
4
Input 3
12
Output 1 I
5
Input 4
13
Output 2 NI
6
Input 5
14
Output 2 Common
7
Input 6
15
Output 2 I
8
Input 7
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-31
Options and Upgrades
3.16
3.16.1
Software Options
Standard Definition
M2/ESO2/NR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include noise reduction
mode. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/VBR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include variable bit-rate.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/422
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include 4:2:2 video
encoding mode. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/RAS
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include RAS mode.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/ACON
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include auto
concatenation. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/AC3
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide Dolby Digital (AC-3)
audio. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/SM38PSK
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide 8PSK modulation.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/SM316QAM
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide 16QAM modulation.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/LSYM
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to work at low symbol rates
(300 ksym/s minimum). Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/MHP
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide MHP timing Events.
Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/DTS
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide DTS Audio. Contact
Customer Services for details.
Page 3-32
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Options and Upgrades
M2/ESO2/525VBIDATA
This purchasable option allows the Encoder to provide NABTS and
GEMSTAR 2.0 VBI extraction. Contact Customer Services for details
M2/ESO2/DPI
This purchasable licence key allows the GPI purchasable option module to
provide an SCTE35 splicing. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/EthernetData
This purchasable licence key enables the reception of fully formed
188-byte transport packets coming in as UDP datagrams on the Encoder’s
Ethernet port.
3.16.2 High Definition
M2/ESO2/HDNR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include noise reduction
mode for HD. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/HDVBR
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include variable bit-rate
for HD. Contact Customer Services for details.
M2/ESO2/HD422
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to include 4:2:2 video
encoding mode for HD. Contact Customer Services for details and to check
that you have the relevant hardware required.
M2/ESO2/HD-MPASS
This purchasable option upgrades the Encoder to operate in multipass
mode in a reflex group. Contact Customer Services for details.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 3-33
Options and Upgrades
BLANK
Page 3-34
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 4
4. Operating the Equipment Locally
Contents
4.1 Introduction ............................................................. 4-11
4.2 Establishing Local Control....................................... 4-11
4.2.1 Input Monitor............................................... 4-11
4.2.2 Summary Screen........................................ 4-12
4.2.3 Line Up Menu ............................................. 4-12
4.2.4 A(udio)/V(ideo) Menu ................................. 4-12
4.2.5 Keyboard Lock............................................ 4-12
4.3 Navigating the Display Screens .............................. 4-13
4.3.1 Moving Through the Menu Screens ........... 4-13
4.3.2 How to Use the Keypad.............................. 4-13
4.3.3 How to Use the Functions Associated
with Softkeys .............................................. 4-14
4.3.4 Display Screens.......................................... 4-15
4.3.5 Menu Formats ............................................ 4-15
4.3.6 Summary Screen and Advanced Menus .... 4-17
4.5.3
4.4 Setup Menu............................................................. 4-17
4.5 System Menu .......................................................... 4-17
4.5.1 Introduction................................................. 4-17
4.5.2 Service Info Menu (Syntax = ATSC)........... 4-19
Overview..................................................... 4-19
Short Channel Name Option ...................... 4-19
Long Channel Name Option ....................... 4-19
Syntax Option ............................................. 4-19
Remux Input n Mode .................................. 4-19
SI Level Option ........................................... 4-20
Ext. PSIP Source Option ............................ 4-20
PSIP Status ................................................ 4-20
PSIP Min PID.............................................. 4-20
PSIP Max PID............................................. 4-20
Data n min/max .......................................... 4-20
Major Channel Option................................. 4-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
4.5.4
Minor Channel Option .................................4-21
Program Number Option.............................4-21
Service Type Option ...................................4-21
Transport Stream Id Option ........................4-21
Program Paradigm Option ..........................4-21
PMT PID Option..........................................4-21
Daylight Saving ...........................................4-21
DST Start Date and DST End Date
Options........................................................4-21
DVB Subtitles..............................................4-21
Service Info Menu (Syntax = DVB) .............4-22
Overview .....................................................4-22
Network Name Option.................................4-22
Service Provider Option ..............................4-22
Service Name Option..................................4-22
Syntax Option .............................................4-22
Remux Input n in Mode...............................4-23
SI Level Option ...........................................4-23
Data n min/max...........................................4-23
Network Id Option .......................................4-24
Service Id Option ........................................4-24
Transport Stream Id Option ........................4-24
Service Type Option ...................................4-24
PMT PID Option..........................................4-24
Stream ID Descriptor Option.......................4-24
Dolby AC-3 Descriptor Option.....................4-24
Logical Chan Desc Option ..........................4-25
Logical Channel Option...............................4-25
DVB Subtitles..............................................4-25
Remote Control Menu.................................4-25
Overview .....................................................4-25
IP Address Option.......................................4-26
MAC Address Option ..................................4-26
Page 4-1
Operating the Equipment Locally
Network Mask Option..................................4-26
Gateway Address Option ............................4-26
Set Community Name Option .....................4-26
SNMP Master Option ..................................4-26
Last SNMP Master Option ..........................4-26
Last SNMP Poll Option ...............................4-26
SNMP Trap IP Option .................................4-26
Trap Level Report Option............................4-26
Browser User Name Option ........................4-26
Browser Password Option ..........................4-26
SNTP Server Option ...................................4-27
Ethernet Bandwidth Option .........................4-27
SABus Address Option ...............................4-27
Serial Protocol Option .................................4-27
SABus Baud Rate Option............................4-27
SABus Data Bits Option..............................4-27
Serial Menu Remote Control.......................4-27
4.5.5 General Menu .............................................4-28
Overview .....................................................4-28
Model Number Option.................................4-28
Config Name Option ...................................4-28
Local Time Option.......................................4-28
Local Date Option .......................................4-28
UTC Offset Option ......................................4-28
GPS UTC Offset .........................................4-28
Temperature Option....................................4-28
Screen Saver Option...................................4-29
Keypress Beep Option ................................4-29
Power Dip Recovery Option........................4-29
Upgrade Encoder Option ............................4-29
Software Release Option ............................4-29
Fan Control Option......................................4-29
4.5.6 Time and Date ............................................4-30
4.5.7 Advanced Menu ..........................................4-30
Overview .....................................................4-30
Setup Password Option ..............................4-30
Current Password Option............................4-30
Display Errors Option..................................4-30
System Control Option................................4-30
Action On PID Error Option.........................4-31
SNMP Control Option .................................4-31
Display Contrast Option ..............................4-31
No. Services Option ....................................4-31
Mbd. Service PIDs Option...........................4-31
Reset On Download Option (Status Only) ..4-31
Reset Encoder Option.................................4-32
4.5.8 Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Menu ....4-32
4.5.9 Build Menu ..................................................4-32
4.5.10 Additional Services (Mbd Services Menu) ..4-32
Overview .....................................................4-32
Host Service 1.............................................4-32
4.6 Video Menu .............................................................4-34
4.6.1 Introduction .................................................4-34
Page 4-2
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
Video Source Menu.................................... 4-34
Overview..................................................... 4-34
Video Input Option...................................... 4-34
Input Source Select (SD Only) ................... 4-37
Frame Rate Option (SD Only) .................... 4-37
HD Input Format......................................... 4-37
Input Video Sense (HD Only) ..................... 4-37
Input Horiz Res (HD Only).......................... 4-38
Video Locked (SD Only) and HD Video
Locked Option ............................................ 4-38
Ident Text Option (SD Only) ....................... 4-38
Video Bandwidth Option............................. 4-38
Adaptive Pre-processing ............................ 4-38
OP Video Loss Option................................ 4-38
Predictive Processing (SD Only) ............... 4-39
Input Termination Option (SD Analogue
Only)........................................................... 4-39
Noise Reduction Option.............................. 4-39
Max Still Period Option (SD Only) .............. 4-40
Default 625 [Analog]................................... 4-40
Default 525 [Analog]................................... 4-40
I/P Monitor Refresh Option......................... 4-41
Text Colour Option (SD Only) .................... 4-41
Background Colour Option (SD Only) ........ 4-41
Logo Option (When Logo Downloaded
into Unit) ..................................................... 4-41
Time Code Option ...................................... 4-41
Video Filter/Process (SD only) ................... 4-42
Video Encoder Menu.................................. 4-42
Overview..................................................... 4-42
Profile/Level Option .................................... 4-42
Compression Mode Option......................... 4-42
Bit-rate Option ............................................ 4-44
Bit-rate Tracking ......................................... 4-44
VBR Mode (HD) ......................................... 4-44
VBR Mode (SD Only) Option...................... 4-45
Delay Option............................................... 4-46
Resolution Option....................................... 4-46
Aspect Ratio Option.................................... 4-47
AFD Option (SD Only)................................ 4-47
GOP Structure Option ................................ 4-48
GOP Length Option.................................... 4-49
Long GOPs Option ..................................... 4-49
Adaptive GOP............................................. 4-50
Field/Frame Option (SD Only).................... 4-50
3:2 Pulldown Option ................................... 4-50
Concatenation Option (SD Only)................ 4-51
PID Option.................................................. 4-51
Component Tag Option .............................. 4-51
Reflex Enable Option.................................. 4-51
Indicated Bit-Rate Option (SD Only)........... 4-51
Copyright Option......................................... 4-51
Original Option............................................ 4-51
Scene Cut Detection................................... 4-51
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.6.5
Insert VBV Delay Option (SD Only)............ 4-52
PES Header Option .................................... 4-52
AFD Location Option (SD Only) ................. 4-52
Intra DC Precision ...................................... 4-52
Rate Buffer Mode (SD Only)....................... 4-52
Encoder Type Option.................................. 4-52
S/W Release Option ................................... 4-52
AFD HD (HD Only) ..................................... 4-52
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI)/Userdata
Menu........................................................... 4-53
Overview..................................................... 4-53
VBI/Userdata Menu (25/50 Hz Frame
Rate)........................................................... 4-53
VBI Menu (29.97/30/59.94/60 Hz Frame
Rate)........................................................... 4-59
4.7 Audio Menu............................................................. 4-62
4.7.1 Overview..................................................... 4-62
4.7.2 Audio A / B Menus – MPEG Layer 2 .......... 4-62
Introduction................................................. 4-62
Source Option............................................. 4-62
Coding Standard Option ............................. 4-62
Input Level L Option ................................... 4-64
Input Level R Option................................... 4-64
Audio Bit-rate Option .................................. 4-64
Coding Mode Option................................... 4-64
VPS Controls Coding Mode........................ 4-65
VPS Coding Mode ...................................... 4-65
VPS Word 5................................................ 4-65
VPS Stereo Mode....................................... 4-66
VPS Dual Chan Mode ................................ 4-66
Auto Lip Sync Option.................................. 4-67
Use Minimum Delay ................................... 4-67
Lip Sync Offset Option................................ 4-67
Audio Delay Option..................................... 4-67
Actual Audio Delay ..................................... 4-67
Clip Level Option ........................................ 4-67
Impedance Option ...................................... 4-68
Language or Language Left/Right Option .. 4-68
De-emphasis Option................................... 4-68
Copyright Option......................................... 4-68
Original Option............................................ 4-68
Embedded Source Option .......................... 4-68
Embedded 1-2 DID Option ......................... 4-69
Embedded 3-4 DID Option ......................... 4-69
Audio PID Option........................................ 4-69
Component Tag Option .............................. 4-69
PCR On Audio PID Option ......................... 4-69
OP Digital Loss........................................... 4-69
Hardware Release Option .......................... 4-69
Software Release Option............................ 4-70
4.7.3 Audio (Dolby Digital (AC-3) Menu) ............. 4-70
Source Option............................................. 4-70
Coding Standard Option ............................. 4-70
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
4.7.4
Audio Alignment..........................................4-70
Lip Sync Adjustment ...................................4-71
Input Level L Option....................................4-71
Input Level R Option ...................................4-71
Audio Bit-rate Option...................................4-71
Coding Mode Option ...................................4-72
Auto Lip Sync Option ..................................4-72
Lip Sync Offset Option ................................4-72
Audio Delay Option .....................................4-73
Use Minimum Delay....................................4-73
Actual Audio Delay......................................4-73
Sampling Rate Option.................................4-73
Clip Level Option.........................................4-73
Impedance Option.......................................4-73
Language Option ........................................4-73
Bit Stream Mode Option..............................4-74
Dialogue Level Option.................................4-74
Dolby Srnd Mode Option.............................4-74
Production Info Option ................................4-74
Mixing Level Option.....................................4-75
Room Type Option......................................4-75
Copyright Option .........................................4-75
Original Option ............................................4-75
Dynamic Range Option...............................4-75
RF Protection Option ..................................4-76
De-emphasis Option ...................................4-76
DC Filter Option ..........................................4-76
Low Pass Filter Option................................4-76
Embedded Source Option...........................4-76
Embedded 1-2 DID Option..........................4-77
Embedded 3-4 DID Option..........................4-77
Audio PID Option ........................................4-77
Component Tag Option...............................4-77
PCR On Audio PID Option..........................4-77
OP Digital Loss ...........................................4-77
Hardware Release Option...........................4-78
Software Release Option ............................4-78
Audio (Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E
Pass-thru and DTS Pass-thru) Menu..........4-78
Source Option .............................................4-78
Coding Standard Option .............................4-78
Audio Alignment (Dolby E only) ..................4-78
Lip Sync Adjustment ...................................4-79
Audio Bit-rate Option...................................4-79
Auto Lip Sync Option ..................................4-79
Use Minimum Delay....................................4-79
Lip Sync Offset Option ................................4-80
Audio Delay Option .....................................4-80
Actual Audio Delay......................................4-80
Language Option ........................................4-80
SMPTE 302M Standard Option ..................4-80
Channel Option ...........................................4-80
Embedded Source Option...........................4-81
Page 4-3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.7.5
4.7.6
4.7.7
Page 4-4
Embedded 1-2 DID Option..........................4-81
Embedded 3-4 DID Option..........................4-81
Audio PID Option ........................................4-81
Component Tag Option...............................4-81
PCR On Audio PID Option..........................4-81
OP Digital Loss ...........................................4-81
Hardware Release Option...........................4-82
Software Release Option ............................4-82
Audio (Linear PCM [Direct][Via SRC])
Menu ...........................................................4-82
Source Option .............................................4-82
Coding Standard Option .............................4-82
Audio Alignment..........................................4-83
Lip Sync Adjustment ...................................4-83
Input Level L Option....................................4-83
Input Level R Option ...................................4-83
Coding Mode Option ...................................4-84
Auto Lip Sync Option ..................................4-84
Lip Sync Offset Option ................................4-84
Use Minimum Delay....................................4-84
Audio Delay Option .....................................4-84
Actual Audio Delay......................................4-84
Clip Level Option.........................................4-85
Impedance Option.......................................4-85
Language or Language Left/Right Option...4-85
SMPTE 302M Standard Option ..................4-85
Channel Option ...........................................4-86
Embedded Source Option...........................4-86
Embedded 1-2 DID Option..........................4-86
Embedded 3-4 DID Option..........................4-86
Audio PID Option ........................................4-86
Component Tag Option...............................4-86
PCR On Audio PID Option..........................4-87
OP Digital Loss ...........................................4-87
Hardware Release Option...........................4-87
Software Release Option ............................4-87
Audio Languages Menu ..............................4-87
Advanced Audio Coding
(M2/EOM/ADVAUD) ...................................4-88
Overview .....................................................4-88
Input Source Option ....................................4-88
Coding Standard Option .............................4-88
Bit-rate Option.............................................4-88
Coding Mode Option ...................................4-89
PID ..............................................................4-90
PCR On Audio PID Option..........................4-90
Delay...........................................................4-90
Auto Lip Sync Option ..................................4-90
Use Minimum Delay....................................4-90
Language or Language Left/Right Option...4-91
OP on Digital I/P Loss.................................4-91
Temporal Noise Shaping.............................4-91
ADTS CRC..................................................4-91
Copyright Option .........................................4-91
Original Option............................................ 4-91
Embedded 1-2 DID Option ......................... 4-91
Embedded 3-4 DID Option ......................... 4-91
Level [L] Option .......................................... 4-92
Level [R] Option.......................................... 4-92
Component Tag Option .............................. 4-92
4.8 Data Menu .............................................................. 4-93
4.8.1 Introduction................................................. 4-93
4.8.2 Data A - RS232 Menu ................................ 4-93
Encoding Option......................................... 4-93
Baud Rate Option....................................... 4-94
RS232 PID Option...................................... 4-94
Component Tag Option .............................. 4-94
Buffer Data Option...................................... 4-94
Delay Option............................................... 4-95
SNMP oid index Option .............................. 4-95
O/P Bit-rate Option ..................................... 4-95
4.8.3 Data B - RS422 Menu ................................ 4-95
Encoding Option......................................... 4-95
Bit-rate Option ............................................ 4-95
RS422 PID Option...................................... 4-96
Component Tag Option .............................. 4-96
Test Mode Option....................................... 4-96
Delay Option............................................... 4-96
D Mode Option ........................................... 4-96
SNMP oid index Option .............................. 4-96
Version Option............................................ 4-96
4.8.4 Data C – Ethernet Menu............................. 4-96
Licence Key................................................ 4-96
Encoding..................................................... 4-96
Port Number ............................................... 4-97
PID.............................................................. 4-97
Pkts Received............................................. 4-97
Pkts Sent .................................................... 4-97
Alarm Screen.............................................. 4-97
4.9 Output Menu ........................................................... 4-97
4.9.1 Overview..................................................... 4-97
4.9.2 Output Format Option................................. 4-97
4.9.3 Delivery Descriptor Menu ........................... 4-98
4.9.4 Descriptor Type Option............................... 4-98
4.9.5 Descriptor Type = Terrestrial.................... 4-100
Band Plan Option ..................................... 4-100
Channel Option......................................... 4-100
Frequency Option..................................... 4-100
Bandwidth Option ..................................... 4-101
Modulation Type Option ........................... 4-101
Hierarchy Option....................................... 4-101
FEC (HP) and FEC (LP) Options ............. 4-102
Guard Interval Option ............................... 4-102
Carriers Options ....................................... 4-102
Other Frequency Option........................... 4-103
4.9.6 Descriptor Type = Cable........................... 4-103
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.9.7
4.9.8
4.9.9
Frequency Option ..................................... 4-103
Modulation Type Option ........................... 4-103
FEC (Outer) Option .................................. 4-103
FEC (Inner) Option ................................... 4-104
Symbol Rate Option ................................. 4-104
Descriptor Type = Satellite ....................... 4-104
Frequency Option ..................................... 4-104
Modulation Type Option ........................... 4-104
FEC (Inner) Option ................................... 4-104
Symbol Rate ............................................. 4-105
Orbital Position Option.............................. 4-105
West East Option...................................... 4-105
Polarisation Option ................................... 4-105
Output Format = Satellite Modulator (IF
Output)...................................................... 4-105
TS Input Source........................................ 4-105
IF Output Option ....................................... 4-106
IF Power Option........................................ 4-106
IF Frequency Option................................. 4-106
Modulation Option .................................... 4-106
Mod Type Option ...................................... 4-106
Symbol Rate Option ................................. 4-107
FEC Rate Option ...................................... 4-107
Spectrum Sense Option ........................... 4-107
Roll Off Factor Option............................... 4-107
Tx Bandwidth Factor Option ..................... 4-107
Tx Bandwidth Option ................................ 4-108
Bit-rate (188) Option ................................. 4-108
Bit-rate (204) Option ................................. 4-108
Preset Pwr Low Option............................. 4-108
Preset Pwr Norm Option........................... 4-108
Sat Deliv Freq Option ............................... 4-108
Sat Orb Pos Option .................................. 4-109
Sat West/East Option ............................... 4-109
Polarisation Option ................................... 4-109
Status Only Options for the Satellite
Modulator Menu........................................ 4-109
Output Format = Satellite Modulator (LBand Output) ............................................ 4-110
TS Input Source........................................ 4-110
Rate Adaptation Option ............................ 4-110
L-Band Output Option............................... 4-110
L-Band Power Option ............................... 4-110
Frequency Option ..................................... 4-110
Modulation Option .................................... 4-110
Mod Type Option ...................................... 4-110
Symbol Rate Option ................................. 4-111
FEC Rate Option ...................................... 4-111
Spectrum Invert Option............................. 4-111
Roll Off Factor Option............................... 4-111
Tx Bandwidth Factor Option ..................... 4-111
Tx Bandwidth Option ................................ 4-111
Bit-rate (188) Option ................................. 4-111
Bit-rate (204) Option ................................. 4-111
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preset Pwr Low Option .............................4-111
Preset Pwr Norm Option ...........................4-111
BUC DC Power .........................................4-111
Sat Deliv Freq Option................................4-111
Sat Orb Pos Option...................................4-112
Sat West/East Option................................4-112
Polarisation Option....................................4-112
Status Only Options for the Satellite
Modulator Menu ........................................4-112
BUC LO Frequency...................................4-112
Transmit Frequency ..................................4-112
BUC 10 MHz Ref O/P Option....................4-112
4.9.10 Output Format = IP Streamer
(M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC Option Module)...4-112
Own IP Address Option ............................4-112
Network Mask Option................................4-113
Router IP Address Option .........................4-113
IP Output...................................................4-113
Protocol/Pro-MPEG FEC Option...............4-113
TS Pkts/UDP Frm Option..........................4-113
Nbr of Cols Option ....................................4-113
Nbr of Rows Option...................................4-113
Destination x IP Address Option ...............4-113
Destination x UDP Port Option .................4-114
Time To Live Option..................................4-114
Type of Service Option .............................4-114
Line Mode .................................................4-114
4.9.11 Output Format = G.703 Output .................4-114
Introduction ...............................................4-114
PDH Rate Option ......................................4-114
Framing Option .........................................4-114
DS-3 Signal Level Out Option...................4-114
Reed-Solomon Option ..............................4-115
Interleaver Option .....................................4-115
Randomizer Option ...................................4-115
Clock Mode Option ...................................4-115
Direction Option ........................................4-115
Mode Option .............................................4-116
Reset Option .............................................4-116
MPEG Input Row Option...........................4-116
Output Rate Option ...................................4-116
Alarm Status Option..................................4-116
Show Config Status Differences Option....4-116
4.10 Mux Menu..............................................................4-116
4.10.1 Overview ...................................................4-116
4.10.2 Mux Output, no Remux Card ....................4-116
4.10.3 Mux Output, With Remux Card .................4-117
4.10.4 Packet Length Option ...............................4-120
4.10.5 On Air Option ............................................4-120
4.10.6 Bit-rate (188) and Bit-rate (204) Option ....4-120
4.10.7 Clock .........................................................4-120
4.10.8 PCR PID Option........................................4-121
4.10.9 FPGA Firmware ........................................4-121
Page 4-5
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.10.10 RAS Firmware...........................................4-121
4.10.11 BISS Hardware .........................................4-121
4.10.12 BISS Firmware..........................................4-121
4.10.13 RAS Options Enabled ...............................4-121
Scramble Option .......................................4-121
SNG Key (RAS1) Option...........................4-122
4.10.14 BISS Options Enabled ..............................4-122
Overview ...................................................4-122
Scramble Option .......................................4-123
Session Word Option ................................4-123
Enc Session Word Option.........................4-123
BISS-E Injected Id Option .........................4-124
4.11 ATM Network Interface Option Module Menu .......4-124
4.11.1 Overview ...................................................4-124
4.11.2 Add Connection Option.............................4-124
4.11.3 Delete Connection Option.........................4-126
4.11.4 View Connection List Menu.......................4-126
4.11.5 View Connection ID Menu.........................4-126
View Connection ID Option.......................4-126
4.11.6 Add Profile Menu.......................................4-127
Overview ...................................................4-127
Profile Name Option..................................4-127
VC Type Option ........................................4-127
ATM Address Option.................................4-127
VPI Option.................................................4-128
VCI Option ................................................4-128
Direction Option ........................................4-128
AAL Option................................................4-128
4.11.7 Delete Profile Menu...................................4-129
4.11.8 Edit Profile Option .....................................4-129
4.11.9 Add Authorisation Menu............................4-129
Overview ...................................................4-129
Authorisation Name Option.......................4-129
ATM Address Option.................................4-129
4.11.10 Delete Authorisation Menu........................4-129
4.11.11 Edit Authorisation Option ..........................4-130
4.11.12 Incoming Calls Option...............................4-130
4.11.13 General Menu ...........................................4-130
IP Address Option.....................................4-130
IP NetMask Option....................................4-130
IP Gateway Option....................................4-130
Default ATM Prefix Option ........................4-130
Def UNI Version Option ............................4-131
Enable SVC PMP Option ..........................4-131
Status-only Options...................................4-131
4.11.14 Tx Menu ....................................................4-131
TS Source Option .....................................4-131
AAL5 PCR Aware Option..........................4-132
Status-only Options...................................4-132
4.11.15 Rx Menu....................................................4-132
Srce Clk Tolerance Option........................4-132
CDV Tolerance Option..............................4-132
TS Asi Output Option ................................4-133
Page 4-6
Asi Stuffing Bytes Option.......................... 4-133
Status-only Options .................................. 4-133
4.11.16 Physical Menu .......................................... 4-134
Mode Option............................................. 4-134
Path Label Option..................................... 4-134
Tx Clock Source Option............................ 4-134
Cell Mode Option...................................... 4-135
Interface Option........................................ 4-135
4.12 Remux Menu......................................................... 4-136
4.12.1 Introduction............................................... 4-136
4.12.2 Addition to Mux Menu When Remux
Fitted......................................................... 4-136
Host Bit-rate Option.................................. 4-136
4.12.3 Remux Module Menu ............................... 4-136
PID Remap............................................... 4-136
Packet Length Option............................... 4-137
Bit-rate Option .......................................... 4-137
Status Only Options for the Remux
Module Menu............................................ 4-137
4.12.4 1.Service/2.Service Menu......................... 4-138
Output Option ........................................... 4-138
Source (BNC) Option ............................... 4-138
Short Name In Option............................... 4-138
Short Name Out Option............................ 4-138
Name (In) Option...................................... 4-138
Name Out Option ..................................... 4-139
Service Prov (In) Option ........................... 4-139
Service Provider Option............................ 4-139
Service Id (Out) Option............................. 4-139
Program Number (Out) Option ................. 4-139
Major Channel Option............................... 4-139
Minor Channel Option............................... 4-139
Logical Channel Option ............................ 4-140
CA Input Option........................................ 4-140
BISS Key Code Option............................. 4-140
Enc Session Word Option ........................ 4-140
Session Word Option................................ 4-140
PMT PID Option ....................................... 4-140
PCR PID Option ....................................... 4-140
Video Option............................................. 4-141
ECM (CA) PID Option .............................. 4-141
VBI PID Option ......................................... 4-141
Audio (Type of Audio) Option ................... 4-142
Data (Type of Data) Option ...................... 4-142
Teletext Option ......................................... 4-142
4.13 Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Menu .............. 4-143
4.13.1 Option Availability ..................................... 4-143
4.13.2 Overview................................................... 4-143
4.13.3 DPI Initiated by GPI.................................. 4-143
4.13.4 DPI Initiated by DVS 525.......................... 4-143
4.13.5 Menu Structure......................................... 4-143
4.14 Errors Menu .......................................................... 4-145
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.14.1 Overview................................................... 4-145
4.14.2 Active Errors Option ................................. 4-145
Status of Error Masks ............................... 4-145
4.14.3 Ignored Errors........................................... 4-145
Status of Error Masks ............................... 4-145
Restore Defaults....................................... 4-145
4.14.4 Masked Active Errors ............................... 4-146
4.15 Diagnostics Menu.................................................. 4-146
4.16 Configs Menu........................................................ 4-147
4.16.1 Accessing the Menu ................................. 4-147
4.16.2 Overview................................................... 4-147
Types of Configuration ............................. 4-147
Active Configuration ................................. 4-147
User Configurations.................................. 4-148
Backup Configurations ............................. 4-148
Factory HD Default Configurations........... 4-148
Configuration, Write-Protection ................ 4-148
4.16.3 Quick Configuration From the Summary
Screen ...................................................... 4-149
4.16.4 Load Active Config Option........................ 4-149
4.16.5 Store Active Config Option ....................... 4-149
4.16.6 Load Configs From Backup Option .......... 4-149
4.16.7 Store Configs in Backup Option ............... 4-149
4.16.8 Factory HD Defaults Option...................... 4-150
List of Figures
Figure 4.1: Input Monitor.............................................................. 4-11
Figure 4.2: Summary Screen....................................................... 4-12
Figure 4.3: Keyboard Lock .......................................................... 4-12
Figure 4.4: Keypad and Display Functions.................................. 4-13
Figure 4.5: Accessing Inscriptions on the Keypad....................... 4-14
Figure 4.6: Menu Hierarchy – Summary Screen and
Advanced Menus ....................................................... 4-16
Figure 4.7: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/System Menu..................... 4-18
Figure 4.8: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu (SD Mode) ..... 4-35
Figure 4.9: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu (HD Mode)..... 4-36
Figure 4.10: VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for
525-line Systems (SD Only)....................................... 4-57
Figure 4.11: VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for
625-line Systems (SD Only)....................................... 4-58
Figure 4.12: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Audio Menu ..................... 4-63
Figure 4.10: Advanced Audio Coding Menu................................ 4-89
Figure 4.13: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Data Menu ....................... 4-93
Figure 4.14: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Output Menu.................... 4-99
Figure 4.15: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu (DVB) ........... 4-118
Figure 4.16: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu (ATSC)......... 4-119
Figure 4.17: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/ATM Menu ..................... 4-125
Figure 4.18: Menu Hierarchy – Digital Programme Insertion
DPI Menu (GPI Initiated) .......................................... 4-143
Figure 4.19: Menu Hierarchy – Error Masks Menu.................... 4-146
Figure 4.20: Configuration, Graphical Explanation.................... 4-147
List of Tables
Table 4.1: Keypad Key Assignments........................................... 4-14
Table 4.2: Syntax Options ........................................................... 4-19
Table 4.3: Remux Input n Mode Options.................................... 4-19
Table 4.4: SI Level Options ......................................................... 4-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Table 4.5: DVB Subtitle Options.................................................. 4-22
Table 4.6: Syntax Options ........................................................... 4-23
Table 4.7: Remux Input n Mode Options..................................... 4-23
Table 4.8: SI Level Options ......................................................... 4-23
Table 4.9: Audio AC-3 Descriptor Options .................................. 4-25
Table 4.10: DVB Subtitle Options............................................... 4-25
Table 4.11: UTC Offset Options .................................................. 4-28
Table 4.12: Screen Saver Options .............................................. 4-29
Table 4.13: Keypress Beep Options............................................ 4-29
Table 4.14: Power Dip Recovery Options ................................... 4-29
Table 4.15: Fan Control Options.................................................. 4-30
Table 4.16: System Control Options............................................ 4-30
Table 4.17: Action on PID Error Options ..................................... 4-31
Table 4.18: SNMP Control Options ............................................. 4-31
Table 4.19: Video Input Options .................................................. 4-34
Table 4.20: Input Source Select Options..................................... 4-37
Table 4.21: Frame Rate Options ................................................. 4-37
Table 4.22: HD Input Format ....................................................... 4-37
Table 4.23: Profile/Level Options................................................. 4-37
Table 4.24: Video Bandwidth Options ......................................... 4-38
Table 4.25: OP Video Loss Options ............................................ 4-39
Table 4.26: Predictive Processing ............................................... 4-39
Table 4.27: Noise Reduction Options (HD Only)......................... 4-40
Table 4.28: Noise Reduction Options (SD Only) ......................... 4-40
Table 4.29: Default 625 Options .............................................. 4-40
Table 4.30: Default 525 Options ............................................ 4-41
Table 4.31: Text Colour Options.................................................. 4-41
Table 4.32: Background Colour Options ..................................... 4-41
Table 4.33: Profile/Level Options................................................. 4-42
Table 4.34: Compression Mode Options ..................................... 4-43
Table 4.35: Seamless Mode Bit-rate (Full Resolution Only)........ 4-43
Table 4.36: VBR Mode Options................................................... 4-45
Table 4.37: Resolution Options ................................................... 4-47
Table 4.38: Aspect Ratio Options................................................ 4-47
Table 4.39: AFD Options ............................................................. 4-48
Table 4.40: AFD Information........................................................ 4-48
Table 4.41: Group of Pictures Structure Options......................... 4-49
Table 4.42: Group of Pictures Length Options (Long GOPs
Disabled) .................................................................... 4-49
Table 4.43: Field/Frame Options ................................................. 4-50
Table 4.44: AFD HD (HD Only) ................................................... 4-53
Table 4.45: VBI in Picture Options............................................... 4-54
Table 4.46: VBI - Line ‘n’ Options ................................................ 4-56
Table 4.47: VBI in Picture Options............................................... 4-59
Table 4.48: Source Options......................................................... 4-62
Table 4.49: Coding Standard Options ......................................... 4-62
Table 4.50: Audio Bit-rate Options............................................... 4-64
Table 4.51: Coding Mode Options (MPEG-2).............................. 4-65
Table 4.52: Coding Mode Options (MPEG-2).............................. 4-65
Table 4.53: VPS Bits.................................................................... 4-66
Table 4.54: VPS Stereo Mode Options........................................ 4-66
Table 4.55: VPS Dual Chan Mode Options ................................. 4-66
Table 4.56: Lip Sync Offset Options............................................ 4-67
Table 4.57: Audio Delay Options................................................. 4-67
Table 4.58: Clip Level Options..................................................... 4-68
Table 4.59: Embedded 1-2 DID Options...................................... 4-69
Table 4.60: OP Digital Loss Options ........................................... 4-69
Table 4.61: Source Options......................................................... 4-70
Page 4-7
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 4.62: Coding Standard Options ......................................... 4-70
Table 4.63: Lip Sync Adjustment Options ................................... 4-71
Table 4.64: Audio Bit-rate Options (Dolby Digital (AC-3)) ........... 4-71
Table 4.65: Coding Mode Options............................................... 4-72
Table 4.66: Lip Sync Offset Options............................................ 4-72
Table 4.67: Audio Delay Options................................................. 4-73
Table 4.68: Clip Level Options .................................................... 4-73
Table 4.69: Bit Stream Mode Options ......................................... 4-74
Table 4.70: Dialogue Level Options ............................................ 4-74
Table 4.71: Dolby Srnd Mode Options ........................................ 4-74
Table 4.72: Mixing Level Options ................................................ 4-75
Table 4.73: Room Type Options.................................................. 4-75
Table 4.74: Dynamic Range Options........................................... 4-76
Table 4.75: Embedded 1-2 DID Options ..................................... 4-77
Table 4.76: OP Digital Loss Options ........................................... 4-77
Table 4.77: Source Options......................................................... 4-78
Table 4.78: Coding Standard Options ......................................... 4-78
Table 4.79: Lip Sync Adjustment Options ................................... 4-79
Table 4.80: Lip Sync Offset Options............................................ 4-80
Table 4.81: Audio Delay Options................................................. 4-80
Table 4.82: SMPTE 302M Standard Options .............................. 4-80
Table 4.83: Channel Options....................................................... 4-81
Table 4.84: Embedded 1-2 DID Options ..................................... 4-81
Table 4.85: OP Digital Loss Options ........................................... 4-82
Table 4.86: Source Options......................................................... 4-82
Table 4.87: Coding Standard Options ......................................... 4-82
Table 4.88: Lip Sync Adjustment Options ................................... 4-83
Table 4.89: Coding Mode Options (Linear PCM [Direct]/via
SRC]) ......................................................................... 4-84
Table 4.90: Lip Sync Offset Options............................................ 4-84
Table 4.91: Audio Delay Options................................................. 4-84
Table 4.92: Clip Level Options .................................................... 4-85
Table 4.93: SMPTE 302M Standard Options .............................. 4-86
Table 4.94: Channel Options....................................................... 4-86
Table 4.95: Embedded 1-2 DID Options ..................................... 4-86
Table 4.96: OP Digital Loss Options ........................................... 4-87
Table 4.97: Input Source Options................................................ 4-88
Table 4.98: Bit-rate Options......................................................... 4-88
Table 4.99: Coding Mode Options (AAC) .................................... 4-89
Table 4.100: Coding Mode Options (AAC) .................................. 4-90
Table 4.101: Audio Delay Options............................................... 4-90
Table 4.102: OP on Digital I/P Loss Options.............................. 4-91
Table 4.103: Embedded 1-2 DID Options ................................... 4-91
Table 4.104: Data A – RS232 Encoding Option Modes .............. 4-94
Table 4.105: Baud Rate Options ................................................. 4-94
Table 4.106: SNMP oid index Options ........................................ 4-95
Table 4.107: Bit-rate Options....................................................... 4-95
Table 4.108: Encoding Options ................................................... 4-97
Table 4.109: Descriptor Type Options......................................... 4-98
Table 4.110: Band Plan Options................................................ 4-100
Table 4.111: Channel Options................................................... 4-100
Table 4.112: Frequency Options ............................................... 4-101
Table 4.113: Bandwidth Options ............................................... 4-101
Table 4.114: Modulation Type Options...................................... 4-101
Table 4.115: Hierarchy Options................................................. 4-101
Table 4.116: FEC (HP) and FEC (LP) Options ......................... 4-102
Table 4.117: Guard Interval Options ......................................... 4-102
Table 4.118: Carriers Options ................................................... 4-103
Page 4-8
Table 4.119: Other Frequency Options ..................................... 4-103
Table 4.120: Modulation Type Options...................................... 4-103
Table 4.121: FEC (Outer) Options............................................. 4-103
Table 4.122: FEC (Inner) Options ............................................. 4-104
Table 4.123: Symbol Rate Options............................................ 4-104
Table 4.124: Modulation Type Options...................................... 4-104
Table 4.125: Orbital Position Options........................................ 4-105
Table 4.126: West East Options................................................ 4-105
Table 4.127: Polarisation Options ............................................. 4-105
Table 4.128: TS Input Source Options ...................................... 4-106
Table 4.129: IF Power Options.................................................. 4-106
Table 4.130: IF Frequency Options ........................................... 4-106
Table 4.131: Modulation Type Options...................................... 4-106
Table 4.132: Symbol Rate Options............................................ 4-107
Table 4.133: FEC Rate Options ................................................ 4-107
Table 4.134: Tx Bandwidth Factor Options ............................... 4-108
Table 4.135: Preset Pwr Low Options ....................................... 4-108
Table 4.136: Preset Pwr Norm Options..................................... 4-108
Table 4.137: Sat Deliv Freq Options ......................................... 4-108
Table 4.138: Sat Orb Pos Options............................................. 4-109
Table 4.139: Sat West/East Options ......................................... 4-109
Table 4.140: Polarisation Options ............................................. 4-109
Table 4.141: TS Input Source Options ...................................... 4-110
Table 4.142: L-Band Power Options ......................................... 4-110
Table 4.143: Frequency Options ............................................... 4-110
Table 4.144: Packet Length Options ......................................... 4-120
Table 4.145: On Air Options ...................................................... 4-120
Table 4.146: Bit-rate (188) and Bit-rate (204) Options .............. 4-120
Table 4.147: Clock Options ....................................................... 4-121
Table 4.148: PCR PID Options.................................................. 4-121
Table 4.149: Scramble Options (RAS) ...................................... 4-122
Table 4.150: Scramble Options (BISS) ..................................... 4-123
Table 4.151: Add Connection Options....................................... 4-124
Table 4.152: Delete Connection Options................................... 4-126
Table 4.153: Add Profile Options............................................... 4-127
Table 4.154: VC Type Options .................................................. 4-127
Table 4.155: ATM Address Options .......................................... 4-128
Table 4.156: VPI Options .......................................................... 4-128
Table 4.157: VCI Options .......................................................... 4-128
Table 4.158: Direction Options .................................................. 4-128
Table 4.159: AAL Options ......................................................... 4-129
Table 4.160: Add Authorisation Options.................................... 4-129
Table 4.161: Delete Authorisation Options................................ 4-130
Table 4.162: Incoming Calls Options......................................... 4-130
Table 4.163: Def UNI Options ................................................... 4-131
Table 4.164: Enable SVC PMP Options.................................... 4-131
Table 4.165: TS Source Options ............................................... 4-131
Table 4.166: AAL5 PCR Aware Options.................................... 4-132
Table 4.167: Srce Clk Tolerance Options.................................. 4-132
Table 4.168: CDV Tolerance Options........................................ 4-133
Table 4.169: TS Asi Output Options.......................................... 4-133
Table 4.170: Asi Stuffing Bytes Options .................................... 4-133
Table 4.171: Mode Options ....................................................... 4-134
Table 4.172: Path Label Options ............................................... 4-134
Table 4.173: Tx Clock Source Options...................................... 4-134
Table 4.174: Cell Mode Options ................................................ 4-135
Table 4.175: Host Bit-rate Options ............................................ 4-136
Table 4.176: PID Remap Options.............................................. 4-136
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 4.177: Output Options ..................................................... 4-138
Table 4.178: Source (BNC) Options.......................................... 4-138
Table 4.179: Service Id (Out)Options ........................................ 4-139
Table 4.180: Program Number (Out) Options ........................... 4-139
Table 4.181: PMT PID Options.................................................. 4-140
Table 4.182: PCR PID Options.................................................. 4-141
Table 4.183: Video Options ....................................................... 4-141
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Table 4.184: ECM (CA) PID Options......................................... 4-141
Table 4.185: VBI PID Options.................................................... 4-141
Table 4.186: Audio (Type of Audio) Options.............................. 4-142
Table 4.187: Data (Type of Data) Options................................. 4-142
Table 4.188: Teletext Options.................................................... 4-142
Table 4.189: DPI Options (DPI Mode= GPI SCTE 35).............. 4-144
Page 4-9
Operating the Equipment Locally
BLANK
Page 4-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.1
Introduction
The front panel display and keypad are used to configure, control and
monitor the Encoder. The control interface is a structured menu which
gives access to the various options. This chapter describes the menu
hierarchy and menu items in detail.
NOTES…
1. The configuration of the Encoder after booting is the same as when power was removed, with
the following exceptions:
• The satellite modulator output is switched off.
• The modulation of the IF carrier is switched on.
• The output power level is set to low.
2. If the Encoder configuration after power-up, matches the required configuration, then to
re-enable transmission the satellite modulator output must be switched on, and the output power
level must be set to its previous setting.
4.2
Establishing Local Control
4.2.1
Input Monitor
At power-on the Encoder runs through a boot sequence (boot time with
Remux option module is approximately 90 seconds). An initial Input
Monitor screen is shown. This displays a picture of the currently selected
video source (SD mode only), the service name of the video channel being
encoded, the audio A and B channels in the form of bargraphs, and the
multiplexer and video bit-rates.
NOTE…
The screen may vary slightly in detail between Encoders.
Figure 4.1: Input Monitor
Pressing the More softkey displays the Summary Screen (see
Section 4.2.2, Summary Screen).
Pressing the A/V softkey displays the A(udio)/V(ideo) Menu (see
Section 4.2.3, Line Up Menu.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-11
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.2.2
Summary Screen
Will say Host Service if the Remux
option is fitted.
On or Off Air.
Indicates whether or not the mux On Air
option is set to on or off.
Clear or Scrambled.
Indicates whether or not the output is
scrambled.
Press the Ops softkey to
access the Operations menu
(where available)
This gives quick access to the
Configurations menu
Press More softkey to access
the Advanced (Top Level)
menu
NOTE…
The screen may vary slightly in detail between Encoders.
Figure 4.2: Summary Screen
NOTE…
The Configurations Menu can also be accessed through the Advanced Menu (see
Figure 4.6).
4.2.3
Line Up Menu
This menu brings together various functions associated with the modulated
output. There is also an approximate graphical representation of the
Encoder’s modulated output. At a glance, it is easy to see if the carrier is
present and being modulated with a signal. It also shows the approcximate
RF power (which can be adjusted using this screen).
4.2.4
A(udio)/V(ideo) Menu
The A/V Menu contains some basic video and audio options. They can all be
changed with the exception of the audio input levels. These are only
indicators of the current audio input level and are status only.
Only those video input selections compatible with the currently selected
frame rate can be chosen from this menu. For example, if the current
selection is PAL-B/G/H/I (frame rate 25 Hz) then any format except PAL-M
or NTSC-M can be selected (29.97 Hz only).
4.2.5
Keyboard Lock
The softkeys can be locked out to prevent inadvertent operation (see the
key icon in Figure 4.3).
Key icon
Figure 4.3: Keyboard Lock
Page 4-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
Press the softkey adjacent to the key icon. This shows the Keyboard Lock
screen. Press the Yes softkey to disable the softkeys. They are all disabled
with the exception of Unlock.
To enable and restore the softkey functions, press the Unlock softkey.
This shows the Keyboard Lock screen. Press the Yes softkey.
4.3
Navigating the Display Screens
4.3.1
Moving Through the Menu Screens
Each of the menu items on the display has a connection to a softkey (see
Figure 4.4). Press the associated softkey to select the required option. Use
the + and – softkeys to scroll through the choices in the option or use the
keypad on the far right of the display to change options (unless indicated
otherwise in the display). The last item in the right-hand corner of each
menu is Quit. This causes the display to revert to the previous menu in
the hierarchy. The screens displayed in this manual are only
representations - there might be differences between equipment,
depending upon the options chosen.
NOTE…
In the Encoder menus when it states that you may ‘update using softkeys’ you can use both softkeys
and keyboard keys for some options.
Each softkey on each side of the display is
used to access, select and sometimes
amend the menu item associated with it.
Where there is a +/- sign
associated with a softkey, this
scrolls through a set of options.
This keypad is used to amend the
menu option which has been
selected (unless indicated
otherwise).
Figure 4.4: Keypad and Display Functions
4.3.2
How to Use the Keypad
Each key on the keypad has more than one inscription. One press of a key
makes the number appear on the display screen, two quick presses makes
the first letter appear etc. All keys are cyclic, displaying their assigned
characters in sequence. In certain options only letters or numbers may be
available.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-13
Operating the Equipment Locally
Table 4.1: Keypad Key Assignments
Keypad
Button
1 Press
2 Presses
3 Presses
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
.
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
(
:
4 Presses
)
A
B
C
D
E
F
.
G
J
M
P
T
W
Space
O
H
K
N
R
U
X
0
Q
I
L
6
S
V
Y
Space
Z
+
/
-
+
Figure 4.5 gives details of how to access the inscriptions.
Press the key three times in rapid succession to have a B
appear on the display screen
Press the key once to have a 2 appear on the
display screen
Press the key twice in rapid succession for an A
to appear on the display screen
2
ABC
Press the key four times in rapid succession to have a C
appear on the display screen
Figure 4.5: Accessing Inscriptions on the Keypad
4.3.3
How to Use the Functions Associated with Softkeys
The following display screens show the different functions associated with
the options.
Press Left and Right to
move the underscore to the
next letter that you want to
change.
Press Ins to insert a
space where the
underscore is.
Press Del to delete
where the
underscore is.
On Air / Off Air indicates
whether the mux On Air
option is set to on or off.
Scrambled means that
scrambling is enabled. Clear
means that it is not.
Press + and - to scroll
through the choices in the
option.
Press Enter to accept the
option choice.
Softkeys mean those at the
side of the screen and those
on the keypad.
NOTE…
A black diagonal cross enclosed by a white circle ( ) means that the Encoder is under remote
control and the user does not have access to change that parameter.
Page 4-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
Indicates the number of
screens in the menu.
Press PgUp and PgDn to
scroll up and down to show
more options in the menu.
A clear circle indicates that the option
cannot be accessed and is for
information only.
Press Quit to revert to previous
menu.
4.3.4
Display Screens
The display screens shown in Section 4.3.3, How to Use the Functions
Associated with Softkeys are identical to those seen on the Encoder front
panel display screen. The remainder of the display screens in this chapter
are representations and may differ slightly.
4.3.5
Menu Formats
All menus generally conform to the following format. Some of the menus
provide access to sub-menus.
A clear circle indicates no further
access and is for information
only.
A black circle indicates further
menus or options.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-15
Operating the Equipment Locally
Input Monitor
Screen
— Ops....
— Line Up....
— A/V....
— More....
Audio/Video
Menu
— Video Input
— Profile/Level
— Compression Mode
— Ident Text
— Audio A
— Input Level L
— Input Level R
— Audio B
— Input Level L
— Input Level R
Summary
Screen
Line Up
Menu
— Power -20 dBm
— Modulation Off
— Carrier Off
— Quit
Operations
Menu
— IF Output
— Modulation
— IF Power
— FEC Rate
— Bit-rate (188)
— Symbol Rate
— IF Frequency
— Ops
— Cfgs...
— More...
— Quit
Config
Menu
Advanced
Menu
— Setup....
— Errors....
— Diagnostics....
— Ops....
— Configs....
— Quit
— Load Active Config....
— Store Active Config....
— Load Configs from Backup
— Store Configs in Backup
— Factory HD Defaults
— Write Protect Configs
— Quit
Errors
Menu
— Active Errors....
— Ignored Errors…
— Error Masks....
— Masked Active Errors…
— Quit
Config
Menu
From the Summary
Screen, see the Config
Menu
Operations
Menu
From the Input Monitor Screen,
see the (Operations) Ops Menu
Operations
Menu
From the Input Monitor Screen,
see the (Operations) Ops Menu
Setup
Menu
— System....
— Video....
— Audio....
— Data....
— Output....
— Mux....
— Quit
See Figure 4.7
See Figure 4.8/4.9
See Figure 4.12
See Figure 4.13
See Figure 4.14
See Figure 4.15/4.16
Front Panel
Diagnostics
Menu
— LCD Display
— Keyboard
— Fail Relay
— Alarm Relay
— Alarm LED
— Buzzer
— Quit
Figure 4.6: Menu Hierarchy – Summary Screen and Advanced Menus
Page 4-16
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.3.6
Summary Screen and Advanced Menus
See Figure 4.6, for the top-level menu hierarchy. Access the Advanced
Menu from the Summary Screen. The Advanced Menu provides options for
configuring and testing the Encoder.
4.4
Setup Menu
The Setup Menu can be selected from the Advanced Menu (see Figure 4.6
for menu structure). The menu provides access to configuration and
operating features and predefined configurations. If the password option
has been set in the System/Advanced Menu (see page 4-30) then a
password will be asked for to access and change a parameter.
4.5
System Menu
4.5.1
Introduction
The System Menu is selected from the Setup Menu (see Figure 4.7 for
menu structure).
This menu permits the selection of system information. Any option with a
clear circle next to it cannot be accessed and changed. It is for status
information only.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-17
Operating the Equipment Locally
Setup
Menu
System
Menu
— Service Info....
— Remote Control....
— General....
— Advanced....
— Dig Program Insertion (DPI)3....
— Time and Date....
— Mbd Services
— Build....
— Quit
Remote
Control
Menu
— IP Address
Menu options depend
— MAC Address
on Syntax selected.
— Network Mask
— Gateway Address
— SNTP Server
ATSC
DVB
— Set Community Name
— SNMP Master
— Short Channel Name
— Network Name
— Last SNMP Master
— Long Channel Name
— Service Provider
— Last SNMP Poll
— Syntax
— Service Name
4
— SNMP Trap IP
— Remux input 1 mode — Syntax
4
— Trap Level Report
— Remux input 2 mode — Remux input 1 mode 4
4
— Browser User Name
— Remux input 3 mode — Remux input 2 mode 4
— Ethernet Bandwidth
— SI Level
— Remux input 3 mode 4
— SABus Address
— Ext PSIP Source
— SI Level
— Serial Protocol
— PSIP Status
— Data 1 min PID 4
— SABus Baud Rate
— PSIP Min PID
— SABus Data Bits
— PSIP Max PID
— Data 3 max PID 4
— Serial Menu Remote Control — Data 1 min PID 4
— Network ID 2
— Service ID 2
— Data 3 max PID 4
— Transport Stream ID 2
— Major Channel
— Service Type
— Minor Channel
— PMT PID
— Program Number
— Stream ID Descriptor
— Service Type
— Dolby AC-3 Descriptor
— Transport Stream ID
— Logical Chan Desc
— Program Paradigm
— Logical Channel
— PMT PID
— DVB Subt 5
— Daylight Saving
— DST Start Date
— DST End Date
— DVB Subt 5
Build
Menu
— Build Version
— Model Number
— PCB Serial Number
— Box Serial Number
— Board Ref.
— PCB Issue
— H/W Mod Strike
— F/W Release
— S/W Release
— S/W Build Date
There are 11 screens
of information in total.
Mbd
Services
Menu
These menus are mainly for TANDBERG
Television use for testing purposes. The
Mdb Services and Default Service
menus are only available if, in the
Advanced Menu, the number of
Services is set to more than one.
— Default Service...
— Default Service...
Default
Service
Menu
Service Info
Menu
General
Menu
Advanced
Menu
— Scramble
— Name
— Service ID
— Logical Channel
— Service Type
— Enc Session Word
— Session Word
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video/Audio/Data
— Setup Password
— Current Password
— Display Errors
— System Control
— Action on PID Error
— SNMP Control
— Display Contrast
— No. Services...
— Reset On Download
— Reset Encoder
— Model Number
— Config Name
— Local Time
— Local Date
— UTC Offset
— GPS UTC Offset
— Temperature
— Screen Saver
— Keypress Beep
— Power Dip Recovery
— Upgrade Encoder
— Software Release
— Fan Control
1
2
3
4
5
Only shown if Logical Chan Desc = On.
Not shown if the Encoder is set to generate PSIP
externally or is under MEM control.
Digital Program Insertion (DPI) is only available when
M2/ESO2/DPI Licence is purchased.
Options are only available when M2/EOM2/REMUX
is purchased.
DVB Subt only displayed when Remux Input n Mode
is set to DVB Subtitle.
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
Figure 4.7: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/System Menu
Page 4-18
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
4.5.2
Service Info Menu (Syntax = ATSC1)
Overview
This menu provides options for configuring the Service Information (SI)
parameters transmitted in the output transport stream. The options
available depend on whether the syntax is set to DVB or ATSC.
See Figure 4.7 for the menu structure when the Syntax option has been
set to ATSC. For information regarding ATSC program and system
information protocol refer to ATSC Standard Doc A/65A Program and
System Information Protocol for Terrestrial Broadcast and Cable.
Short Channel Name Option
This option is associated with the field short_name and is a seven
character name for the channel The information is included in the Virtual
Channel Table (VCT).
Long Channel Name Option
This is associated with the field extended_channel_name and gives the full
name of the channel.
Syntax Option
This enables the syntax to be specified.
Table 4.2: Syntax Options
Selected Option
Description
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting.
Comments
See page 4-21
Remux Input n Mode
Where n=1 to 3 to designate the three inputs. See Annex J, Setting of the
Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input for details on setting
up these modes.
Table 4.3: Remux Input n Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
Cuts the ASI input and leaves the PID mapping the same or deleting all PID mappings.
Service
Selects the current default mode where services are detected and remuxed.
DVB Subt
This mode is provided for subtitles to be added to the locally encoded service only. It is not
possible to add subtitles to services arriving on a remux input in this way.
Selecting this mode displays the DVB Subtitle option.
Data
If selected for input n, two menu entries appear Input n PIDmin and Input n PIDmax. Defaults are
0x1FD0 and 0x1FFE. This specifies the range of PIDs that is mapped through for that input.
If at least one input is set for Data, ensure that the PSI and SI information is correct. Usually, this
would mean having to turn the “SI Level” to “Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI)” and one of the remux inputs would
be receiving all PSI and PSIP.
1
For further information refer to ATSC Standard Doc A/65 Program and System Information Protocol for Terrestrial
Broadcast and Cable - Annex D.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-19
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
SI Level Option
This enables the service information level to be specified.
Table 4.4: SI Level Options
Selected Option
Description
PAT/PMT/CAT only
Program Association Table/ Program Map Table/ Conditional
Access Table.
PAT/PMT only
Program Association Table/ Program Map Table.
Off
Elementary streams only.
On (PSIP)
PAT/PMT/CAT/TDT/SDT/NIT/EIT – minimum DVB.
On (Ext. PSIP)
PAT/PMT/CAT/TDT/SDT/NIT.
Ext. PSIP Source Option
This option only applies if the SI level has been set to On (Ext. PSIP). It
specifies the Remux input through which the external PSIP is to be
received.
PSIP Status
This option only applies if the SI level has been set to On (Ext. PSIP). It
reports the range of PIDs that will be passed through the external PSIP
input.
PSIP Min PID
This option only applies if the SI level has been set to On (Ext. PSIP). This
sets the minimum PID value that will be passed through the external PSIP
input.
PSIP Max PID
This option only applies if the SI level has been set to On (Ext. PSIP). This
sets the maximum PID value that will be passed through the external PSIP
input.
Data n min/max
This option enables a PIDmin and PIDmax range to be selected for a
specified input [n]. All PIDs lying within this range are passed through. No
attempt to extract SI information nor interpret SI/PSI information is made
on this input.
The Encoder is not able to build accurate PSI tables when in data remux
mode as it does not extract any info from the incoming stream. Therefore,
in this case, it is necessary for PSI/PSIP to be externally generated.
There must be no PID clashes (between other inputs or the locally
generated streams) as PID clashes are not resolved nor detected by the
Encoder.
Major Channel Option
This is associated with the field major_channel_number and is used to
group all channels that are to be identified as belonging to a particular
broadcast corporation.
Page 4-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Minor Channel Option
This is associated with the field minor_channel_number and is used to
identify a particular channel within the major_channel_number group of
channels.
Program Number Option
This enables the Program Number to be specified. In ATSC this is used as
the basis of the PMT PID (same as Service ID in DVB). The information is
included in the Program Association Table (PAT), Program Map Table (PMT)
and VCT.
NOTE…
This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control.
Service Type Option
The Service Type identifies the type of service carried in this virtual
channel. The options are; Analog TV, ATSC Digital TV, ATSC Audio only,
and ATSC Data Broadcast.
Transport Stream Id Option
This sets the Transport Stream ID value for the transport stream output
from the Encoder.
NOTE…
This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control.
Program Paradigm Option
This option determines whether PIDs are assigned in accordance with the
ATSC Program Paradigm or not.
PMT PID Option
This option shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier.
Daylight Saving
This option determines whether daylight saving is enabled. Select
Observed to enable it and NOT Observed to disregard it.
DST Start Date and DST End Date Options
These tell the Encoder the start and end dates for daylight saving. This
information is used in conjunction with the Encoder’s current date to
calculate to the next change in daylight saving. This time is put in the
System Time Table (STT). Changes can be made in the Time and Date
Menu.
DVB Subtitles
NOTE…
This option is only available when Remux Input n Mode is set to DVB Subt.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-21
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
DVB Subtitle mode is provided for subtitles to be added to the locally
encoded service only. It is not possible to add subtitles to services arriving
on a remux input.
Table 4.5: DVB Subtitle Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
On streams 1, 2, 3, 4
On streams 1, 2, 3
On streams 1, 2
The encoder shall include a PES Private Data component entry in the PMT and include the
VBI_data_descriptor and Subtitle descriptor within this component definition in the PMT for each of
the 1 to n DVB Subtitle streams.
On stream 1
NOTE…
The Encoder does not check that the incoming stream actually contains DVB subtitle data nor whether
the user-entered subtitle PID corresponds to the incoming stream.
4.5.3
Service Info Menu (Syntax = DVB)
Overview
The Service Info Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the
Service Info softkey. This menu provides options for configuring the
Service Information (SI) parameters transmitted in the output transport
stream.
The options available depend on whether the syntax is set to DVB or ATSC.
See Figure 4.7 for the menu structure when the Syntax option has been
set to DVB.
For information regarding DVB Service Information refer to ETSI EN 300
468 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Specification for Service Information
(SI) in DVB Systems.
Network Name Option
This option allows the network name to be changed. The information is
included in the Network Information Table (NIT).
Service Provider Option
This option allows the service provider name to be changed. The
information is included in the Service Description Table (SDT).
Service Name Option
This option allows the service name to be changed. The information is
included in the SDT.
Syntax Option
This enables the syntax to be specified.
Page 4-22
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.6: Syntax Options
Selected Option
Description
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting.
Remux Input n in Mode
Where n=1 to 3 to designate the three inputs. See Annex J, Setting of the
Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input for details on setting
up these modes.
Table 4.7: Remux Input n Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
Cuts the ASI input and leaves the PID mapping the same or deleting all PID mappings.
Service
Selects the current default mode where services are detected and remuxed.
DVB Subt
This mode is provided for subtitles to be added to the locally encoded service only. It is not
possible to add subtitles to services arriving on a remux input in this way.
Selecting this mode displays the DVB Subtitle option.
Data
If selected for input n, two menu entries appear Input n PIDmin and Input n PIDmax. Defaults are
0x1FD0 and 0x1FFE. This specifies the range of PIDs that is mapped through for that input.
If at least one input is set for Data, ensure that the PSI and SI information is correct. Usually, this
would mean having to turn the ‘SI Level’ to ‘Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI)’ and one of the remux inputs would
be receiving all PSI and PSIP.
SI Level Option
This enables the service information level to be specified.
Table 4.8: SI Level Options
Selected Option
Description
PAT/PMT/CAT only
Program Association Table/ Program Map
Table/ Conditional Access Table.
PAT/PMT only
Program Association Table/ Program Map
Table.
Off
On
On (No EIT)
Data n min/max
This option enables a PIDmin and PIDmax range to be selected for a
specified input [n]. All PIDs lying within this range are passed through. No
attempt to extract SI information nor interpret SI/PSI information is made
on this input.
The Encoder is not able to build accurate PSI tables when in data remux
mode as it does not extract any info from the incoming stream. Therefore,
in this case, it is necessary for PSI/PSIP to be externally generated.
There must be no PID clashes (between other inputs or the locally
generated streams) as PID clashes are not resolved nor detected by the
Encoder.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-23
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Network Id Option
This enables the Network Identity to be specified. The information is
included in the NIT.
NOTE…
This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control.
Service Id Option
This option ties the SDT to the PMT and is the same as the Program
Number in ATSC. This enables the Service Identity to be specified. The
information is included in the PAT, PMT, SDT, EIT and NIT.
NOTE…
This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control.
Transport Stream Id Option
This sets the Transport Stream ID value for the transport stream output
from the Encoder.
NOTE…
This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM control.
Service Type Option
The service type identifies the type of service carried. The options are:
Analog TV, Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, and Data Broadcast. The
information is included in the SDT.
PMT PID Option
This shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier.
Stream ID Descriptor Option
This option turns on or off the insertion of a stream identifier descriptor
within the PMT.
Dolby AC-3 Descriptor Option
This allows a user to specify only the DVB, only the ATSC, or both the
ATSC and DVB descriptors for use with audio streams.
It is necessary because the ATSC descriptor existed prior to the DVB
descriptor and some Decoders (e.g. early Alteias) used the AC-3 descriptor
for identifying Dolby Digital AC-3 streams.
NOTE…
This is only available when the syntax is set to DVB.
Page 4-24
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.9: Audio AC-3 Descriptor Options
Selected Option
Description
DVB & ATSC
Both the ATSC and DVB descriptors are used with the audio streams.
DVB only
Only the DVB descriptors are used with the audio streams.
ATSC only
Only the ATSC descriptors are used with the audio streams.
Logical Chan Desc Option
This enables the Logical Channel Descriptor to be turned On or Off. The
information is included in the NIT (for Australia mainly).
Logical Channel Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown if the Logical Chan Desc option is set to On.
This enables a number to be given to the Logical Channel.
DVB Subtitles
NOTE…
This option is only available when Remux Input n Mode is set to DVB Subt.
DVB Subtitle mode is provided for subtitles to be added to the locally
encoded service only. It is not possible to add subtitles to services arriving
on a remux input.
Table 4.10: DVB Subtitle Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
On streams 1, 2, 3, 4
On streams 1, 2, 3
On streams 1, 2
The encoder shall include a PES Private Data component entry in the PMT and include the
VBI_data_descriptor and Subtitle descriptor within this component definition in the PMT for each of
the 1 to n DVB Subtitle streams.
On stream 1
NOTE…
The Encoder does not check that the incoming stream actually contains DVB subtitle data nor whether
the user-entered subtitle PID corresponds to the incoming stream.
4.5.4
Remote Control Menu
Overview
The Encoder can be controlled remotely via either an RS-232 or a RS-485
serial link, or alternatively via Ethernet using either SNMP, or a web
browser. The Remote Control Menu provides options for configuring these
interfaces. See Figure 4.7 for the Remote Control Menu structure.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-25
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
IP Address Option
This option allows the IP Address to be changed.
MAC Address Option
The MAC Address cannot be changed.
Network Mask Option
This option allows the Network Mask to be changed.
Gateway Address Option
This gives the default gateway address used on the Ethernet network
interface connected via the 10BaseT socket. Any communications to
network hosts not on the local IP network will be sent to this address.
Set Community Name Option
This option allows the SNMP Community Name to be changed.
SNMP Master Option
This gives the SNMP Master’s IP address. If this is set, only one SNMP
controller will be allowed access to the Encoder. It can be set to
000.000.000.000 to allow any controller access.
Last SNMP Master Option
This gives the last SNMP Master’s IP address. It cannot be changed.
Last SNMP Poll Option
The Last SNMP Poll option cannot be changed
SNMP Trap IP Option
SNMP Traps are a way of reporting status information to a control system,
but not all control systems can handle them. This option sets the IP
address to which the trap messages will be sent. If it is set to
000.000.000.000 then the trap messages will be sent to the last SNMP
master.
Trap Level Report Option
This enables the type of events reported via SNMP traps. The options are;
Start Msgs only, Fail & Start Msgs or All Traps, which will mean all failures,
warnings and start messages will be reported.
Browser User Name Option
This option is only available from the front panel. The Encoder can be
controlled via a web browser, but to prevent unauthorised control of the
Encoder a user name and password must be supplied to ‘log on’ to the
Encoder. This option enables the web browser user name to be set.
Browser Password Option
This option is only available from the front panel. This option allows the
web browser password to be set. To prevent unauthorised knowledge of
the password it cannot be read back from the Encoder.
Page 4-26
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
SNTP Server Option
This option sets the IP address of a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
server, which the Encoder will then synchronise it’s clock to. If the SNTP
Server is set to 000.000.000.000 the Encoder will not try and access an
SNTP server.
Ethernet Bandwidth Option
Problems can be experienced with Ethernet control of the Encoder if the
available network bandwidth is low. This option provides a low and a high
network bandwidth setting. The low bandwidth setting limits the packet
size, which can prevent problems with low bandwidth networks, but at the
cost of speed of communications.
SABus Address Option
The SABus protocol is multi-drop, and has an address byte for
differentiating between the devices on the SABus (the address option).
The Encoder can be controlled via an RS-232 or RS-485 serial interface
using a SABus protocol (see ST.TS.E10074 for details). The SABus protocol
is multi-drop, and has an address byte for differentiating between devices.
This option sets the address of the Encoder, which must be in the range
49 to 127.
Serial Protocol Option
This option selects whether the Encoder will respond to commands via its
RS-232 interface, or via its RS-485 control interface.
SABus Baud Rate Option
This option enables the SABus Baud Rate to be set.
This option sets the Baud rate for the SABus interface. The Baud rates
supported are; 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 and 38400 Baud.
SABus Data Bits Option
This determines whether the SABus interface is expecting 8 data bits
(1 stop bit), or 7 data bits (2 stop bits).
Serial Menu Remote Control
The Serial Menu Remote Control option can take the values: Off and RS232
Remote Control Port.
NOTE…
1. When selected, it is not possible to set SMPTE 333-M Port option to Remote Control.
This is for serial closed captions. Thus, if using the remote control port for menu control, serial
CC’s must go in via the RS232 data port).
2. When set to ‘RS232 Remote Control Port’ the existing RS232 9-pin D-type port labelled ‘Remote
Control’ provides a menu interface to control the encoder. When set to ‘Off’, this port functions as
before (i.e. respond to command as described in the ‘Remote Control Protocol (RCP)’.
The serial menu system available via this serial port is similar to Telnet
(i.e. front panel level menu available via user name ‘general’, ‘password’.)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-27
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
4.5.5
General Menu
Overview
The General Menu provides options for configuring the general parameters
of the Encoder such as the time and date, screen savers, and fan control.
See Figure 4.7 for the General Menu structure.
Model Number Option
The model number of the Encoder is reported and cannot be changed.
Whilst the Encoder is initialising this value may be incorrect because all the
option cards may not have been identified yet.
Config Name Option
This option allows a name to be assigned to the current Encoder
configuration. It is this name that is used if the configuration is stored (see
Section 4.16, Configs Menu).
Local Time Option
This option is status only. It gives the local time on the Encoder.
Local Date Option
This option is for status only. It gives the local date on the Encoder.
UTC Offset Option
The Universal Time Co-ordinate (UTC) is effectively the same as Greenwich
Mean Time (GMT). When including SI in the output transport stream the
Encoder is required to output a Time and Date Table (TDT). This uses UTC.
Therefore, as the local time is input on the front panel a UTC offset is
needed so that the UTC time for the
Table 4.11: UTC Offset Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
–12 Hours
Max:
15 Hours
Step Size: 1 Hour
UTC offset. A positive value indicates East of Greenwich, and
a negative value indicates West of Greenwich.
If the specified UTC offset is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen is displayed which shows the minimum/maximum value allowed.
GPS UTC Offset
This menu item has values from 0 to 60. The factory default is 13 (which is
the current offset as of June 2005. The value changes at irregular times, a
few times a decade). This number is used to set the GPS_UTC_Offset field
in the ATSC STT table.
Temperature Option
The Temperature option indicates the current internal temperature.
Page 4-28
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Screen Saver Option
This option enables the Screen Saver to be set.
Table 4.12: Screen Saver Options
Selected Option
Description
Top Level Menu
Van
Service Name
Off
If no changes have been made to the Encoder for five
minutes (no softkey has been pressed) the chosen
screen saver appears on the front panel display.
Keypress Beep Option
This option enables the Keypress Beep to be set.
Table 4.13: Keypress Beep Options
Selected Option
Description
On
A beep sounds every time that a key is pressed.
Off
There is silence every time that a key is pressed.
Power Dip Recovery Option
This option enables the Power Dip Recovery to be set. It determines the
state of the satellite modulator outputs (if fitted).
Table 4.14: Power Dip Recovery Options
Selected Option
Description
On
The outputs are restored following a power dip.
Off
The outputs are not restored following a power dip.
Upgrade Encoder Option
There are a number of features which are not enabled by default. Refer to
Chapter 3, Options and Upgrades, Table 3.1 for details.
This shows the serial number of the box, which is in the range of 0 to
65535. Send this number to TANDBERG Customer Services and they will
return a software licence key to enter via the front panel to enable the
features.
NOTE…
These software options must be purchased before the software licence key is sent.
Software Release Option
The software release cannot be changed.
Fan Control Option
Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for more information about the
temperatures at which fans activate and deactivate.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-29
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.15: Fan Control Options
4.5.6
Selected Option
Description
Auto (Temp. control)
The fans are activated automatically when a defined temperature is reached.
On
The fans are activated all the time.
Time and Date
This option sets the local time and date. In ATSC, daylight saving time can
be set.
4.5.7
Advanced Menu
Overview
The Advanced Menu is selected from the System Menu by pressing the
Advanced softkey. This menu provides options for the advanced
parameters of the Encoder. See Figure 4.7 for the Advanced Menu
structure.
Setup Password Option
This option is only available from the front panel. If the Setup Password
option is set to On then a password is required to change any parameters.
Current Password Option
This option is only available from the front panel and allows the current
password to be changed.
NOTE…
For forgotten passwords, contact Customer Services.
Display Errors Option
This option either enables or disables the display of error or alarm
messages on the front panel.
System Control Option
This option enables the type of system control specified in the SI to be set.
Table 4.16: System Control Options
Selected Option
Description
MEM
Control of the video/audio delay (lip sync) is via the MEM.
Local
Control of the video/audio delay (lip sync) is within the Encoder2.
External (SNMP)
Control of the video/audio delay (lip sync) is via the SNMP protocol.
If the control equipment is a TT7000 System Manager, ensure that the
Auto Lip Sync option is turned on (see on page 4-65). The TT7000 does
not have a lip sync function therefore the Encoder has to provide this.
2
To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre-encoded audio, the option card M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 should
be used.
Page 4-30
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Action On PID Error Option
This option enables the Action On PID Error to be set.
Table 4.17: Action on PID Error Options
Selected Option
Description
Raise Alarm
An error message is displayed if a PID error is found.
Auto Correct
If a PID error is found it is automatically corrected.
SNMP Control Option
This option enables the SNMP Control to be set.
Table 4.18: SNMP Control Options
Selected Option
Description
Wait for Initialisation
No SNMP reply during initialisation.
From Power On
Reply as modules start to appear.
Display Contrast Option
NOTE…
When this softkey is pressed, the display changes immediately.
This option allows the contrast ratio of the LCD display to be set. The
contrast range is: Very Light, Light, Medium, Dark, Very Dark. As the key
is pressed the display changes.
If the background is set to very dark or very light, the text may not be
visible. In this instance, view the display at an acute angle, this should
enable the text to be seen enough to change the contrast.
No. Services Option
This option is only available if the syntax is set to DVB. It defines how
many services (up to eight) the Encoder can generate in the output
transport stream. If the number of services is greater than one then there
is an additional menu Mbd Services which allows the additional services to
be defined (see Section 4.5.10) In ATSC only one motherboard service is
possible.
Mbd. Service PIDs Option
This option is only available if the number of services is greater than one.
The motherboard service PIDs option defines whether the PIDs assigned to
a service are unique, or can be duplicated between services. If the option
is set to unique PIDs, then an elementary stream such as video can only
be assigned to one service. Alternatively, if duplicate PIDs are allowed,
then an elementary stream can be shared by services, but this does mean
that both services must have the same scrambling setting.
Reset On Download Option (Status Only)
The option is status only. The Encoder automatically reboots following a
download, keeping the current configuration.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-31
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Reset Encoder Option
A confirmation message appears ‘Reset Encoder – Are you sure?’. If Yes is
selected the Encoder immediately reboots, keeping the current
configuration. If No, the Encoder keeps working normally.
CAUTION…
The Reset Encoder option is not normally used.
One example of its use is when code has been downloaded in background mode (such as Base Board
code or Video Compression Module (VCM) code) and you want to reset the Encoder, to action the new
code.
4.5.8
Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Menu
The Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Menu is only available when the
M2/ESO2/DPI Licence key is purchased and is selected from the System
Menu. The available options are described in Section 4.13.
DPI can be initiated via the M2/EOM2/GPI card or by the DVS 525 protocol.
4.5.9
Build Menu
The Build Menu is selected from the System Menu. The Build Menu shows
the status of the options shown in Figure 4.7. They cannot be changed.
4.5.10 Additional Services (Mbd Services Menu)
Overview
The Mbd Services Menu is only available if the number of services
(defined in the Advanced Menu) has been set to greater than one. The
menu has an entry for each service, to allow the service to be configured.
The number of Host Service Menus correspond to the number set in the
No. Services option of the Advanced Menu. The maximum number of host
services is eight.
Host Service 1
Configure Menu
There will be a configure menu for each of the services.
Scramble Option
This option controls whether the service is in the clear (no scrambling) or
the type of scrambling applied to it.
Name Option
This option sets the service name for the service.
Service ID Option
This option sets the service ID for the service, which is used to uniquely
identify it in the PAT, PMT, SDT, EIT and NIT. The valid range is 0 to
65535.
Page 4-32
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Logical Channel Option
This option defines the logical channel number to be given to the service.
This information is included in the NIT. The valid range is 1 to 1023
Service Type Option
The service type identifies the type of service carried. The options are:
Analog TV, Digital TV, Digital Radio, Teletext, and Data Broadcast. The
information is included in the SDT.
Enc Session Word Option
This sets the encrypted session word to be used to scramble the service if
the scramble option has been set to BISS-E scrambling.
Session Word Option
This sets the session word to be used to scramble the service if the
scramble option has been set to BISS Mode 1 scrambling.
PMT PID Option
This defined the Packet Identifier (PID) to be used for the Program Map
Table (PMT) associated with the service.
PCR PID
This is a status display of the PCR PID, it cannot be changed.
Video/Audio/VBI Data Options
There is a menu item for each elementary stream, such as video or audio,
which allows the elementary stream to be defined as part of the service.
The PID value of the elementary stream is shown for information.
If the Motherboard Service PIDs option in the Advanced Menu has been set
to ‘Unique PIDs’, then an elementary stream can only be used in one
service. If the elementary stream has already selected as part of another
service, selecting it as part of this service will automatically remove it from
the other service.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-33
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
4.6
Video Menu
4.6.1
Introduction
The Video Menu is selected from the Setup Menu. This menu permits the
selection of video parameters (see Figure 4.8 for menu structure).
4.6.2
Video Source Menu
Overview
This menu permits the selection of video source parameters. The screens
vary according to the type of video source selected.
NOTE…
The options in the Video Source Menu depend on which Profile/Level is selected in the Video Encoder
Menu (see page 4-42).
Video Input Option
This option enables the Video Input to be set.
Table 4.19: Video Input Options
Video Type
Selected Option
None
Off
Video input switched off.
Analogue
Composite
NTSC No Pedestal
NTSC-M composite video input (with no Pedestal) on COMP VIDEO connector.
NTSC with Pedestal
NTSC-M composite video input (with Pedestal) on COMP VIDEO connector.
PAL-B/G/H/I
PAL-B/G/H/I composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector.
PAL-D
PAL-D composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector.
PAL-M
PAL-M composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector.
PAL-N (Jamaica)
PAL- N (Jamaica) composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector.
PAL-N
PAL- N composite video input on COMP VIDEO connector.
Serial Digital
Serial digital video input on SDI IN connector.
Bars & Red
Colour bars and red internal test pattern.
Black
Black internal test pattern.
Moving Pattern
Moving internal test pattern.
Ident
Video Source which allows the user to superimpose identification text on the
video. Mainly used for test purposes.
HD-SDI
HD Serial digital video input on HD SDI IN connector.
Color Bars
Colour bar test pattern.
Black
Black internal test pattern.
Monitor
Test Pattern
(SD) Ident,
Digital and
Internal Test
Pattern Video
Sources
HD
Page 4-34
Description
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Standard Definition (SD) Mode
Setup
Menu
Video
Menu
— Video Source....
— Video Filter/Process 8…
— Video Encoder....
— VBI....
— Reflex
VBI/Userdata
Menu
Video
Encoder
Menu
Video
Filter/
Process
Menu
Video
Source
Menu
Menu options depend on
Video Source selected
— Profile/Level
— Border Process: Top
— Compression Mode
— Border Process: Bottom
— Bit-rate
— Border Process: Left
— Bit-rate Tracking
— Border Process: Right
— Delay
— Resolution
— Aspect Ratio
any PAL source
— AFD
Digital (SD)
(SD) 29.97 Hz
(SD) 25 Hz
any NTSC source
— GOP Structure
any test pattern
— GOP Length
Ident
— VITC on PES
— Teletext (All lines) — Long GOPs
— VBI on PID
— Teletext Data Out — Adaptive GOP
— Video Input
— Video Input
— VBI PID
— Teletext PID
— Frame Rate
— Frame Rate
— 3:2 Pulldown 3
— VBI Component Tag — Teletext Tag
— Input Source Select
— Input Source Select
— Field/Frame
1
— VBI in Picture
— VITC on PES
— Video Locked
— Video Locked
— Concatenation 7
— Closed Caption
— VBI on PID
— Ident Text
— Ident Text
— PID
— CC Format
— VBI PID
— Video Bandwidth
— Video Bandwidth
— Component Tag
6
— CC Descriptor
— VBI Component Tag — Indicated Bit- Rate
— Adaptive Pre-processing — Adaptive Pre-processing
6
— CC Font
— VBI in Picture 1
— OP Video Loss
— OP Video Loss
— Reflex Enable 2
— CC Pen Size 6
— Input Termination
— VPS (Line 16)
— Predictive Processing
— Copyright
6
— CC Foreground Size — WSS (Line 23)
— Predictive Processing
— Noise Reduction 4
— Original
6
— CC Background Size — Blank Line 23
— Noise Reduction 4
— Max Still Period
— Scene Cut Detection
— Field 1 Captions
— Auto Detect VITC — Insert VBV Delay
— Max Still Period
— Default 525
— Field 2 Captions
— VBI Line 7
— Default 525 Analog
— Default 625
— PES Header
— SMPTE-333M Port 6
to
— Default 625 Analog
—
I
/P
Monitor
Refresh
—
AFD
Location
— CC Packet Size 6
— VBI Line 24
— I/P Monitor Refresh
— Text Colour 5
— Intra DC Precision
— Auto Detect VITC
— VBI Line 319
— Text Colour 5
— Background Colour
— Rate Buffer Mode
— VBI Line 10
to
— Background Colour
— Logo 8
— Encoder Type
to
— VBI Line 335
— Logo 8
— Time Code
— S/W Release
— VBI Line22
— Time Code
— VBI Line272
to
— VBI Line285
Menu options depend on
Frame Rate selected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VBI in Picture is only available when the Profile/Level is set to 422P@ML.
Only shown if M2/ESO2/VBR option enabled.
3:2 Pulldown is only available for 525 line 29.97 Hz inputs.
Only shown if M2/ESO2/NR option enabled.
Only shown if the logo has previously been downloaded into the Encoder.
Only shown if Closed Caption option selected.
Concatination is only available if M2/ESO2/ACON is purchased.
Only shown if the logo has previously been downloaded into the Encoder.
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
Figure 4.8: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu (SD Mode)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-35
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Setup
Menu
High Definition (HD) Mode
Video
Menu
— Video Source....
— HD Video Encoder....
— VBI/Userdata....
— Reflex
VBI /Userdata
Menu
HD Video
Encoder
Menu
Menu options depend on
Frame Rate selected (in
Video Source menu when
Video Input is Digital).
(HD) 25/50
1
2
3
4
5
(HD)
— Profile/Level
— Compression Mode
— Bit-rate
— Bi-rate Tracking
(HD) 23.976/24/30/29.97/
59.94/60
— Teletext
— Teletext Data Out
— Teletext PID
— Teletext Tag
— VBI on PID
— VBI PID
— VBI Component Tag
— VBI Line 6
to
— VBI Line 23
— VBI Line 318
to
— VBI Line 335
Video
Source
Menu
— VBI on PID
— VBI PID
— VBI Component Tag
— Closed Caption
— CC Format 5
— CC Descriptor 5
— CC Font5
— CC Pen Size 5
— CC Foreground 5
— CC Background 5
— Field 1 Captions
— Field 2 Captions
—Time Code in Userdata
— VBI Line 10
to
— VBI Line 22
— VBI Line 272
to
— VBI Line 285
— VBR Mode1
— Delay
— HD Format
— Hor Resolution
— Aspect Ratio
— GOP Structure
— GOP Length
— Long GOPs
— Adaptive GOP (SD Only)
— 3:2 Pulldown 2
— PID
— Component Tag
— Reflex Enable 1
— Copyright
— Original
— Scene Cut Detection
Menu options depend on
Video Source selected
Digital (HD)
— HD Input
— HD Input Format
— Input Horz Res
— Auto Sense
— Video Locked
— HD Video Locked
— Video Bandwidth
— Adaptive Pre-processing
— OP Video Loss
— HD Noise Reduction 3
— Default 625 Analog
— Default 525 Analog
— Logo 4
— Time Code
— PES Header
— Rate Buffer Mode
— Encoder Type
— S/W Release
— AFD HD Mode
Only shown if M2/ESO2/HDVBR option enabled.
3:2 Pulldown is only available for 525 line 29.97 Hz inputs.
HD Noise Reduction only shown if M2/ESO2/NR option enabled.
Logo only shown if the logo has previously been downloaded into the Encoder.
CC options only shown if Closed Captions enabled.
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
Figure 4.9: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Video Menu (HD Mode)
Page 4-36
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Input Source Select (SD Only)
This allows the enabling or disabling of automatic frame rate detection.
Table 4.20: Input Source Select Options
Selected Option
Description
Manual
The frame rate must be set via the Frame rate option.
Auto Frame Rate
The frame rate is automatically detected.
Auto Config Switch
The frame rate is automatically detected, and the Encoder loads the
appropriate config defined by Default 525 Config and Default 625
Config.
Frame Rate Option (SD Only)
NOTE…
The frame rate is only shown when the video input is Serial Digital, any Test Pattern or Off.
This option enables the Frame Rate to be set.
Table 4.21: Frame Rate Options
Selected Option
Description
29.97 Hz
Used in 525 lines (NTSC-M + PAL-M).
25 Hz
Used in 625 lines (PAL).
HD Input Format
This option sets the HD format to encode coming in on the HD SDI
connector.
Table 4.22: HD Input Format
Input Format
60 Hz
480p/59.94, 480p60, 720p59.94, 720p60, 1080pSF/23.976,
1080pSF/24, 1080i/29.97, 1080i/30
50 Hz
576p50, 720p50, 1080i/25, 1080pSF/25
Input Video Sense (HD Only)
There are two modes of operation selectable.
Table 4.23: Profile/Level Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No action is performed with regards to the input format – it just passes
the video on to be coded, even if it is not correctly aligned.
On
The Encoder adjusts the input setting with regards to the actual input.
Any change is reflected back as status on the Encoder interfaces. The
normal input selection is read-only.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-37
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Input Horiz Res (HD Only)
A table of live options for 1080 input only and can be 1920 or 1440. This is
used to set how much picture is fed to the encoding engine. If it is 1440,
the sides of the video will be lost.
Video Locked (SD Only) and HD Video Locked Option
This option indicates whether the video is locked. It is for status only and
cannot be changed.
Ident Text Option (SD Only)
This is the text that is displayed if the video output is lost (see page 4-38).
Video Bandwidth Option
The Video Bandwidth Option controls the filtering of the video before it is
compressed. Reducing the bandwidth requires slightly less bits in the
compressed bit-stream. Refer to ST.AN.BW.E10074 for more information.
Table 4.24: Video Bandwidth Options
Selected Option
Description
Sharp
Filter is at the maximum bandwidth possible for the resolution selected.
Medium
Slightly reduced bandwidth.
Medium Soft (SD Only)
Reduced a little further.
Soft
Reduced a little further still.
Auto
Automatically adjusts the bandwidth depending on the video bit-rate and resolution settings.
Adaptive Pre-processing
Changes the filtering of the input signal according to the complexity of the
picture. It will be a small change from the bandwidth/noise reduction
setting currently selected.
OP Video Loss Option
This option gives the choice of what is displayed on the television screen in
the event of losing video input.
NOTE…
Black and ASI off are the only options available in HD mode.
Page 4-38
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.25: OP Video Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
SD
HD
Freeze Frame
The last video frame received is encoded if the video input is lost.
3
2
Black
A black screen is encoded if the video input is lost.
3
3
Bars & Red
Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video input is lost.
3
2
Freeze + Ident
The last video frame received is encoded if the video input is lost. Text
message is superimposed.
3
2
Black + Ident
A black screen is encoded if the video input is lost. Text message is
superimposed.
3
2
Bars & Red + Ident
Bars and red test pattern is encoded if the video input is lost. Text message
is superimposed.
3
2
Stored OSD
Available if an OSD has been downloaded to the Encoder.
3
3
No Video PID
The video PID is no longer transmitted, but it is still referenced in the SI.
3
3
No ASI O/P
The ASI output is turned off
3
3
Predictive Processing (SD Only)
This is a read-only indication of the current mode of a multipass-capable
Encoder.
Table 4.26: Predictive Processing
Selected Option
Description
Normal
Encoder is in non-multipass mode.
Advanced
Encoder is in multipass mode.
Input Termination Option (SD Analogue Only)
This enables the termination of the analogue video input to be switched On
or Off.
Noise Reduction Option3
This option enables the noise reduction feature to be switched on (at
different levels) or off. The feature can be used when the incoming picture
material is corrupted by high frequency noise (such as white noise). When
noise reduction is enabled, the Encoder applies sophisticated edge
preserving filters on the incoming material and removes the noise which
can reduce the encoding difficulty considerably. Refer to Application Note
ST.AN.1094, Video Noise Reduction and Compression for more
information.
3
Noise reduction is only available when software option M2/ESO2/NR or M2/ESO2/HDNR is purchased.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-39
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.27: Noise Reduction Options (HD Only)
Selected Option
Description
Off
Level 1
Use noise reduction, if necessary, but don't 'damage' the picture in any way.
Level 2
Medium setting (best compromise), quite powerful, but noise reduction might, very occasionally,
introduce some artefacts.
Level 3
Powerful noise reduction that may introduce some artefacts.
Level 4
Very powerful noise reduction that can introduce some artefacts.
Table 4.28: Noise Reduction Options (SD Only)
Selected Option
Description
0
Noise reduction off
Adaptive 1
Use noise reduction if necessary but don’t introduce artefacts.
Adaptive 2
Medium adaptive noise reduction, best compromise between Adaptive 1 and 3
Adaptive 3
Very powerful adaptive noise reduction, may introduce some filter artefacts but will remove as
much noise as is possible.
Adaptive 4
Used for turn-around systems where the input video signal includes coding artefacts.
Fixed 1
Weak non-adaptive noise reduction independent of input noise.
Fixed 2
Medium non-adaptive noise reduction independent of input noise.
Fixed 3
Strong non-adaptive noise reduction independent of input noise.
Max Still Period Option (SD Only)
If set to a value greater than zero it triggers a ‘Freeze Frame On Video
Input’ alarm if it detects no movement in the source video for the defined
number of seconds.
Default 625 [Analog]
This sets the default for the 625 Line standard.
Table 4.29: Default 625 Options
Selected Option
Description
PAL-B/G/H/I
PAL-D
PAL-M (Jaimaca)
PAL-M
Default 525 [Analog]
This sets the default for the 625 Line standard.
Page 4-40
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.30: Default 525 Options
Selected Option
Description
NTSC with pedestal
PAL-M
NTSC no pedestal
I/P Monitor Refresh Option
This sets the update rate of the input video monitor on the front panel, and
the web browser monitor.
Text Colour Option (SD Only)
This option defines the text colour for any on-screen messages generated
by the Encoder (e.g. by the Ident test pattern).
Table 4.31: Text Colour Options
Available Options
White
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
Black
Red
Orange
Grey
Cyan
Pink
Background Colour Option (SD Only)
This option defines the background colour for any on-screen messages
generated by the Encoder (e.g. by the Ident test pattern).
CAUTION…
Make the background colour a contrast to the text otherwise the text will not be seen!
Table 4.32: Background Colour Options
Available Options
White
Blue
Magenta
Yellow
Green
Black
Red
Orange
Grey
Cyan
Pink
Logo Option (When Logo Downloaded into Unit)
This gives the choice of superimposing the broadcaster’s logo on the video
(On) or not (Off).
NOTE…
This option only appears if the logo has previously been downloaded into the equipment (see Annex D,
Creating and Downloading a Logo).
Time Code Option
This option indicates the time given by the Vertical Interval Time Code
(VITC) or generated by the Encoder. It is for status only and cannot be
changed.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-41
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
4.6.3
Video Filter/Process (SD only)
Each of the Border Process menu items (Top/Bottom/Left/Right) has a
number of defined levels. The level indicates the percentage processing
being applied (i.e 0 would be no processing; 100 full processing resulting
in solid block borders). There are four allowable values: 0,25,50,75.
4.6.4
Video Encoder Menu
Overview
The Video Encoder Menu is selected from the Video Menu by pressing the
Video Encoder softkey. This menu permits the selection of video encoding
parameters.
NOTE…
In SD the menu is Video Encoder, in HD mode it is called HD Video Encoder.
Profile/Level Option
NOTE…
This option is always MP@ML or MP@HL and cannot be changed unless the M2/ESO2/422 or
M2/ESO2/HD422 software option is enabled.
This option enables the Profile/Level to be set.
Table 4.33: Profile/Level Options
Selected Option
Description
MP@ML
Main Profile @ Main Level. Typically used in 4:2:0 direct to home.
422P@ML
4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level. Typically used in 4:2:2 contribution feed.4
MP@HL
Main Profile @ High Level. Typically used in HD 4:2:0 direct to home.
422P@HL
4:2:2 Profile @ Main Level. Typically used in HD 4:2:2 contribution feed4.
Compression Mode Option
This enables various compression modes to be selected in which some
encoding parameters are automatically controlled depending on the
selected encoding delay.
NOTES…
1. Changing compression causes a change to GOP structure and length.
2. Picture quality may decrease with reduced delay.
4
4:2:2 is not available unless the M2/ESO2/422 or M2/ESO2/HD422 (E5788) software option is enabled.
Page 4-42
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.34: Compression Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Seamless 1
Seamless 2
Seamless 3
Seamless 4
This gives a fixed delay which allows the bit-rate to be changed, over the permitted range, without
a break in transmission.
Seamless 5
Seamless 6
In the following modes the delay is a function of the bit-rate selected. If the bit-rate is changed
there is a break in transmission.
Standard
The normal mode, with no special techniques or fixed settings to reduce encoding delay.
Low Delay
Delay is reduced by reducing the size of the video rate buffer. This compromises video quality in
some circumstances.
Very Low Delay
SD Only
Delay is reduced using the same techniques as Low Delay mode. GOP structure used is IP and field
pictures are used (ie B frames are not used)..
Mega Low Delay
SD Only
The generated transport stream is not fully DVB compliant and may not work with all Decoders.
Table 4.35: Seamless Mode Bit-rate (Full Resolution Only)
Profile
Seamless 1
(Mbit/s)
Seamless 2
(Mbit/s)
Seamless 3
(Mbit/s)
Seamless 4
(Mbit/s)
Seamless 5
(Mbit/s)
Seamless 6
(Mbit/s)
4:2:0 (SD)
0.8 - 10
1.5 - 10
2 - 15
0.4 - 10
1 - 12
1.3 - 10
4:2:2 (SD)
1.5 - 13
3 - 27
5 - 33
0.7 - 10
2.1 – 2.5
2.5 - 20
1080 420/422 (HD)
7 - 25
7 - 50
7 - 60
7 - 20
7 - 50
7 - 60
720 420/422 (HD)
4 - 25
5.5 - 50
6.5 - 60
4 - 20
5 - 50
6.5 - 60
Rate Buffer delay
2.5 s
1.2 s
1s
3.3 s
1.3 s
1s
Seamless 1 This would be used for 4:2:0 DTH statistical multiplexing
applications. The Encoder delay is approximately 2.5 seconds.
Seamless 2 mode emulates System 3000 6U and 6U+ Encoders delay.
Actual minimum and maximum rates depend on video standard and
resolution.
Seamless 3 Would usually be used in 4:2:2 statistical multiplexing
applications. The Encoder delay is approximately 1.1 seconds.
Seamless 4 mode has a very low Bmin. Actual minimum and maximum
depend on the video standard and resolution. This mode would typically be
used for 4:2:0 DTH statistical multiplexing applications.
Seamless 5 mode minimum and maximum depend on the video standard
and resolution.
Seamless 6 mode is typically used with 4:2:2 statistical multiplexing and
a low Bmin. Actual minimum and maximum depend on the video standard
and resolution.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-43
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
NOTE…
In Seamless Modes 4, 5 and 6 coding performance is compromised a little to achieve lower Bmins.
Bit-rate Option
This option enables the Bit-rate to be set. An error message is shown with
the correct range of bit-rates if the wrong rate is entered.
NOTE…
In SD mode, high bit-rates in low resolutions cannot always generate sufficient bits to match the
requested bit-rate. However, a valid picture will still be produced.
CAUTION…
When using the Encoder with a PRO IRD M2/PSR/3/422BAS in 4:2:2 SD mode the upper video bit-rate
limit of the IRD is 25 Mbit/s.
Bit-rate Tracking
If the Bit-rate option is set to its maximum then Bit-rate Tracking is
automatically switched on. In this mode, any changes which cause the
mux bit-rate to increase or decrease will cause the video rate to always fill
the available mux bit-rate. Changes which cause the mux rate to change
include varying audio bit-rate, RS-232 data bit-rate, changing symbol-rate
(on Voyager units).
NOTE…
On an Encoder fitted with a Remux card, only changes to the Host Bit-rate will cause the video rate to
track. Increasing the final bit-rate (e.g. by changing the symbol=rate) will NOT cause the video=rate of
the local service to increase. This is to allow the final rate to be increased to accommodate more
Remux services.
Bit-rate tracking is switched off by manually setting the video bit-rate to
any value lower than the maximum.
VBR Mode (HD)
This option is only available from the Systems Menu when the
M2/ESO2/HDVBR licence key is purchased.
The VBR Mode5 option is selected from the Menu by pressing the VBR
Mode softkey. The option is used to provide spare capacity in the video
stream. Operating in a stuffing off mode or in a true variable bit rate
mode, a decision can be made as to how much impact there will be on the
broadcast service. The spare capacity these modes provide is ideal for
opportunistic data insertion.
5
The VBR licence M2/ESO2/HDVBR is needed with this option.
Page 4-44
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.36: VBR Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Off <constant>
VBR mode not selected. Any unused bits are stuffed.
On <stuffing off>
This uses normal quantisation levels and any unused bits are used to carry other data. This
has no impact on the quality of the encoded pictures.
On <variable>
Quantisation level is limited with pictures which are easier to encode. This is done in order to
provide more unused bits to carry other data. This may have an impact on the quality of
certain encoded pictures.
VBR Mode (SD Only) Option
This option is only available from the Systems Menu when the
M2/ESO2/VBR licence key is purchased.
It is possible to operate the Encoder in a stand-alone Variable Bit-rate
(VBR6) mode. When in this mode the bit-rate generated by the video
encoder ranges between a minimum (Bmin - dependent on Compression
Mode) and a maximum (Bmax - set by user, up to a limit defined by the
Compression Mode). The video encoder attempts to use a bit-rate to
achieve a particular picture quality set by the user.
If this is set very high then the generated bit-rate clips at the Bmax value.
If it is set very low then the bit-rate clips at Bmin. Somewhere in-between
the bit-rate varies, depending on the picture material being encoded.
Simple pictures use a lower bit-rate than complex pictures.
When in this mode the main encoder output remains at the bit-rate set
within the Mux menu and any spare unused bit-rate is filled with stuffing
packets. These could optionally be removed and reinserted by some
equipment between the Encoder and Decoder.
A typical view of the Video Encoder menu would be:
To run in VBR mode the Encoder must be placed into a Seamless
Compression mode.
A new menu item VBR Mode then appears. When set to Off (Constant)
the Encoder generates a fixed constant bit-rate set by the Bit-rate option.
When changed to On (Variable) the Encoder enters its stand-alone
VBR Mode.
6
The VBR licence M2/ESO2/VBR is needed with this option.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-45
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
A new menu item appears Max (VBR) Bit-rate. This is the maximum
bit-rate the Encoder will generate. The read-only menu item Bit-rate
remains, but now indicates the bit-rate being generated by the Encoder.
The required picture quality is set in the same menu by the VBR Target
Quality item.
When running in VBR Mode the two top-level status screens show the
current bit-rate being used. This will typically vary.
Delay Option
This option indicates the current video delay. It is for status only and
cannot be changed.
Resolution Option
This option gives both horizontal and vertical resolution. The first number
indicates the horizontal resolution and the second the vertical resolution.
For example, 720x576 gives a horizontal resolution of 720 and a vertical
resolution 576.
Page 4-46
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.37: Resolution Options
In Auto, pixel
value in
brackets varies
with bit-rate that
is set.
Selected Option
SD Mode
625 Line Modes
525 Line Modes
Auto (720x576)
Auto (720x480)
720 x576
720 x480
704 x576
704x480
640 x576
640x480
544 x576
544x480
528 x576
528x480
Description
Relates to the number of pixels across the screen and
the number of lines down the screen (pixels x lines).
480x480
480 x576
352x480
352x576
352x240 (SIF)
352x288 (SIF)
HD
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 23.976
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 24
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 25
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 25
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 29.97
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 30
720 x 1280/960p 50
Relates to the number of lines down the screen and
number of pixels across the screen (lines x pixels).
720 x 1280/960p 59.94
720 x 1280/960p 60
576 x 720/704p 50
480 x 720/704p 59.94
480 x 720/704p 60
Aspect Ratio Option
This option does not affect the image processing.
Table 4.38: Aspect Ratio Options
Selected Option
Description
1, 0
Video image is encoded at 1:1 aspect ratio. Not currently used.
4:3
Video image is encoded at 4:3 aspect ratio. Default SD.
16:9
Video image is encoded at 16:9 aspect ratio. Default HD.
2.21:1
Video image is encoded at 2.21:1 aspect ratio. Not currently used.
AFD Option (SD Only)
Active Format Descriptor (AFD) uses three bits of video index to define the
video format. This information is encoded into user data and can then be
used by a Decoder for wide-screen switching.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-47
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.39: AFD Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No AFD data output.
On
Output AFD value zero if input is lost.
On (No Action on Error)
If the input is lost, carry on outputting last valid data.
NOTE…
625 line – with AFD set to On, lines 11 and 324 will be set to Video Index.
525 line – with AFD set to On, lines 14 and 277 will be set to Video Index.
Table 4.40: AFD Information
Video
Input
Encoder
Encoder AFD off
Video Index
Extraction
Encoder AFD on
Encoder AFD on (No action
on Error)
Sequence_header AFD
aspect_ratio_inform user_data()
ation
active_format
sequence_header AFD user_data()
aspect_ratio_infor active_format
mation
sequence_header AFD
aspect_ratio_infor user_data()
mation
active_format
Aspect ratio from AFD value
Video Index
from Video
Index
Present
ON
Aspect ratio from
Video Index
Not present
Aspect ratio from AFD value from
Video Index
Video Index
Present
OFF
Encoder setting
Not present
Encoder setting
0 (Active region is Stays at last
the same as
aspect ratio
encoded frame) extracted from
Video Index
Stays at last
value
extracted
from Video
Index (This
could be 0)
No input
ON
Encoder setting
Not present
Encoder setting
0 (Active region is Stays at last
the same as
aspect ratio
encoded frame) extracted from
Video Index
Stays at last
value
extracted
from Video
Index (This
could be 0)
OFF
Encoder setting
Not present
Encoder setting
0 (Active region is Stays at last
the same as
aspect ratio
encoded frame) extracted from
Video Index
Stays at last
value
extracted
from Video
Index (This
could be 0)
or
Present but no
Video Index data
No input
or
Present but no
Video Index data
GOP Structure Option
This option enables the GOP Structure to be set.
Page 4-48
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.41: Group of Pictures Structure Options
Selected Option
Description
IBBBP
(IBBBPBBBPBBBI) (SD only).
IBBP
for successive B frames (IBBPBBPBBPBBPI) – default.
IBP
for operation with B frames (IBPBPBPBPBPI).
IP
for non-B frame operation (IPPPPPPPPPPI) - default for very low delay modes.
IBBB
(IBBBIBBBIBBBIBBB) - professional editing standard (SD only).
IBB
IBBIBBIBBIBBIBBIBBI) - professional editing standard.
IB
(IBIBIBIBIBIBIBIBIB) - a professional editing standard.
I-Frame
(IIIIIIIIIIIIIII) - for precise editing and compression.
NOTE…
For some GOP changes operation can be seamless but this is not guaranteed.
GOP Length Option
This enables the video GOP structure length to be set. The structure length
determines how regularly an I frame is transmitted. The I frame provides a
regular reference from which predicted frames can be generated, thereby
ensuring that predictions do not become wildly inaccurate.
NOTE…
Some of the settings may not be available if they are not valid for use with other current encoding
parameters. Also, changing the GOP structure automatically changes the GOP length if the current
GOP length is not compatible with the selected structure.
Table 4.42: Group of Pictures Length Options (Long GOPs Disabled)
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
GOP lengths available depend on GOP structure selected and the frame rate.
Maximum GOP lengths are 12 for 25 Hz, 15 for 29.97/30 Hz, 24 for 50 Hz and
30 for 59.94/60 Hz.
1
15
I-Frame and IP encoding have 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15.
IBP and IB have 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14.
IBBP and IBB have 3, 6, 9, 12, 15.
IBBBP and IBBB have 4, 8, 12 (SD only).
Long GOPs Option
This is used to enable or disable the use of GOP structures that are longer
than 500 ms in duration. To set longer GOP values, use GOP length option
with this option set to On.
Long GOP structures can improve video encoding performance, particularly
at low bit-rates. However, it can lead to compression artefacts being visible
on scene cuts, and a periodic build-up and removal of noise at the I-frame
rate.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-49
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
NOTE…
Long GOPs are not DVB compliant, and should be used with caution.
Adaptive GOP
This option is not valid in HD progressive modes.
The GOP structure is adapted in regard to the number of B and P frames
according to the motion detected in the video. It should be left ON unless
there is a compatibility issue with the receiver population.
Field/Frame Option (SD Only)
This enables the choice of field or frame based pictures.
MPEG-2 encodes video at the field/frame level in what are known as
pictures. These are coding units within the hierarchy of the spec. Pictures
can be used in two ways, frame pictures and field pictures. With frame
pictures a frame of a field 1 and field 2 is encoded as a single unit. With
field pictures each individual field of video is encoded as a single unit, but
must be followed or preceded by another field picture relating to its
matching field.
Table 4.43: Field/Frame Options
Selected Option
Description
Fields
Field based pictures.
Frames
Frame based pictures.
Auto
Automatically chooses the correct option on a frame by frame basis.
3:2 Pulldown Option
This enables 3:2 pulldown (film) mode to be switched On and Off.
NOTES…
1. This option is only available for 29.97 Hz, 30 Hz, 59.97 Hz and 60 Hz modes.
2. In SD, VBI in Picture is not supported when 3:2 Pulldown is active.
3. 3:2 Pulldown is not valid for Very Low Delay and Mega Low Delay coding modes.
4. It is recommended to set this option to On.
The option should be switched on if the video material originated on film
and has been converted from the 24 frames per second film rate to the
29.97 frames per second NTSC rate. This enables the Encoder to increase
the video compression by only including a flag in the transport stream to
represent a repeated field (when detected), rather than compressing the
repeated fields.
Page 4-50
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Concatenation Option7 (SD Only)
Use this option if the signal has been coded, then decoded and is about to
be coded again. It reduces picture degradation associated with multiple
generation compression encoding. Setting this option may give better
results as it tries to line up the I-frames. Only available to video via the
SDI input. See Application Note, ST.AN.1110, Near Loss-less MPEG
Concatenation Without Helper Signals.
PID Option
The option is used for entering or updating video PIDs, as required. Enter a
PID then press the Enter softkey to accept it.
To be DVB compliant, PIDs below 32 are reserved. Therefore PIDs 32 to
8191 are available for use. In the event of a clash, one of the PIDs will be
changed by the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this video
stream.
Reflex Enable Option
The option is used to enable (On) or disable (Off) Reflex. It is only
available with VBR licence keys M2/ESO2/VBR and M2/ESO2/HDVBR.
Indicated Bit-Rate Option (SD Only)
This option controls the video bit-rate that is signalled in the transport
stream. If set to 'Max Value' the maximum possible bit-rate for the profile
and encoding mode is signalled. This is the way all previous generations of
TANDBERG Encoders have operated. If set to 'Actual Value', and the
encoding mode is not a seamless mode, then the bit-rate signalled is the
actual video bit-rate set on the Encoder.
There is also a 2 Mbit/s option which signals 2 Mbit/s for use with a
particular decoder range which requires this value.
Copyright Option
This option indicates whether the information in the bit-stream is shown to
be protected by copyright. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Original Option
This option indicates whether the bit-stream is an original or a copy of an
original bit-stream. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Scene Cut Detection
In SD mode, this is a status only option. The Encoder detects that a scene
change has happened and so intra-codes some or all of the blocks. That is,
the picture is coded without any reference to previous frames.
7
Auto Concatenation is only available when software option M2/ESO2/ACON is purchased.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-51
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
In HD mode, the Encoder also detects that a scene cut has occurred but,
in this mode, inserts a complete new I frame to change the GOP structure
to start on the new scene. This, again, stops any references to previous
frames. However, changing the GOP structure may cause problems with
older generation receiving equipment. Hence, Scene Cut Detection can be
turned off in HD Encoder mode.
Insert VBV Delay Option (SD Only)
If this option is turned on the Encoder will insert vbv_delay values into the
picture header. This is required by some older set-top boxes. The default
value is off.
PES Header Option
This option controls how often the Encoder inserts a PES header into the
transport stream.
The default option is ‘per GOP’, when the Encoder will insert a PES header
at the start of every GOP. The alternative is ‘per Picture’, when the
Encoder will insert a PES header at the start of every picture. The PES
header contains the PTS (Presentation Time Stamp), and some set-top
boxes require this to be sent more frequently than once every GOP, hence
the PES per Picture option.
AFD Location Option (SD Only)
This option indicates where the AFD information is transmitted. The
options are: Sequence Header; Picture Header.
Intra DC Precision
Intra DC Prec has possible values: Auto, 8 bits, 9 bits, 10 bits. 11 bits is
also available in 422P@ML. Auto selects the optimum number of bits
depending on the profile, coding mode and video bit-rate.
Rate Buffer Mode (SD Only)
This has the values: Small, Medium. Refer to Chapter 6 for information
about using this option.
Encoder Type Option
This option indicates the type of Encoder. It is for status only and cannot
be changed.
S/W Release Option
This option indicates the software release of the Video Compression
Module. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
AFD HD (HD Only)
The Encoder responds to a contact closure on the General Purpose
Interface (GPI) to signal a change in aspect ratio.
When enabled, AFD is inserted into the picture user_data in accordance
with the Digital TV Group (DTG) format. It is now also registered as a DVB
standard (ETSI TR 101 154). When switched off, no AFD is present. The
Page 4-52
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
menu items shown in Table 4.44 are only available if the M2/EOM2/GPI
GPI option card is purchased.
Table 4.44: AFD HD (HD Only)
4.6.5
Selected Option
Item
Description
AFD HD Mode
Off
No AFD data is put into user data.
On GPI
Signalling comes from GPI pin.
On user
Signalling is controlled via an SNMP OID, front
panel or web page.
AFD HD GPI Pin
Pin0, Pin 1,…Pin 7
Selects the pin to trigger the change of AFD state.
AFD HD 4/3 Pin
Polarity
Open or Close
Selects the state, which is used to signal 4/3.
AFD HD current state
4/3 or 16/9
Shows the current state.
Comments
Only available if
AFD mode is set to
On GPI)
Only available if
AFD mode is set to
On user)
Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI)/Userdata Menu
Overview
The VBI Menu permits the selection of Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI)
parameters. The Encoder can extract a maximum of eight VBI lines per
field. However, this limit does not apply to Teletext. The VBI options that
are available are dependent on the frame rate of the video.
VBI/Userdata Menu (25/50 Hz Frame Rate)
Teletext (All lines) Option
This option provides a quick way of configuring the Encoder to the most
common Teletext configuration. When turned On, it enables extraction of
Teletext System B (WST) data from lines 7 to 22 and 320 to 335. It is
possible to extract Teletext from lines 6, 318 and 319 as well, but these
lines must be individually configured.
Teletext Data Out Option
This option indicates whether the Encoder is currently outputting Teletext
data. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Teletext PID Option
This option defines the PID to be used for Teletext data.
Teletext Tag Option
This option sets the component tag for the Teletext stream. The valid
range is 0 to 255.
VITC on PES Option (SD only)
Extraction of VITC data from VBI lines as shown in VBI - Line ‘n’ Options
on Page 4-56. Enabling this option will disable VBI on PID.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-53
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
VBI on PID Option
This option allows the transmission of VBI data on its own PID to be turned
On or Off.
VBI PID Option
This option defines the PID to be used for VBI data.
VBI Component Tag Option
This option sets the component tag for the VBI stream. The valid range is
0 to 255.
VBI In Picture Option (SD Only)
NOTES…
1. The VBI in Picture option is only accessible if the selected video profile/level is 422P@ML8.
2. VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to
some distortion. Most analogue VBI types are robust against this type of distortion but others,
e.g. video index and ITS, are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG
coding/decoding in VBI in Picture mode.
This enables the extended picture format available in the MPEG 4:2:2
specification to be selected. When selected, the Encoder compresses and
transmits the VBI data as part of the active picture. This mode requires up
to 3 Mbit/s of bit-rate, depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI
present. It may be necessary to increase the video bit-rate accordingly to
maintain picture quality.
NOTE…
When encoding VBI in this way 3:2 Pulldown should be switched off. If it is not, then occasionally
fields may not be encoded because of the inverse pulldown process. This results in some VBI lines not
being transmitted.
When this option is not selected (or when 4:2:0 format video is used), VBI
data must be transmitted in its original digital form either in an
independent data stream (in the case of Teletext) or in user data fields
within the MPEG video transport stream.
Table 4.45: VBI in Picture Options
Selected Option
Description
On
VBI is coded as active video.
Off
Off (Bit-rate too low)
Insufficient bit-rate.
VPS (Line 16) Option (SD Only)
This enables or disables the extraction of VPS (Video Programming
System) data from line 16 of the video input.
8
4:2:2 is only available when software option M2/ESO2/422 is purchased.
Page 4-54
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
WSS (Line 23) Option (SD Only)
NOTES…
1. Aspect ratio changes when WSS is enabled.
2. If the PES Header option in the Video Encoder menu is set to PES per picture, any aspect ratio
changes will be signalled frame accurately if WSS-AFD is selected.
This enables or disables the extraction of WSS (Wide Screen Signalling)
data from line 23 of the video input. The WSS format can either be in
accordance with ETSI 300 294, or can be in the proprietary WSS-AFD
format.
Blank Line 23 Option (SD Only)
This option controls the blanking of line 23. The options are off or whole
line blanked. The option is provided to enable line 23 VBI signals to be
removed if it is found that set-top boxes are not correctly removing it
when displaying in ‘letter box’ format. In most situations line 23 blanking
should be disabled.
Auto Detect VITC Option
If this option is enabled the Encoder automatically detects the presence of
Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) data.
In SD mode, the Encoder examines each VBI line, and its equivalent in
the other field, for VITC signals. If it finds a VITC signal it stops searching
and decodes VITC from that pair of lines. It does not look for VITC on VBI
lines that are not configured to Off.
In HD mode, the timecode is extracted according to SMPTE RP188 from
the HD SDI. It is always in Auto mode and, therefore, not shown in the
menu structure. In this mode, if timecode data is found it is extracted and
then put back into the video stream. If no timecode is found, a locally
generated timecode is generated an inserted into the stream.
VBI Line ‘n’ Option (SD Only)
NOTE…
To autodetect VITC the lines within the VBI line option must be set to VITC (SD only).
Each VBI line can be individually configured as to the format of VBI data
that should be extracted from that line. However, a maximum of eight VBI
lines can be processed per field (this does not include Teletext lines). Refer
to Table 4.46 for the options available for a frame rate of 25 Hz.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-55
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Table 4.46: VBI - Line ‘n’ Options
Option
Frame Rate = 29.97 Hz
Off
Vertical Interval Time Code
Video Index
Closed Caption
Description
VBI data is not extracted from the line.
VITC data extracted from the line.
The setting cannot be selected on this screen, but is set by setting the Closed Caption
option to On [SMPTE 333M], On [video 21 & 284] or On [video line 21]. It indicates that
closed captioning data is extracted from the line. Setting Line 21 back to Off or VITC resets
the Closed Caption option back to Off (see also page 4-60).
Neilsen AMOL 1
Neilsen AMOL 1 data is extracted from the line.
Neilsen AMOL 11
Neilsen AMOL 11 data is extracted from the line.
Frame Rate = 25 Hz
Off
Vertical Interval Time Code
Video Index
Teletext System B
(World System Teletext)
Inverted Teletext
Wide Screen Signalling
Closed Caption
Video Programming System
VBI data is not extracted from the line.
VITC data extracted from the line.
Aspect ratio will be affected (see Table 4.40).
Teletext System B data extracted from the line.
Inverted Teletext is extracted from the line.
The setting cannot be selected on this screen, but is set by setting the WSS (Line 23) option
to On. It indicates that WSS data is extracted from the line. Setting Line 23 back to Off,
VITC or Teletext System B resets the WSS (Line 23) option back to Off.
Closed Caption data is extracted from the line.
The setting cannot be selected on this screen, but is set by setting the VPS (Line 16) option
to On. It indicates that VPS data is extracted from the line. Setting Line 16 back to Off, VITC
or Teletext System B resets the VPS (Line 16) option back to Off.
When operating in ATSC mode and Closed Captions, the language of the
descriptors is set by the Encoder.
When switching the Encoder from DVB to ATSC mode the PIDs are
remapped. The remapping would be specified by the program paradigm.
Switching back to DVB would invoke the original PIDs.
NOTES…
1. In HD only Teletext and Vertical Timecode options are available
2. VITC is carried as timecode in the video stream rather than as a separate PES stream. If VITC is
not present, a locally generated timecode is sent instead.
3. From SV 3.6.0, VITC data can be carried in PES.
Time Code in Userdata Option (HD Only)
This option is used to insert a time code into userdata as defined by
SMPTE 328. Only the time code section of SMPTE 328 is implemented,
along with appropriate headers.
This option has the following selections: On/Off.
Page 4-56
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
FIELD 1
VITC (SMPTE), Video Index, Off, Closed
Caption, Nielsen/AMOL 1, Nielsen/AMOL 11
273
10
Same options as line 10
11
11
Same options as line 10
274
11
Same options as line 10
12
12
Same options as line 10
275
12
Same options as line 10
13
13
Same options as line 10
276
13
Same options as line 10
14
14
Same options as line 10
277
14
Same options as line 10
15
15
Same options as line 10
278
15
Same options as line 10
16
16
Same options as line 10
279
16
Same options as line 10
17
17
Same options as line 10
280
17
Same options as line 10
18
18
Same options as line 10
281
18
Same options as line 10
19
19
Same options as line 10
282
19
Same options as line 10
20
20
Same options as line 10
283
20
Same options as line 10
21
21
Same options as line 10
284
21
Same options as line 10
22
22
Same options as line 10
285
22
Same options as line 10
23 262
23 262
ACTIVE VIDEO
286
525
23 262
ACTIVE VIDEO
263
263
ACTIVE VIDEO / Equalising pulses
Line Number (field by field)
Same options as line 10
Line Number (whole frame)
9
Line Number (field by field)
272
Line Number (whole frame)
10
FIELD 2
Start of coded video.
Start of coded video.
NOTES…
1. In 525-line systems, fields start on the first full line after the end of the picture period. Therefore,
field 1 is 262 lines long and field 2 is 263 lines long.
2. An MPEG frame is 480 lines when formatting 525-line format pictures.
3. For compatibility with some older Receivers the start of coded video may need to begin at
line 22. Contact Customer Services for details.
Figure 4.10: VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for 525-line Systems (SD Only)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-57
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
FIELD 1
FIELD 2
6
Teletext System B or Inverted Teletext, VITC, Video Index,
Closed Caption, Wide Screen Signalling (WSS), Off, Video
Programming System (VPS)
318
Same options as line 6
7
Same options as line 6
319
Same options as line 6
8
Same options as line 6
320
Same options as line 6
9
Same options as line 6
321
Same options as line 6
10
Same options as line 6
322
Same options as line 6
11
Same options as line 6
323
Same options as line 6
12
Same options as line 6
324
Same options as line 6
13
Same options as line 6
325
Same options as line 6
14
Same options as line 6
326
Same options as line 6
15
Same options as line 6
327
Same options as line 6
16
Same options as line 6
328
Same options as line 6
17
Same options as line 6
329
Same options as line 6
18
Same options as line 6
330
Same options as line 6
19
Same options as line 6
331
Same options as line 6
20
Same options as line 6
332
Same options as line 6
21
Same options as line 6
333
Same options as line 6
22
Same options as line 6
334
Same options as line 6
23
Same options as line 6
Start of coded video.
335
Same options as line 6
ACTIVE VIDEO
336
Same options as line 6
24
Start of coded video.
25 310
ACTIVE VIDEO
337 622
ACTIVE VIDEO
311 312
Equalising Pulses
623
ACTIVE VIDEO / Equalising Pulses
313
Equalising Pulses (part)
624 625
Equalising Pulses
NOTES…
1. Any type of valid VBI can be on any line, even if it is not usually associated with that line.
2. 625-line fields start on the leading edge of the first vertical sync (broad) pulse. Therefore, the first
half of line 313 is in field 1 and the second half is in field 2.
3. An MPEG frame is 576 lines when formatting 625-line format pictures.
4. Line 23 is the Wide Screen Signalling line. It carries information which defines the picture Aspect
Ratio.
5. ETS 300 294 is the specification which describes WSS.
6. EN 300 472 is the specification associated with System B Teletext (World System Teletext).
Figure 4.11: VBI Structure Implemented by TANDBERG for 625-line Systems (SD Only)
Page 4-58
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
VBI Menu (29.97/30/59.94/60 Hz Frame Rate)
VITC on PES Option (SD only)
Extraction of VITC data from VBI lines as shown in Table 4.46: VBI - Line
‘n’ Options on Page 4-56. Enabling this option will disable VBI on PID.
VBI on PID Option
This option allows the transmission of VBI data on its own PID to be turned
On or Off.
VBI PID Option
This option defines the PID to be used for VBI data.
VBI Component Tag Option
This option sets the component tag for the VBI stream. The valid range is
0 to 255.
VBI In Picture Option (SD Only)
NOTES…
1. The VBI in Picture option is only accessible if the selected video profile/level is 422P@ML9.
2. VBI in Picture transmits the VBI waveform as part of the picture and as such will be subject to
some distortion. Most analogue VBI types are robust against this type of distortion but others,
e.g. video index and ITS, are intended for SDI transmission and will not survive MPEG
coding/decoding in VBI in Picture mode.
This enables the extended picture format available in the MPEG 4:2:2
specification to be selected. When selected, the Encoder compresses and
transmits the VBI data as part of the active picture. This mode requires up
to 3 Mbit/s of bit-rate, depending on the amount and complexity of the VBI
present. It may be necessary to increase the video bit-rate accordingly to
maintain picture quality.
NOTE…
When encoding VBI in this way 3:2 Pulldown should be switched off. If it is not, then occasionally
fields may not be encoded because of the inverse pulldown process. This results in some VBI lines not
being transmitted.
When this option is not selected (or when 4:2:0 format video is used), VBI
data must be transmitted in its original digital form either in an
independent data stream (in the case of Teletext) or in user data fields
within the MPEG video transport stream.
Table 4.47: VBI in Picture Options
Selected Option
Description
On
VBI is coded as active video.
Off
Off (Bit-rate too low)
9
Insufficient bit-rate.
4:2:2 is only available when software option M2/ESO2/422 is purchased.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-59
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Closed Caption Option
This option controls the extraction and processing of closed caption data by
the Encoder. Closed caption data can be obtained from: video line 21,
video lines 21 and 284, or be received in accordance with SMPTE 333M on
RS-232 and SMPTE 334M on HDSDI.
NOTE…
The Encoder automatically converts EIA608 to EIA708 format. The ‘CC…’ settings are used in this
conversion.
CC Format Option
This inserts the closed captions as user data in the video stream in the
selected format.
This controls the format used to insert the closed captions as user data in
the video stream. The options are ATSC (SD and HD), SCTE 20/21 (SD
only) or a proprietary TANDBERG/NDS format (SD only).
CC Descriptor Option
This option is only available if the CC format is set to ATSC. The option
controls the CC Descriptor type that the Encoder generates. The options
are ‘Line 21 only’, ‘Line 21 and Advanced’, and ‘Advanced only’.
CC Font Option
This option is only available if the CC Format is ATSC, and Closed Captions
are being extracted from line 21 or lines 21 and 284. It defines the font to
be used for displaying the closed caption text.
CC Pen Size
This option is only available if the CC Format is ATSC, and Closed Captions
are being extracted from line 21 or lines 21 and 284. It defines the pen
size to be used for displaying the closed caption text.
CC Foreground Size
This option is only available if the CC Format is ATSC, and Closed Captions
are being extracted from line 21 or lines 21 and 284. It defines the
foreground colour to be used for displaying the closed captions.
CC Background Size
This option is only available if the CC Format is ATSC, and Closed Captions
are being extracted from line 21 or lines 21 and 284. It defines the
background colour to be used for displaying the closed captions.
Field 1 Captions
This option sets the appropriate descriptors in the PSIP information. It
allows the number of CC services, from the source, contained in Field 1 to
be entered.
Page 4-60
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Video Menu
Field 2 Captions
This option sets the appropriate descriptors in the PSIP information. It
allows the number of CC services, from the source, contained in Field 2 to
be entered.
SMPTE 333M Port Option
This option is only displayed if the Closed Captions are set to SMPTE 333M
input. It controls which RS-232 interface is used for receiving the closed
caption data.
CC Packet Size Option
This option is only displayed if the Closed Captions are set to SMPTE 333M
input. It controls the size of closed caption packet the Encoder requests
from the closed caption server via the SMPTE 333M interface.
Auto Detect VITC Option
If this option is enabled the Encoder automatically detects the presence of
Vertical Interval Time Code (VITC) data and extracts it.
In SD mode, the Encoder examines each VBI line, and its equivalent in
the other field, for VITC signals. If it finds a VITC signal it stops searching
and decodes VITC from that pair of lines. It does not look for VITC on VBI
lines that are not configured to Off.
In HD mode, the timecode is extracted according to SMPTE RP188 from
the HD SDI. It is always in Auto mode and, therefore, not shown in the
menu structure. In this mode, if timecode data is found it is extracted and
then put back into the video stream. If no timecode is found, a locally
generated timecode is generated an inserted into the stream.
VBI Line ‘n’ Option (SD only)
NOTE…
To autodetect VITC the lines within the VBI line option must be set to VITC (SD only).
Each VBI line can be individually configured as to the format of VBI data
that should be extracted from that line. However, a maximum of eight VBI
lines can be processed per field (this does not include Teletext lines). Refer
to Table 4.46 for the options available and also the notes below the table.
Time Code in Userdata Option (HD Only)
This option is used to insert a time code into userdata as defined by
SMPTE 328. Only the time code section of SMPTE 328 is implemented,
along with appropriate headers.
This option has the following selections: On/Off.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-61
Operating the Equipment Locally
4.7
Audio Menu
4.7.1
Overview
The Encoder can process two stereo pairs as standard, but with the
addition of Audio Option Cards it can process more. The control menu for
each stereo pair is essentially the same, but the options available are
dependent on the audio coding standard selected. See Figure 4.12 for the
menu structure.
4.7.2
Audio A / B Menus – MPEG Layer 2
Introduction
Audio A and B have the same menu options, depending upon the Coding
Standard selected. Audio A Menus are shown as examples. This menu
permits the selection of individual channel audio parameters.
Source Option
This option defines the audio source.
Table 4.48: Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI.
Mute
Audio silence.
Test Tone
An internally generated test tone is used as the audio source. The bit-rate automatically changes
to 96 kbit/s.
Analogue
Analogue audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
Digital
Digital audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
SDI Embedded 1
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 2
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 3
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
SDI Embedded 4
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
Coding Standard Option
This option controls the audio coding standard. The options available in the
audio menu are dependent on the coding standard selected.
Table 4.49: Coding Standard Options
Page 4-62
Selected Option
Description
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard.
AC-3 Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded (in Dolby Encoder) AC-3 audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information.
Dolby E Pass-Thru
Dolby E audio coding standard (pre-encoded in Dolby Encoder). See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information mode.
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio coding standard.
DTS Pass-Thru
DTS audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information when using this mode.
Linear PCM (Direct)
Linear PCM audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information.
Linear PCM (Via SRC)
When selected, the audio passes through the sample rate converter before encoding. As a
consequence, any user data bits in the incoming digital audio stream are lost. Audio passes
through the SRC for all input sources i.e. Embedded, Digital, Analogue (though not really
relevant for analogue).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Setup
Menu
Audio
Menu
— Audio A....
— Audio B....
— Audio XLR....
— Audio Languages
Audio
XLR
Menu
Audio
Languages
Menu
— Input Format
— Input Termination
— Input Clip Level
— Output Source
— Output Format
— Output FSR 1
— Firmware Release
— Hardware Release
Refer to Annex C:
Language Abbreviations
Audio A
Menu
Audio B
Menu
Menu options depend on
Coding Standard selected
Dolby Digital (AC3)
Dolby E Pass-Thru
DTS Pass-Thru
AC-3 Pass-Thru
— Source
— Coding Standard
— Audio Alignment 10
— Lip Sync Adjustment 10
— Auto Lip Sync 9
— Use Minimum Delay 4
— Lip Sync Offset 4
— Actual Audio Delay
— Audio Delay 5
— Language
— SMPTE 302M Standard
— Embedded 1-2 DID
— Embedded 3-4 DID
— Audio PID
— Component Tag
— OP Digital Loss
— PCR on Audio PID
— Hardware Release
— Software Release
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
MPEG Layer 2
— Source
— Coding Standard
— Audio Bit-rate3
— Coding Mode38
— Auto Lip Sync 9
— Use Minimum Delay 4
— Lip Sync Offset 4
— Actual Audio Delay
— Audio Delay 5
— External Delay
— Language
— Bit Stream Mode3
— Embedded 1-2 DID
— Embedded 3-4 DID
— Audio PID
— Component Tag
— OP Digital Loss
— PCR on Audio PID
— Hardware Release
— Software Release
Only shown if Source/Input Format = Analogue
Only shown if Coding Mode = Dual Mono
Status only. Only shown if the Encoder has a viable source
from a Dolby Encoder.
Only shown if Auto Lip Sync = On.
Only shown if Auto Lip Sync = Off.
Only shown if in two-channel mode.
Only shown if Production Info = Yes.
Only shown if VPS Cntrls Coding Mode = On.
Auto Lip Sync is Status only when Use Minimum Delay = On.
Dolby E Pass–thru only.
Linear PCM
(Direct)/(Via SRC)
— Source
— Coding Standard
— Input Level L
— Input Level R6
— Audio Bit-rate
— Coding Mode
— VPS Cntrls Coding Mo
— VPS Coding Mode 8
— VPS Stereo Mode 8
— VPS Dual Chan Mode 8
— Auto Lip Sync 9
— Use Minimum Delay 4
— Lip Sync Offset4
— Audio Delay5
— Actual Audio Delay
— Clip Level1
— Impedance1
— Language Left2
— Language Right2
— Deempahasis
— Copyright
— Original
— Embedded 1-2 DID
— Embedded 3-4 DID
— Audio PID
— Component Tag
— OP Digital Loss
— PCR on Audio PID
— Hardware Release
— Software Release
only shown if M2/ESO2/AC3
option enabled
— Source
— Coding Standard
— Audio Alignment
— Lip Sync Adjustment
— Input Level L
— Input Level R6
— Coding Mode
— Auto Lip Sync 9
— Use Minimum Delay 4
— Lip Sync Offset4
— Audio Delay5
— Actual Audio Delay
— Clip Level1
— Impedance1
— Language Left2
— Language Right2
— SMPTE 302M Stand
— Channel
— Embedded 1-2 DID
— Embedded 3-4 DID
— Audio PID
— Component Tag
— OP Digital Loss
— PCR on Audio PID
— Hardware Release
— Software Release
Shaded options are showing status and
cannot be changed.
— Source
— Coding Standard
— Audio Alignment
— Lip Sync Adjustment
— Input Level L
— Input Level R6
— Audio Bit-rate
— Coding Mode
— Auto Lip Sync 9
— Use Minimum Delay 4
— Lip Sync Offset4
— Audio Delay5
— Actual Audio Delay
— Sampling Rate
— Clip Level1
— Impedance1
— Language
— Bit Stream Mode
— Dialogue Level
— Dolby Srnd Mode
— Production Info
— Mixing Level7
— Room Type7
— Copyright
— Original
— Dynamic Range
— RF Protection
— De-empahasis
— DC Filter
— Low Pass Filter
— Embedded 1-2 DID
— Embedded 3-4 DID
— Audio PID
— Component Tag
— OP Digital Loss
— PCR on Audio PID
— Hardware Release
— Software Release
Figure 4.12: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Audio Menu
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-63
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Input Level L Option
This indicates the input level of the left audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Input Level R Option
This indicates the input level of the right audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Audio Bit-rate Option
This option sets the audio bit-rate of this audio channel.
Table 4.50: Audio Bit-rate Options
Available
Settings
MPEG Layer 2 Coding
Mono
Dual Mono
Stereo
Joint Stereo
32 kbit/s
48 kbit/s
56 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
80 kbit/s
96 kbit/s
112 kbit/s
128 kbit/s
160 kbit/s
192 kbit/s
224 kbit/s
256 kbit/s
320 kbit/s
384 kbit/s
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
9
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
9
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
448 kbit/s
512 kbit/s
576 kbit/s
640 kbit/s
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Coding Mode Option
This option sets the audio coding mode. If the current audio bit-rate is
outside the bit-rate range supported by the new coding mode, the bit-rate
is automatically changed to the lowest value within the supported range.
Page 4-64
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Table 4.51: Coding Mode Options (MPEG-2)
Selected Option
Description
Mono Left
Single channel mono audio, encoding the left channel.
Mono Right
Single channel mono audio, encoding the right channel.
Dual Mono
Dual channel mono audio. Both mono channels are transmitted in the same PID.
Stereo
Dual channel stereo audio.
Joint Stereo
Dual channel joint (intensity) stereo audio.
Audio Description
Only available if the source is digital or SDI embedded.
NOTE…
Audio Description is only available if the input source is either digital or SDI embedded.
VPS Controls Coding Mode
When selected, this option allows the extraction of the Audio Coding Mode
from Video Programming System (VPS).
VPS Coding Mode
NOTE…
Only available if VPS Controls Coding Mode is set to On.
This is a read-only item. This menu displays what the motherboard has
been able to extract from the VPS.
Table 4.52: Coding Mode Options (MPEG-2)
Selected Option
Description
Not detected
Not able to extract any information. In this case, the coding mode signalled
shall revert to that set in the existing ‘Coding Mode’ menu..
Undefined
Single Chan (Mono)
Stereo
Dual Chan
VPS Word 5
NOTE…
Only available if VPS Controls Coding Mode is set to On.
This displays the hex value extracted from the VPS. If it has not been able
to extract any information, it displays 0xFF.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-65
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Table 4.53: VPS Bits
Incoming Signalling via Line 16
Encoding and Signalling Modes to be Performed by the Audio Encoder
Video Programming System Word 5
ISO/IEC 11172-3 Mode Field in
Header
Audio Encoding Mode
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 1
Bit 2
0
0
X
X
1
0
Undefined, but will code Dual Channel
0
1
X
X
1
1
Single Channel (Mono left)
1
0
X
0
0
1
Joint Stereo
1
0
X
1
0
0
Stereo
1
1
0
X
1
0
Dual Channel
1
1
1
X
1
1
Single Channel (Mono left)
VPS Stereo Mode
NOTE…
Only available if VPS Controls Coding Mode is set to On.
Table 4.54: VPS Stereo Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Auto-Bit5
Auto-Bit6
Auto-Bit7
In auto modes, the corresponding bit in VPS Word5 controls whether
stereo or joint stereo is coded.
Auto-Bit8
Stereo
Joint Stereo
If either of these options is selected, Bit6 is ignored and coding is forced
when Bit1/2 is 1 0.
VPS Dual Chan Mode
NOTE…
Only available if VPS Controls Coding Mode is set to On.
Table 4.55: VPS Dual Chan Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Auto-Bit5
Auto-Bit6
Auto-Bit7
In auto modes, the corresponding bit in VPS Word5 controls whether the
dual or single channel is coded.
Auto-Bit8
Dual
Single
Page 4-66
If either of these options is selected, the coding mode is forced to this
when Dual channel is signalled in bits 1 and 2 (i.e. Bit1/2 is 1 1).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Auto Lip Sync Option10
This option controls whether the Encoder automatically adjusts the audio
delay to maintain lip sync with the video. If the Encoder is being controlled
via SNMP by a control system that has auto lip sync functionality, then this
should be set to off.
See the text underneath Table 4.16 on page 4-30 for use of this facility.
Use Minimum Delay
This sets the lowest possible audio delay.
If this option is set to ON, the Auto Lip Sync and Audio Delay options are
unavailable.
Lip Sync Offset Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to On. It
allows a fixed delay to be applied to the audio in addition to the auto lip
sync delay.
Table 4.56: Lip Sync Offset Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Lip Sync Offset in milliseconds.
-50
50
Audio Delay Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off. It sets
the delay that should be applied to the audio.
Table 4.57: Audio Delay Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Audio Delay in milliseconds.
111
3540
Actual Audio Delay
Shows the actual audio delay. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Clip Level Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the audio clip level to be set. That is, the head room above 0 dBu
prior to the audio being clipped.
NOTE…
The clip levels available depend on the hardware issue of the Encoder.
10
To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre-encoded audio, use the option card M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-67
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Table 4.58: Clip Level Options
Selected Option
Description
12 dB
12 dB audio clipping level.
15 dB
15 dB is only available with PCB issue 4 and later.
18 dB
18 dB audio clipping level.
21 dB
21 dB audio clipping level.
22 dB
22 dB audio clipping level.
24 dB
24 dB audio clipping level.
Impedance Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the input impedance of the analogue audio input to be set to
either 600 Ω or 20 kΩ.
Language or Language Left/Right Option
This enables the language of the audio channel to be set. If the coding
mode is dual mono, then a different language can be set for the left and
right channels.
De-emphasis Option
This option is turned on in order to de-emphasise pre-emphasised audio
input into the Encoder.
To meet the MPEG Layer 2 audio encoding algorithm specification, the
audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have
pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filtering process must be applied
prior to encoding.
For a digital audio input, pre-emphasis detection is typically achieved by
monitoring the pre-emphasis flags within the channel status data of the
incoming digital audio signal. The de-emphasis is automatically adjusted
when the Encoder is set to Auto.
For an analogue audio signal, the user must manually select the
appropriate de-emphasis filter.
Copyright Option
This controls the Copyright flag in the bit-stream. If set to On the
bit-stream is shown to be protected by copyright.
Original Option
This controls the setting of the Original flag in the bit-stream. If set to On
the bit-stream will be signalled as an original, if set to Off the bit-stream
will be signalled as a copy of an original bit-stream.
Embedded Source Option
This option defines the embedded source. Select HD-SDI or SD-SDI.
Page 4-68
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Audio Menu – MPEG Layer 2
Embedded 1-2 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 1 and SDI Embedded 2. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Table 4.59: Embedded 1-2 DID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
Max:
Other:
Off
Select DID
Default DID
0
1023
>1023
Embedded 3-4 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 3 and SDI Embedded 4. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Audio PID Option
This option sets the PID to be used for the audio channel. In the event of a
PID clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder’s internal
checking algorithm.
To be DVB compliant the audio PID should not be less than 32. However it
is possible to set the PID to less than 32, but in the event of a PID clash
the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm will not resolve the conflict.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this audio
stream.
PCR On Audio PID Option
This option controls whether PCR should be signalled on the audio PID.
This may be necessary if an audio only service is being generated. The
default setting is Off.
OP Digital Loss
This option controls behaviour digital audio is not locked.
Table 4.60: OP Digital Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
Silence
Valid PES stream containing silence
No PID
No Audio PES stream (though stream is still refernced in SI)
No ASI O/P
The ASI output of the Encoder is turned off
Hardware Release Option
This option indicates the hardware version of this audio encode channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-69
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Software Release Option
This option indicates the software version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
4.7.3
Audio (Dolby Digital (AC-3) Menu)
Source Option
This option defines the audio source.
Table 4.61: Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI.
Mute
Audio silence.
Test Tone
An internally generated test tone is used as the audio source. The bit-rate automatically changes
to 96 kbit/s.
Analogue
Analogue audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
Digital
Digital audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
SDI Embedded 1
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 2
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 3
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
SDI Embedded 4
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
Coding Standard Option
This option controls the audio coding standard. The options available in the
audio menu are dependent on the coding standard selected.
Table 4.62: Coding Standard Options
Selected Option
Description
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard.
AC-3 Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded (in Dolby Encoder) AC-3 audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby E Pass-Thru
Dolby E audio coding standard (pre-encoded in Dolby Encoder). See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio coding standard.
DTS Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded DTS audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information when
using this mode.
Linear PCM (Direct)
Linear PCM audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information.
Linear PCM (Via SRC)
When selected, the audio passes through the sample rate converter before encoding. As a
consequence, any user data bits in the incoming digital audio stream are lost. Audio passes
through the SRC for all input sources i.e. Embedded, Digital, Analogue (though not really
relevant for analogue).
Audio Alignment
Setting this to Aligned ensures each PES packet contains an integral
number of audio frames (which is required by some set-top boxes).
Page 4-70
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Lip Sync Adjustment
NOTE…
This option is only available when the Audio Alignment option is enabled.
Using the Lip Sync Adjustment option, audio can be advanced by 1 or 2
frames to compensate for the audio encoder delay and 1 frame as the
decoder expects the audio a frame before the video. Table 4.63 shows the
option.
Table 4.63: Lip Sync Adjustment Options
Selected Option
Description
-1 frame
When Audio Alignment is enabled, the audio
delay can be nudged as indicated. The
default is 0.
0
+1 frame
+2 frames
Input Level L Option
This indicates the input level of the left audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Input Level R Option
This indicates the input level of the right audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Audio Bit-rate Option
This option sets the audio bit-rate of this audio channel.
Table 4.64: Audio Bit-rate Options (Dolby Digital (AC-3))
Available
Settings
1/0(C)
2/0(L,R)
32 kbit/s
48 kbit/s
56 kbit/s
64 kbit/s
80 kbit/s
96 kbit/s
112 kbit/s
128 kbit/s
160 kbit/s
192 kbit/s
224 kbit/s
256 kbit/s
320 kbit/s
Dolby Digital
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-71
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Available
Settings
1/0(C)
2/0(L,R)
384 kbit/s
448 kbit/s
512 kbit/s
576 kbit/s
640 kbit/s
Dolby Digital
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Coding Mode Option
This option sets the audio coding mode. If the current audio bit-rate is
outside the bit-rate range supported by the new coding mode, the bit-rate
is automatically changed to the lowest value within the supported range.
Table 4.65: Coding Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
1/0(C) (Left)
Single channel mono audio, encoding the left channel.
1/0(C) (Right)
Single channel mono audio, encoding the right channel.
2/0(L,R)
Dual channel stereo audio coding.
Joint Stereo
Auto Lip Sync Option11
This option controls whether the Encoder automatically adjusts the audio
delay to maintain lip sync with the video. If the Encoder is being controlled
via SNMP by a control system that has auto lip sync functionality, then this
should be set to off.
See the text underneath Table 4.16 on page 4-30 for use of this facility.
Lip Sync Offset Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to On. It
allows a fixed delay to be applied to the audio in addition to the auto lip
sync delay.
Table 4.66: Lip Sync Offset Options
11
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Lip Sync Offset in milliseconds.
-50
50
To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre-encoded audio, use the option card M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2.
Page 4-72
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Audio Delay Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off. It sets
the delay that should be applied to the audio.
Table 4.67: Audio Delay Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Audio Delay in milliseconds.
111
3540
Use Minimum Delay
This sets the lowest possible audio delay.
If this option is set to ON, the Auto Lip Sync and Audio Delay options are
unavailable.
Actual Audio Delay
Shows the actual audio delay. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Sampling Rate Option
This option controls the audio sampling rate.
Clip Level Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the audio clip level to be set. That is the head room above 0 dBu
prior to the audio being clipped.
NOTE…
The clip levels available depend on the hardware issue of the Encoder.
Table 4.68: Clip Level Options
Selected Option
Description
12 dB
12 dB audio clipping level.
15 dB
15 dB is only available with PCB issue 4 and later.
18 dB
18 dB audio clipping level.
21 dB
21 dB audio clipping level.
22 dB
22 dB audio clipping level.
24 dB
24 dB audio clipping level.
Impedance Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the input impedance of the analogue audio input to be set to
either 600 Ω or 20 kΩ.
Language Option
This enables the language of the audio channel to be set.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-73
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Bit Stream Mode Option
This option sets the bit-stream mode that is signalled in the bit-stream. It
is used to indicate the type of service the bit-stream conveys.
Table 4.69: Bit Stream Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Complete Main
Music & Effects
Visually impaired
Hearing impaired
Dialogue
Commentary
Emergency
Reserved
Voice Over/Karaoke
In Dolby Digital when the coding mode is 1/0 this option
appears as ‘Voice Over’ otherwise as ‘Karaoke’.
Dialogue Level Option
This option sets the dialogue level that the Encoder will signal in the
bit-stream. The dialogue level indicates how far the average dialogue level
is below digital 100%. It is not used by the AC-3 decoder, but may be used
by other parts of the sound reproduction system.
Table 4.70: Dialogue Level Options
Selected Option
Description
–1 dB to –31 dB
Dialogue levels between –1 dB to –31 dB.
Dolby Srnd Mode Option
This option is only available if the coding mode is 2/0(L,R). It determines
whether the bit-stream is signalled as conveying a Dolby Surround
encoded program or not. This information is not used by the AC-3
Decoder, but may be used by other parts of the sound reproduction
system.
Table 4.71: Dolby Srnd Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Not indicated
It is not known if the bit-stream is conveying a Dolby Surround
encoded program.
Not Dolby Surround
The bit-stream is not conveying a Dolby Surround encoded
program.
Dolby Surround
The bit-stream is conveying a Dolby Surround encoded
program.
Production Info Option
This option indicates whether the Mixing Level and Room Type parameters
exist within the bit-stream.
Page 4-74
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Mixing Level Option
This option is only available if the Production Info option is set to On. This
parameter indicates the acoustic sound pressure level of the dialogue level
during the final audio mixing session. This makes it possible for the
program to be replayed at the same loudness, or at a known difference
from the original. Refer to ATSC Doc. A52 for further details.
Table 4.72: Mixing Level Options
Selected Option
Description
0 dB to 31 dB
Mixing levels between 0 dB to 31 dB.
Room Type Option
This option is only available if the Production Info option is set to On. This
parameter indicates the type and calibration of the mixing room used for
the final audio mixing session. Refer to ATSC Doc. A52 for further details.
Table 4.73: Room Type Options
Selected Option
Description
Not Indicated
Small, Flat Mon
Type and calibration of the mixing room used
Large, X Curve Mon
for the final audio mixing session.
Copyright Option
This controls the Copyright flag in the bit-stream. If set to On the
bit-stream is shown to be protected by copyright.
Original Option
This controls the setting of the Original flag in the bit-stream. If set to On
the bit-stream will be signalled as an original, if set to Off the bit-stream
will be signalled as a copy of an original bit-stream.
Dynamic Range Option
The dynamic range of audio material can vary according to its origin. This
function determines which compression profile is applied to the encoding
process.
The dynamic range compression profile determines the characteristic curve
of the dynamic range compression algorithm (each profile has its own
boost, null-band and cut parameters).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-75
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Table 4.74: Dynamic Range Options
Selected Option
Description
None
Program reproduction with the original dynamic range.
Film Standard
Film Light
Music Standard
Music Light
Speech
RF Protection Option
This option enables or disables RF Overmodulation Protection. It is used in
situations where the audio signal of a decoded AC-3 bit-stream is delivered
via a link with very restricted dynamic range. One example is the case of a
television broadcast, where sound is modulated onto an RF channel and
delivered to a low cost television Receiver.
In this situation it is necessary to restrict the maximum peak output level
to a known value with respect to dialogue level, in order to prevent
overmodulation.
De-emphasis Option
This option is turned on in order to de-emphasise pre-emphasised audio
input into the Encoder.
To meet the MPEG Layer 2 audio encoding algorithm specification, the
audio must not have pre-emphasis applied. If the input signal does have
pre-emphasis applied, a de-emphasis filtering process must be applied
prior to encoding.
For a digital audio input, pre-emphasis detection is typically achieved by
monitoring the pre-emphasis flags within the channel status data of the
incoming digital audio signal. The de-emphasis is automatically adjusted
when the Encoder is set to Auto.
For an analogue audio signal, the user must manually select the
appropriate de-emphasis filter.
DC Filter Option
This option turns on or off a dc high pass filter in the input channel.
Removing the dc component can allow more efficient coding. However,
there is a risk that signals that do not reach 100% PCM level before high
pass filtering, will exceed 100% level after filtering and therefore be
clipped.
Low Pass Filter Option
This option is used to enable or disable a low-pass filter in the audio input
which has a cut-off near the specified bandwidth of the audio channel.
Embedded Source Option
This option defines the embedded source. Select HD-SDI or SD-SDI.
Page 4-76
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Embedded 1-2 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 1 and SDI Embedded 2. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Table 4.75: Embedded 1-2 DID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
Max:
Other:
Off
Select DID
Default DID
0
1023
>1023
Embedded 3-4 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 3 and SDI Embedded 4. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Audio PID Option
This option sets the PID to be used for the audio channel. In the event of a
PID clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder’s internal
checking algorithm.
To be DVB compliant the audio PID should not be less than 32. However it
is possible to set the PID to less than 32, but in the event of a PID clash
the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm will not resolve the conflict.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this audio
stream.
PCR On Audio PID Option
This option controls whether PCR should be signalled on the audio PID.
This may be necessary if an audio only service is being generated. The
default setting is Off.
OP Digital Loss
This option controls behaviour digital audio is not locked.
Table 4.76: OP Digital Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
Silence
Valid PES stream containing silence
No PID
No Audio PES stream (though stream is still refernced in SI)
No ASI O/P
The ASI output of the Encoder is turned off
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-77
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Hardware Release Option
This option indicates the hardware version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
Software Release Option
This option indicates the software version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
4.7.4
Audio (Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E Pass-thru
and DTS Pass-thru) Menu
Source Option
This option defines the audio source.
Table 4.77: Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI.
Digital
Digital audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
SDI Embedded 1
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 2
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 3
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
SDI Embedded 4
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
Coding Standard Option
This option controls the audio coding standard. The options available in the
audio menu are dependent on the coding standard selected.
Table 4.78: Coding Standard Options
Selected Option
Description
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard.
AC-3 Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded (in Dolby Encoder) AC-3 audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby E Pass-Thru
Dolby E audio coding standard (pre-encoded in Dolby Encoder). See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio coding standard.
DTS Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded DTS audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information when
using this mode.
Linear PCM (Direct)
Linear PCM audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information.
Linear PCM (Via SRC)
When selected, the audio passes through the sample rate converter before encoding. As a
consequence, any user data bits in the incoming digital audio stream are lost. Audio passes
through the SRC for all input sources i.e. Embedded, Digital, Analogue (though not really
relevant for analogue).
Audio Alignment (Dolby E only)
When checked, Auto Lip Sync is forced On, the delay can be ‘nudged’
using the Lip Sync Adjustment option.
Page 4-78
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E Pass-thru and DTS Pass-thru
When set, each PES contains an integral number of audio access units
(AU’s) and the PTS shall be the same as the nearest video frame.
This is to support the SMPTE 302M-2002 specification for carriage of AES3
data in an MPEG transport stream. It provides one audio PES packet per
video frame, such that the PES packet is aligned to that video frame and
stamped with the same PTS.
NOTE…
Choose the Audio Alignment option to enable the SMPTE 302M 2002 standard. This disables the
SMPTE 302M Standard option.
Lip Sync Adjustment
NOTE…
This option is only available when the Audio Alignment option is enabled.
Using the Lip Sync Adjustment option, audio can be advanced by 1 or 2
frames to compensate for the audio encoder delay and 1 frame as the
decoder expects the audio a frame before the video. Table 4.63 shows the
option.
Table 4.79: Lip Sync Adjustment Options
Selected Option
Description
-1 frame
0
+1 frame
When Audio Alignment is enabled, the audio
delay can be nudged as indicated. The
default is 0.
+2 frames
Audio Bit-rate Option
This option shows the audio bit-rate of this audio channel. It is for status
only and cannot be changed.
Auto Lip Sync Option12
This option controls whether the Encoder automatically adjusts the audio
delay to maintain lip sync with the video. If the Encoder is being controlled
via SNMP by a control system that has auto lip sync functionality, then this
should be set to off.
See the text underneath Table 4.16 on page 4-30 for use of this facility.
Use Minimum Delay
This sets the lowest possible audio delay.
If this option is set to ON, the Auto Lip Sync and Audio Delay options are
unavailable.
12
To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre-encoded audio, use the option card M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-79
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E Pass-thru and DTS Pass-thru
Lip Sync Offset Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to On. It
allows a fixed delay to be applied to the audio in addition to the auto lip
sync delay.
Table 4.80: Lip Sync Offset Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Lip Sync Offset in milliseconds.
-50
50
Audio Delay Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off. It sets
the delay that should be applied to the audio.
Table 4.81: Audio Delay Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Audio Delay in milliseconds.
111
3540
Actual Audio Delay
Shows the actual audio delay. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
Language Option
This enables the language of the audio channel to be set.
SMPTE 302M Standard Option
This option is only available if the coding standard is Dolby E Pass-thru.
SMPTE 302M defines the mapping of AES3 data into an MPEG-2 transport
stream. Problems may be experienced with some Receivers if the Encoder
and Receiver are not using the same version of SMPTE 302M. This option
allows the Encoder to be configured to work in either the 1998 or the 2000
version of SMPTE 302M.
Table 4.82: SMPTE 302M Standard Options
Selected Option
Description
1998 Standard
Refers to the 1998 SMPTE 302M standard.
2000 Standard
Refers to the 2000 SMPTE 302M standard.
Channel Option
This option is only available if the coding standard is Dolby E Pass-thru. It
controls the value written to the channel identification field in the
(SMPTE 302M) AES3 data elementary stream header.
Page 4-80
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E Pass-thru and DTS Pass-thru
Table 4.83: Channel Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
This value is written to the channel identification field in
the (SMPTE 302M) AES3 data elementary stream
header.
0
15
Embedded Source Option
This option defines the embedded source. Select HD-SDI or SD-SDI.
Embedded 1-2 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 1 and SDI Embedded 2. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Table 4.84: Embedded 1-2 DID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
Max:
Other:
Off
Select DID
Default DID
0
1023
>1023
Embedded 3-4 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 3 and SDI Embedded 4. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Audio PID Option
This option sets the PID to be used for the audio channel. In the event of a
PID clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder’s internal
checking algorithm.
To be DVB compliant the audio PID should not be less than 32. However it
is possible to set the PID to less than 32, but in the event of a PID clash
the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm will not resolve the conflict.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this audio
stream.
PCR On Audio PID Option
This option controls whether PCR should be signalled on the audio PID.
This may be necessary if an audio only service is being generated. The
default setting is Off.
OP Digital Loss
This option controls behaviour digital audio is not locked.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-81
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Dolby (AC-3) Pass-thru, Dolby E Pass-thru and DTS Pass-thru
Table 4.85: OP Digital Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
Silence
Valid PES stream containing silence
No PID
No Audio PES stream (though stream is still refernced in SI)
No ASI O/P
The ASI output of the Encoder is turned off
Hardware Release Option
This option indicates the hardware version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
Software Release Option
This option indicates the software version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
4.7.5
Audio (Linear PCM [Direct][Via SRC]) Menu
Source Option
This option defines the audio source.
Table 4.86: Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI.
Mute
Audio silence.
Test Tone
An internally generated test tone is used as the audio source. The bit-rate automatically changes
to 96 kbit/s.
Analogue
Analogue audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
Digital
Digital audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
SDI Embedded 1
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 2
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF (SD), 0x2E7 (HD)
SDI Embedded 3
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
SDI Embedded 4
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD (SD), 0x1E6 (HD)
Coding Standard Option
This option controls the audio coding standard. The options available in the
audio menu are dependent on the coding standard selected.
Table 4.87: Coding Standard Options
Page 4-82
Selected Option
Description
MPEG Layer 2
MPEG Layer 2 audio coding standard.
AC-3 Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded (in Dolby Encoder) AC-3 audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby E Pass-Thru
Dolby E audio coding standard (pre-encoded in Dolby Encoder). See Annex F, Audio Modes, for
information when using this mode.
Dolby Digital (AC-3)
Dolby Digital (AC-3) audio coding standard.
DTS Pass-Thru
Pre-encoded DTS audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information when
using this mode.
Linear PCM (Direct)
Linear PCM audio coding standard. See Annex F, Audio Modes, for information when using this
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
mode.
Linear PCM (Via SRC)
When selected, the audio passes through the sample rate converter before encoding. As a
consequence, any user data bits in the incoming digital audio stream are lost. Audio passes
through the SRC for all input sources i.e. Embedded, Digital, Analogue (though not really
relevant for analogue).
Audio Alignment
When checked, Auto Lip Sync is forced On, the delay can be ‘nudged’
using the Lip Sync Adjustment option.
When set, each PES contains an integral number of audio access units
(AU’s) and the PTS shall be the same as the nearest video frame.
This is to support the SMPTE 302M-2002 specification for carriage of AES3
data in an MPEG transport stream. It provides one audio PES packet per
video frame, such that the PES packet is aligned to that video frame and
stamped with the same PTS.
NOTE…
Choose the Audio Alignment option to enable the SMPTE 302M 2002 standard. This disables the
SMPTE 302M Standard option.
Lip Sync Adjustment
NOTE…
This option is only available when the Audio Alignment option is enabled.
Using the Lip Sync Adjustment option, audio can be advanced by 1 or 2
frames to compensate for the audio encoder delay and 1 frame as the
decoder expects the audio a frame before the video. Table 4.63 shows the
option.
Table 4.88: Lip Sync Adjustment Options
Selected Option
Description
-1 frame
0
+1 frame
When Audio Alignment is enabled, the audio
delay can be nudged as indicated. The
default is 0.
+2 frames
Input Level L Option
This indicates the input level of the left audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Input Level R Option
This indicates the input level of the right audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-83
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
Coding Mode Option
This option sets the audio coding mode. If the current audio bit-rate is
outside the bit-rate range supported by the new coding mode, the bit-rate
is automatically changed to the lowest value within the supported range.
Table 4.89: Coding Mode Options (Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC])
Selected Option
Description
Dual Mono
Dual channel mono audio. Both mono channels are transmitted in the same PID.
Stereo
Dual channel stereo audio.
Auto Lip Sync Option13
This option controls whether the Encoder automatically adjusts the audio
delay to maintain lip sync with the video. If the Encoder is being controlled
via SNMP by a control system that has auto lip sync functionality, then this
should be set to off.
See the text underneath Table 4.16 on page 4-30 for use of this facility.
Lip Sync Offset Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to On. It
allows a fixed delay to be applied to the audio in addition to the auto lip
sync delay.
Table 4.90: Lip Sync Offset Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Lip Sync Offset in milliseconds.
-50
50
Use Minimum Delay
This sets the lowest possible audio delay.
If this option is set to ON, the Auto Lip Sync and Audio Delay options are
unavailable.
Audio Delay Option
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off. It sets
the delay that should be applied to the audio.
Table 4.91: Audio Delay Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Audio Delay in milliseconds.
111
3540
Actual Audio Delay
Shows the actual audio delay. It is for status only and cannot be changed.
13
To ensure correct lip sync when working with linear or pre-encoded audio, use the option card M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2.
Page 4-84
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
Clip Level Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the audio clip level to be set. That is, the head room above 0 dBu
prior to the audio being clipped.
NOTE…
The clip levels available depend on the hardware issue of the Encoder.
Table 4.92: Clip Level Options
Selected Option
Description
12 dB
12 dB audio clipping level.
15 dB
15 dB is only available with PCB issue 4 and later.
18 dB
18 dB audio clipping level.
21 dB
21 dB audio clipping level.
22 dB
22 dB audio clipping level.
24 dB
24 dB audio clipping level.
Impedance Option
This option is only displayed if the audio source is set to analogue. It
enables the input impedance of the analogue audio input to be set to
either 600 Ω or 20 kΩ.
Language or Language Left/Right Option
This enables the language of the audio channel to be set. If the coding
mode is dual mono, then a different language can be set for the left and
right channels.
SMPTE 302M Standard Option
SMPTE 302M defines the mapping of AES3 data in to an MPEG-2 transport
stream. Problems may be experienced with some Receivers if the Encoder
and Receiver are not using the same version of SMPTE 302M. This option
allows the Encoder to be configured to work in either the 1998 or the 2000
version of SMPTE 302M.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-85
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
Table 4.93: SMPTE 302M Standard Options
Selected Option
Description
1998 Standard
Refers to the 1998 SMPTE 302M standard.
2000 Standard
Refers to the 2000 SMPTE 302M standard.
Channel Option
This option controls the value written to the channel identification field in
the (SMPTE 302M) AES3 data elementary stream header.
Table 4.94: Channel Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
This value is written to the channel identification field in the
(SMPTE 302M) AES3 data elementary stream header.
0
15
Embedded Source Option
This option defines the embedded source. Select HD-SDI or SD-SDI.
Embedded 1-2 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 1 and SDI Embedded 2. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Table 4.95: Embedded 1-2 DID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
Max:
Other:
Off
Select DID
Default DID
0
1023
>1023
Embedded 3-4 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 3 and SDI Embedded 4. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Audio PID Option
This option sets the PID to be used for the audio channel. In the event of a
PID clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder’s internal
checking algorithm.
To be DVB compliant the audio PID should not be less than 32. However it
is possible to set the PID to less than 32, but in the event of a PID clash
the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm will not resolve the conflict.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this audio
stream.
Page 4-86
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
PCR On Audio PID Option
This option controls whether PCR should be signalled on the audio PID.
This may be necessary if an audio only service is being generated. The
default setting is Off.
OP Digital Loss
This option controls behaviour digital audio is not locked.
Table 4.96: OP Digital Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
Silence
Valid PES stream containing silence
No PID
No Audio PES stream (though stream is still refernced in SI)
No ASI O/P
The ASI output of the Encoder is turned off
Hardware Release Option
This option indicates the hardware version of this audio encode channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
Software Release Option
This option indicates the software version of this audio encoder channel. It
is for status only and cannot be changed.
4.7.6
Audio Languages Menu
The Audio Languages Menu is selected from the Audio Menu. This menu
permits the selection of languages used in the MPEG broadcast.
English is the default language and cannot be changed. Those other
languages which have an asterisk (*) next to them are selected for use,
those without an asterisk are not. To select/deselect a language press the
softkey nearest to it. The asterisk is turned on and off. There are over forty
languages to choose from in addition to two User Defined Language
options where the User can input and use their own three-letter codes.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-87
Operating the Equipment Locally — Setup Menu: Audio Menu - Linear PCM [Direct]/via SRC] Menu
4.7.7
Advanced Audio Coding (M2/EOM/ADVAUD)
Overview
The Advanced Audio Coding Menu is selected from the Audio Menu. See
Figure 4.13 for the menu structure.
NOTE…
Further status information can be displayed when accessing the menus via a Tenet session.
Input Source Option
This option defines the audio source.
Table 4.97: Input Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
No audio packets are sent in the transport stream and audio is removed from the SI.
Mute
Audio silence.
Test Tone
An internally generated test tone. The bit-rate automatically changes to 96 kbit/s.
Digital
Digital audio input on AUDIO IN connector.
SDI Embedded 1
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF.
SDI Embedded 2
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x2FF.
SDI Embedded 3
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD.
SDI Embedded 4
Digital audio de-embedded from digital video input using DID 0x1FD.
These are default
DIDs
Coding Standard Option
This item is status only and has one value: AAC (Advanced Audio Coding).
Bit-rate Option
This option sets the audio bit-rate of this audio channel.
Table 4.98: Bit-rate Options
Available Settings
64 kbit/s
80 kbit/s
96 kbit/s
112 kbit/s
128 kbit/s
160 kbit/s
192 kbit/s
224 kbit/s
256 kbit/s
Page 4-88
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Advanced Audio Coding (M2/EOM/ADVAUD)
Setup
Menu
Shaded options are showing status and
cannot be changed.
Audio
Menu
— Advanced Audio A.... 
— Advanced Audio B.... 
— Advanced Audio C.... 
— Advanced Audio D.... 
— Audio A....
— Audio B....
— Audio Languages
Advanced
Audio
Menu
3/2L(L,C,R,Ls, Rs,LFE)
3/2(L,C,R,Ls,Rs)
2/0 (L,R)
1+1
Advanced Audio…
Coding Mode
A
3
3
3
3
B
2
2
3
3
C
2
2
3
3
D
3
3
3
3
— Input Source
— Coding Standard
— Bit-rate
— Coding Mode
— PID
— PCR in Audio PID
— Delay
— Auto Lip Sync
— Use Minimum Delay
— Language
— O/P on Digital I/P Loss
— Temporal Noise Shaping
— ADTS CRC
— Copyright
— Original
— Embedded 1– 2 DID
— Embedded 3– 4 DID
— OP Digital Loss
— Level [L] -------------— Level [R] -------------— DSP Codec Id
— Component Tag
Figure 4.13: Advanced Audio Coding Menu
Coding Mode Option
This option sets the audio coding mode. If the current audio bit-rate is
outside the bit-rate range supported by the new coding mode, the bit-rate
is automatically changed to the lowest value within the supported range.
Table 4.99: Coding Mode Options (AAC)
Selected Option
Description
2/0 (L,R)
Option Availability
A
B
C
D
Stereo: 64, 80, 96, 128, 192 kbit/s
3
3
3
3
3/2(L,C,R,Ls,Rs)
Multi-channel: 320, 384 kbit/s
3
2
2
2
3/2L(L,C,R,Ls, Rs,LFE)
Multi-channel: 320, 384 kbit/s
3
2
2
2
1+1
Mono: 64, 80, 96, 128, 192 kbit/s
3
3
3
3
When a multi-channel coding mode is selected, the channels are presented
to the module inputs as follows:
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-89
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Advanced Audio Coding (M2/EOM/ADVAUD)
Table 4.100: Coding Mode Options (AAC)
Coding Mode
Channel
Input
5.1
7.1
A
A
Front L+R
B
B
Center + Subwoofer
C
C
Surround L + R
-
D
Rear L + R
PID
This option sets the PID to be used for the audio channel. In the event of a
PID clash, one of the PIDs will be changed by the Encoder’s internal
checking algorithm.
To be DVB compliant the audio PID should not be less than 32. However it
is possible to set the PID to less than 32, but in the event of a PID clash
the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm will not resolve the conflict.
PCR On Audio PID Option
This option controls whether PCR should be signalled on the audio PID.
This may be necessary if an audio only service is being generated. The
default setting is Off.
Delay
This option is only available if the Auto Lip Sync option is set to Off. It sets
the delay that should be applied to the audio.
Table 4.101: Audio Delay Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
Max:
Audio Delay in milliseconds.
111
3540
Auto Lip Sync Option
This option controls whether the Encoder automatically adjusts the audio
delay to maintain lip sync with the video. If the Encoder is being controlled
via SNMP by a control system that has auto lip sync functionality, then this
should be set to off.
See the text underneath Table 4.16 on page 4-30 for use of this facility.
Use Minimum Delay
This sets the lowest possible audio delay.
If this option is set to ON, the Auto Lip Sync and Audio Delay options are
unavailable.
Page 4-90
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Advanced Audio Coding (M2/EOM/ADVAUD)
Language or Language Left/Right Option
This enables the language of the audio channel to be set. If the coding
mode is dual mono, then a different language can be set for the left and
right channels.
OP on Digital I/P Loss
This option controls behaviour digital audio is not locked.
Table 4.102: OP on Digital I/P Loss Options
Selected Option
Description
Silence
Valid PES stream containing silence
No PID
No Audio PES stream (though stream is still refernced in SI)
No ASI O/P
The ASI output of the Encoder is turned off
Temporal Noise Shaping
This option is used to apply a filtering process to parts of the spectral data
of each channel to control the temporal shape of the quantization noise.
ADTS CRC
Write ADTS CRC (MPEG 2) - fixed to ON.
Copyright Option
This controls the Copyright flag in the bit-stream. If set to On the
bit-stream is shown to be protected by copyright.
Original Option
This controls the setting of the Original flag in the bit-stream. If set to On
the bit-stream will be signalled as an original, if set to Off the bit-stream
will be signalled as a copy of an original bit-stream.
Embedded 1-2 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 1 and SDI Embedded 2. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Table 4.103: Embedded 1-2 DID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
0
Max: 1023
Other: >1023
Off
Select DID
Default DID
Embedded 3-4 DID Option
This option defines the DID to be de-embedded to obtain the audio source
for SDI Embedded 3 and SDI Embedded 4. If this is set to 1024, then the
default DID will be used. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes for information
about DIDs.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-91
Operating the Equipment Locally: Audio Menu – Advanced Audio Coding (M2/EOM/ADVAUD)
Level [L] Option
This indicates the input level of the left audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Level [R] Option
This indicates the input level of the right audio channel. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this audio
stream.
Page 4-92
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Data Menu
4.8
Data Menu
4.8.1
Introduction
The Data Menu is selected from the Setup Menu. This menu permits the
selection of RS-232 asynchronous data and RS-422 synchronous data
channel parameters.
See Figure 4.14 for the menu structure.
Setup
Menu
Shaded options are showing status
and cannot be changed.
Data
Menu
— Data A - RS232....
— Data B - RS422....
— Data C – Ethernet Data…
Data C – Ethernet
Menu
Data B – RS422
Menu
— Encoding
— Port Number
— PID
— Pkts Received
— Pkts sent
Data A - RS232
Menu
— Encoding
— Bit-rate
— RS422 PID
— Component Tag
— Test Mode
— Delay
— D Mode
— SNMP oid index
— Version
— Encoding
— Baud-rate
— RS232 PID
— Component Tag
— Buffer Data
— Delay
— SNMP oid index
— O/P Bit-rate
— Locked Motorola
NOTE…
If Ethernet data is turned on it is not possible to turn RS232 data on, and vice-versa.
Figure 4.14: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Data Menu
4.8.2
Data A - RS232 Menu
Encoding Option
This option enables the RS-232 asynchronous data channel to be switched
On or Off. Table 4.104 shows the modes.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-93
Operating the Equipment Locally: Data Menu
Table 4.104: Data A – RS232 Encoding Option Modes
Selected Option
Description
Off
On(Wegener)
If On (Wegener) is selected, the stream is identified in the PMT as a component of type 0xC1
with no descriptors.
Wegener ASYNC data are transmitted as private stream 2 type data. This stream conforms to
ISO13818. The adaptation field is used to add stuffing bytes if needed to complete a TS packet.
Stuffing bytes are set to a value of 0xFF. Payload data bytes follow the packet length field and
do not include a CRC field.
On(Motorola)
If On (Motorola) is selected, the stream is identified in the PMT as a component of type 0xC0
with no descriptors. The RS232 data is encapsulated directly into the full 184 payload bytes of
the transport packets (i.e. no PES layer).
The RS-232 data-stream is expected to contain complete DCIIText packets. These packets must
be preceded by the sequence (0x7F, 0xFE, 0x7F, 0Xfe) followed by 2-bytes which contain the
length of the DCIIText packet. Once this sequence is detected, the optionj Locked Motorola
indicates Yes.
On(DVB)
This is the format specified by DVB
On(Tandberg)
This is a proprietary format
NOTE…
If Ethernet data is turned on it shall not be possible to turn RS232 data on.
Baud Rate Option
This option enables the baud rate of the RS-232 asynchronous data
channel to be set.
Table 4.105: Baud Rate Options
Selected Option
Description
Selected Option
Description
1200
1200 Baud rate.
9600
9600 Baud rate.
2400
2400 Baud rate.
19200
19200 Baud rate.
4800
4800 Baud rate.
38400
38400 Baud rate.
RS232 PID Option
This option is used for entering or updating data PIDs. To be DVB
compliant, PIDs below 32 are reserved. Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are
available for use. In the event of a clash, one of the PIDs will be changed
by the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this data
stream.
Buffer Data Option
Send immediately: Whenever data is available at the RS232 port it is sent
in the output transport stream.
Page 4-94
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Data Menu
NOTES…
1. This option is only available in Tandberg mode.
2. This can result in wasted bandwidth due to low packet occupancy. Also results in a higher packet
rate which may cause some receivers to overflow.
Delay Option
This option enables the Delay to be set. The option cannot be changed.
SNMP oid index Option
All option modules have the same SNMP oid (object identifier) with the
exception of one byte which identifies which slot the module is in. An MEM
expects the data module to be in slot two or three in the previous version
of the Encoder. Therefore, slots one and two in this Encoder have been
allocated to correspond directly to slots two and three in the previous
Encoder.
In this Encoder the data module can be allocated to slot one, making it
inaccessible to an MEM. This variable allows the on-board data module to
be apparently moved around - to a slot in which it may be referenced by
the MEM.
Table 4.106: SNMP oid index Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
Max:
Oid index
1
7
O/P Bit-rate Option
This option is for status only and indicates the output bit-rate.
4.8.3
Data B - RS422 Menu
Encoding Option
This option enables the RS-422 synchronous data channel to be switched
On or Off.
Bit-rate Option
This option enables the bit-rate of the RS-422 synchronous data channel to
be set.
Table 4.107: Bit-rate Options
Selected Option
Description
Settings cycle from 56 to 1792 in steps of 56 then from 64 to
2048 in steps of 64, then back to 56
RS-422 synchronous data
channel bit-rate.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-95
Operating the Equipment Locally: Data Menu
RS422 PID Option
This option is used for entering or updating data PIDs. To be DVB
compliant, PIDs below 32 are reserved. Therefore PIDs 32 to 8191 are
available for use. In the event of a clash, one of the PIDs will be changed
by the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm.
Component Tag Option
This item defines the optional component tag to be assigned to this data
stream.
Test Mode Option
This option is used for turning the test mode On and Off.
Delay Option
The Delay option cannot be changed.
D Mode Option
The D Mode option cannot be changed.
SNMP oid index Option
See Delay Option on page 4-95 for details of this option.
Version Option
This option indicates the version of the data. It is for status only and
cannot be changed.
4.8.4
Data C – Ethernet Menu
Licence Key
This option is only available if the M2/EOM2/EthernetData licence key is
purchased otherwise, packets arriving over the Ethernet are ignored.
It is only possible for the Encoder to accept either RS232 data or Ethernet
data.
Encoding
NOTES…
1. Delivery of packets is not guaranteed. The maximum data-rate is 100 kbit/s.
2. It is only possible to turn this option on if RS232 data is turned off.
Page 4-96
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally Data Menu
Table 4.108: Encoding Options
Selected Option
Description
On(BissKeys)
Similar to On(TSPkt Data), additionally, aCA descriptor is placed in the CAT.
CA_System_ID=0x1001. The CA PID is set; there is no check that the PID entered
corresponds to the PID of the packets being received over Ethernet.
On(VRNav Data)
The Encoder accepts data, as DCIIText messages containing VRNav data packets,
coming in as UDP datagrams on its Ethernet port.
The Encoder will packetise the data into Transport Packets and set TS header bits –
Packet Start is set for each TS packet containing the start of a DCIIText packet.
On (TSPkt Data)
When selected, the Encoder expects pre-formed transport stream packets, one per
UDP packet.
Off
Port Number
This is the IP Port number. Valid selections are in the range 0 to 65535
(the default is 1000).
PID
Possible values are 0x0001 – 0x1FFE (the default is 0x100).
NOTE…
The PID option is not relevant for On(TSPkt Data).
Pkts Received
Shows the number of packets received on the port.
Pkts Sent
Shows the number of packets put on to the transport stream.
Alarm Screen
An Alarm is raised if Ethernet packets are discarded because the playout
FIFO is full i.e. if incoming rate is too high. The default is that this is NOT
masked.
4.9
Output Menu
4.9.1
Overview
The Output Menu is selected from the Setup Menu. This menu permits the
selection of the output parameters. See Figure 4.15 for the menu
structure.
4.9.2
Output Format Option
Access the Output Format option from the Output Menu. The menus
available depend upon which option cards are fitted to the unit.
If the Output Format option = ASI then the following menu option is
Delivery Descriptor, otherwise it is the menu associated with the output
format selected, i.e. satellite modulator, OFDM modulator or IP Output.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-97
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
4.9.3
Delivery Descriptor Menu
Access the Delivery Descriptor Menu from the Output Menu. The
screens in this menu vary according to the Descriptor Type selected.
4.9.4
Descriptor Type Option
Access the Descriptor Type option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the descriptor type to be specified.
Table 4.109: Descriptor Type Options
Selected Option
Description
Comments
Satellite
Descriptor type set to Satellite.
Terrestrial
Descriptor type set to Terrestrial.
The type of delivery descriptor
selected affects the remaining
options shown on the Delivery
Descriptor Menu.
None
Cable
Page 4-98
Descriptor type set to Cable.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
Setup
Menu
Output
Menu
Output Format...
IP Streamer...
G703...
Output Format...
Satellite Modulator...
IP Streamer
Menu
Output Format...
Delivery Descriptor...
Satellite
Modulator
Delivery
Descriptor Menu
Descriptor
— Own IP Address
— Network Mask
Menu options depend on
L-Band Output
IF Output
Descriptor Type
— Router IP Address
— IP Output
TS Input Source
TS Input Source
— Protocol/Pro MPEG FEC
Rate Adaptation
IF Output
— TS Pkts/UDP Frm
L-Band Output
IF Power
Cable
Satellite
— Nbr of Cols
L-Band Power
IF Frequency Terrestrial
— Nbr of Rows
Bananne1.Servicel
Frequency
Frequency
L-Band Frequency
Modulation
— Destination 0 IP Addr
Frequency 1
Modulation Type
Modulation Type
Modulation
Mod Type
— Destination 0 UDP Port
Bandwidth 1
FEC (Outer)
FEC (Inner)
Mod Type
Symbol Rate
— Destination 1 IP Addr
Modulation Type
FEC (Inner)
Symbol Rate
Symbol Rate
FEC Rate
— Destination 1 UDP Port
Hierarchy
Symbol Rate
Orbital Position
FEC Rate
Spectrum Sense
— Destination 2 IP Addr
FEC (HP)
West East
Spectrum Sense
Roll Off Factor
— Destination 2 UDP Port
FEC (LP)
Polarisation
Roll Off Factor
Tx Bandwidth Factor
— Destination 3 IP Addr
Guard Interval
Tx Bandwidth Factor
Tx Bandwidth
— Destination 3 UDP Port
Carriers
Tx Bandwidth
Bit-rate (188)
— Time to Live
Other Frequency
Bit-rate (188)
Bit-rate (204)
— Type of Service
Bit-rate (204)
Preset Pwr Low
— Line Mode
Preset Pwr Low
Preset Pwr Norm
— Software version
Preset Pwr Norm
Sat Deliv Freq
BUC DC Power
Sat Orb Pos
1 This option is status only unless Manual option
G.703
Sat Deliv Freq
Sat West/East
has been selected in the Band Plan
Menu
Sat Orb Pos
Polarisation
Sat West/East
Baseband (BB) Card
Polarisation
BB PCB Revision
PDH Rate
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be
Baseband (BB) Card
BB Mod Status
Framing
changed.
BB PCB Revision
BB Serial No.
DS-3 Signal Level Out
BB Mod Status
BB S/W Release
Reed- Solomon
BB Serial No.
BB CPLD F/W Release
Interleaver
BB S/W Release
BB DSP F/W Release
Randomizer
BB CPLD F/W Release
BB RNF F/W Release
Clock Mode
BB DSP F/W Release
IF Card Type
Direction
BB RNF F/W Release
DPC Card Type
Mode
L-Band Card Type
Reset
DPC Card Type
MPEG Input Row
BUC LO Frequency
Output Rate
Transmit Frequency
Alarm Status
BUC 10MHz Ref O/P
Show Config Status Differences
NOTE…
Refer to Annex K for details of Pro MPEG FEC for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders.
Figure 4.15: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Output Menu
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-99
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
4.9.5
Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
Band Plan Option
Access the Band Plan option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
Once a country has been selected then the required channel should be
selected in the Channel option. Each channel number corresponds to a
particular frequency (see Annex E, Band Plans).
Table 4.110: Band Plan Options
Selected Option
Selected Option
Australia
Ireland
Europe VHF
South Africa
Europe CATV
French Overseas PIA
Italy
France
Morocco
Japan
New Zealand
USA
China
CCIR14
OIRT15
Manual
Channel Option
Access the Channel option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. Each
channel number corresponds to a particular frequency (see Annex E, Band
Plans).
Table 4.111: Channel Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Depends upon the country
selected.
See Annex E, Band Plans for the frequencies
associated with particular countries.
Frequency Option
Access the Frequency option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
enables the carrier frequency of the transmitter to be specified.
NOTES…
1. This option is not displayed if the unit is set to generate PSIP externally or it is under MEM
control.
2. This option is status only unless Manual has been selected in the Band Plan option.
14
CCIR is now know as International Telecommunications Union-Radiocommunications Study Groups.
Organisation that co-ordinated TV standards and programme interchange among the Eastern–block countries of
Europe.
15
Page 4-100
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
Table 4.112: Frequency Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
0.0001 MHz
Max: 42949.6729 MHz
Step Size: 0.0001 MHz
Carrier frequency of transmitter.
Bandwidth Option
Access the Bandwidth option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
enables the channel spacing of the terrestrial transmitter to be specified.
NOTE…
This option is status only unless Manual has been selected in the Band Plan option.
Table 4.113: Bandwidth Options
Selected Option
Description
6 MHz
Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 6 MHz.
7 MHz
Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 7 MHz.
8 MHz
Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 8 MHz.
10 MHz
Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 10 MHz.
12 MHz
Terrestrial transmitter channel spacing is 12 MHz.
Modulation Type Option
Access the Modulation Type option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the type of modulation used to be specified.
Table 4.114: Modulation Type Options
Selected Option
Description
QPSK
Terrestrial transmitter uses QPSK modulation.
16QAM
Terrestrial transmitter uses 16QAM modulation.
64QAM
Terrestrial transmitter uses 64QAM modulation.
Hierarchy Option
Access the Hierarchy option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
screen enables the hierarchy of the terrestrial transmission to be specified.
Table 4.115: Hierarchy Options
Selected Option
Description
Non-Hierarchical
Terrestrial transmission is not hierarchical.
Alpha=1
Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical, and the α value = 1.
Alpha=2
Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical, and the α value = 2.
Alpha=4
Terrestrial transmission is hierarchical, and the α value = 4.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-101
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
FEC (HP) and FEC (LP) Options
Access the FEC (HP) or the FEC (LP) option from the Delivery
Descriptor Menu. These screens enable the inner FEC schemes used by
the terrestrial transmitter to be specified.
NOTE…
If the Hierarchy option is set to Non-Hierarchical, then only the FEC Rate parameter is used and
shown on the display.
If the Hierarchy option is set to Alpha=n, then the FEC (HP) and
FEC (LP) parameters provide two levels of modulation. Transmission
starts with the code rate for the HP level of modulation and ends with the
code rate for the LP level.
The screen for the FEC (LP) option is the same except that (LP) replaces
(HP).
Table 4.116: FEC (HP) and FEC (LP) Options
Selected Option
Description
1/2
Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP/LP is 1/2.
2/3
Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP/LP is 2/3.
3/4
Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP/LP is 3/4.
5/6
Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP/LP is 5/6.
7/8
Terrestrial transmitter FEC rate HP/LP is 7/8.
Guard Interval Option
Access the Guard Interval option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the guard interval of the terrestrial transmitter to be
specified.
Table 4.117: Guard Interval Options
Selected Option
Description
1/4
Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1/4.
1/8
Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1/8.
1/16
Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1/16.
1/32
Terrestrial transmitter guard interval is 1/32.
Carriers Options
Access the Carriers option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
enables the transmission mode (i.e. number of carriers in an OFDM frame)
used by the terrestrial transmitter to be specified.
Page 4-102
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Terrestrial
Table 4.118: Carriers Options
Selected Option
Description
2k Mode
Terrestrial transmitter uses 2k transmission mode
(2k carriers in an OFDM frame).
8k Mode
Terrestrial transmitter uses 8k transmission mode
(8k carriers in an OFDM frame).
Other Frequency Option
Access the Other Frequency option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the flag which specifies whether other frequencies are in use
or not to be set.
Table 4.119: Other Frequency Options
4.9.6
Selected Option
Description
None
No other frequency is in use.
in use
One or more other frequencies are in use.
Descriptor Type = Cable
Frequency Option
See Frequency Option on page 4-100.
Modulation Type Option
Access the Modulation Type option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This screen enables the type of modulation used by the cable channel to be
specified.
Table 4.120: Modulation Type Options
Selected Option
Description
16QAM
Cable channel uses 16QAM modulation.
32QAM
Cable channel uses 32QAM modulation.
64QAM
Cable channel uses 64QAM modulation.
128QAM
Cable channel uses 128QAM modulation.
256QAM
Cable channel uses 256QAM modulation.
FEC (Outer) Option
Access the FEC (Outer) option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
screen enables the outer FEC rate used by the cable channel to be
specified.
Table 4.121: FEC (Outer) Options
Selected Option
Description
No outer FEC coding
Cable channel does not use outer FEC.
RS(204/188)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-103
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Cable
FEC (Inner) Option
Access the FEC (Inner) option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
screen enables the inner FEC rate used by the cable channel to be
specified.
Table 4.122: FEC (Inner) Options
Selected Option
Description
No conv. coding
Cable channel does not use inner FEC rate.
1/2
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 1/2.
2/3
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 2/3.
3/4
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 3/4.
5/6
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 5/6.
7/8
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 7/8.
8/9
Cable channel uses inner FEC rate of 8/9.
Symbol Rate Option
Access the Symbol Rate option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
Table 4.123: Symbol Rate Options
4.9.7
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0.4688 Msym/s
Max: 30.0000 Msym/s
Step Size: 0.0001 Msym/s
Symbol rate.
Changing the symbol rate affects the automatic Tx
bandwidth, video bit-rate and video resolution calculations.
Descriptor Type = Satellite
Frequency Option
See Frequency Option on page 4-100.
Modulation Type Option
Access the Modulation Type option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the type of modulation used by the satellite transponder to be
specified.
Table 4.124: Modulation Type Options
Selected Option
Description
8PSK
Satellite transponder uses 8PSK modulation.
16QAM
Satellite transponder uses 16QAM modulation.
BPSK
Satellite transponder uses BPSK modulation.
QPSK
Satellite transponder uses QPSK modulation.
FEC (Inner) Option
Access the FEC (Inner) option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
screen enables the inner FEC rate used by the satellite transponder to be
specified. See FEC (Inner) Option, page 4-104 for further details.
Page 4-104
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
Symbol Rate
See Symbol Rate Option on page 4-104.
Orbital Position Option
Access the Orbital Position option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu.
This enables the orbital position of the satellite to be specified.
Table 4.125: Orbital Position Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0.0°
Max:
360.0°
Step Size: 0.1°
If the specified orbital position is outside the valid input range, a
confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum/minimum
value allowed.
West East Option
Access the West East option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
enables the satellite west/east flag to be specified to indicate whether the
satellite position is in the western or eastern part of the orbit.
Table 4.126: West East Options
Selected Option
Description
West
Satellite position is in western part of the orbit.
East
Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit.
Polarisation Option
Access the Polarisation option from the Delivery Descriptor Menu. This
enables the polarisation of the satellite transponder to be specified.
Table 4.127: Polarisation Options
4.9.8
Selected Option
Description
Linear - Horizontal
Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal polarisation.
Linear - Vertical
Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation.
Circular - Left
Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation.
Circular - Right
Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation.
Output Format = Satellite Modulator (IF Output)
TS Input Source
This option determines the source of the transport stream.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-105
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
Table 4.128: TS Input Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Backplane
ASI1
ASI2
IF Output Option
Access the IF Output option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
enables the IF output to be switched On or Off.
IF Power Option
Access the IF Power option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.129: IF Power Options
Valid Input Range
Min:
Max:
Description
–20 dBm
5 dBm
IF Frequency Option
Access the IF Frequency option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
This setting allows the centre frequency of the IF output to be changed.
Table 4.130: IF Frequency Options
Valid Input Range
Min:
Max:
Description
50 MHz
180 MHz
Modulation Option
Access the Modulation option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
enables the Modulation to be switched On or Off.
Mod Type Option
Access the Mod(ulation) Type option from the Satellite Modulator
Menu. This enables the type of modulation used by the Satellite Modulator
to be specified.
Table 4.131: Modulation Type Options
Selected Option
Description
BPSK
Satellite modulator uses BPSK modulation.
QPSK
Satellite Modulator uses QPSK modulation.
8PSK
Satellite Modulator uses 8PSK modulation.
16QAM
Satellite Modulator uses 16QAM modulation.
NOTE…
The following software options must be purchased to enable the different modulation types;
M2/ESO2/LSYM for BPSK, M2/ESO2/SM38PSK for 8PSK, M2/ESO2/SM316QAM for 16QAM.
Page 4-106
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
Symbol Rate Option
Access the Symbol Rate option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.132: Symbol Rate Options
Valid Input Range
Min (Low Sym Rate):
Min:
Max:
Step Size:
Description
0.3000 Msym/s
1.0000 Msym/s
30.0000 Msym/s
0.0001 Msym/s
Minimum with low symbol rate option M2/ES02/LSYM.
Changing the symbol rate affects the automatic Tx bandwidth, video
bit-rate and video resolution calculations.
FEC Rate Option
Access the FEC Rate option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.133: FEC Rate Options
Selected Option
Description
1/2
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 1/2.
2/3
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 2/3.
3/4
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 3/4.
5/6
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 5/6.
7/8
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 7/8.
8/9
Satellite Modulator uses FEC rate of 8/9.
NOTE…
Only certain combinations of Modulation Type and FEC Rate are valid.
Spectrum Sense Option
Access the Spectrum Invert option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
allows the spectrum sense to be normal or inverted.
Roll Off Factor Option
The Roll Off Factor option is to do with the bandwidth of the modulated
output and how quickly the output level rolls off with frequency. There are
two values, 25% and 35%. Only 35% is allowed for QPSK but both 25%
and 35% are available in 8PSK and 16QAM.
In the L-band option, only 35% is allowed for QPSK and BPSK.
Tx Bandwidth Factor Option
Access the Tx Bandwidth Factor option from the Satellite Modulator
Menu. This option is used to calculate the Tx Bandwidth based upon the
Symbol Rate.
Bandwidth = Factor x Symbol Rate
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-107
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
Table 4.134: Tx Bandwidth Factor Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
1
Max:
2
Step Size: 0.01
Tx Bandwidth Option
The Tx Bandwidth option value cannot be updated. It should only be used
as an approximate value as it depends on the performance of external
equipment as well.
Bit-rate (188) Option
The Bit-rate (188) option value cannot be updated.
Bit-rate (204) Option
The Bit-rate (204) option value cannot be updated.
Preset Pwr Low Option
Access the Preset Pwr Low option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.135: Preset Pwr Low Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
-20.0 dBm
Max:
0.0 dBm
Step Size: 0.1 dBm
Preset Pwr Norm Option
Access the Preset Pwr Norm option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.136: Preset Pwr Norm Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
-20.0 dBm
Max:
5.0 dBm
Step Size: 0.1 dBm
Sat Deliv Freq Option
Access the Sat Deliv Freq option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.137: Sat Deliv Freq Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0.0000 GHz
Max:
999.9999 GHz
Step Size: 0.0001 GHz
Page 4-108
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
Sat Orb Pos Option
Access the Sat Orb Pos option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
enables the orbital position of the satellite to be specified.
Table 4.138: Sat Orb Pos Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0.0°
Max:
360.0°
Step Size: 0.1°
If the specified orbital position is outside the valid input range, a
confirmation screen is displayed which shows the maximum/minimum
value allowed.
Sat West/East Option
Access the Sat West/East option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
This enables the satellite west/east flag to be specified, indicating whether
the satellite position is in the western or eastern part of the orbit.
Table 4.139: Sat West/East Options
Selected Option
Description
West
Satellite position is in western part of the orbit.
East
Satellite position is in the eastern part of the orbit.
Polarisation Option
Access the Polarisation option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
enables the polarisation of the satellite transponder to be specified.
Table 4.140: Polarisation Options
Selected Option
Description
Linear - Horizontal
Satellite transponder uses linear horizontal polarisation.
Linear - Vertical
Satellite transponder uses linear vertical polarisation.
Circular - Left
Satellite transponder uses circular left polarisation.
Circular - Right
Satellite transponder uses circular right polarisation.
Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu
The following options are status only and cannot be changed. They give
information about the Baseband (BB) Card.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baseband (BB) Card Option
BB PCB Revision Option
BB Mod Status Option
BB Serial No. Option
BB S/W Release Option
BB CPLD F/W Release Option
BB DSP F/W Release Option
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-109
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Descriptor Type = Satellite
•
•
•
4.9.9
BB RNF F/W Release Option
IF Card Type Option
DPC Card Type Option
Output Format = Satellite Modulator
(L-Band Output)
TS Input Source
This option determines the source of the transport stream.
Table 4.141: TS Input Source Options
Selected Option
Description
Backplane
ASI1
ASI2
Rate Adaptation Option
Function not currently available on 2/3 width modulator modules
(S13716 and S13719).
L-Band Output Option
Access the L-Band Output option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
This enables the L-Band output to be switched On or Off.
L-Band Power Option
Access the L-Band Power option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.142: L-Band Power Options
Valid Input Range
Min:
Max:
Description
-20.0 dBm
+5.0 dBm
Frequency Option
Access the Frequency option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
Table 4.143: Frequency Options
Valid Input Range
Min:
Max:
Description
950 MHz
1750 MHz
Modulation Option
Access the Modulation option from the Satellite Modulator Menu. This
enables the modulation to be switched On or Off.
Mod Type Option
Refer to Mod Type Option on page 4-106 for details.
Page 4-110
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = Satellite Modulator (L-Band Output)
Symbol Rate Option
Refer to Symbol Rate Option on page 4-107 for details. Exactly the same
except that Table 4.132 should only contain 2U values because L-Band
output is only available in the 2U.
FEC Rate Option
Refer to FEC Rate Option on page 4-107 for details.
Spectrum Invert Option
Refer to Spectrum Sense Option on page 4-107 for details.
Roll Off Factor Option
Refer to Roll Off Factor Option on page 4-107 for details.
Tx Bandwidth Factor Option
Refer to Tx Bandwidth Factor Option on page for details.
Tx Bandwidth Option
The Tx Bandwidth option value cannot be updated. It should only be used
as an approximate value as it depends on the performance of external
equipment as well.
Bit-rate (188) Option
The Bit-rate (188) option value cannot be updated.
Bit-rate (204) Option
The Bit-rate (204) option value cannot be updated.
Preset Pwr Low Option
Refer to Preset Pwr Low Option on page 4-108 for details.
Preset Pwr Norm Option
Refer to Preset Pwr Norm Option on page 4-108 for details.
BUC DC Power
Access the BUC DC Power option from the Satellite Modulator Menu.
This option allows the +24 Vdc power on the L-Band Modulator Main
output to be either Enabled or Disabled.
NOTE…
The modulator provides d.c. power to drive an up-converter. Do not connect equipment to the main
output which might be damaged by d.c. power without protecting with a suitable d.c. block.
Sat Deliv Freq Option
Refer to Sat Deliv Freq Option on page 4-108 for details.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-111
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = Satellite Modulator (L-Band Output)
Sat Orb Pos Option
Refer to Sat Orb Pos Option on Page 4-109 for details.
Sat West/East Option
Refer to Sat West/East Option on page 4-109 for details.
Polarisation Option
Refer to Polarisation Option on page 4-109 for details.
Status Only Options for the Satellite Modulator Menu
The following options are for status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Baseband (BB) Card Option
BB PCB Revision Option
BB Mod Status Option
BB Serial No. Option
BB S/W Release Option
BB CPLD F/W Release Option
BB DSP F/W Release Option
BB RNF F/W Release Option
L-Band Output Card Type Option
DPC Card Type Option
BUC LO Frequency
This represents the overall translation frequency of the external
up-converter.
Transmit Frequency
Transmit Frequency refers to the frequency of the RF output from an
external up-converter that is used in the satellite earth station to
frequency up-convert the Modulator’s IF output. The parameters IF
Frequency and Uplink Freq are interrelated; when an Uplink Freq value is
entered, the value of IF Frequency is calculated and set automatically. The
allowable range of Uplink Freq is dependent upon the Modulator model, the
UpConv Freq and IF Spectrum settings.
BUC 10 MHz Ref O/P Option
This is used for switching On or Off the 10 MHz frequency reference which
may be used by an external BUC.
4.9.10 Output Format = IP Streamer
(M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC Option Module)
Own IP Address Option
Access the Own IP Address option from the IP Streamer Menu. This is the
local IP address associated with the 100 Mbit/s Ethernet video output
interface.
Page 4-112
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = IP Streamer (M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)
Network Mask Option
Access the Network Mask option from the IP Streamer Menu. This is the
network mask setting corresponding to the Own IP address.
Router IP Address Option
Access the Router IP Address option from the IP Streamer Menu. If the
Destination IP Address setting indicates an IP address not residing on the
local net segment, the video traffic is forwarded to this gateway.
IP Output
This option allows the User to switch off or on the IP streamed video
output.
Protocol/Pro-MPEG FEC Option
This sets the protocol to be used for the IP Frame. It establishes the IP
frame structure to be either: UDP, UDP plus the RTP Header or UDP, the
RTP Header, the FEC Header and 16 Reed-Solomon Bytes after each
188 byte payload packets. The possible settings are: UDP, RTP, RTP/FEC0,
RTP/FEC1, RTP/FEC2, RTP/FEC3 and RTP/FEC4.
TS Pkts/UDP Frm Option
This configures how many 188-byte MPEG-2 Transport Stream packets are
mapped into each UDP frame. Valid values are between 1 and 7. For
bit-rates in excess of 15 Mbit/s it is recommended to use the maximum
setting of 7 and limit the minimum to not less than 2.
Nbr of Cols Option
This setting configures the number of Columns in the matrix, and
determines the number of MPEG packets used when calculating the Row
FEC packets.
Nbr of Rows Option
This setting configures the number of Rows in the matrix, and determines
the number of MPEG packets used when calculating the Column FEC
packets.
Destination x IP Address Option
In Smallcasting mode, up to four separate destination IP addresses can be
assigned.
This is the IP address to which the video stream should be sent. It can
either be a unicast IP address or it can be a class D multicast address
(224.0.0.1-239.255.255.255). Choosing a multicast IP address enables
IGMPv2 support. Configuring a normal IP address turns off the IGMPv2
support again.
NOTE…
The maximum multiplexer output rate, which can be reliably streamed to each IP address, is reduced
for each extra destination address that is added. i.e. if two destinations are specified, the maximum
rate for each address is half of that for one address, and so on.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-113
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = IP Streamer (M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC)
Destination x UDP Port Option
Up to four separate UDP Ports can be assigned.
This configures the UDP destination port field in the outgoing UDP frames.
Time To Live Option
This is the Time-to-Live setting as specified in RFC-791. The Time-to-Live
setting is decremented by one for each Router hop the IP frame does.
When 0 (zero) is reached, the packet is discarded by the network. A value
greater than one is recommended.
Type of Service Option
This option is the byte value of the Type-of-Service (TOS) field in the IP
header as specified in RFC-791. It is used for Class-of-service
prioritisation. It depends on the Router honouring this field.
Line Mode
This option allows the User to allow the IP Streamer card to automatically
(Auto) negotiate the port speed and mode as the port automatically
advertises its maximum capabilities. If set to Fixed, the line speed is fixed
to 100 Mbits/s Full Duplex mode. Auto is the default and preferred setting.
4.9.11 Output Format = G.703 Output
Introduction
The G.703 Output Menu is selected from the Output Menu. The G.703
Interface Module enables a Broadcast Application to interface an Encoder
to a G.703 Telecommunication Network. The card only provides a transmit
source of a DVB service over a G.703 network. See Figure 4.15 for the
menu structure.
NOTE…
The G.703 card is only compatible with TANDBERG Television’s MkII G.703 Input card.
PDH Rate Option
This option sets the overall G.703 Interface Module’s line rate at either the
E3 (34.368 Mbit/s) or DS3 rate (44.736 Mbit/s).
Framing Option
This option sets the G.703 Interface Module’s E3 or DS-3 framing mode.
The modes for E3 are None and G.832. The DS-3 modes are None, M13 or
c-bit. The selectable modes are dependent upon what the PDH Rate is set
to.
DS-3 Signal Level Out Option
NOTE…
Only available for the DS-3 PDH Rate selection.
Page 4-114
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = G.703 Output
This option allows the output G.703 DS-3 signal level to be increased if the
receiving end is placed some distance away (> 68 metres (225 Feet)). The
receiving end could be the TT6120 as in a Test Application or a G.703
Repeater. If selected to High, the Transmitter preshapes the output signal
amplitude.
Reed-Solomon Option
NOTE…
Only available if the MUX rate has been set to 204 Byte Packet Mode.
Forward Error Correction requires 16 Bytes for Reed-Solomon encoding.
Interleaver Option
NOTE…
Only available if Reed-Solomon is set to On.
The Reed-Solomon encoding pattern is arranged so that the information is
read in Row format and then read out to the Framing stage in Column
format.
Randomizer Option
NOTE…
Only available if Reed-Solomon is set to On.
The Reed-Solomon encoded pattern is Randomised according to the DVB-C
standard.
Clock Mode Option
NOTE…
This option should be set to Slave and is the ONLY setting to be used in this application.
When sending MPEG-2 packets directly into Telecommunications framing,
the output must be sent at a constant fixed rate. This can be performed
using two methods.
Master: Generate an MPEG-2 transport rate that fits exactly into the
Telecommunications rate.
Slave: Insert 'stuff' packets to fill up the Output Rate.
Direction Option
This option cannot be altered and should always be displayed as Tx. This
indicates that the G.703 card portion of the G.703 Interface Module is set
to Tx mode.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-115
Operating the Equipment Locally: Output Menu - Output Format = G.703 Output
Mode Option
This option cannot be altered and should always be displayed as MKII. This
indicates that the G.703 card portion of the G.703 Interface Module is set
to MKII mode.
Reset Option
This option is for TANDBERG use only and it is a method to reset the G.703
card of the G.703 Interface Module.
MPEG Input Row Option
This option cannot be altered and should always be displayed as A. This
indicates that the G.703 Interface Module is deriving the Transport Stream
via the A Row of connectors of the G.703 card.
Output Rate Option
This option cannot be altered. It displays a value for the line rate that has
been selected by the PDH Rate option.
Alarm Status Option
This option displays the current G.703 Interface Module Alarms. For an
explanation of the alarm, selection of this parameter displays the current
Alarm status and its meaning.
Show Config Status Differences Option
If the G.703 Interface Module is no longer responding to the Encoder’s
commands, this option shows any disparities, if selected. Under normal
modes of operation, there should be no disparities.
4.10
Mux Menu
4.10.1 Overview
Access the Mux Menu from the Setup Menu. This menu permits the
selection of Multiplexer output parameters, Remux (if enabled), RAS
scrambling options (if enabled) and BISS scrambling options (if enabled).
See Figure 4.16 for details when Syntax = DVB. See Figure 4.17 for
details when Syntax = ATSC.
4.10.2 Mux Output, no Remux Card
To obtain various outputs when no Remux card is fitted:
Page 4-116
•
Basic mux output, no scrambling and no Remux – see Section 4.10.4,
Packet Length Option, to Section 4.10.12, BISS Firmware.
•
RAS scrambling – see basic mux output + Section 4.10.13, RAS
Options Enabled.
•
BISS scrambling – see basic mux output + Section 4.10, Mux Menu.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
4.10.3 Mux Output, With Remux Card
To obtain an output when a Remux card is fitted, set the options in the
following menus:
•
•
•
Host Bit-rate Option on page 4-136
Remux Module menu – see Section 4.12.3, Remux Module Menu
Host and Incoming Services – Section 4.12.4, 1.Service/2.Service
Menu
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-117
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
Setup
Menu
Mux
Menu
— Mux…
— Remux…
— 1.Service2…
— 2.Service (1)
up to
— 13.Service2…
— 1(Mdb) Service…
up to
— 4(Mdb) Service…
Mux
Menu
When BISS scrambling
has. been enabled
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate6
— Scramble
— BISS Key Entry5
— Session Word3
— Enc Session Word4
— BISS-E Injected Id4
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
This menu is mainly for
TANDBERG Television
used for testing purposes.
1-4[Mdb]
Service
Menu
2.Service
Menu
(when there is an
incoming service)
— Name Out
— Service Id
— Service Type
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video
— Audio A
— Audio B
— Data A
1
2
3
4
5
6
When RAS scrambling
has been enabled
Bit-rate (204) is only available when the Packet Length is set to
204.
This name changes to be the same as the Service Name.
There could be more menus, depending upon the number of
inputs to the Remux card.
Only available when BISS Mode 1 is selected as the Scrambling
mode. Available in Build version 2.2 and later.
Only available when BISS-E is selected as the Scrambling mode.
Available in Build version 2.2 and later.
This option is not available from Build version 2.2.
Only available when the Remux card is fitted and enabled.
— Output
— Source (BNC)
— Name (In)
— Name Out
— Service Prov (in)
— Service Id (Out)
— Logical Channel
— CA Input
— BISS Key Code5
— Enc Session Word4
— Session Word3
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video
— ECM (CA)
— VBI
— Audio (type of audio)
— Data (type of data)
No scrambling
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate (188)6
— Scramble
— SNG Key (RAS 1)
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— RAS Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
1.Service
Menu
— Output
— Source (BNC)
— Name Out
— Service Provider
— Service Id (Out)
— Logical Channel
— BISS Key Code5
— Enc Session Word4
— Session Word3
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video
— ECM (CA) PID
— Audio (type of audio)
— Data (type of data)
— PMT PID
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate (188)6
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
Remux
Module
Menu
— PID Remap
— Packet Length
— Bit-rate (188)
— Spare Bit-rate
— Input Bit-rate
— Output Bit-rate
— Host TS Output Rate
— Host Data Rate
— Input TS 1 (188)
— Data Rate 1 (188)
— Input TS 2 (188)
— Data Rate (188)
— Input TS 3 (188)
— Data Rate 3 (188)
— Software Release
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
Figure 4.16: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu (DVB)
Page 4-118
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
Setup
Menu
Mux
Menu
— Mux....
— Remux Module....
— 2.Service2, 7…
3.Program 2 (1)...
up to
xxxx.Service2…
Mux
Menu
When BISS scrambling
has been enabled
3.Program 2 (1)
Menu
(when there is an
incoming service)
When ATSC has
been enabled
(Incoming Service)
— Output
— Source (BNC)
— Short Name In
— Short Name Out
— Name In
— Name Out
— Program Number (Out)
— Major Channel
— Minor Channel
— CA Input
— Enc Session Word4
— Session Word3
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video
— Audio (type of audio)
1
2
3
4
5
6
When RAS
scrambling
has been enabled
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate6
— Scramble
— BISS Key Entry5
— Session Word3
— Enc Session Word4
— BISS-E Injected Id4
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate (188)6
— Scramble
— SNG Key (RAS 1)
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— RAS Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
2.Default
Service
Menu
When ATSC has
been enabled
(Host Encoder)
Bit-Rate (204) is only available when the Packet Length is set to
204.
This name changes to be the same as the Service Name.
There could be more menus, depending upon the number of
inputs to the Remux card.
Only available when BISS Mode 1 is selected as the Scrambling
mode. Available in Build version 2.2 and later.
Only available when BISS-E is selected as the Scrambling mode.
Available in Build version 2.2 and later.
This option is not available from Build version 2.2.
Only available when the Remux card is fitted and enabled.
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
No scrambling
— Output
— Source (BNC)
— Short Name In
— Short Name Out
— Name Out
— Program Number (Out)
— Major Channel
— Minor Channel
— Enc Session Word4
— Session Word3
— PMT PID
— PCR PID
— Video
— ECM (CA) PID
— Audio (type of audio)
— Data (type of data)
— Packet Length
— On Air
— Bit-rate (188)
— Bit-rate (204)1
— Host Bit-rate (188)6
— Clock
— PCR PID
— FPGA Firmware
— BISS Hardware
— BISS Firmware
Remux Module
Menu
— PID Remap
— Packet Length
— Bit-rate (188)
— Spare Bit-rate
— Input Bit-rate
— Output Bit-rate
— Host TS Output Rate
— Host Data Rate
— Input TS 1 (188)
— Data Rate 1 (188)
— Input TS 2 (188)
— Data Rate (188)
— Input TS 3 (188)
— Data Rate 3 (188)
— Software Release
Figure 4.17: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/Mux Menu (ATSC)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-119
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
4.10.4 Packet Length Option
This option enables the Packet Length to be set.
Table 4.144: Packet Length Options
Selected Option
Description
188 bytes
Uses 188 byte packet format.
204 bytes
Uses 204 byte packet format.
4.10.5 On Air Option
This option determines whether the output of the Encoder is sent to the
Multiplexer.
Table 4.145: On Air Options
Selected Option
Description
On
Multiplexer output is switched on.
Off
Multiplexer output is switched off.
4.10.6 Bit-rate (188) and Bit-rate (204) Option
NOTE…
If the Packet Length option is set to 188 bytes then only the Bit-rate (188) option is displayed. If the
Packet Length option is set to 204 bytes then both the Bit-rate (188) and Bit-rate (204) options are
displayed.
Both the Bit-rate (188) and the Bit-rate (204) can be in the range of
0 Mbit/s to 110 Mbit/s.
Table 4.146: Bit-rate (188) and Bit-rate (204) Options
Selected Option
Description
188 / 204
Min:
0.0000 Mbit/s
Max (without Remux):110.0000 Mbit/s
Max (with Remux): 50.0000 Mbit/s
Step Size:
0.0001 Mbit/s
Multiplexer output bit-rate when in baseband
output format and ASI output mode.
Changing the bit-rate affects the automatic
video bit-rate and video resolution
calculations.
If the specified bit-rate is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen is displayed which shows the maximum/minimum value allowed.
4.10.7 Clock
NOTE…
This option indicates the origin of the clock. It must be set to a video or external source before
attempting to change the clock value or it will default to Local Oscillator.
This option enables the Clock to be set.
Page 4-120
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
Table 4.147: Clock Options
Selected Option
Description
Local Oscillator
The system clock is derived from the local oscillator.
HSYNC (External)
The system clock is locked to the HSYNC input.
Video
The system clock is locked to the video source.
Earlier versions of HD Encoder do not support this
option and it is unavailable in the menu structure. A
hardware modification is required to implement it.
4.10.8 PCR PID Option
This option shows the Program Clock Reference Packet Identifier.
Table 4.148: PCR PID Options
Selected Option
Min:
Max:
Step Size:
Description
1
8190 (1FFEh)
1
4.10.9 FPGA Firmware
This option indicates the version of the FPGA Firmware. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
4.10.10 RAS Firmware
This option indicates the version of the RAS Firmware. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
4.10.11 BISS16 Hardware
This option indicates the version of the BISS Hardware. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
4.10.12 BISS Firmware
This option indicates the version of the BISS Firmware. It is for status only
and cannot be changed.
4.10.13 RAS Options Enabled
Scramble Option
This option enables RAS1 security scrambling of the Encoder transmission
to be switched on or off.
16
BISS is implemented according to Tech 3290 March 2000 and BISS-E is implemented according to Tech 3292 April
2001.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-121
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
Table 4.149: Scramble Options (RAS)
Selected Option
Description
Off
Encoder output is not scrambled.
RAS (Fixed 1)
Encoder output is scrambled using the fixed RAS key assigned by TANDBERG TV,
and preprogrammed into the Encoder.
RAS (Fixed 2)
Encoder output is scrambled using the fixed second RAS key assigned by
TANDBERG TV, and preprogrammed into the Encoder.
RAS (EBU Key)
Encoder output is scrambled using the fixed RAS key assigned to the EBU and
preprogrammed into the Encoder.
RAS1 (SNG Key)
Encoder output is scrambled. Scrambling key used is entered using the SNG Key
(RAS1) option.
NOTE…
RAS Fixed Keys and the EBU Key are only programmed into the Encoder if requested when the units
are ordered.
SNG Key (RAS1) Option
This option enables the scrambling key used in SNG Key scrambling mode
to be set (see the Scramble option). The same scrambling code must be
used at the receive end to unscramble the transmission.
Enter up to seven digits using the keypad, then press the Enter softkey to
accept the scrambling code. If less then seven digits are entered, they are
prefixed with 0’s (zero) to give a seven-digit code.
4.10.14 BISS Options Enabled
Overview
BISS Mode 1 uses a fixed scrambling key, known as the Session Word, to
encrypt the transport stream. The same Session Word must be entered in
the Receivers and the Encoder to enable the transport stream to be
decrypted.
BISS-E adds an extra layer of security, as a unique key is required for each
Encoder and Receiver. This is known as the Encrypted Session Word. Each
Encoder and Receiver is assigned a unique BISS Injected ID, which should
not be made generally known, and which cannot be read from the unit.
For a particular transmission a BISS Session Word is chosen, and then
encrypted, using each unit’s BISS Injected ID to produce an Encrypted
Session Word for each unit. This means that if an unauthorised person
obtains an Encrypted Session Word, it is useless unless they also know the
BISS Injected ID for the unit that the Encrypted Session Word was
intended.
Page 4-122
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
Scramble Option
Access the Scramble option from the Mux Menu. This enables security
scrambling of the Encoder transmission to be switched on or off.
NOTE…
If the scrambling is switched between BISS Mode 1 and BISS-E, the session word, or the encrypted
session word must be re-entered.
Table 4.150: Scramble Options (BISS)
Selected Option
Description
BISS Mode 1
Encoder output is scrambled. Scrambling key used is
entered using the Session Word option.
BISS-E
Encoder output is scrambled. Scrambling key used is
entered using the Enc Session Word option.
Off
Encoder output is not scrambled.
Session Word Option
Access the Session Word option from the Mux Menu. A Session Word is the
48-bit code used to generate the 64-bit Control Word that is used to
encrypt and decrypt the transport stream.
The sender and receiver(s) of the transmission share the Session Word, so
that only the intended parties receive the transmission. The same Session
Word must be used at the receive end.
If the Session Words are the same, then the IRDs are able to decrypt the
broadcast. If the Session Words are different, the broadcast is not
received.
NOTE…
Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the Session Word.
The Session Word relates to the different types of BISS as follows:
•
BISS Mode 1: All components are scrambled by a fixed control word,
derived from a clear Session Word.
•
BISS-E: All components are scrambled by a fixed control word,
derived from an Encrypted Session Word.
Enc Session Word Option
Access the Enc Session Word option from the Mux Menu. This is used with
BISS-E. An Enc(rypted) Session Word is a 64-bit number that is
transformed by the Encoder into a Session Word used to encrypt and
decrypt the transport stream.
NOTE…
Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the Encrypted Session Word.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-123
Operating the Equipment Locally: Mux Menu
BISS-E Injected Id Option
Access the BISS-E Injected Id option from the Mux Menu. This is only used
with BISS-E and is an identifier for the unit, comprising a 56-bit
hexadecimal word.
NOTE…
Take precautions to avoid general knowledge of the BISS-E Injected Id.
4.11
ATM Network Interface Option Module Menu
4.11.1 Overview
This menu permits the selection of the ATM parameters and is only
available if one of the M2/EOM2/ATMS… ATM Network Interface Option
Modules is fitted.
The ATM Menu is selected from the Setup Menu by pressing the ATM
softkey (see Figure 4.18 for menu structure).
4.11.2 Add Connection Option
The Add Connection option displays a list of valid profiles from which a
connection can be made. This sets up a Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC) or
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) connection to the other end of the network
to either transmit, receive or transmit and receive an MPEG-2 transport
stream.
Select a profile and press the Connect softkey. This profile is used to
attempt to make a connection and the menu returns to the list of valid
profiles.
NOTE…
The profile defining the connection parameters must be in the Profile list. There can be one Tx
connection and one Rx connection or one Tx/Rx connection active at any time.
Table 4.151: Add Connection Options
Page 4-124
Selected Option
Description
Connect
Sets up SVC or PVC connection to the other end of the
network.
Not Connected
No connection to the other end of the network.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Setup
Menu
ATM
Menu
Add Connection
Delete Connection
View Connection List....
View Connection ID....
Add Profile....
Delete Profile
Edit Profile....
Add Authorisation....
Delete Authorisation
Edit Authorisation....
Incoming Calls
General....
Tx....
Rx....
Physical....
Quit
Add/Edit
Profile Menu
Profile Name
VC Type
ATM Address1
VPI2
VCI2
Direction
AAL
View
Connection
ID Menu
View Connection ID
Name
Connection Status
Termination Status
VC Type
Media
VPI
VCI
Direction
AAL
View
Connection
List Menu
Select a connection to
view the details
View Connection ID
Name
Connection Status
Termination Status
VC Type
Media
VPI
VCI
Direction
AAL
Add/Edit
Authorisation
Menu
Select an authorisation to
change the details
Authorisation Name
ATM Address
Physical
Menu
Mode
Path Label
Tx Clock Source
Cell Mode
Interface
1 Only shown when VC Type = SVC PP or SVC PMP.
2 Only shown when VC Type = PVC.
3 Only shown when Enable SVC PMP= True.
Shaded options are showing status and cannot be changed.
Rx Menu
Src Clk Tolerance
CDV Tolerance
TS Asi Output
Asi Stuffing Bytes
Valid Stream
Packet Status
Bit-rate
Bit-rate (Min)
Bit-rate (Max)
Lost Cells
Misinserted Cells
Corrected Packets
Uncorrected Packets
Length Errors
Crc Errors
Unknown Cells
Tx Menu
TS Source
AAL5 PCR Aware
Valid Stream
Packet Status
Bit-rate
General
Menu
IP Address
IP NetMask
IP Gateway
Default ATM Prefix
Def UNI Version
Enable SVC PMP
Own ATM Address3
Software Release
Protocol Version
Hardware Release
TxFirmware Release
RxFirmware Release
Figure 4.18: Menu Hierarchy – Setup/ATM Menu
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-125
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
4.11.3 Delete Connection Option
The Delete Connection option displays a list of currently active
connections. The list may be empty if there are no active connections. This
breaks the connection to the network and terminates the MPEG-2
transmission and/or reception. The Connection name is the specified profile
name or authorisation name.
Table 4.152: Delete Connection Options
Selected Option
Description
Retain
Retains the connection to the other end of the network.
Delete
Removes the connection to the other end of the network.
4.11.4 View Connection List Menu
This displays a list of current connections whether active or inactive.
Selecting a connection displays the connection details.
The following options (connection details) are status only and cannot be
changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
View Connection ID
Name
Connection Status
Termination Status
VC Type
Media
VPI
VCI
Direction
AAL
4.11.5 View Connection ID Menu
View Connection ID Option
Enter a number to view the details of that specific connection ID. They are
status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 4-126
Name
Connection Status
Termination Status
VC Type
Media
VPI
VCI
Direction
AAL
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
4.11.6 Add Profile Menu
Overview
Access the Profile Menu from the ATM Menu. Then press the Profile
softkey. Change the option to ‘Active’ and press the Enter softkey.
This shows a further set of options which define the connection parameters
used to establish a connection to the network. Multiple profiles can be
added to the list, defining different endpoint addresses or parameters.
Table 4.153: Add Profile Options
Selected Option
Description
Active
A new default Profile is created and the menu moves directly to
the Edit screen for the new profile.
Not Active
Profile Name Option
Use the keypad to amend the profile name (if necessary) and press the
Enter softkey.
VC Type Option
This option enables the VC Type to be set.
Table 4.154: VC Type Options
Selected Option
Description
SVC17 PP
Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC).Point to Point (PP). PP indicates
transmission to a single Receiver.
SVC PMP
Switched Virtual Circuit (SVC). Point to Multipoint (PMP). PMP
indicates simultaneous transmissions to several Receivers
PVC18
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC) connection.
ATM Address Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown when VC Type = SVC PP or SVC PMP.
This option allows an ATM address value to be input.
17
An SVC is a circuit which only exists for the duration of the session, after which it is usually disconnected. Also
referred to as “Bandwidth on Demand”. A connection established via signalling.
18
A PVC is a circuit, equivalent to a dedicated leased line, yet over some form of packet switched network. A PVC is set
up once, usually through the management system of the network supporting it, and continues to exist until it is
removed, again via the management system.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-127
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Table 4.155: ATM Address Options
Selected Option
Description
0 to 255
Enter the ATM address value.
VPI Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown when VC Type = PVC.
This option allows a Virtual Path Identifier value to be input.
Table 4.156: VPI Options
Selected Option
Description
0 to 255
Enter the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) value.
VCI Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown when VC Type = PVC.
This option allows a Virtual Channel Identifier19 value to be input.
Table 4.157: VCI Options
Selected Option
Description
0 to 65535
Virtual Channel Identifier.
Values less than 49 are reserved.
Direction Option
This option enables the Direction to be set.
Table 4.158: Direction Options
Selected Option
Description
TX
Transmit direction.
RX
Receive direction.
TXRX
Bi-directional.
AAL Option20
This option enables the selection of an ATM adaptation layer used with the
MPEG transport stream.
19
Virtual Channel Identifier – a unique numerical tag as defined by a 16 bit field in the ATM cell header that identifies a
virtual channel, over which the ATM cell is to travel.
20
ATM Adaptation Layer – the standards layer that allows multiple applications to have data converted to and from the
ATM cell.
Page 4-128
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Table 4.159: AAL Options
Selected Option
Description
AAL1 FEC
ATM adaptation layer and Forward Error Correction, used with the MPEG transport stream.
AAL1
ATM adaptation layer without Forward Error Correction, used with the MPEG transport stream.
AAL5
ATM adaptation layer, used with the MPEG transport stream and ATM signalling.
4.11.7 Delete Profile Menu
The Delete Profile option lists the current active profiles. Select a Profile by
pressing the associated softkey, select Delete and press the Enter softkey.
4.11.8 Edit Profile Option
Press the associated softkey to edit the selected Profile.
Further screens appear which are the same as those on page 4-127.
The Profile parameters available change according to VC Type (see
Figure 4.18 on page 4-125).
4.11.9 Add Authorisation Menu
Overview
This authorises an ATM address from which SVC connections will be
accepted. Press the Auth softkey. Change the option to ‘Active’ and press
the Enter softkey.
Table 4.160: Add Authorisation Options
Selected Option
Description
Active
A new default Authorisation is created, and the menu moves directly to the Edit screen for the
new Authorisation.
Not Active
A new default Authorisation is not created.
NOTE…
If Incoming Calls is set to Authorisations then any incoming connection requests from ATM addresses
which are not in the authorisations list will be rejected.
More options appear.
Authorisation Name Option
Change the name and press the Enter softkey.
ATM Address Option
Change the ATM address and press the Enter softkey.
4.11.10 Delete Authorisation Menu
The Delete Authorisation Menu lists the current Authorisations. Select
an authorisation by pressing the associated softkey. Change to ‘Delete’ and
press the Enter softkey.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-129
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Table 4.161: Delete Authorisation Options
Selected Option
Description
Retain
Keeps the authorisation.
Delete
Deletes the authorisation.
4.11.11 Edit Authorisation Option
Press the associated softkey to edit the selected Authorisation.
Further screens appear which are the same as those on page 4-129.
4.11.12 Incoming Calls Option
This enables the Incoming Calls to be changed.
Table 4.162: Incoming Calls Options
Selected Option
Description
Permit All
Accepts calls from any ATM address.
Refuse All
No incoming calls accepted.
Authorisations
Only accepts calls which are in the authorisations list.
4.11.13 General Menu
IP21 Address Option
This is a network address used to identify the ATM interface when plugged
into an Ethernet network via the 10BaseT socket on the card. Use the
keypad to amend the IP Address.
IP NetMask Option
Use the keypad to amend the IP NetMask.
IP Gateway Option
This option gives the default gateway address used on the Ethernet
network interface connected via the 10BaseT socket. Any communications
to network hosts not on the local IP network will be sent to this address.
Default ATM Prefix Option
This option is a 26 digit hexadecimal number identifying the ATM address
prefix defined by the connected ATM network operator. This only needs to
be specified if the ATM network does not support Integrated Layer
Management Interface (ILMI) which normally sets this prefix automatically
21
Internet Protocol.
Page 4-130
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Def UNI Version Option
This option is the default User to Network Interface (UNI) protocol version
used to communicate with the ATM network, defined by the connected ATM
network operator. This only needs to be specified if the ATM network does
not support ILMI, which normally automatically negotiates the version to
use. Use the softkeys to amend the Default UNI option.
Table 4.163: Def UNI Options
Selected Option
Description
UNI 3.0
Protocol versions used to communicate with
the ATM network, defined by the connected
ATM network operator.
UNI 3.1
UNI 4.0
Enable SVC PMP Option
This enables the Enable SVC PMP to be changed.
Table 4.164: Enable SVC PMP Options
Selected Option
Description
TRUE
When set to TRUE a new status parameter,
Own ATM Address, appears in the General
menu.
FALSE
Status-only Options
The following options are status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Own ATM Address22
Software Release
Protocol Version
Hardware Release
TxFirmware Release
RxFirmware Release
4.11.14 Tx Menu
TS Source Option
This option enables a choice of which MPEG transport stream source is to
be transmitted.
Table 4.165: TS Source Options
22
Selected Option
Description
Encoder
Default setting.
ASI
External ASI BNC input.
Own ATM Address only appears in the General menu when the Enable SVC PMP option is set to TRUE.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-131
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
AAL5 PCR Aware Option
This is an alternative AAL-5 transmission mode. Use the + and – softkeys
to alternate between On and Off and then press Enter after selecting one
of them. The option is usually set to Off.
Table 4.166: AAL5 PCR Aware Options
Selected Option
Description
On
AAL5 PCR Aware Option enabled.
Off
AAL5 PCR Aware Option disabled – default setting.
Status-only Options
The following options are status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
Valid Stream
Packet Status
Bit-rate
4.11.15 Rx Menu
Srce Clk Tolerance Option
This setting affects the reception clock recovery tolerance to the source
transmitter clock accuracy, normally set to Normal. If the source clock is
known to be accurately calibrated to either the PAL-I or ATSC specification
then those settings can be used, resulting in less end-to-end delay.
Table 4.167: Srce Clk Tolerance Options
Selected Option
Description
Normal +/- 30.0ppm
PAL-I +/- 0.226ppm
PAL-I source
ATSC +/- 2.8ppm
ATSC source
CDV23 Tolerance Option
This setting affects the reception clock recovery tolerance to cell delay
variation introduced by the ATM network. Configure it to a value greater
than or equal to that specified by the network operator, to handle the
worst case but to also achieve the minimum possible end-to-end delay.
NOTE…
Excessive end-to-end delay may cause annoyance when, for example, live reporting requires an
interactive conversation with the studio. Long pauses may occur as the recipient waits for the reply.
23
Cell Delay Variation – a component of cell transfer delay, induced by buffering and cell scheduling.
Page 4-132
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Table 4.168: CDV Tolerance Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0 µsec
Max:
4000 µsec
Step Size: 1 µsec
The maximum ATM network Cell Delay Variation of the
MPEG transport stream that can be tolerated (in micro
(µ) seconds).
TS Asi Output Option
This enables the TS Asi Output to be changed.
Table 4.169: TS Asi Output Options
Selected Option
Description
Active
The transport stream ASI output is enabled.
Not Active
The transport stream ASI output is disabled.
Asi Stuffing Bytes Option
This enables the Asi Stuffing Bytes to be changed.
Table 4.170: Asi Stuffing Bytes Options
Valid Input Range
Description
0
Byte mode
1-7
Bytes for Burst mode
Status-only Options
The following options are status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Valid Stream
Packet Status
Bit-rate
Bit-rate (Min)
Bit-rate (Max)
Lost Cells
Misinserted Cells
Corrected Packets
Uncorrected Packets
Length Errors
Crc Errors
Unknown Cells
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-133
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
4.11.16 Physical Menu
Mode Option
Match the setting to that of the connected network, normally set to SDH.
Table 4.171: Mode Options
Marketing Code
Physical
Interface
Description
Options
M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM
Monomode
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy - the ITU-TSS International standard for
transmitting information over optical fibre.
SDH
M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM
Multimode
Synchronous Optical Network - an ANSI standard for transmitting
information over optical fibre.
SONET
M2/EOM2/ATMS34
E3
The physical layer is E3 using duplex BNC (coaxial) interface.
G.823 ADM
G.751 PLCP
M2/EOM2ATMS45
DS3
DS-3 is the third level in the PDH multiplex hierarchy found in North
America.
C-bit Parity, ADM
M23, ADM
C-bit Parity, PLCP
M23, PLCP
Synchronous multiplexing hierarchy, BNC (coaxial) interface. Rates of
up to 155 Mbit/s.
SDH, SONET
M2/EOM2ATMS155E
STM-1 Electrical
Module
Path Label Option
The Path Signal Label is transmitted in STM-1/STS-3c frame and identifies
to the Receiver that the SONET/SDH frames are carrying ATM cells.
NOTE…
This MUST be set to the default, which is 19. Do not change or the frames might not be recognised as
carrying ATM cells.
Table 4.172: Path Label Options
Valid Input Range
Description
Min:
0
Max:
255
Step Size: 1
The path label which identifies ATM cells.
The input must be set to the default value, 19.
Tx Clock Source Option
This is the physical layer clock reference source used to transmit the data
on the interface. It is normally set to ‘Rx Recovered’ when connected to a
switch but when connected directly to another ATM card, one of the cards
should be set to ‘Local Oscillator’.
Table 4.173: Tx Clock Source Options
Page 4-134
Selected Option
Description
Recovered Rx clock
Use when connected to a switch.
Local Clock
Use when connected directly to another ATM card.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: ATM Network Interface Option Module
Cell Mode Option
This specifies how null cells should be flagged on the interface, normally
‘Unassigned’.
Table 4.174: Cell Mode Options
Selected Option
Description
Idle
Unassigned
Default setting.
Interface Option
The Interface option is for status only and indicates the type of physical
layer interface.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-135
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
4.12
Remux Menu
4.12.1 Introduction
If the Remux option module M2/EOM2/REMUX is fitted, there is an
additional item in the Mux Menu (see Figure 4.16) and a further Remux
Module Menu and 1.Service Menu.
4.12.2 Addition to Mux Menu When Remux Fitted
Host Bit-rate Option
This option refers to the multiplex in the local (host) Encoder. The Host Bitrate is shown in Table 4.175.
NOTE…
The host bit-rate cannot exceed the output rate (see Table 4.175).
Table 4.175: Host Bit-rate Options
Selected Option
Description
Min
0.0000 Mbit/s
Max (without
Remux)
110.0000 Mbit/s
Max
(with Remux)
65 Mbit/s
Step Size
0.0001 Mbit/s
Multiplexer output bit-rate when in baseband output format and ASI output mode.
Changing the bit-rate affects the automatic video bit-rate and video resolution
calculations.
The maximum bit-rate is 65 Mbit/s irrespective of packet size. To obtain 69 Mbit/s
modulated output rate, set the packet size to 188 and bit-rate to 65 Mbit/s. The
modulator automatically adds 16 Reed-Solomon bytes per packet.
If the specified bit-rate is outside the valid input range, a confirmation
screen is displayed which shows the maximum/minimum value allowed.
4.12.3 Remux Module Menu
PID Remap
This options allows the action taken during PID Remapping to be tailored.
Table 4.176: PID Remap Options
Page 4-136
Selected Option
Description
Update PIDs from I/Ps
In this mode, only changes at any of the Remux inputs (e.g. PID change, new component
appears) will always be passed through to the output and the outgoing PSI tables will change
accordingly.
Lock PID Mapping
In this mode, changes at the Remux inputs will not be recognised. The outgoing PSI tables will
also not change. This can result in TS errors being flagged by an analyser, e.g. if a component
disappears from an input. It will remain mapped through and referred in the PSI tables which
will result in ‘Packet Missing’ warnings from the analyser.
PID Lock Power Up Delay
Option
This option only appears in Lock PID Mapping mode, It is designed to give the Encoder time
after power up to acquire the services at its Remux input before it is locked-down.
PID Remap Status
This option only appears in Lock PID Mapping mode. It indicates whether the power-up delay
has expired and lock-down has occurred.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
Selected Option
Description
New Services Default
This specifies whether new services detected on a Remux input will be ON (i.e. mapped
through) or OFF by default. (If PID Remap Status has reached the LOCKED stage, new
services will not be recognised at all.) A service is deemed to be new if, on power-up, the
acquired PSI shows that there is any differences to the make up of the services. In a
multi-level Remux system, if an upstream Encoder is power-cycled, the downstream Remux
Encoder may detect the service as NEW due to the way the PSI is built during power-up.
Therefore it is recommended that the New Services Default be set to ON unless there are
particular concerns about services causing an overflow.
Packet Length Option
This option indicates the packet length. See Section 4.10.4, Packet Length
Option for details.
Bit-rate Option
This option indicates the bit-rate. See Section 4.10.6, Bit-rate (188) and
Bit-rate (204) Option for details.
Status Only Options for the Remux Module Menu
The following options are status only and cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Spare Bit-rate
Input Bit-rate
Output Bit-rate
Host TS Output Rate
Host Data Rate
Input TS 1 (188)
Data Rate 1 (188)
Input TS 2 (188)
Data Rate 2 (188)
Input TS 3 (188)
Data Rate 3 (188)
Software Release
NOTE…
The maximum input bit-rate allowed on the Remux Module ASI inputs is 50 Mbit/s. If the input bit-rate
exceeds 86 Mbit/s it will be incorrectly reported as a lower rate.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-137
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
4.12.4 1.Service/2.Service Menu
Output Option
This option enables the Output to be set.
Table 4.177: Output Options
Selected Option
Description
Off
The service is not included in the output.
On
The service is included in the output, unscrambled.
On (RAS)
The service is included in the output, scrambled and using RAS.
On (BISS Mux Key)
The service is included in the output, scrambled and the
Session Word entered in the Mux Menu.
On (BISS Mode 1)
The service is included in the output, scrambled, using BISS
Mode 1 and the Session Word entered in this menu.
On (BISS-E)
The service is included in the output, scrambled, using BISS-E
and the Enc(rypted) Session Word entered in this menu.
Source (BNC) Option
This option indicates the source of the input. It is for status only.
Table 4.178 indicates what is shown for the various inputs.
Table 4.178: Source (BNC) Options
Selected Option
Description
0
Host Encoder.
1, 2, 3
Remux inputs 1 to 3.
Short Name In Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown in ATSC mode.
This option allows the Short Name In to be changed.
Short Name Out Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown in ATSC mode.
This option allows the Short Name Out to be changed.
Name (In) Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown on an incoming Service menu (2-13.Service Menu).
This option indicates the input service name. It is status only and cannot
be changed.
Page 4-138
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
Name Out Option
This option allows the service output name to be changed.
Service Prov (In) Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown on an incoming Service menu (2-13.Service Menu).
This option indicates the input service provider’s name. It is set for status
only and cannot be changed.
Service Provider Option
This option relates to the output service provider and allows the name to
be changed.
Service Id (Out) Option
This option enables the output Service Identity to be specified. It is the
number at the start of the remuxxed services.
Table 4.179: Service Id (Out)Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
65535
Step Size: 1
Service identity number.
Program Number (Out) Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown in ATSC mode.
This option enables the output program number to be specified.
Table 4.180: Program Number (Out) Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
65535
Step Size: 1
Program Number.
Major Channel Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown in ATSC mode.
This option enables the major channel to be specified.
Minor Channel Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown in ATSC mode.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-139
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
This option enables the minor channel to be specified.
Logical Channel Option
This option enables a number to be given to the Logical Channel.
CA Input Option
NOTE…
This option is only shown if there are incoming services.
This option indicates the type of CA present on the input. It is set for
status only and cannot be changed.
BISS Key Code Option
NOTE…
This option is not available from Build version 2.2.
This option enables the scrambling key used in BISS scrambling mode to
be set. The same scrambling code must be used at the receive end to
unscramble the transmission.
Enter up to 12 digits. If less then seven digits are entered, they are
prefixed with 0s (zero) to give a seven-digit code.
Enc Session Word Option
Refer to Enc Session Word Option on page 4-123 for details.
Session Word Option
Refer to Session Word Option on page 4-123 for details.
PMT PID Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
This option shows the Program Map Table Packet Identifier.
Table 4.181: PMT PID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
32
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Program Map Table Packet
Identifier (PMT PID).
PCR PID Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
This option shows the Program Clock Reference Packet Identifier.
Page 4-140
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
Table 4.182: PCR PID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Video Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
This option shows the Video PID.
Table 4.183: Video Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
ECM (CA) PID Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
This option shows the Entitlement Control Message (Conditional Access)
Packet Identifier (PID).
Table 4.184: ECM (CA) PID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
VBI PID Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services. Available
prior to Build version 2.2.0.
This option is used for entering or updating the VBI PID.
Table 4.185: VBI PID Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-141
Operating the Equipment Locally: Remux
Audio (Type of Audio) Option
NOTES…
1. This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
2. The option could be Audio (MPEG-2), Audio (Dolby Digital) etc. The words in the brackets
change according to the type of audio that was previously selected.
This option is used for entering or updating audio PIDs.
To be DVB compliant, PIDs below 32 are reserved. Therefore PIDs 32 to
8191 are available for use. In the event of a clash, one of the PIDs will be
changed by the Encoder’s internal checking algorithm
Table 4.186: Audio (Type of Audio) Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Data (Type of Data) Option
NOTES…
1. This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
2. The option could be Data (RS-232), Data (RS-422) etc. The words in the brackets change
according to the type of data that was previously selected.
This option is used for entering or updating data PIDs.
Table 4.187: Data (Type of Data) Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Teletext Option
NOTE…
This option is status only for the Host Encoder but can be changed for incoming services.
This option is used for entering or updating Teletext PIDs.
Table 4.188: Teletext Options
Selected Option
Description
Min:
1
Max:
8190 (1FFEh)
Step Size: 1
Page 4-142
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Digital Programme Insertion (DPI)
4.13
Digital Programme Insertion (DPI) Menu
4.13.1 Option Availability
This option is only available from the Systems Menu when the
M2/ESO2/DPI licence key is purchased. DPI can be triggered either by GPI
contact closure or by the DVS 525 protocol.
4.13.2 Overview
Splicing is used to insert Digital Programme (e.g. advertisements) into an
MPEG-2 transport stream. SCTE-35 has been written to support splicing
information for Cable systems.
4.13.3 DPI Initiated by GPI
Only one of the card’s eight inputs is used. This is configured to be a
straight Open/Close switch. The switch is then able to activate/deactivate
the splicing message insertion.
The GPI card is used as an interface between the Encoder and an
Automation System. The System dictates when the Encoder is to send
SCTE-35 messages by changing the state of the GPI card’s input switch.
Before the command can be executed, some Encoder parameters need to
be set.
4.13.4 DPI Initiated by DVS 525
The number of options available through this method are shown in
Table 4.189. In this mode, the Encoder responds to messages received via
Ethernet adhering to the DVS 525 protocol.
4.13.5 Menu Structure
Figure 4.19 shows the options available from the menu.
System
Menu
….
Digital Programme Insertion (DPI)....
….
— Dig Program Ins (DPI)
— DPI Mode
— GPI Input Pin
— GPI OutofNet Polarity
— Return to Network
— Avail Descriptor
— Provider Avail ID
— DPI info PID
— Component Tag
— OUT Pre-roll
— Return Pre-roll
— Nbr Out Msg
— Nbr Return Msg
— Splice Duration
— Fixed Delay
— Splice ID Increment Mode
— DVS 525 COMPEL
— DVS 525 SCTE 35
— GPI SCTE 35
Ext Control
Auto Return
— Present
— Off
Figure 4.19: Menu Hierarchy – Digital Programme Insertion DPI Menu (GPI Initiated)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-143
Operating the Equipment Locally: Digital Programme Insertion (DPI)
NOTES…
1. Some of the options may be different or unavailable in other DPI modes.
2. The stream carrying the splice information is referenced in PMT as Private Data.
DPI Program Ins
(DPI)
DPI Mode
3
GPI SCTE 35: GPI card triggers SCTE 35 splice
3
3
DVS 525 SCTE 35: DVS 525 messages triggers SCTE 35 splice.
3
3
DVS 525 COMPEL: DVS 525 triggers splice. DVS 525 version
compatible with Wegener Compel unit – Compel Control DPI Monitor
version R3.15.32.
3
3
Return to Network
3
3
If set to Auto, no return messages are sent out and ‘Auto Return’ flag in
the message is set to 1.
3
Avail Descriptor
3
3
Present/Off
3
Provider Avail ID
3
3
0 - FFFFFFFF
3
DPI info PID
3
3
PID in which the splice messages are carried.
3
Out Pre-roll
3
0, 4 – 100 s (0 indicates immediate)
3
Return Pre-roll
3
0, 4 – 100 s (0 indicates immediate)
3
Nbr Out Msg
3
Only single is possible.
3
Nbr Return Msg
3
Only single is possible.
3
Only single is possible.
3
If non-zero, ‘Break duration’ structure is included in the splice message.
3
Added to both Out and Return pre-roll.
3
Determines whether splice_event_id is incremented for each splice
message or only for an out/return message pair.
3
Nbr Splice Msg
Page 4-144
On/Off
3
Splice Duration
3
Fixed Delay
3
Splice ID
Increment mode
3
3
TCP port
3
Port number on which to receive DVS 525 messages.
3
Component Tag
3
The value for component tag in the ‘stream identification descriptor’ in
the PMT.
3
Synchronisation
3
Sync to Alive/Do not sync. Most installations should choose ‘Sync to
Alive’ so that splice times are accurate.
3
Pre-roll Adjuster
3
[DVS 525 Compel mode] Compel protocol enables pre-roll in steps of
one second only. Users can enter a constant milli-second offset here to
get sub-second accuracy.
3
GPI Input Pin
3
Physical pin on GPI connector to be monitored.
3
GPI OutofNet
Polarity
3
Whether an open or close will trigger Out of Network.
3
HD mode
DVS 525
Description
GPI
Menu Item
SD Mode
Table 4.189: DPI Options (DPI Mode= GPI SCTE 35)
3
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Errors
4.14
Errors Menu
4.14.1 Overview
The Errors Menu can be selected from the Advanced Menu.
New errors are reported to the front panel display approximately every
30 seconds.
4.14.2 Active Errors Option
Access the Active Errors option from the Errors Menu. This gives a list of
any current errors. Error Masks Menu
Status of Error Masks
Access the Error Masks option from the Error Masks Menu. This allows any
of the error messages to be masked. There are three states for the error
message: Alm, Fail or Off.
•
•
Alm (Alarm) shows the error message and triggers the alarm relay
•
Off does not show the error message and does not trigger any relays
Fail shows the error message and triggers both the fail and alarm
relays
Press the softkey next to a message. As the key is pressed the status of
the message changes.
4.14.3 Ignored Errors
Errors flagged as ‘Ignored Errors’ are displayed in the Ignored list and
aren’t passed onto to any other equipment. Error Masks Menu
Status of Error Masks
This option allows any of the error messages to be masked. There are
three states for the error message: Alm, Fail or Off.
•
•
Alm (Alarm) shows the error message and triggers the alarm relay
•
Off does not show the error message and does not trigger any relays
Fail shows the error message and triggers both the fail and alarm
relays
Press the softkey next to a message. As the key is pressed the status of
the message changes.
Restore Defaults
Access the Restore Defaults option from the Error Masks Menu. This sets
alarm, fail and error messages to the factory defaults.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-145
Operating the Equipment Locally: Errors
Errors
Menu
Active Errors…
Ignored Errors…
Error Masks....
Masked Active Errors....
Quit
Error Masks
Menu
Refer to Annex H, Error Messages for details
of all the error messages
Figure 4.20: Menu Hierarchy – Error Masks Menu
4.14.4 Masked Active Errors
If an active error is masked, it appears in the Masked list where the error
is noted and may be passed to a controlling GUI but doesn't generate an
error. Off and Masked are two of the same thing.
4.15
Diagnostics Menu
See Chapter 6, Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding for information
about the Diagnostics Menu.
Page 4-146
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Configs Menu
4.16
Configs Menu
4.16.1 Accessing the Menu
The Configs Menu can be selected from the Summary Screen by pressing
the Cfgs softkey or from the Advanced Menu by pressing the Configs
softkey.
4.16.2 Overview
Types of Configuration
The Encoder has a set of 16 default configurations. These configurations
provide the basis for quick and easy configuration of the operating
parameters for common set-ups, without having to enter all parameters
individually. The default configurations can be used as they are, or loaded
as the active configuration and edited as required.
The Encoder normally holds the following configurations:
•
•
•
•
One Active Configuration (it runs the Encoder)
Sixteen user configurations (in the User FLASH)
Sixteen backup configurations (in Backup FLASH)
Sixteen HD factory default configurations
Config editing takes place here.
Active Config
User Editable
Config (x1)
Load Active Config
Factory HD Defaults (x16)
Load Factory
HD Defaults
Store Active Config
User FLASH
Store Configs
in Backup
Password required here
Backup FLASH
User Configs
(x16)
Backup Configs
(x16)
Load Configs
from Backup
Any or all Configs
can be Password
Write-protected
Figure 4.21: Configuration, Graphical Explanation.
Active Configuration
This is the configuration that the Encoder is currently using. It is loaded
from one of the 16 user configuration locations (Load Active Config). It
can be edited at any time and also stored back as one of the user
configurations (Store Active Config).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-147
Operating the Equipment Locally: Configs Menu
User Configurations
Configurations loaded into the user FLASH become user configurations.
Any one of the user configurations can be loaded as an active configuration
(Load Active Config). A modified active configuration can be copied back
into one of the user FLASH locations (Store Active Config) where it can
be password write-protected. A user configuration that is write-protected
cannot be overwritten. The 16 user configurations can be saved in the
backup FLASH (Store Configs in Backup).
CAUTION…
Any user configuration that is not write-protected, will be overwritten
when Factory Default or Backup configurations are loaded to the user FLASH.
Backup Configurations
Backup FLASH stores a copy of each of the 16 user configurations when
you select Store Configs in Backup, you will be asked for the password
here.
If unsure of the user configurations or they become inadvertently modified,
the user configurations can be returned to a known state at any time by
the command Load Configs from Backup. This loads the 16 backup
configurations to the User FLASH, overwriting all user configurations that
are not write-protected. Individual configurations cannot be selected for
loading to the User FLASH.
The active (current) configuration is unaltered when you select Load
Configs from Backup.
Factory HD Default Configurations
There are 16 default configurations. They are provided as examples and
can be used as they are, if their settings suit your needs. They are
non-editable. The 16 default configurations can be loaded to the user
FLASH at any time by selecting Factory HD Defaults. This overwrites all
user configurations that are not write-protected. Individual configurations
cannot be selected for loading to the User FLASH.
Configuration, Write-Protection
Any or all of the 16 user configurations can be write-protected by selecting
Write Protect Configs. A password is asked for. With the correct
password entered, the question Write protect Which Configs? appears.
Select which configurations to protect by pressing the associated softkey in
each case. This toggles the write-protect condition (On or Off) for each
individual configuration. The letter R when shown to the left of the config
number, indicates that the configuration is read-only (write-protected).
Any configuration that is write-protected will be displayed as read-only if
attempting to overwrite it.
Page 4-148
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Operating the Equipment Locally: Configs Menu
4.16.3 Quick Configuration From the Summary Screen
The sixteen predefined user configurations are a quick and easy way to
configure the Encoder without having to enter individual parameters. The
Config Menu can be accessed directly from the summary screen by
pressing the Cfgs softkey. Press the Load Active Config softkey (see
Section 4.16.4) and a list of configurations is shown. Select the required
one by pressing the associated softkey. Nothing more need be done. The
Encoder is ready for use.
Press the Cfgs softkey for quick
access to the Config menu
This menu provides options for loading and storing predefined
configurations and updating and restoring backup configurations.
4.16.4 Load Active Config Option
Use the softkeys to select the required configuration to be loaded.
4.16.5 Store Active Config Option
Use the softkeys to select the position where the configuration is to be
stored.
NOTE…
There is no confirmation screen, the configuration is overwritten immediately the softkey indicating the
storage position is selected.
4.16.6 Load Configs From Backup Option
This option enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten with the
16 backup configurations.
NOTE…
The 16 backup configurations are loaded immediately the Load Configs from Backup softkey is
pressed although the current Encoder configuration remains unchanged.
4.16.7 Store Configs in Backup Option
This enables the 16 user configurations to be stored in the backup, and
may be password protected.
NOTE…
The 16 backup configurations are stored immediately the Store Configs in Backup softkey is
pressed.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 4-149
Operating the Equipment Locally: Configs Menu
4.16.8 Factory HD Defaults Option
This option enables the 16 user configurations to be overwritten by the
factory default settings.
Page 4-150
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 5
5. Web Browser Interface
Contents
5.1 Introduction ............................................................... 5-3
5.2 How to Set Up Internet Explorer For the Web
Browser Interface...................................................... 5-3
5.3 Web Browser Interface Options ................................ 5-6
5.4 Fault Reporting.......................................................... 5-8
List of Figures
Figure 5.1: Internet Options Dialog Box ........................................ 5-3
Figure 5.2: Settings Dialog Box ..................................................... 5-4
Figure 5.3: Connections Tab ......................................................... 5-4
Figure 5.4: Local Area Network (LAN) Settings Dialog Box .......... 5-5
Figure 5.5: Proxy Settings Dialog Box........................................... 5-5
Figure 5.6: TFTP Protocol for Cloning a File................................. 5-9
5.5 Cloning a File ............................................................ 5-9
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 5-1
Web Browser Interface
BLANK
Page 5-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Web Browser Interface
5.1
Introduction
There is a range of diagnostic and other utilities that can be accessed via a
web browser, such as Internet Explorer. Before these can be accessed it is
important to ensure that the Internet Explorer is correctly set up for the
web browser.
NOTE…
Netscape not currently supported.
5.2
How to Set Up Internet Explorer For the Web
Browser Interface
To set up Internet Explorer proceed as follows:
1. In Internet Explorer version 6, on the menu bar click Tools, Internet
Options. This displays the Internet Options dialog box with tabs
across the top.
2. In the General tab click Settings (see Figure 5.1).
Settings
Figure 5.1: Internet Options Dialog Box
3. This opens the Settings dialog box (see Figure 5.2).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 5-3
Web Browser Interface
Every visit to the page
Figure 5.2: Settings Dialog Box
4. For Check for newer versions of stored pages, select Every visit
to the page or any changes made to the pages will not be displayed.
Click OK to save the changes and return to the Internet Options
dialog box.
5. If Internet Explorer currently connects to the internet via a proxy
server then it must be reconfigured to connect directly to the Encoder,
bypassing the proxy server. Click the Connections tab (see
Figure 5.3).
LAN Settings
Figure 5.3: Connections Tab
Page 5-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Web Browser Interface
6. Click LAN Settings to open the Local Area Network (LAN)
Settings dialog box (see Figure 5.4).
Advanced
Figure 5.4: Local Area Network (LAN) Settings Dialog Box
7. Click Advanced to open the Proxy Settings dialog box (see
Figure 5.5).
Type the IP address of the
Encoder
Figure 5.5: Proxy Settings Dialog Box
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 5-5
Web Browser Interface
8. In the Exceptions area type the IP address of the Encoder.
9. Click OK as many times as necessary to close all dialog boxes until
only the Internet Explorer window is open.
For Internet Explorer version 4 the same selections must be made, but the
process starts from the View menu.
Once Explorer has been set up, type the IP address of the Encoder to be
accessed in the address bar (e.g. http://172.16.197.245), press Return
and a connection is established. After a few seconds, a welcome screen
appears followed by a window.
5.3
Web Browser Interface Options
The Web Browser interface gives access to the following options via a
menu tree on the left-hand side of the screen. Some options show
diagnostic information for parts of the Encoder.
•
General
Version Info
Gives full information on the build status of the Encoder
Release Notes.
The software releases are very useful in identifying any known
defects and the various code releases which fixed them.
Backplane Modes
The various backplane modes are shown. These indicate all the
combinations of option modules allowed.
SNMP MIB
This option is password protected. It allows the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP) Management Information Base
(MIB1) files to be downloaded from the Encoder to the PC. The
password is available from TANDBERG Television Customer
Services under a non-disclosure agreement (NDA).
Customer Support
There are contact details for Customer Services in various
countries. Fault reporting methods are also given.
•
Status
Summary – the current configuration of installed modules is
shown.
Licenced Features – shows a list of all the features which are,
and can be, enabled when the appropriate licence is purchased.
Installed Modules – gives details of which options are installed in
the Encoder.
Event Log – shows the events and tests which have been
performed since the Encoder was last switched on.
1
A definition of management items for some network component that can be accessed by a network manager. A MIB
includes the names of objects it contains and the type of information retained.
Page 5-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Web Browser Interface
NV Event Log - shows the actions which have been performed
since the Encoder was last switched on
External Control – gives the IP addresses of external equipment
which can control the Encoder.
•
Utilities
Symbol Rate Calculator
The Modulation Help allows you to see the difference that various
parameters have upon the symbol rate and bandwidth.
OFDM Bit-rate Calculator
The Bit-rate Calculator allows you to enter various parameters and
the optimal bit-rate (Mbit/s) is automatically calculated for 204
bytes and 188 bytes.
Telnet
Allows you to connect to a Telnet session.
Video Monitor
The Video Monitor displays the video input to the Encoder.
Front Panel
For TANDBERG Television use only.
Encoder List
Shows a list of the Encoders on the network together with various
parameters.
OSD
-
•
Download Utilities – allows you to download an osd.zip file
which consists of an OSD Creator (Creator.exe) and OSD
Loader (OSD.exe). There is a logo overlay facility allowing
broadcasters to trademark material whereby the Encoder is
able to overlay broadcasters trademarks/logos onto the active
video. See Annex E, Creating and Downloading a Logo for
information on how to use the programs.
Configure
Shows all the menus relevant to the Encoder and allows it to be set up.
•
Errors
Current Errors - shows a list of Active Errors, Masked Active
Errors and Latched Errors.
Masks
-
All Modules – allows you to set the alarm error masks to
Masked, Alarm, Fail or Ignore.
-
Modules - allows you to set the alarm error masks for each
individual module to Masked, Alarm, Fail or Ignore.
Fault Reporting – see Section 5.4.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 5-7
Web Browser Interface
•
Stored Configs
Load Config
Gives a list of preconfigured settings.
Save Config
Saves the current setting to an existing prenamed configuration.
Extract File
- ‘config’
- ‘flashcfg’
- ‘clone’
5.4
Fault Reporting
Click version nos.htm, event log.htm, event nv log.htm and Encoder
Errors to display the appropriate file. Save the files to a disk as follows:
1. Right-click the hyperlink version nos.htm, event log.htm, event nv
log.htm and Encoder Errors.
2. From the shortcut menu click Save Target As.
3. Select the directory where you want to save the files and click Save.
4. Send to the files to TANDBERG Television.
5. Also, send a clone file of the Encoder configuration. See Section 5.5,
Cloning a File for details.
Page 5-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Web Browser Interface
5.5
Cloning a File
A particularly useful feature of the Encoder is the ability to extract a clone
file. This can be sent to TANDBERG Television and used to configure other
Encoders to exactly the same specification. It is very useful when trying to
reproduce a fault and also for restoring a machine after repair. The file is
extracted using TFTP protocol (see Figure 5.6).
To extract the file, open a Command Prompt window and type:
tftp –i `IP address of Encoder’ get clone
For instance,
tftp –i 172.16.197.245 get clone
The cloned file will be stored on the PC drive in the same directory that the
command prompt is set to.
Figure 5.6: TFTP Protocol for Cloning a File
NOTE…
The clone file is read-only and must be deleted or renamed prior to downloading a second clone file on
the computer.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 5-9
Web Browser Interface
BLANK
Page 5-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Chapter 6
6. Preventive Maintenance and Faultfinding
Contents
6.1 Introduction ............................................................... 6-3
6.2 Preventive Maintenance............................................ 6-3
6.2.1 Routine Inspection - Cooling Fans ............... 6-3
6.2.2 Cleaning ....................................................... 6-3
6.2.3 Servicing....................................................... 6-3
Damage Requiring Service........................... 6-3
Replacement Parts ....................................... 6-4
Checks on Completion of Servicing.............. 6-4
6.3 Maintenance and Support Services .......................... 6-4
6.3.1 Introduction................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Warranty ....................................................... 6-4
6.3.3 Levels of Continuing TANDBERG
Television Service Support........................... 6-4
6.4 Errors and Diagnostics Menus – When to Use
Them ...................................................................... 6-5
6.4.1 Error Messages ............................................ 6-5
6.4.2 Diagnostics Menu ......................................... 6-5
Introduction................................................... 6-5
LCD Display Test.......................................... 6-6
Keyboard Test .............................................. 6-6
Fail Relay Test.............................................. 6-6
Alarm Relay Test .......................................... 6-6
Alarm LED Test ............................................ 6-6
Buzzer Test .................................................. 6-6
6.5.5
6.5.6
Fault Symptoms ............................................6-9
Breaks in Transmission.................................6-9
Noise Reduction............................................6-9
Audio Fault-finding ........................................6-9
Mux Fault-finding...........................................6-9
6.6 Rate Buffer Setting (SD Only) ...................................6-9
6.7 Field/Frame Pictures (SD Only)...............................6-10
6.8 Power Supply Problems/Green LED on Front
Panel Unlit ...............................................................6-10
6.8.1 Symptoms ...................................................6-10
6.8.2 Power LED Unlit..........................................6-10
6.8.3 Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating ................6-11
6.9 Disposing of This Equipment...................................6-11
6.9.1 General .......................................................6-11
6.9.2 Lithium Batteries .........................................6-12
List of Figures
Figure 6.1: Finding the Errors Menu ..............................................6-5
Figure 6.2: Finding the Diagnostics Menu......................................6-6
Figure 6.3: Orientation of Fuse Carrier ..........................................6-8
List of Tables
Table 6.1: Video Fault-finding ........................................................6-9
Table 6.2: Rate Buffer Settings ....................................................6-10
Table 6.3: Power LED Unlit Fault-finding .....................................6-10
Table 6.4: Fans Not Working/Overheating...................................6-11
6.5 Fault-finding .............................................................. 6-7
6.5.1 Fault-finding Philosophy ............................... 6-7
6.5.2 Preliminary Checks....................................... 6-7
6.5.3 AC User Accessible Fuse Replacement....... 6-8
6.5.4 Video Fault-finding........................................ 6-9
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-1
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
BLANK
Page 6-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.1
Introduction
This chapter provides the schedules and instructions, where applicable, for
routine inspection, cleaning and maintenance of the equipment which
should be performed by an operator. There are also some basic
fault-finding procedures to follow in the event of a suspected Encoder
failure.
6.2
Preventive Maintenance
6.2.1
Routine Inspection - Cooling Fans
The fans on the Encoder can be temperature controlled so may not be on if
the ambient temperature is low. Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification
for more information.
NOTE...
Failure to ensure a free flow of air around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is detected
by a temperature sensor on the Base Board which causes the alarm relay to be energised.
6.2.2
Cleaning
Unplug the Encoder from the wall outlet before cleaning the exterior with a
damp cloth. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
NOTE…
Only the exterior of the case should be cleaned.
6.2.3
Servicing
Damage Requiring Service
WARNING…
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THIS PRODUCT AS OPENING OR REMOVING COVERS MAY
EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS. REFER ALL SERVICING TO SERVICE
PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG TELEVISION.
Unplug the equipment from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified
service personnel under the following conditions:
1. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged
2. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product
3. If the product has been exposed to rain or water
4. If the product does not operate normally by following the operating
instructions
5. If the product has been dropped or the case has been damaged
6. When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Replacement Parts
When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has
used parts specified by the manufacturer or which have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorised substitutions may result
in fire, electric shock or other hazards.
Checks on Completion of Servicing
Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service
technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in a
safe operating condition. Also, performance and EMC checks may be
required.
6.3
Maintenance and Support Services
6.3.1
Introduction
TANDBERG Television is a leader in the design, integration and
implementation of digital broadcasting products and systems. It has a
large team dedicated to keeping our customers on air 24 hours a day, 365
days a year.
With regional offices worldwide, and ultra-modern specialist service
facilities in the US, UK, Hong Kong and Australia, TANDBERG Television
covers the world. There is a customer service centre open round the clock,
every day of the year, in your time zone.
TANDBERG’s years of design and support experience enable it to offer a
range of service options that will meet your needs at a price that makes
sense.
It’s called the TANDBERG Advantage.
6.3.2
Warranty
All TANDBERG Products and Systems are designed and built to the highest
standards and are covered under a comprehensive 12 month warranty.
6.3.3
Levels of Continuing TANDBERG Television Service
Support
For stand-alone equipment, then TANDBERG Television BASIC Advantage
is the value for money choice for you. BASIC provides you with year-byyear Service long after the warranty has expired.
For systems support you can choose either Gold or Silver Advantage.
These packages are designed to save you costs and protect your income
through enlisting the help of TANDBERG Television support specialists.
VOYAGER Advantage is the truly mobile service solution. This provides a
package specifically designed to keep you mobile and operational.
Call TANDBERG Sales for more details.
Page 6-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.4
Errors and Diagnostics Menus – When to Use
Them
6.4.1
Error Messages
Summary Screen
Ops ...
Cfgs
More ...
Quit
Advanced Menu
Setup ...
Errors...
Diagnostics…
Ops ...
Configs
Quit
Front Panel Diagnostics Menu
LCD Display
Keyboard
Fail Relay
Alarm Relay
Alarm LED
Buzzer
Quit
Errors Menu
Active Errors…
Ignored Errors…
Error Masks…
Masked Active Errors…
Quit
Figure 6.1: Finding the Errors Menu
Investigate any run-time errors by pressing the Active Errors softkey in
the Errors Menu (see Figure 6.1). Current errors are displayed.
Refer to Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally for further details of
error messages.
NOTES…
1. This function can be used with the Encoder still in service.
2. If an error reoccurs within approximately 30 seconds then it does not 'interrupt' the front panel
display. This avoids swamping the front panel display with error messages should an intermittent
error occur.
CAUTION…
It does not mean that the Encoder is fully functional if the Error option does not produce any results.
Some processes cannot be tested on-line.
6.4.2
Diagnostics Menu
Introduction
The Diagnostics Menu is selected from the Advanced Menu by pressing
the Diagnostics softkey. This menu (see Figure 6.2) has a selection of
diagnostic tests which allow the operator to test the individual component
parts of the equipment.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-5
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Summary Screen
Ops ...
Cfgs
More ...
Quit
Advanced Menu
Setup ...
Errors...
Diagnostics…
Ops ...
Configs
Quit
Front Panel Diagnostics Menu
LCD Display
Keyboard
Fail Relay
Alarm Relay
Alarm LED
Buzzer
Quit
Errors Menu
Active Errors
Error Masks
Quit
Figure 6.2: Finding the Diagnostics Menu
LCD Display Test
Press the LCD Display softkey to access the option and then press any
key to cycle through the test patterns and to return to the menu.
Keyboard Test
Press the Keyboard softkey to access the option and then press each
softkey and keypad key in turn. The display shows the name of each key
pressed. Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu.
Fail Relay Test
Press the Fail Relay softkey to access the option and then press any key
(except the Quit softkey) to toggle the fail relay on and off. Press the Quit
softkey to return to the menu. The relay can usually be heard clicking as it
changes state. The relay is connected to the rear panel ALARM connector
– see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for the connector pin-out details.
Alarm Relay Test
Press the Alarm Relay softkey to access the option and then press any
key (except the Quit softkey) to toggle the alarm relay on and off. Press
the Quit softkey to return to the menu. The relay can usually be heard
clicking as it changes state. The relay is connected to the rear panel
ALARM connector – see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment for the
connector pin-out details.
Alarm LED Test
Press the Alarm LED softkey to access the option and then press any key
(except the Quit softkey) to toggle the front panel Alarm LED on and off.
Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu.
Buzzer Test
Press the Buzzer softkey to access the option which immediately causes a
buzzer to sound. Press any key (except the Quit softkey) to turn the
buzzer off. Press the Quit softkey to return to the menu.
Page 6-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.5
Fault-finding
6.5.1
Fault-finding Philosophy
It is the objective of this chapter to provide sufficient information to enable
the operator to rectify apparent faults or else to identify the suspect
module, where possible. Some basic procedures are provide to follow in
the event of a suspected Encoder failure. It is assumed that fault-finding
has already been performed at a system level and that other equipment
units have been eliminated as the possible cause of the failure (see
relevant System Manual).
WARNING…
DO NOT REMOVE THE COVERS OF THIS EQUIPMENT. HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT
WITHIN THIS EQUIPMENT AND MAY BE EXPOSED IF THE COVERS ARE REMOVED. ONLY
TANDBERG TELEVISION TRAINED AND APPROVED SERVICE ENGINEERS ARE PERMITTED TO
SERVICE THIS EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION…
Do not remove the covers of this equipment. Unauthorised maintenance or the use of non-approved
replacements may affect the equipment specification and invalidate any warranties.
This manual does not include any maintenance information or procedures
which would require the removal of covers.
If the following information fails to clear the abnormal condition, call a
Service Engineer or contact Customer Services using the information given
in the preliminary pages of this manual.
6.5.2
Preliminary Checks
Always investigate the failure symptoms fully, prior to taking remedial
action. Fault diagnosis for the equipment operator is limited to the
following tasks, since the operator should NOT remove the covers of the
equipment:
1. Check the front panel Power LED. If this is not lit:
a) Replace the fuse in the power connector at the rear panel (see
Section 6.5.3, AC User Accessible Fuse Replacement).
NOTE…
Only replace the fuse once. If it blows again contact Customer Services.
b) Replace external equipment, power source and cables by
substitution to check their performance.
2. Confirm that the equipment hardware configuration is suitable for the
purpose and has been correctly installed and connected (see
Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment).
3. Confirm that inappropriate operator action is not causing the problem,
and that the equipment software set-up is capable of performing the
task being asked of it. If the validity of the configuration, set-up or
operation is in doubt, check it (see Chapter 4, Operating the Encoder
Locally).
4. Check that the fans are unobstructed and working correctly.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-7
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
When the failure condition has been fully investigated, and the symptoms
are known, proceed with fault-finding according to the observed
symptoms. If the fault persists, and cannot be rectified using the
instructions given in this manual, contact Customer Services. Switch off
the equipment if it becomes unusable, or to protect it from further
damage.
6.5.3
AC User Accessible Fuse Replacement
A fuse is held in an integral fuse carrier at the a.c. power inlet at the rear
panel.
NOTE…
Refer to Annex B, Technical Specification for information about the fuse.
To replace the a.c. power fuse:
WARNING…
BEFORE REPLACING THE REAR PANEL FUSE, DISCONNECT THE UNIT FROM THE SUPPLY.
FAILURE TO DO THIS MAY EXPOSE HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES. UNPLUG THE UNIT FROM THE
LOCAL SUPPLY SOCKET.
1. Ensure that power is turned off and the power cable is disconnected
from the a.c. power inlet.
2. Ease out the fuse carrier by placing a small, flat-bladed screwdriver in
the notch at the top of the carrier.
CAUTION...
When replacing the power input fuse, always ensure that a fuse of the correct type and rating is fitted.
Failure to do so results in inadequate protection.
3. Replace the fuse in the carrier.
4. Insert the fuse carrier back in the a.c. power inlet.
AC Power Inlet
If required, use a small flat-bladed
screwdriver in the notch at the top
of the carrier to ease it out.
Fuse Carrier
Figure 6.3: Orientation of Fuse Carrier
If the replacement fuse also blows, do not continue. Disconnect the
equipment and contact Customer Services for advice.
Page 6-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.5.4
Video Fault-finding
Fault Symptoms
Table 6.1: Video Fault-finding
Problem
What to do
Video input lock error
Check video input.
Video - wrong line standard
Check which video format is selected.
VCM stopped
Reboot.
Bad parameters
Check set-up.
Breaks in Transmission
If a transitory break in transmission occurs then check the encoding mode
option of the Encoder (see Chapter 4, Operating the Equipment Locally).
In the standard delay, low delay, very low delay and mega low delay the
following are not seamless: encoding modes, bit-rate and GOP changes.
This is because the Encoder tries to maintain minimal end-to-end delay
(latency) and that means buffer sizes must be as small as possible. In the
standard delay, low delay, very low delay and mega low delay encoding
modes the buffer size is selected by the video bit-rate. Changing the
bit-rate changes the buffer size, requiring a reset of the coding process.
For reflex operation video bit-rate changes must be seamless as the
bit-rate varies continuously. All the seamless modes are seamless only for
video bit-rate changes. However, for some GOP changes operation can be
seamless, but this aspect is not guaranteed.
Noise Reduction1
Where incoming picture material is corrupted by high frequency noise
(such as white noise) it is advisable to make use of the noise reduction
process. Noise reduction can be selected at the front panel.
6.5.5
Audio Fault-finding
If having problems when using the Dolby E Pass-through coding mode then
refer to Annex G, Audio Modes, for information about using this mode.
6.5.6
Mux Fault-finding
If there is no output from the ASI connectors, check the following:
1. The bit-rate - if it is too low then the video etc. is automatically
switched off.
2. The packet length - should be 188 or 204 bytes depending upon
configuration.
6.6
Rate Buffer Setting (SD Only)
The Encoder, when running in 4:2:22 mode, has two software selectable
rate buffer modes; small and medium.
1
2
Licence M2/ESO2/NR or M2/ESO2/HDNR is needed for this feature.
4:2:2 is only available when software option M2/ESO2/422 is purchased.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-9
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
When transmitting 4:2:22 mode into systems using the earlier System
3000 PRO IRD M2/PSR/3/422BAS then the rate buffer mode of the Encoder
must be set to 'small'.
However, when operating into an Alteia the rate buffer mode of the
Encoder must be set to ‘medium’ (default size).
When operating in mixed environments, both the Alteia and the Encoder
must be changed to small buffer mode.
NOTE…
Contact Customer Services for advice about changing the settings (see Preliminary Pages).
Table 6.2: Rate Buffer Settings
6.7
E5710/E5720 Setting
Alteia Setting
PRO IRD
SMALL
-
Alteia only
MEDIUM
MEDIUM
Alteia and PRO IRD
SMALL
SMALL
Field/Frame Pictures (SD Only)
Some Receivers are unable to decode field pictures. Select Frames in the
Field/Frame Option. Does the fault clear? If not, contact Customer
Services.
6.8
Power Supply Problems/Green LED on Front
Panel Unlit
6.8.1
Symptoms
WARNING...
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT AS OPENING OR REMOVING
COVERS MAY EXPOSE DANGEROUS VOLTAGES OR OTHER HAZARDS. REFER ALL
SERVICING TO SERVICE PERSONNEL WHO HAVE BEEN AUTHORISED BY TANDBERG
TELEVISION.
Use the following techniques to fault-find the Encoder according to the
observed symptom(s) when a power supply failure is suspected.
6.8.2
Power LED Unlit
If the Encoder Power LED is unlit, fault-find the problem as detailed in
Table 6.3.
Table 6.3: Power LED Unlit Fault-finding
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Check the Stand-by Switch. Is the ‘I’ at
The problem lies within the Encoder.
Rotate the Stand-by Switch so that the
Page 6-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
the top?
If Result of Action is No…
‘I’ is at the top. If the problem persists
proceed to next step.
2
Check Power LED. Is the Encoder still
working?
If the Encoder is clearly working normally
then the Power LED itself is probably at
fault. Call a Service Engineer.
Proceed to next step.
3
Check Power Source. Connect a
known-working piece of equipment to the
power source outlet. Does it work?
The problem lies within the Encoder or
power cable. Proceed to next step.
The problem lies with the power source.
Check building circuit breakers, fuse
boxes, etc. If problem persists, contact
the electricity supplier.
4
Check Power Cable and Fuse. Unplug
the power connector from the Encoder and
try it in another piece of equipment. Does it
work?
The problem lies within the Encoder.
Proceed to next step.
The problem lies with either the cable
itself, or with the fuse in the plug.
Replace the fuse or try to substitute
another cable.
5
Check PSU Module and Fuse. Ensure the
power connector is unplugged. Remove the
fuse from the rear panel connector and
inspect it. Has the fuse blown?
Replace the fuse with one of the correct
type and rating (see Annex B Technical
Specification). If the PSU still does not
work, unplug the power cable and call a
Service Engineer.
Possible problem with the PSU module.
Call a Service Engineer.
6.8.3
Fan(s) Not Working/Overheating
The fans can be disabled at low temperatures to allow the unit to quickly
attain operational temperature. In the event of overheating problems,
refer to Table 6.4.
NOTE…
Failure to ensure a free air flow around the unit may cause overheating. This condition is detected by a
temperature sensor on the Base Board which may be used to trigger an automatic alarm.
Table 6.4: Fans Not Working/Overheating
Step
Action
If Result of Action is Yes…
If Result of Action is No…
1
Check Fan Rotation. Inspect the fans
located at the sides of the enclosure. Are
the fans rotating? Check Base Board
temperature and fan (see the Build
Menu in Figure 4.9).
Check that the Encoder has been installed
with sufficient space allowed for air flow
(see Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment). If
the ambient air is too hot, additional cooling
may be required.
Possible break in the dc supply from the
PSU module to the suspect fan(s). Call
a Service Engineer.
6.9
Disposing of This Equipment
6.9.1
General
Dispose of this equipment safely at the end of its life. Local codes and/or
environmental restrictions may affect its disposal. Regulations, policies
and/or environmental restrictions differ throughout the world. Contact your
local jurisdiction or local authority for specific advice on disposal.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page 6-11
Preventive Maintenance and Fault-finding
6.9.2
Lithium Batteries
The equipment uses the Dallas Semiconductor NVRAM DS1746WP which
contains a Dallas DS9034PCX Power Cap Lithium battery. This cell is not a
USA Environmental Protection Agency listed hazardous waste. It is fully
encapsulated and should not be tampered with.
Page 6-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex A
A. Glossary
The following list covers most of the abbreviations, acronyms and terms as used in
TANDBERG Television Limited Manuals, User and Reference Guides. All terms may not
be included in this Reference Guide.
µm
Micrometre (former name - micron): a unit of length equal to one millionth (10-6) of a metre.
3:2 pulldown
A technique used when converting film material (which operates at 24 pictures per second) to 525-line video
(operating at 30 pictures per second).
4:2:0
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on alternate lines at half the
luminance rate.
4:2:2
Digital video coding method in which the colour difference signals are sampled on all lines at half the luminance
rate.
422P@ML
422 Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.) and
transmissions up to 50 Mbit/s over various mediums. Used for Contribution and Distribution applications.
5B6B
5 Binary Bits Encoded to 6 Binary Bits: Block code.
AC-3
Audio Coding algorithm number 3 (See Dolby Digital).
ACC
Authorisation Control Computer.
ADPCM
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An advanced PCM technique that reduces the bit-rate by coding
the difference values between successive samples rather than the absolute value of each sample.
ADT
Audio, Data And Teletext.
AFC
Automatic Frequency Control.
AFS
Automation File Server.
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.
AMOL I and II
Automatic Measure of Line-ups I and II: Used by automated equipment to measure programme-viewing ratings.
ASI
Asynchronous Serial Interface.
ASIC
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit: A customised chip designed to perform a specific function.
Async
Asynchronous.
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A connection orientated, cell based, data transport technology designed for
Broadband ISDN (B-ISDN). It provides a circuit-switched bandwidth-on-demand carrier system, with the flexibility
of packet switching. It offers low end-to-end delays and (negotiable on call set-up) Quality of Service guarantees.
Asynchronous refers to the sporadic nature of the data being transmitted. Cells are transmitted only when data is
to be sent; therefore the time interval between cells varies according to the availability of data.
ATSC
Advanced Television Standards Committee: An organisation founded in 1983 to research and develop a digital
TV standard for the U.S.A. In late 1996, the FCC adopted the ATSC standard, the digital counterpart of the NTSC
standard.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page A-1
Glossary
B3ZS
Bipolar with Three Zero Substitution: A method of eliminating long zero strings in a transmission. It is used to
ensure a sufficient number of transitions to maintain system synchronisation when the user data stream contains
an insufficient number of 1s to do so. B3ZS is the North American equivalent of the European HDB3.
Backward Compatibility
Refers to hardware or software that is compatible with earlier versions.
BAT
Bouquet Association Table: Part of the service information data. The BAT provides information about bouquets.
It gives the name of the bouquet and a list of associated services.
baud rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises information symbols that may consist of a number of
possible states. Equivalent to bit-rate when the symbols only have two states (1 and 0). Measured in Baud.
BER
Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. The rate at which errors occur in the transmission of data bits
over a link. It is generally shown as a negative exponent, (e.g. 10-7 means that 1 in 10,000,000 bits are in error).
BISS
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System: Non-proprietary encryption from EBU (Tech3290).
Bit-rate
The rate of transfer of digital data when the data comprises two logic states, 1 and 0. Measured in bit/s.
Block; Pixel Block
An 8-row by 8-column matrix of luminance sample values, or 64 DCT coefficients (source, quantised, or
dequantised).
Bouquet
A collection of services (TV, radio, and data, or any combination of the three) grouped and sold together, and
identified in the SI as a group. A single service may be in several bouquets.
B-Picture; B-Frame
Bi-directionally Predictive Coded Picture/Frame: A picture that is coded using motion-compensated prediction
from previous I or P frames (forward prediction) and/or future I or P frames (backward prediction). B frames are not
used in any prediction.
BPSK
Binary Phase Shift Keying: A data modulation technique.
Buffer
A memory store used to provide a consistent rate of data flow.
BW
Bandwidth: The transmission capacity of an electronic line such as (among others) a communications network,
computer bus, or broadcast link. It is expressed in bits per second, bytes per second or in Hertz (cycles per
second). When expressed in Hertz, the frequency may be a greater number than the actual bits per second,
because the bandwidth is the difference between the lowest and highest frequencies transmitted. High bandwidth
allows fast transmission or high-volume transmission.
Byte-mode
Each byte is delivered separately in the ASI Transport Stream, with stuffing data added between the Bytes to
increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI) Layer-2 Transport
Protocol.
CA
Conditional Access: The technology used to control the access to viewing services to authorised subscribers
through the transmission of encrypted signals and the programmable regulation of their decryption by a system
such as viewing cards.
CAT
Conditional Access Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data. Mandatory for MPEG-2
compliance if CA is in use.
C-Band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 4 GHz to 6 GHz.
Used by communications satellites. Preferred in tropical climates because it is not susceptible to fading.
CCIR
See: ITU-R.
CCITT
See: ITU-T.
Channel
A narrow range of frequencies, part of a frequency band, for the transmission of radio and television signals
without interference from other channels.
In the case of OFDM, a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise frequencies are allocated to a channel.
Channel Coding
A way of encoding data in a communications channel that adds patterns of redundancy into the transmission path
in order to improve the error rate. Such methods are widely used in wireless communications.
Chrominance
The colour part of a TV picture signal, relating to the hue and saturation but not to the luminance (brightness) of
the signal. In a composite-coded colour system, the colour information (chrominance, often referred to as
chroma) is modulated onto a high frequency carrier and added to the monochrome-format video signal carrying
the luminance (Y). In a component-coded colour system, the two colour-difference signals (R-Y)(B-Y) usually
referred to as CRCB (digital) or PRPB (analogue), are used to convey colour information. When CRCB (PRPB) is
added to the luminance (Y), the complete picture information is conveyed as YCRCB (YPRPB).
Closed Captioning
A TV picture subtitling system used with 525-line analogue transmissions.
CODE
Create Once Distribute Everywhere.
Codec
The combination of an Encoder and a complementary Decoder located respectively at the input and output of a
transmission path.
COFDM
Coded OFDM: COFDM adds forward error correction to the OFDM transmission consisting of Reed-Solomon
(RS) coding followed by convolutional coding to add extra bits to the transmitted signal. This allows a large number
of errors at the receive end to be corrected by convolutional (Viterbi) decoding followed by RS decoding.
Page A-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Glossary
Compression
Reduction in the number of bits used to represent the same information. For the purposes of a broadcast system,
it is the process of reducing digital picture information by discarding redundant portions of information that are not
required when reconstituting the picture to produce viewing clarity. Compression allows a higher bite-rate to be
transmitted through a given bandwidth.
Compression System
Responsible for compressing and multiplexing the video / audio / data bit-streams, together with the authorisation
stream. The multiplexed data stream is then ready for transmission.
CRCB
Digital Colour difference signals. These signals, in combination with the luminance signal (Y), define the colour
and brightness of each picture element (pixel) on a TV line. See: Chrominance
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical value based on the bits in a
block of data. This number is transmitted with the data and the receiver uses this information and the same
algorithm to ensure the accurate delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If
a mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.
CVCT
Cable Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
dB
Decibels: A ratio of one quantity to another using logarithmic scales to give results related to human aural or
visual perception. dB is a ratio whereas dBm, for example, is an absolute value, quoted as a ratio to a fixed point
of 0 dBm. 0 dBm is 1 mW at 1 kHz terminated in 600Ω. 0 dBmV is 1 mV terminated in 75Ω.
DCE
Data Communications Equipment: Typically a modem. It establishes, maintains and terminates a session on a
network but in itself is not the source (originator) or destination (end receiving unit) of signals (e.g. a computer, see
DTE). A DCE device may also convert signals to comply with the transmission path (network) format.
DCT
Discrete Cosine Transform: A technique for expressing a waveform as a weighted sum of cosines. Raw video
data is not readily compressible. DCT is not in itself a compression technique but is used to process the video data
so that it is compressible by an encoder. DCT processes the picture on an 8x8-pixel block basis, converting the
data from an uncompressible X Y form (as displayed by an oscilloscope) to a compressible frequency domain form
(as displayed by a spectrum analyser). Can be forward DCT or inverse DCT.
DDS
Direct Digital Synthesiser.
Decoder
The unit containing the electronic circuitry necessary to decode encrypted signals. Some Decoders are separate
from the receiver but in satellite TV broadcasting, the term is often used interchangeably as a name for an
Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD). The term IRD, or IRD / Decoder, is usually associated with satellite TV
broadcasting while Cable systems are based on Converters or on Set-Top Boxes / Converters.
Decoding Time-stamp
A field that may be present in a PES packet header that indicates the time that an access unit is to be decoded in
the system target Decoder.
DID
Data Identifier.
Differential Coding
Method of coding using the difference between the value of a sample and a predicted value.
DIL
Dual In Line: The most common type of package for small and medium scale integrated circuits. The pins hang
vertically from the two long sides of the rectangular package, spaced at intervals of 0.1 inch.
DIN
Deutsches Institut für Normung: German Standards Institute.
Dolby Digital
Formerly AC-3. An audio coding system based on transform coding techniques and psychoacoustic principles.
Downlink
The part of the satellite communications circuit that extends from the satellite to an Earth station.
Downconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a lower frequency range.
DPCM
Differential Pulse Code Modulation: An audio digitisation technique that codes the difference between samples
rather than coding an absolute measurement at each sample point.
DPI
Digital Programme Insertion. Associated with the splicing of digital programme content into transport streams,
for example, to provide local advertisements etc.
DSNG
Digital Satellite News-Gathering.
DSP
Digital Signal Processor.
DTE
Data circuit Terminating Equipment: A communications device that originates (is the source) or is the end
receiving unit (destination) of signals on a network. It is typically a terminal or computer.
DTH
Direct To Home. The term used to describe uninterrupted transmission from the satellite directly to the subscriber,
that is, no intermediary cable or terrestrial network utilised.
DTS
Digital Theater Systems: A motion picture digital sound system.
DVB
Digital Video Broadcasting: A European project which has defined transmission standards for digital
broadcasting systems using satellite (DVB-S), cable (DVB-C) and terrestrial (DVB-T) medium, created by the
EP-DVB group and approved by the ITU. Specifies modulation, error correction, etc. (see EN 300 421 for satellite,
EN 300 429 for cable and EN 300 744 for terrestrial).
DVB SI
Digital Video Broadcasting Service Information.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page A-3
Glossary
DVB-PI
DVB-Professional Interfaces: TTV Lan search shows – DVB Physical Interfaces
Earth
Technical Earth: Ensures that all equipment chassis within a rack are at the same potential, usually by
connecting a wire between the Technical earth terminal and a suitable point on the rack. This is sometimes known
as a Functional earth.
Protective Earth: Used for electric shock protection. This is sometimes known as a safety earth.
EBU
European Broadcast Union.
ECM
Entitlement Control Message.
EDI
Ethernet Data Input
EIA
Electronics Industries Association (USA).
EIT
Event Information Table: Equipment: A component of the DVB-Service Information (SI) stream generated within
an Encoder, containing information about events or programmes such as event name, start time, duration, etc.
System: EIT (Present/Following) contains the name of the current and next event. It may include an optional
descriptor (synopsis) giving brief details of content. EIT (Schedule) is used to produce a full EPG. The EIT is the
only DVB-SI table, which can be encrypted.
Elementary Stream
A generic term for a coded bit-stream, be it video, audio or other.
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility.
EMM
Entitlement Management Message.
Encryption
Encoding of a transmission to prevent access without the appropriate decryption equipment and authorisation.
EPG
Electronic Programme Guide: On-screen programme listing using thumbnail pictures and/or text.
Ethernet
The most widely used local area network (LAN) defined by the IEEE as the 802.3 standard. Transmission speeds
vary according to the configuration. Ethernet uses copper or fibre-optic cables.
ETS
European Telecommunications Standard.
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission.
FDM
Frequency Division Multiplex: A common communication channel for a number of signals, each with its own
allotted frequency.
FEC
Forward Error Correction: A method of catching errors in a transmission. The data is processed through an
algorithm that adds extra bits and sends these with the transmitted data. The extra bits are then used at the
receiving end to check the accuracy of the transmission and correct any errors.
FFT
Fast Fourier Transformation: A fast algorithm for performing a discrete Fourier transform.
FIFO
First In, First Out: A data structure or hardware buffer from which items are taken out in the same order they
were put in. Also known as a shelf from the analogy with pushing items onto one end of a shelf so that they fall off
the other. A FIFO is useful for buffering a stream of data between a sender and receiver that are not synchronised
- i.e. they not sending and receiving at exactly the same rate.
Footprint
The area of the Earth’s surface covered by a satellite’s downlink transmission. Also (generally) the area from
which the satellite can receive uplink transmissions.
FTP
File Transfer Protocol: A protocol used to transfer files over a TCP/IP network (Internet, UNIX, etc.). For
example, after developing the HTML pages for a Web site on a local machine, they are typically uploaded to the
Web server, using FTP. Unlike e-mail programs in which graphics and program files have to be attached, FTP is
designed to handle binary files directly and does not add the overhead of encoding and decoding the data.
G.703
The ITU-T standard which defines the physical and electrical characteristics of hierarchical digital interfaces.
GOP
Group of Pictures: MPEG video compression works more effectively by processing a number of video frames as
a block. The TANDBERG Television Encoder normally uses a 12 frame GOP; every twelfth frame is an I frame.
GPI
General Purpose Interface. A TANDBERGTV card used to control various specific functions of TTV encoders
using a contact closure input. In addition contact closure outputs are provided.
GUI
Graphical User Interface: The use of pictures rather than just words to represent the input and output of a
program. A program with a GUI runs under a windowing system and has a screen interface capable of displaying
graphics in the form of icons, drop-down menus and a movable pointer. The on-screen information is usually
controlled / manipulated by a mouse or keyboard.
HDTV
High Definition Television.
HPA
High Power Amplifier: Used in the signal path to amplify the modulated and up-converted broadcast signal for
feeding to the uplink antenna.
HSYNC
Horizontal (line) SYNCs.
Hub
A device in a multipoint network at which branch nodes interconnect.
Page A-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Glossary
ICAM
Integrated Conditional Access Module: Embedded in the IRD and responsible for descrambling, plus packet
filtering and reception. It also contains the physical interface to the subscriber’s viewing card.
IEC
International Electrotechnical Committee.
IF
Intermediate Frequency: Usually refers to the 70 MHz or 140 MHz output of the Modulator in cable, satellite and
terrestrial transmission applications.
Interframe Coding
Compression coding involving consecutive frames. When consecutive frames are compared, temporal redundancy
is used to remove common elements (information) and arrive at difference information. MPEG-2 uses B and P
frames, but since they are individually incomplete and relate to other adjacent frames, they cannot be edited
independently.
Intraframe Coding
Compression coding involving a single frame. Redundant information is removed on a per frame basis. All other
frames are ignored. Coding of a macroblock or picture that uses information only from that macroblock or picture.
Exploits spatial redundancy by using DCT to produce I frames; these are independent frames and can be edited.
IP
Internet Protocol: The IP part of TCP/IP. IP implements the network layer (layer 3) of the protocol, which contains
a network address and is used to route a message to a different network or sub-network. IP accepts packets from
the layer 4 transport protocol (TCP or UDP), adds its own header to it and delivers a datagram to the layer 2 data
link protocol. It may also break the packet into fragments to support the Maximum Transmission / Transfer Unit
(MTU) of the network.
I-picture; I-frame
Intracoded Picture/Frame: A picture / frame, which is coded using purely intracoding with reference to no other
field or frame information. The I frame is used as a reference for other compression methods.
IPPV
Impulse Pay Per View: One-time events, purchased at home (on impulse) using a prearranged SMS credit line.
IRD
Integrated Receiver Decoder: The Receiver with an internal MPEG Decoder, which is connected to the
subscriber’s TV. The IRD is responsible for receiving and de-multiplexing all signals. The unit receives the
incoming signal and if CA is active, decodes the signal when provided with a control word by the viewing card.
Domestic IRDs are also known as Set-Top Units or Set-Top Boxes.
IRE
Institute of Radio Engineers: No longer in existence but the name lives on as a unit of video amplitude
measurement. This unit is 1% of the range between blanking a peak white for a standard amplitude signal.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network: The basic ISDN service is BRI (Basic Rate Interface), which is made up of
two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel (2B+D). If both channels are combined into one, called
bonding, the total data rate becomes 128 kbit/s and is four and a half times the bandwidth of a V.34 modem
(28.8 kbit/s).
The ISDN high-speed service is PRI (Primary Rate Interface). It provides 23 B channels and one 64 kbit/s D
channel (23B+D), which is equivalent to the 24 channels of a T1 line. When several channels are bonded together,
high data rates can be achieved. For example, it is common to bond six channels for quality videoconferencing at
384 kbit/s. In Europe, PRI includes 30 B channels and one D channel, equivalent to an E1 line.
ISO
International Standards Organisation.
ISOG
Inter-union Satellite Operations Group.
ITS
Insertion Test Signal: A suite of analogue test signals placed on lines in the VBI. Also known as VITS.
ITT
Invitation To Tender.
ITU-R
International Telecommunications Union - Radiocommunications Study Groups (was CCIR).
ITU-T
International Telecommunications Union - Telecommunications Standardisation Sector (was CCITT).
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group: ISO/ITU standard for compressing still images. It has a high compression
capability. Using discrete cosine transform, it provides user specified compression ratios up to around 100:1 (there
is a trade-off between image quality and file size).
kbit/s
1000 bits per second.
Kbit
1024 bits, usually refers to memory capacity or allocation.
Ku-band
The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum, which spans the frequency range of approximately 12 GHz to
14 GHz. Used by communications satellites. Preferred for DTH applications because this range of frequency is
less susceptible to interference.
LAN
Local Area Network: A network, which provides facilities for communications within a defined building or group of
buildings in close proximity.
L-band
The frequency band from 950 MHz to 2150 MHz, which is the normal input-frequency-range of a domestic IRD.
The incoming signal from the satellite is down-converted to L-band by the LNB.
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
LNB
Low Noise Block Down-Converter: The component of a subscriber satellite transmission receiving dish which
amplifies the incoming signal and down-converts it to a suitable frequency to input to the IRD (typically 950 MHz 1600 MHz).
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page A-5
Glossary
LO
Local Oscillator.
LSB
Least significant bit.
Luminance
The television signal representing brightness, or the amount of light at any point in a picture. The Y in YCRCB.
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signal: LVDS is a generic multi-purpose Interface standard for high speed / low power
data transmission. It was standardised in ANSI/TIA/EIA-644-1995 Standard (aka RS-644).
Macroblock
A 16x16-pixel area of the TV picture. Most processing within the MPEG domain takes place with macro blocks.
These are converted to four 8x8 blocks using either frame DCT or field DCT. Four 8 x 8 blocks of luminance data
and two (4:2:0 chrominance format), four (4:2:2) or eight (4:4:4) corresponding 8 x 8 blocks of chrominance data
coming from a 16 x 16 section of the luminance component of the picture. Macroblock can be used to refer to the
sample data and to the coded representation of the sample values and other data elements.
Mbit/s
Million bits per second.
MCC
Multiplex Control Computer: A component of a System 3000 compression system. The MCC sets up the
configuration for the System 3000 Multiplexers under its control. The MCC controls both the main and backup
Multiplexer for each transport stream.
MCPC
Multiple Channels Per Carrier.
MEM
Multiplex Element Manager: A GUI based control system, part of the range of TANDBERG Television
compression system control element products. The evolution 5000 MEM holds a model of the system hardware.
Using this model, it controls the individual system elements to configure the output multiplexes from the incoming
elementary streams. The MEM monitors the equipment status and controls any redundancy switching.
MMDS
Multichannel Microwave Distribution System: A terrestrial microwave direct-to-home broadcast transmission
system.
Motion Compensation
The use of motion vectors to improve the efficiency of the prediction of sample values. The prediction uses motion
vectors to provide offsets into the past and/or future reference frames or fields containing previously decoded
sample values that are used to form the prediction error signal.
Motion Estimation
The process of estimating motion vectors in the encoding process.
Motion Vector
A two-dimensional vector used for motion compensation that provides an offset from the co-ordinate position in the
current picture or field to the co-ordinates in a reference frame or field.
MP@ML
Main Profile at Main Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.)
and transmissions up to 15 Mbit/s over various mediums.
MP@HL
Main Profile at High Level: A subset of the MPEG-2 standard, which supports digital video storage (DVD etc.)
and transmissions up to 80 Mbit/s over various mediums.
MPEG
Moving Pictures Experts Group: The name of the ISO/IEC working group, which sets up the international
standards for digital television source coding.
MPEG-2
Industry standard for video and audio source coding using compression and multiplexing techniques to minimise
video signal bit-rate in preparation for broadcasting. Specified in ISO/IEC 13818. The standard is split into layers
and profiles defining bit-rates and picture resolutions.
MSB
Most significant bit.
Msymbol/s
(Msym/s) Mega (million) Symbols per second (106 Symbols per second).
Multiplex
A number of discrete data streams (typically 8 to 12), from encoders, that are compressed together in a single
DVB compliant transport stream for delivery to a Modulator.
MUSICAM
Masking pattern adapted Universal Sub-band Integrated Coding And Multiplexing: An audio bit-rate
reduction system relying on sub-band coding and psychoacoustic masking.
Mux
Multiplexer: Transmission Multiplexer: receives EMMs from the ACC, ECMs from the BCC, video/audio data from
the encoders, and the SI stream from the SIC. It then multiplexes them all into a single DVB-compliant transport
stream, and delivers the signal to the uplink after modulation.
The Multiplexer also contains the cypher card, which scrambles the services according to the control words
supplied by the BCC.
Network
In the context of broadcasting: a collection of MPEG-2 transport stream multiplexes transmitted on a single
delivery system, for example, all digital channels on a specific cable system.
NICAM
Near Instantaneously Companded Audio Multiplex: Official name is NICAM 728. Used for digital stereo
sound broadcasting in the UK employing compression techniques to deliver very near CD quality audio.
728 refers to the bit-rate in kbit/s.
NIT
Network Information Table: Part of the service information data. The NIT provides information about the physical
organisation of each transport stream multiplex, and the characteristics of the network itself (such as the actual
frequencies and modulation being used).
Page A-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Glossary
nm
Nanometre: a unit of length equal to one thousand millionth (10-9) of a metre.
NTSC
National Television Systems Committee: The group, which developed analogue standards used in television
broadcast systems in the United States. Also adopted in other countries (e.g. Mexico, Canada, Japan). This
system uses 525 picture lines and a 59.97 Hz field frequency.
NVOD
Near Video On Demand: Method of offering multiple showings of movies or events. The showings are timed to
start at set intervals, determined by the broadcaster. Each showing of a movie or event can be sold to subscribers
separately.
NVRAM
Non-volatile Random Access Memory: Memory devices (permitting random read / write access) that do not lose
their information when power is removed. Stores the default configuration parameters set by the user.
OFDM
Orthogonal FDM: A modulation technique used for digital TV transmission in Europe, Japan and Australia; more
spectrally efficient than FDM. In OFDM, data is distributed over a large number of carriers spaced apart at precise
frequencies. The carriers are arranged with overlapping sidebands in such a way that the signals can be received
without adjacent channel interference.
OPPV
Order ahead Pay Per View: An advance purchase of encrypted one-time events with an expiry date.
OSD
On-screen display: Messages and graphics, typically originating from the SMS, and displayed on the subscriber’s
TV screen by the IRD, to inform the subscriber of problems or instruct the subscriber to contact the SMS.
Packet
A unit of data transmitted over a packet-switching network. A packet consists of a header followed by a number of
contiguous bytes from an elementary data stream.
PAL
Phase Alternating Line: A colour TV broadcasting system where the phase of the R-Y colour-difference signal is
inverted on every alternate line to average out errors providing consistent colour reproduction.
PAT
Program Association Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for
MPEG-2 compliance. The PAT points (maps) to the PMT.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation: A process in which a signal is sampled, each sample is quantised independently of
other samples, and the resulting succession of quantised values is encoded into a digital signal.
PCR
Program Clock Reference: A time-stamp in the transport stream from which the Decoder timing is derived.
PDC
Programme Delivery Control (VBI): A Teletext service allowing simple programming (i.e. VideoPlus) of VCR
recording times. If the desired program is rescheduled, PDC updates the programming information in the VCR.
Pel
Picture Element: Also known as a pixel. The smallest resolvable rectangular area of an image either on a screen
or stored in memory. On screen, pixels are made up of one or more dots of colour. Monochrome and grey-scale
systems use one dot per pixel. For grey-scale, the pixel is energised with different intensities, creating a range
from dark to light (a scale of 0-255 for an eight-bit pixel). Colour systems use a red, green and blue dot per pixel,
each of which is energised to different intensities, creating a range of colours perceived as the mixture of these
dots. If all three dots are dark, the result is black. If all three dots are bright, the result is white.
PES
Packetised Elementary Stream: A sequential stream of data bytes that has been converted from original
elementary streams of audio and video access units and transported as packets. Each PES packet consists of a
header and a payload of variable length and subject to a maximum of 64 kbytes. A time-stamp is provided by the
MPEG-2 systems layer to ensure correct synchronisation between related elementary streams at the Decoder.
PID
Packet Identifier: The header on a packet in an elementary data stream, which identifies that data stream. An
MPEG-2 / DVB standard.
PIN
Personal Identification Number: A password used to control access to programming and to set purchase limits.
Each subscriber household can activate several PINs and may use them to set individual parental rating or
spending limits for each family member.
Pixel
PIX (picture) Element: The digital representation of the smallest area of a television picture capable of being
delineated by the bit-stream. See Pel for more information.
pk-pk
peak to peak: Measurement of a signal or waveform from its most negative point to its most positive point.
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. A phase-locked loop is a control system which controls the rotation of an object by
comparing its rotational position (phase) with another rotating object as in the case of a sine wave or other
repeating signal. This type of control system can synchronise not only the speed, but also the angular position of
two waveforms that are not derived from the same source.
PMT
Program Map Table: Part of the MPEG-2 Program Specific Information (PSI) data and is mandatory for MPEG-2
compliance. Each service has a PMT, which lists the component parts (elementary streams of video, audio, etc.)
for the various services being transmitted.
P-picture/P-frame
A picture / frame produced using forward prediction. It contains predictions from either previous I frames or
previous P frames. The P frame is used as a reference for future P or B frames.
ppm
Parts per million.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page A-7
Glossary
PPV
Pay Per View: A system of payment for viewing services based on a usage / event basis rather than on on-going
subscription. Subscribers must purchase viewing rights for each PPV event that they wish to view. PPV events
may be purchased as IPPV or OPPV.
Program
PC - A sequence of instructions for a computer.
TV - A concept having a precise definition within ISO 13818-1 (MPEG-2). For a transport stream, the timebase is
defined by the PCR. The use of the PCR for timing information creates a virtual channel within the stream.
Programme
A linking of one or more events under the control of a broadcaster. For example, football match, news, film show.
In the MPEG-2 concept, the collection of elementary streams comprising the programme, have a common start
and end time. A series of programmes are referred to as events.
PRPB
Analogue Colour difference signals. Refer to CRCB for an explanation.
PROM
Programmable Read-Only Memory: A device, which may be written once with data for permanent storage, and
then read whenever required. Special types of PROM permit the erasure of all data by Ultraviolet light (EPROM) or
by application of an electronic signal (EEPROM).
PS
Program Stream: A combination of one or more PESs with a common timebase.
PSI
Program Specific Information: Consists of normative data, which is necessary for the demultiplexing of transport
streams and the successful regeneration of programs. (See also: SI).
PSIP
Program System Information Protocol: The ATSC equivalent of SI for DVB.
PSK
Phase Shift Keying: A method of modulating digital signals particularly suited to satellite transmission.
PSR
Professional Satellite Receiver: See also: IRD.
PSU
Power Supply Unit.
PTS
Presentation Time Stamp (ATSC).
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation: A method of modulating digital signals, which uses combined techniques of
phase modulation and amplitude modulation. It is particularly suited to cable networks.
QPSK
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying: A form of phase shift keying modulation using four states.
QSIF
Quarter Screen Image Format.
Quantise
A process of converting analogue waveforms to digital information. 8-bit quantisation as set out in ITU-R Rec. 601.
uses 256 levels in the range 0 – 255 to determine the analogue waveform value at any given point. The value is
then converted to a digital number for processing in the digital domain.
RAM
Random Access Memory: A volatile storage device for digital data. Data may be written to, or read from, the
device as often as required. When power is removed, the data it contains is lost.
RAS
Remote Authorization System: A TANDBERG TV proprietary public-key encryption system used to prevent
unauthorized viewing of a TV programme or programmes.
RF
Radio Frequency.
ROM
Read Only Memory: A non-volatile storage device for digital data. Data has been stored permanently in this
device. No further information may be stored (written) there and the data it holds cannot be erased. Data may be
read as often as required.
RS
Reed-Solomon coding: An error detection and correction, coding system. 16 bytes of Reed-Solomon Forward
Error Correction code are appended to the packet before transmission, bringing the packet length to 204 bytes.
The 16 bytes are used at the receiving end to correct any errors. Up to eight corrupted bytes can be corrected.
RLC
Run Length Coding: Minimisation of the length of a bit-stream by replacing repeated characters with an
instruction of the form ‘repeat character x y times’.
SCPC
Single Channel Per Carrier.
SCTE
Society of Cable and Telecommunications Engineers. SCTE 35 defines a means for inserting digital cue tones
into an Encoder’s output so affiliates can trigger switches from the network feed to a local content.
Spectral Scrambling
A process (in digital transmission) used to combine a digital signal with a pseudo-random sequence, producing a
randomised digital signal that conveys the original information in a form optimised for a broadcast channel.
Scrambling
Alteration of the characteristics of a television signal in order to prevent unauthorised reception of the information
in clear form.
SDI
Serial Digital Interface.
SDT
Service Description Table: Provides information in the SI stream about the services in the system; for example,
the name of the service, the service provider, etc.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage (EN 60950).
Page A-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Glossary
STB
Set-Top Box: A box that sits on top of a television set and is the interface between the home television and the
cable TV company. New technologies evolving for set-top boxes are video-on-demand, video games, educational
services, database searches, and home shopping. The cable equivalent of the IRD.
STT
System Time Table (ATSC).
SFN
Single Frequency Network: The SFN technique allows large geographic areas to be served with a common
transmission multiplex. All transmitters in the network are synchronously modulated with the same signal and they
all radiate on the same frequency. Due to the multi-path capability of the multi-carrier transmission system
(COFDM), signals from several transmitters arriving at a receiving antenna may contribute constructively to the
total wanted signal. The SFN technique is not only frequency efficient but also power efficient because fades in the
field strength of one transmitter may be filled by another transmitter.
SI
Service Information: Digital information describing the delivery system, content and scheduling (timing) of
broadcast data streams. DVB-SI data provides information to enable the IRD to automatically demultiplex and
decode the various streams of programmes within the multiplex.
Specified in ISO/IEC 13818[1]. (DVB)
Single Packet Burst Mode
A burst of ASI bytes (either 188 or 204, depending on packet length) is contiguously grouped into an MPEG-2
Transport Stream packet. Stuffing data is added between the packets to increase the data rate to 270 Mbit/s. See
DVB Document A010 rev. 1, Section B3.3, (ASI) Layer-2 Transport Protocol.
Smart Card
A plastic card with a built-in microprocessor and memory used for identification, financial transactions or other
authorising data transfer. When inserted into a reader, data is transferred to and from the host machine or a
central computer. It is more secure than a magnetic stripe card and it can be disabled if the wrong password is
entered too many times. As a financial transaction card, it can be loaded with digital money and used in the same
way as cash until the balance reaches zero. The file protocol is specific to its intended application.
SMATV
Satellite Mast Antenna Television: A distribution system, which provides sound and television signals to the
households of a building or group of buildings, typically used to refer to an apartment block.
SMPTE
Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers.
SMS
Subscriber Management System: A system which handles the maintenance, billing, control and general
supervision of subscribers to conditional access technology viewing services provided through cable and satellite
broadcasting.
An SMS can be an automatic (e.g. Syntellect) system where subscribers order entitlements by entering
information via a telephone. Alternatively, an SMS can be a manual system, which requires subscribers to speak
with an operator who then manually enters their entitlement requests. Some systems support multiple SMSs.
SNG
Satellite News-Gathering.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol.
Spatial Redundancy
Information repetition due to areas of similar luminance and/or chrominance characteristics within a single frame.
Removed using DCT and Quantisation (Intra-Frame Coding).
SPI
Synchronous Parallel Interface.
Statistical Redundancy
Data tables are used to assign fewer bits to the most commonly occurring events, thereby reducing the overall
bit-rate. Removed using Run Length Coding and Variable Length Coding.
TAXI
Transparent Asynchronous Tx / Rx Interface: A proprietary high-speed data interface.
TCP / IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol: A set of communications protocols that may be used to
connect different types of computers over networks.
TDM
Time Division Multiplex: One common, communications channel carrying a number of signals, each with its own
allotted time slot.
TDT
Time and Date Table: Part of the DVB Service Information. The TDT gives information relating to the present time
and date.
Temporal Redundancy
Information repetition due to areas of little or no movement between successive frames. Removed using motion
estimation and compensation (Inter-Frame Coding).
Time-stamp
A term that indicates the time of a specific action such as the arrival of a byte or the presentation of a presentation
unit.
TOT
Time Offset Table: This optional SI table supports the use of local offsets as well as the UTC time/date
combination.
The purpose of the table is to list by country the current offset from UTC and the next expected change to that
offset (to track when daylight saving occurs).
The offset resolution is to within 1 minute over a range of ±12 hours from UTC.
Transport Stream
A set of packetised elementary data streams and SI streams, which may comprise more than one programme, but
with common synchronisation and error protection. The data structure is defined in ISO/IEC 13818-1 [1] and is the
basis of the ETSI Digital Video Broadcasting standards.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page A-9
Glossary
Transport Stream Packet
Header
A data structure used to convey information about the transport stream payload.
TS
Transport Stream.
TSDT
Transport Stream Descriptor Table: A component of the MPEG-2 PSI data. This table describes which type of
Transport stream it is in (i.e. DVB, ATSC etc.). It may also contain other descriptors.
TSP
Transport Stream Processor.
TVCT
Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
U
44.45 mm (rack height standard).
UART
Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter: A device providing a serial interface for transmitting and
receiving data.
UHF
Ultra High Frequency: A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 300 MHz to 3000 MHz (3 GHz).
Upconvert
The process by which the frequency of a broadcast transport stream is shifted to a higher frequency range.
Uplink
The part of the communications satellite circuit that extends from the Earth to the satellite.
UPS
Uninterruptable Power Supply: A method of supplying backup power when the electrical power fails or drops to
an unacceptable voltage level. Small UPS systems provide battery power for a few minutes; enough to power
down the computer in an orderly manner. This is particularly important where write back cache is used.
Write back cache is where modified data intended for the disk, is temporarily stored in RAM and can be lost in the
event of a power failure. Sophisticated systems are tied to electrical generators that can provide power for days.
UPS systems typically provide surge suppression and may provide voltage regulation.
UTC
Universal Time Co-ordinate: An internationally agreed basis for timekeeping introduced in 1972 and based on
international atomic time (corresponds to Greenwich Mean Time or GMT).
VCT
Virtual Channel Table (ATSC).
VHF
Very High Frequency: A portion of the electromagnetic spectrum covering 30 MHz to 300 MHz.
VITC
Vertical Interval Time Code.
VITS
Vertical Interval Test Signal: See: ITS.
VPS
Video Programming System: A German precursor to PDC
WSS
Wide Screen Switching: Data used in wide-screen analogue services, which enables a receiver to select the
appropriate picture display mode.
WST
World System Teletext: System B Teletext. Used in 625 line / 50 Hz television systems (ITU-R 653).
XILINX
A type of programmable Integrated Circuit.
Y (Luminance)
Defines the brightness of a particular point on a TV line. The only signal required for black and white pictures.
Page A-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex B
B. Technical Specification
Contents
B.1 Inputs ......................................................................B-3
B.1.1 Video ............................................................B-3
SDI................................................................B-3
HD IN............................................................B-3
H SYNC ........................................................B-4
Analogue Video Specification.......................B-4
Encoder Settings for PAL/NTSC Video
Performance Figures ....................................B-4
PAL Video Performance Figures ..................B-5
NTSC Video Performance Figures ...............B-6
Teletext Extraction........................................B-6
International Television Standards ...............B-6
Video Coding Resolutions ............................B-7
B.1.2 Audio ............................................................B-7
Analogue and Digital Audio ..........................B-7
Embedded Audio (Via SDI) ..........................B-9
Embedded Audio (Via HD SDI) ..................B-10
MPEG-1 Audio Encoding Bit-rates .............B-10
Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit-rates.......B-11
B.1.3 L-Band Input ...............................................B-11
B.2 Test Tones ..............................................................B-12
B.3 Outputs ...................................................................B-12
B.3.1 IF Outputs...................................................B-12
B.3.2 L-Band Outputs ..........................................B-13
B.3.3 Reference Frequency Output .....................B-15
B.3.4 ASI Out 1, ASI Out 2, ASI Out 3 Outputs ...B-15
B.4 Control and Monitoring............................................B-15
B.4.1 Remote Control - Ethernet 1 and 2.............B-15
B.4.2 Local Control ..............................................B-15
B.4.3 Alarm ..........................................................B-16
B.4.4 Remote Control ..........................................B-16
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
B.5 Data ................................................................... B-16
B.5.1 RS-232 Data .............................................. B-16
B.5.2 RS-422 Data .............................................. B-17
B.6 AC Power Supply ................................................... B-18
B.7 Physical Details ...................................................... B-18
B.8 Environmental Conditions....................................... B-19
B.9 Compliance............................................................. B-19
B.9.1 Safety......................................................... B-19
B.9.2 EMC ........................................................... B-20
B.9.3 Shock and Vibration................................... B-20
B.9.4 CE Marking ................................................ B-21
B.9.5 C-Tick Mark................................................ B-21
B.10 Cable Types ........................................................... B-21
B.11 Option Modules ...................................................... B-22
B.11.1 M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 Additional Audio and
Linear PCM Option Module........................ B-22
B.11.2 M2/EOM2/REMUX Remux Option
Module ....................................................... B-22
Connectors................................................. B-22
LEDs .......................................................... B-23
B.11.3 M2/EOM2/ATMS155… ATM Network
Interface Module ........................................ B-24
Variants of The ATM Network Interface
Module ....................................................... B-24
DVB-ASI Copper Output ............................ B-24
DVB-ASI Copper Input............................... B-24
10BaseT Ethernet Connector .................... B-25
Multimode Fibre Optic Connector .............. B-25
Monomode Fibre Optic Connector............. B-25
M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Connector .... B-26
M2/EOM2ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Connector... B-27
Page B-1
Technical Specification
M2/EOM2ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical
Module ....................................................... B-28
B.11.4 M2/EOM2/IP, IP Output Card Option......... B-28
B.11.5 General Purpose Interface Card
(M2/EOM2/GPI) ......................................... B-29
List of Tables
Table B.1: Serial Digital Video Specification ................................. B-3
Table B.2: H SYNC Specification .................................................. B-4
Table B.3: Analogue Video Specification ...................................... B-4
Table B.4: Encoder Settings for PAL/NTSC Video
Performance Figures.................................................... B-5
Table B.5: PAL System Video Performance Figures .................... B-5
Table B.6: NTSC System Video Performance Figures ................. B-6
Table B.7: International Television Standards............................... B-6
Table B.8: Video Coding Resolutions............................................ B-7
Table B.9: Analogue and Digital Audio Specification .................... B-7
Table B.10: MUSICAM Analogue Test Specification..................... B-8
Table B.11: Embedded Audio Specification ................................ B-10
Table B.12: Embedded Audio Specification ................................ B-10
Table B.13: MPEG-1 Audio Encoding Bit-rates........................... B-10
Table B.14: Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit-rates .................... B-11
Table B.15: L-BAND IN Specification.......................................... B-11
Table B.16: Test Tones Specification.......................................... B-12
Table B.17: IF OUT MAIN Specification...................................... B-12
Table B.18: IF OUT MONITOR Specification.............................. B-13
Table B.19: L-BAND OUT MAIN Specification............................ B-13
Table B.20: L-BAND OUT MONITOR Specification.................... B-14
Table B.21: Reference Frequency Output Specification ............. B-15
Page B-2
Table B.22: ASI Out Specification ............................................... B-15
Table B.23: Ethernet Specification .............................................. B-15
Table B.24: Alarm Specification .................................................. B-16
Table B.25: Remote Control Specification................................... B-16
Table B.26: RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification ...... B-16
Table B.27: RS-422 Data Specification ....................................... B-17
Table B.28: AC Power Supply Specification................................ B-18
Table B.29: Physical Details........................................................ B-18
Table B.30: Environmental Specification..................................... B-19
Table B.31: Suitable Signal Cable Types .................................... B-21
Table B.32: DVB ASI In 1, 2 and 3 Connector ............................ B-22
Table B.33: DVB ASI Out 1 Connector (Disabled) ...................... B-22
Table B.34: DVB ASI In 1, 2 and 3 - LED Indications.................. B-23
Table B.35: DVB ASI Out 1 - LED Indications............................. B-23
Table B.36: B-ISDN Networks Supported ................................... B-24
Table B.37: DVB Copper Output Connection .............................. B-24
Table B.38: DVB Copper Input Connection................................. B-24
Table B.39: Ethernet Connector ................................................. B-25
Table B.40: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector ............................ B-25
Table B.41: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector ........................... B-26
Table B.42: E3 Input Connector .................................................. B-26
Table B.43: E3 Output Connector ............................................... B-26
Table B.44: DS3, G.703 Input Connector.................................... B-27
Table B.45: DS3, G.703 Output Connector ................................. B-27
Table B.46: SDH (STM-1E) Copper Input Connector.................. B-28
Table B.47: SDH (STM-1E) Copper Output Connector............... B-28
Table B.48: Ethernet Port (IP Output Card)................................. B-28
Table B.49: GPI Connector ......................................................... B-29
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.1
Inputs
B.1.1
Video
SDI
Table B.1: Serial Digital Video Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
SDI IN
Connector type
75 Ω BNC female socket
Input standard (UK/EC)
ITU-R RECMN BT.656-3 Interfaces for Digital Component Video Signals in
525-Line and 625-Line Television Systems Operating at the 4:2:2 Level of
Recommendation ITU-R BT.601 (Part A).
Input standard (USA)
ANSI / SMPTE 259M Television 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4 fsc
Composite Digital Signals -Serial Digital Interface.
(Encoder only supports Component).
Level C - 270 Mbit/s, 525/625 component.
Cable length
250 m, maximum
Recommended cable type
PSF 1/3
Input level
800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
Return loss
Better than 15 dB, 10 MHz - 270 MHz
Input impedance
75 Ω (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
HD IN
Table B.2: High Definition Serial Digital Video Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
HD IN
Connector type;
BNC 75 Ω female
Input standard
SMPTE 292M Bit Serial Digital Interface for High Definition Television
Systems
Cable length
100 m, maximum
Input level
800 mV pk-pk nominal ±10%
Return loss
>15 dB, 1.5 GHz
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-3
Technical Specification
H SYNC
Table B.2: H SYNC Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
H SYNC
Connector type
75 Ω BNC female socket
Input standard
625 line PAL, 525 line PAL-M or 525 line NTSC, chrominance not required.
Input level
1 V pk-pk nominal ±5%
Cable length
250 m, maximum
Return loss
Better than 30 dB up to 6 MHz
Input impedance
75 Ω (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
Analogue Video Specification
Table B.3: Analogue Video Specification
Item
Specification
Analogue input
625 line composite PAL-B, -D, -G, -H, -I
525 line composite NTSC-M, PAL-M as specified in ITU-R report 624-4, Characteristics of
Television Systems (NTSC with and without set-up of 7.5 IRE)
Connector designation
COMP VIDEO
Connector type
75 Ω BNC socket
Input level
1 V pk-pk nominal ±5%
Return loss
Better than 30 dB up to 6 MHz (when impedance is set to 75 Ω)
Input impedance
75 Ω/High Z switchable (powered-down impedance = 75 Ω)
Sampling
Sampled with a 10 bit ADC
NOTE…
The inputs are isolated from the chassis to prevent 50 Hz/60 Hz hum.
Encoder Settings for PAL/NTSC Video Performance Figures
The Encoder settings for the PAL/NTSC video performance figures are
shown in Table B.4.
NOTE…
The PAL and NTSC video performance figures are measured when the Encoder is connected to a
calibrated Receiver.
Page B-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
Table B.4: Encoder Settings for PAL/NTSC Video Performance Figures
Item
Specification
Noise reduction
Off
Video bit-rate
8 Mbit/s
Resolution
720 x 576
GOP
IBBP
Profile
422P@ML
Packet length
188
Mux Bit-rate
40 Mbit/s
PAL Video Performance Figures
Table B.5: PAL System Video Performance Figures
Pattern
Item
Specification
Input return loss
30 dB
VITS Line 17
Bar amplitude ref (bp)
700 mV ± 7 mV
VITS Line 17
Jitter
5 ns pk-pk
VITS Line 17
Luminance bar tilt
±0.2%
VITS Line 17
2T pulse K-rating
±1.0% KF
VITS Line 17
Pulse/bar K-rating
± 0.5% KF
VITS line 17
P-B ratio
99% - 101%
VITS Line 17
Chrom/lum delay
±20 ns
VITS Line 17
Chrom/lum gain
95 – 105%
100% Luma Ramp
Luma noise weighted
≤ -60 dB
Filters: tilt null, unified weighting, 5 MHz
LPF, Fsc trap, 100 kHz HP
5-step staircase - modulated
Differential gain
± 1.5%
5-step staircase - modulated
Differential phase
± 1°
5-step staircase - no
modulation
Luma non-linearity
≤ 5%
Flat field Red 75%
Chroma noise AM
≤ -58 dB
Chroma noise PM
≤ -58 dB
Filters: HPF - 10 kHz, LPF 500 kHz
Reference – fixed; single line, Field 1
Multiburst VITS line 18
Frequency response
0.5 MHz ±0.2 dB
1.0 MHz ±0.2 dB
2.0 MHz ±0.2 dB
4.0 MHz ±0.2 dB
4.8 MHz ±0.5 dB
5.8 MHz - 0 to –2.5 dB
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-5
Technical Specification
NTSC Video Performance Figures
Table B.6: NTSC System Video Performance Figures
Pattern
Item
Specification
Input return loss
30 dB
NTC-7 Composite
Jitter
± 5 ns
NTC-7 Composite
Bar amplitude ref (bp)
100 ±1.5 IRE
NTC-7 Composite
2T pulse K-rating
±1% KF
NTC-7 Composite
Chrom/lum delay
± 20 ns
NTC-7 Composite
Chrom/lum gain
90 - 110%
100% Luma Ramp
Luma noise weighted
≤ -60 dB
Filters: tilt null, unified weighting, 5 MHz
LPF,
Fsc trap, 100 kHz HP
5-step staircase - modulated
Differential gain
±1.5%
5-step staircase - modulated
Differential phase
±1°
Teletext Extraction
Teletext is extracted from the Vertical Blanking Interval (VBI).
International Television Standards
Table B.7 shows television standards appropriate to the Encoder.
Table B.7: International Television Standards
As indicated in Menus M
Page B-6
M
B
G
H
----- Europe / Asia ----
I
D
Region
USA/Japan
UK
Standard
NTSC
------------------------------------------- PAL ---------------------------------
Lines / frame
525
525
625
625
625
625
625
Fields / second
60
60
50
50
50
50
50
Interlace
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
2/1
Frames / second
30 (29.97)
30 (29.97) 25
25
25
25
25
Lines / second
15 750
15 750
15 625
15 625
15 625
15 625
15 625
Aspect ratio
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
4/3
Video band (MHz)
4.2
4.2
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.5
6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
Video Coding Resolutions
Table B.8: Video Coding Resolutions
In Auto, pixel
value in
brackets
varies with
bit-rate that
is set.
Selected Option
SHD Mode
625 Line Modes
525 Line Modes
Auto (720x576)
Auto (720x480)
720 x576
720 x480
704 x576
704x480
640 x576
640x480
544 x576
544x480
528 x576
528 x576
480 x576
352x576
352x288 (SIF)
Description
Relates to the number of pixels
across the screen and the
number of lines down the
screen (pixels x lines).
480x480
352x480
352x240 (SIF)
HD
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 23.976
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 24
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 25
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960pSF 25
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 29.97
Relates to the number of lines
down the screen and number
of pixels across the screen
(lines x pixels).
1080 x 1920/1440/1280/960i 30
720 x 1280/960p 50
720 x 1280/960p 59.94
720 x 1280/960p 60
576 x 720/704p 50
480 x 720/704p 59.94
480 x 720/704p 60
B.1.2
Audio
Analogue and Digital Audio
Table B.9: Analogue and Digital Audio Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
AUDIO IN
Connector type
15-way, D-type male connector
Input standard (analogue)
Balanced analogue
Clip level
12 dB, 15 dB or 18 dB
(15 dB available with PCB issue 4 and later)
Sampling rate
32/48 kHz (selectable)
Input impedance
600 Ω or 20 kΩ (selectable). 20 kΩ = default
Input standard (digital)
AES/EBU digital
Termination
110 Ω
Sampling rate
32/48 kHz (selectable)
Input rate
32, 44.1, 48 kHz
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-7
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Output (digital) ref
AES/EBU digital
Impedance
75 Ω
Sampling rate
48 kHz
Coding Standards
Coding standard
MPEG-1 Layer 2 (ISO/IEC 11172)
Supported coding modes
Single Mono, Dual Mono, Joint Stereo, Stereo
Supported coded data rate
32 kbit/s - 384 kbit/s
Coding standard
Dolby Digital (AC-3) (ATSC A/52, DVB TR 102 154)
Supported coding modes
1/0, 2/0
Supported coded data rate
56 k - 640 kbit/s
Coding standard
Dolby Digital AC-3 Pass-through (ATSC A/52, DVB TR 102 154) (see
Note 1, after Table)
Coding standard
Linear PCM/Dolby E Pass-through (SMPTE 302M) (see Note 1, after
Table)
Coding Standard
DTS Pass-through (see Note 1, after Table))
NOTES…
1. Refer to Annex F, Audio Modes when using these coding standards.
2. Problems may be experienced with some Receivers if the Encoder and Decoder are not using the
same version of SMPTE 302M specification, e.g. either 1998 or 2000. The Encoder can be set up
to work in either standard.
3. The digital audio input does not support SPDIF.
CAUTION…
When the unit is not powered the audio input defaults to digital with 110 Ω termination.
Table B.10: MUSICAM Analogue Test Specification
Item
Specification
Set-up of Alteia Receiver
Audio Format
MPEG
Output
Analogue
Clip Level
18 dB
Set-up of Audio Encoder
Input
Analogue
Clip Level
18 dB
Sampling Frequency
48 kHz
Coding Standard
MUSICAM, MPEG 1 (Layer 2)
Coding Mode
Stereo
Bit-rate
384 k bit/s
Set-up of Lindos Audio Oscillator
Sequence
TPBDLKZ
Test
Tolerance for Left and Right Legs for Channel (A) and Channel (B)
Test Level
T
1 kHz @ 0 dB
Sweep 20 Hz - 20 kHz @ -20 dB
Page B-8
± 0.2 dB
P
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
20 Hz – 63 Hz
+0.0 to - 0.5 dB
100 Hz – 10 kHz
+0.2 to - 0.3 dB
12.5 Hz – 18 kHz
+0.2 to - 0.5 dB
20 kHz
0 to -1.5 dB
Crosstalk @ 0 dBs
B
100 Hz
72 dB
1 kHz
74 dB
6.3 kHz
67.5 dB
10 kHz
63 dB
Distortion + noise @ +8 dB
D
100 Hz
68 dB
1 kHz
70 dB
Noise RMS
L
A-weighted
68 dB
Unweighted
68 dB
User Levels @ 1 kHz (0 to 50 dB)
K
+10 dB
±0.2 dB
-10 dB
±0.2 dB
-20 dB
±0.2 dB
-30 dB
±0.2 dB
-40 dB
±0.3 dB
-50 dB
0 to -2 dB
Phase @ 0 dBs
Z
40 Hz
±2°
100 Hz
±2°
315 Hz
±2°
1 kHz
±2°
6.3 kHz
±2°
10 kHz
±2°
15 kHz
±2°
Embedded Audio (Via SDI)
Audio embedded on the serial digital interface can also be extracted. Up to
four stereo pairs of audio can be extracted from the SDI. The Encoder can
extract two DIDs at once, giving four stereo pairs.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-9
Technical Specification
Table B.11: Embedded Audio Specification
Item
Specification
Serial Digital Interface
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
SDI IN
Connector type
BNC female connector
Input standard
ITU-R RECMN BT.656-3
SMPTE 272M-A
Embedded Audio (Via HD SDI)
Audio embedded on the HD serial digital interface can also be extracted.
Up to eight stereo pairs of audio can be extracted from the HD SDI but the
Encoder can only extract two DIDs at once, giving four stereo pairs.
Table B.12: Embedded Audio Specification
Item
Specification
HD Serial Digital Interface
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
HD SDI IN
Connector type
BNC female connector
Input standard
SMPTE 299M
MPEG-1 Audio Encoding Bit-rates
Table B.13: MPEG-1 Audio Encoding Bit-rates
Page B-10
Bit-rate
(kbit/s)
Single
Channel
Mono
Dual
Mono
Stereo
Joint Stereo
32
9
-
-
-
48
9
-
-
-
56
9
-
-
-
64
9
9
9
9
80
9
-
-
-
96
9
9
9
9
112
9
9
9
9
128
9
9
9
9
160
9
9
9
9
192
9
9
9
9
224
-
9
9
9
256
-
9
9
9
320
-
9
9
9
384
-
9
9
9
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit-rates
Table B.14: Dolby Digital Audio Encoding Bit-rates
B.1.3
Bit-rate
(kbit/s)
Single
Channel
Mono (1/0)
Dual
Channel
Stereo (2/0)
56
9
-
64
9
-
80
9
-
96
9
9
112
9
9
128
9
9
160
9
9
192
9
9
224
9
9
256
9
9
320
9
9
384
9
9
448
9
9
512
9
9
576
9
9
640
9
9
L-Band Input
This input provides a carrier combining facility for summing an externally
generated carrier into the L-band output.
Table B.15: L-BAND IN Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
SMA female 50 Ω
Connector designation:
L-BAND IN
Input impedance:
50 Ω
Gain to L-BAND OUT MAIN
output:
0 dB ±2 dB
Input power:
+5 dBm max
Return loss:
>14 dB, 950-1750 MHz
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-11
Technical Specification
B.2
Test Tones
Table B.16: Test Tones Specification
Item
Specification
Level
0 dB relative to FSR 18 dB
Frequency
1 kHz at 48 kHz sampling frequency
Bit-rate
96 kbit/s
B.3
Outputs
B.3.1
IF Outputs
Table B.17: IF OUT MAIN Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
BNC female 75 Ω
Connector designation:
IF OUT MAIN
Output impedance:
75 Ω
Output power:
−20 dBm to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
Power level stability:
±0.5 dB
Return loss:
>20 dB, 50-180 MHz
Modulation format:
BPSK as per ETSI TR 101 198
QPSK as per EN 300 421 (DVB-S)
8PSK and 16QAM as per EN 301 210 (DVB-DSNG) (HOM option)
FEC rate:
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 with QPSK
2/3, 5/6 and 8/9 with 8PSK
3/4, and 7/8 with 16QAM
Symbol rate:
1 to 48 Msymbol/s (Standard)
0.2 to 66 Msymbol/s (Extended symbol rate option)
NOTE…
For certain combinations of modulation format, FEC code rate
and input packet size, the maximum symbol rate may be limited to
lower values than indicated above due to an input bit-rate
limitation of 213 Mbit/s imposed by the ASI input interface.
Page B-12
Spectrum roll-off factor:
20%, 25%, 30%, 35% selectable
Spectrum sense:
Normal / inverted
Transmission modes:
Modulation on/off
Carrier on/off
Carrier frequency:
50-180 MHz, tuneable in 1 kHz steps
Carrier frequency error:
< ±1 kHz (all causes over 10 years)
Carrier ON/OFF ratio:
>60 dB
Carrier suppression:
>40 dB
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Phase noise (continuous):
< −66 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset
< −76 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset
< −86 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz offset
< −96 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz offset
< −120 dBc/Hz at 1 MHz offset and above
Phase noise (discrete
sidebands):
< −70 dBc
Spurious outputs (modulated
carrier):
< −60 dBc/4 kHz over the frequency range 0 to 500 MHz but excluding the frequency
range of the wanted output signal (equal to ±1.06 × Symbol Rate about the carrier
frequency, as defined by the spectrum mask Figure A.1 in EN 300 421)
Spurious outputs (unmodulated
carrier):
< −55 dBc, each component
Noise floor (N0/C):
< −120 dBc/Hz
Main / monitor output isolation
(both directions):
>30 dB, 50-180 MHz
Table B.18: IF OUT MONITOR Specification
B.3.2
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
BNC female 75 Ω
Connector designation:
IF OUT MONITOR
Output impedance:
75 Ω
Output power:
−20 dB ±2 dB relative to main IF output power
Return loss:
>20 dB, 50-180 MHz
L-Band Outputs
Table B.19: L-BAND OUT MAIN Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
SMA female 50 Ω
Connector designation:
L-BAND OUT MAIN
Output impedance:
50 Ω
Output power:
−20 dBm to +5 dBm in 0.1 dB steps
Output power ramp rate:
9 dB/s over operational power level range
Power level stability:
±0.5 dB
Return loss:
>14 dB, 950-1750 MHz
Modulation format:
BPSK as per ETSI TR 101 198
QPSK as per EN 300 421 (DVB-S)
8PSK and 16QAM as per EN 301 210 (DVB-DSNG) (HOM option)
FEC rate:
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 with QPSK
2/3, 5/6 and 8/9 with 8PSK
3/4, and 7/8 with 16QAM
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-13
Technical Specification
Item
Specification
Symbol rate:
1 to 48 Msymbol/s (Standard)
0.2 to 66 Msymbol/s (Extended symbol rate option)
NOTE…
For certain combinations of modulation format, FEC code rate
and input packet size, the maximum symbol rate may be limited to
lower values than indicated above due to an input bit-rate
limitation of 213 Mbit/s imposed by the ASI input interface.
Spectrum roll-off factor:
20%, 25%, 30%, 35% selectable
Spectrum sense:
Normal / inverted
Transmission modes:
Modulation on/off
Carrier on/off
Carrier frequency:
950-1750 MHz, tuneable in 1 kHz steps
Carrier frequency error:
< ±35 Hz versus temperature
< ±1 kHz ageing over 10 years
Carrier ON/OFF ratio:
>60 dB
Carrier suppression:
>35 dB
Phase noise (continuous):
< −46 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset
< −66 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset
< −76 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset
< −86 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz offset
< −96 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz offset
< −120 dBc/Hz at 1 MHz offset and above
Phase noise (discrete
sidebands):
< −70 dBc
Spurious outputs (modulated
carrier):
< −60 dBc/4 kHz over the frequency range 500 MHz to 2500 MHz but excluding the
frequency range of the wanted output signal (equal to ±1.06 × Symbol Rate about the
carrier frequency, as defined by the spectrum mask Figure A.1 in EN 300 421)
Spurious outputs (unmodulated
carrier):
< −55 dBc over the frequency range 500 MHz to 2500 MHz, each component
Noise floor (N0/C):
< −120 dBc/Hz
Main / monitor output isolation
(both directions):
>30 dB, 950-1750 MHz
Table B.20: L-BAND OUT MONITOR Specification
Page B-14
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
F-type female 75 Ω
Connector designation:
L-BAND OUT MONITOR
Output impedance:
75 Ω
Output power:
−30 dB nominal relative to main L-band output power
Return loss:
>10 dB, 950-1750 MHz
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.3.3
Reference Frequency Output
A reference frequency output is provided via the L-BAND OUT MAIN
connector, intended for use by an external frequency up-converter.
Table B.21: Reference Frequency Output Specification
B.3.4
Item
Specification
Output power:
0 dBm ±3 dB sine-wave into 50 Ω load
Switchable on/off
Frequency:
10 MHz
Frequency stability:
< ±0.2 Hz versus temperature
< ±1 Hz ageing over 1 year
< ±5.5 Hz ageing over 10 years
Phase noise:
−110 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz offset
−135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz offset
−155 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz offset
−160 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz offset
ASI Out 1, ASI Out 2, ASI Out 3 Outputs
Table B.22: ASI Out Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status:
SELV
Connector type:
BNC 75 Ω
Connector designation:
ASI OUT 1, ASI OUT 2, ASI OUT 3
B.4
Control and Monitoring
B.4.1
Remote Control - Ethernet 1 and 2
Table B.23: Ethernet Specification
B.4.2
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
ETHERNET#1 and ETHERNET#2
Connector type
8-way RJ-45 socket, 10BaseT (ISO 882/3)
Local Control
Local control is by means of the front panel keypad and LCD display.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-15
Technical Specification
B.4.3
Alarm
Table B.24: Alarm Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
ALARM
Connector type
9-way D-type male
Alarm contacts
Change-over contacts (5 Ω in common)
Fail contacts
Change-over contacts (5 Ω in common)
Reset contacts
Short pins 9 and 5 (resets the Encoder)
Relay Contact Rating
B.4.4
Maximum switching power
30 W
Maximum switching voltage
110 V
Maximum switching current
1A
Remote Control
This connector provides an RS-232/RS-485 user interface control port that
allows the unit to be controlled by an external master.
Table B.25: Remote Control Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
REMOTE CONTROL
Connector type
9-way D-type male
B.5
Data
B.5.1
RS-232 Data
A 9-way, D-type female connector provides an RS-232 asynchronous,
serial communications data input interface.
Table B.26: RS-232 Asynchronous Data Input Specification
Page B-16
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
ITU-T V.24/V.28 (RS-232D) asynchronous serial
data
Connector designation
RS-232 DATA
Connector type
9-way D-type female
Supported baud rates
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400 baud
Control mechanism
XON/XOFF
Time-stamp
Not supported
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.5.2
RS-422 Data
This provides an RS-422 synchronous, serial communications data input
interface.
Table B.27: RS-422 Data Specification
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Type
ITU-T V.11 (RS-422), synchronous serial data and external clock
Connector designation
RS-422 DATA
Connector type
15-way D-type female
Clock frequencies
n x 64 kbit/s from 64 kbit/s to 2048 kbit/s (selectable)
or
n x 56 kbit/s from 56 kbit/s to 1792 kbit/s (selectable)
Time-stamp
Not supported
Operation modes
Bit-pipe - Transport packet alignment and byte alignment relative to the incoming bit-stream
are arbitrary.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-17
Technical Specification
B.6
AC Power Supply
This equipment is fitted with an wide-ranging power supply. It is suitable
for supply voltages of 100-120 Vac -10% +6% or 220-240 Vac -10% +6%
at 50/60 Hz nominal.
Table B.28: AC Power Supply Specification
Item
Specification
Power distribution system
Type TN ONLY (EN 60950 para 1.2.12.1): Power distribution system having one point
directly earthed, the exposed conductive parts of the installation being connected to
that point by protective earth conductors. This equipment must NOT be used with
single-phase three-wire and PE, TT or IT Type Power distribution systems.
Connection to supply
Pluggable Equipment Type A (EN 60950 para 1.2.5): Equipment which is intended for
connection to the building power supply wiring via a non-industrial plug and
socket-outlet or a non-industrial appliance coupler or both. Correct mains polarity
must always be observed. Do not use reversible plugs with this equipment.
Class of equipment
Class I Equipment (EN 60950 para 1.2.4): electric shock protection by basic
insulation and protective earth.
Rated voltage
100-120/220-240 Vac (single phase)
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Voltage selection
Wide-ranging
4 A (100-120 Vac range)
2 A (220-240 Vac range)
Rated current
Input connector
CEE 22/IEC 3-pin male receptacle
Fuse
Fuse in live conductor in power input filter at rear of unit. Do not use reversible plugs
with this equipment.
Fuse type
Bussmann S505
Littelfuse 215
5x20 mm time delay (T) 1500 A breaking capacity (HBC)
IEC/EN 60127-2 Sheet 5
B.7
Fuse current rating
5 A 250 V T HBC
Power consumption
100 W maximum (NO options fitted)
250 W maximum (WITH options fitted)
Stand-by power
15 W typically
Physical Details
Table B.29: Physical Details
Page B-18
Item
Specification
Height
88.9 mm chassis
Width
442.5 mm excluding fixing brackets
Overall width
482.6 mm including fixing brackets
Depth
545 mm excluding rear connector clearance
Approximate weight
11.5 kg (25.3 lbs)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.8
Environmental Conditions
Table B.30: Environmental Specification
Item
Specification
Operational
Temperature
-10°C to +50°C (14°F to 122°F) ambient with free air-flow
Over temperature alarm
generated at
>= 55°C
Under temperature alarm
generated at
< 0°C
Temperature checked
Once every 30 seconds
All fans switched off at
< 10°C (when set to auto)
Half the fans switched off at
< 20°C (when set to auto)
All fans on at
>= 20°C (when set to auto)
Relative humidity
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
Cooling requirements 2U
Front section: Cool air input from front panel, exhaust from right side of unit
Rear section: Cool air input from left side of unit, exhaust from right side of unit
See Chapter 2, Installing the Equipment, Figure 2.2.
Handling/movement
Designed for stationary or fixed use when in operation
Storage/Transportation
Temperature
-20°C to +70°C (-4°F to 158°F)
Relative humidity
0% to 90% (non-condensing)
B.9
Compliance1
B.9.1
Safety
This equipment has been designed and tested to meet the requirements of
the following:
EN 60950
European
Safety of information technology equipment.
IEC 60950
International
Safety of information technology equipment.
In addition, the equipment has been designed to meet the following:
UL 60950
1
USA
Safety of information technology equipment.
The version of the standards shown is that applicable at the time of manufacture.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-19
Technical Specification
B.9.2
EMC2
The equipment has been designed and tested to meet the following:
B.9.3
Emission Standard
Limits and methods of measurement of
radio frequency interference
characteristics of information
technology equipment - Class A.
EN 55022
and
CISPR22
European
EN 61000-3-23
European
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC),
Part 3 Limits; Section 2. Limits for
harmonic current emissions (equipment
input current ≤ 16 A per phase).
EN 61000-3-33
European
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC),
Part 3. Limits; Section 3. Limitation of
voltage fluctuations and flicker in low
voltage supply systems for equipment
with rated current ≤ 16 A.
EN 55024
European
Information technology equipment Immunity characteristics - Limits and
methods of measurement.
FCC
USA
Conducted and radiated emission limits
for a Class A digital device, pursuant to
the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
Title 47-Telecommunications, Part 15:
Radio frequency devices, subpart B Unintentional Radiators.
International
Shock and Vibration
The Encoder and Receiver chassis complies with the requirements of
ETS 300-019-2-5 Table 2, for both non-operational and operational states,
without any special mounting or casing requirements over and above the
standard mounting requirements specified.
ETS 300-019-2-5
European
Equipment Engineering (EE):
Environmental conditions and
environmental tests for
telecommunications equipment
Part 2-5: Specification of environmental
tests Ground Vehicle Installations.
Table 2.
2
The EMC tests were performed with the Technical Earth attached, and configured using recommended cables (see
Table B.31).
3
Applies only to models of the Encoder using mains (ac) power sources.
Page B-20
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.9.4
CE Marking
The CE mark is affixed to indicate compliance with the following
directives:
89/336/EEC of 3 May 1989 on the approximation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electromagnetic compatibility.
73/23/EEC of 19 February 1973 on the harmonisation of the laws of the
Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within
certain voltage limits.
1999/5/EC of 9 March 1999 on radio equipment and telecommunications
terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity. (If
fitted with telecom type interface modules).
NOTE...
The CE mark was first affixed to this product in 2004.
B.9.5
C-Tick Mark
The C-Tick mark is affixed to denote compliance with the
Australian Radiocommunications (Compliance and Labelling –
Incidental Emissions) Notice made under s.182 of
Radiocommunications Act 1992.
NOTE...
The C-Tick mark was first affixed to this product in 2004.
B.10
Cable Types
The signal cable types (or similar) in Table B.31 are those recommended
by TANDBERG Television in order to maintain product EMC compliance.
Table B.31: Suitable Signal Cable Types
Signal Type
Connector
Cable
RS-232
9-way D-type Male
Belden 8162 CM 2PR24 shielded E108998 (typical)
Ethernet
RJ-45
Alcatel Data Cable FTP 7 x 0.16
ASI Outputs
BNC
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF (type 2 Video cable)
SD SDI In (Video Input)
BNC
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF
HD SDI In (Video Input)
BNC
Canford Audio BBC 1/2 PSF or Belden 1694A
H SYNC
BNC
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF
Composite Video (Input)
BNC
Canford Audio BBC 1/3 PSF
Audio (Input)
15-way D-type Male
Canford Audio DFT 110 Ω
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-21
Technical Specification
B.11
Option Modules
B.11.1 M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2 Additional Audio and Linear
PCM Option Module
See Section B.1.2 for details.
B.11.2 M2/EOM2/REMUX Remux Option Module
Connectors
Table B.32: DVB ASI In 1, 2 and 3 Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
DVB ASI IN 1, DVB ASI IN 2, DVB ASI IN 3
Connector type
BNC
Connector impedance
75 Ω4
Data coding
8B/10B
Channel rate
270 Mbit/s
Specification
DVB A010 rev 1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)5
Table B.33: DVB ASI Out 1 Connector (Disabled)
4
5
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
DVB ASI OUT 1
Connector type
BNC
Connector impedance
75 Ω4
Data coding
8B/10B
Channel rate
270 Mbit/s
Specification
DVB A010 rev 1 (Asynchronous Serial Interface)5
75 Ω terminator must be fitted when this interface is not in use.
Byte mode and single packet burst mode only.
Page B-22
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
LEDs
Table B.34: DVB ASI In 1, 2 and 3 - LED Indications
Item
Specification
Red LED
Input ASI lock
On
No lock on ASI (8B/10B coding)
Off
Input ASI lock OK
Green LED
Packet size
Off
Not locked to MPEG packets
Flash (1:3 mark:space)
188 byte packets
Flash (3:1 mark:space)
204 byte packets
Table B.35: DVB ASI Out 1 - LED Indications
Item
Specification
Red LED
On
Output disabled
Off
Output enabled
Green LED
Off
Output not in use
Flash (1:3 mark:space)
188 byte packets output
Flash (3:1 mark:space)
204 byte packets output
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-23
Technical Specification
B.11.3 M2/EOM2/ATMS155… ATM Network Interface
Module
Variants of The ATM Network Interface Module
To provide the interface to the B-ISDN Telecommunications network, a
Physical Layer Module must be installed according to the type of network
required. Refer to Table B.36 for the types of B-ISDN networks which are
supported.
Table B.36: B-ISDN Networks Supported
Physical Layer
Physical Layer Bandwidth
Marketing Code
SDH STM-1 / SONET STS-3c Multimode
Optical
155.520 Mbit/s
M2/EOM2/ATMS155MM
SDH STM-1 / SONET STS-3c Monomode
Optical
155.520 Mbit/s
M2/EOM2/ATMS155SM
DVB-ASI Copper Output
Table B.37: DVB Copper Output Connection
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
DVB ASI
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Packet Size
188 / 204 bytes
Data coding
8B 10B
Data rate
0.5 Mbit/s to 60 Mbit/s
Channel rate
270 Mbit/s
DVB-ASI Copper Input
Table B.38: DVB Copper Input Connection
Page B-24
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
DVB ASI
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Packet Size
188 / 204 bytes
Data coding
8B 10B
Data rate
0.5 Mbit/s to 60 Mbit/s
Channel rate
270 Mbit/s
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
10BaseT Ethernet Connector
Table B.39: Ethernet Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
Ethernet
Channel rate
10 Mbit/s
Data coding
Manchester Coding
Specification
Complies with IEEE Standard 802.3i 1990 for Twisted Pair Ethernet
Max cable length
Typically 100 metres (CAT-5 UP)
Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LED: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT.
NOTE…
The Class 1 LED warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Table B.40: Multimode Fibre Optic Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MULTI)
Data Rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Centre Wavelength
1270 nm (min) 1310 nm (typ) 1380 nm (max)
Emitter type
LED, InGaAsP
Emitter output power
-20 dBm (min) -14 dBm (max)
Detector type
PIN diode
Detector input power
-31 dBm (min) –14 dBm (max)
Optic Fibre type
62.5/125 µm
Typical max fibre length
2000 metres
Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
WARNING…
LASER: CLASS I LASER PRODUCT.
NOTE…
The Class 1 Laser warning is as defined in paragraph 5.2 of EN 60825-1 1994.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-25
Technical Specification
Table B.41: Monomode Fibre Optic Connector
Item
Specification
Connector type
SC type
Connector designation
SDH STM-1/OC3 (MONO)
Data Rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Centre Wavelength
1261 nm (min) 1360 nm (max)
Emitter type
LASER, InGaAsP
Emitter output power
-15 dBm (min) -8 dBm (max)
Detector type
PIN diode
Detector input power
-28 dBm (min) –7 dBm (max)
Optic Fibre type
62.5/125µm
Typical max fibre length
20000 metres
M2/EOM2/ATMS34 PDH/E3 Connector
Table B.42: E3 Input Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
BNC, female
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Connector Designation
ATM-PDH-E3 IN
Data-rate
34.368 Mbit/s ±20ppm
Data Coding
HDB3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Loss of Signal Detect
ITU-T G.775
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
Table B.43: E3 Output Connector
Page B-26
Item
Specification
Connector Type
BNC, female
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Connector Designation
ATM-PDH-E3 OUT
Data-rate
34.368 Mbit/s ±20ppm
Data Coding
HDB3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
M2/EOM2ATMS45 PDH/DS3 Connector
Table B.44: DS3, G.703 Input Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC, female
Connector Designation
ATM-PDH-DS3 IN
Data-rate
44.736 Mbit/s
Data Coding
BZD3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Loss of Signal Detect
ITU-T G.775
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B DS3 and E3
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transmit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
Table B.45: DS3, G.703 Output Connector
Item
Specification
Connector Type
75 Ω BNC, female
Connector Designation
ATM-PDH-DS3 OUT
Data-rate
44.736 Mbit/s
Data Coding
BZD3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transmit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-27
Technical Specification
M2/EOM2ATMS155E STM-1 Electrical Module
Table B.46: SDH (STM-1E) Copper Input Connector
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
ATM-SDH-STM1/E IN
Connector Type
BNC, female
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Line-rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Data Coding
HDB3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Loss of Signal Detect
ITU-T G.775
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
Table B.47: SDH (STM-1E) Copper Output Connector
Item
Specification
Safety Status
SELV
Connector Designation
ATM-SDH-STM1/E OUT
Connector Type
BNC, female
Connector Impedance
75 Ω
Line-rate
155.520 Mbit/s
Data Coding
HDB3
Physical/Electrical Characteristics
ITU-T G.703
Jitter Tolerance
ITU-T G.823
Over-voltage Protection
ITU-T G.703 Annex B
ATM Direct Cell Mapping
ITU-T G.804
PLCP Mapping
ETSI T/NA(91) and T/NA(91)18
Supported Frame Modes
ITU-T G.751 and ITU-T G.832.
Transit Timing Source
Recovered Clock or Local Clock
B.11.4 M2/EOM2/IP, IP Output Card Option
Table B.48: Ethernet Port (IP Output Card)
Page B-28
Item
Specification
Safety Status:
SELV
Connector Type:
8-way RJ-45
Connector Designation:
10/100 BT
Signal Type:
10/100BaseT Ethernet (IEEE 802.3/802.3u)
Transport Stream Rate:
1.5 – 80 Mbit/s
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Technical Specification
B.11.5 General Purpose Interface Card (M2/EOM2/GPI)
Table B.49: GPI Connector
Item
Specification
Safety status
SELV
Connector designation
GPI
Connector type
D-type, 15-way, Male
Input
1: Open-circuit
0: Pulled low to between 0.8 V and 0.0 V
Limit over-voltage, under-voltage and excess current.
Input function
Output
Application-specific, tailored by software. Contacts are debounced as required.
Open-circuit or connected to common output pin.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page B-29
Technical Specification
BLANK
Page B-30
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex C
C. Language Abbreviations
Languages are shown in alphabetical
order.
LANGUAGE
ABBREVIATION
Afrikaans
afr
Albanian
alb
Arabic
ara
Auxiliary
two
Basa
bas
Basque
baq
Bengali
ben
Breton
bre
Bulgarian
bul
Burmese
bur
Catalan
cat
Chinese
chi
Czech
cze
Danish
dan
Dutch
dut
English
eng
Estonian
est
Finnish
fin
French
fre
Fulani
ful
Gaelic (Scots)
gae
German
ger
Greek
gre
Gujarati
guj
Hausa
hau
Hindi
hin
Hungarian
hun
Ibo
ibo
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
LANGUAGE
ABBREVIATION
Icelandic
ice
Indonesian
ind
Irish
iri
Italian
ita
Japanese
jpn
Javanese
jav
Kannada
kan
Korean
kor
Latvian
lav
Lithuanian
lit
Macedonian
mac
Main
one
Malayalam
mal
Malay
msa
Marathi
mar
Miscellaneous
mis
Multiple languages
mul
Ndebele (North)
nde
Norwegian
nor
Oriya
ori
Persian
per
Polish
pol
Portugese
por
Punjabi
pan
Romanian
rum
Russian
rus
Serbo-Croat
SCR
Slovak
slk
Somali
som
Spanish
spa
Swahili
swa
Page C-1
Language Abbreviations
LANGUAGE
ABBREVIATION
Swedish
swe
Tagalog
tgl
Tamil
tam
Telugu
tel
Thai
tha
Tibetan
tib
Turkish
tur
Ukranian
ukr
Undefined
und
Urdu
urd
Vietnamese
vie
Welsh
cym
Xhosa
xho
Yoruba
yor
Zulu
zul
There is the facility to enter a User specified abbreviation. This is
performed by entering a 3 letter code for the User Defined
Language 1 or 2 entry in the menu. Once this has been carried out,
the code appears against the User Defined 1 or 2 options and it is
these entries that are used for language code insertion.
Page C-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex D
D. Creating and Downloading a Logo
Contents
D.1 Introduction ...............................................................D-3
D.2 Summary of Features ...............................................D-3
D.3 OSD Programs Built Into the Encoder ......................D-3
D.4 Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator ........................D-5
D.5 Using OSD Creator ...................................................D-5
D.5.1 Overview.......................................................D-5
D.5.2 Loading a .bmp File ......................................D-6
D.5.3 Creating Transparency .................................D-6
Overview.......................................................D-6
Adding Transparency Manually ....................D-7
Adding Transparency Using a Key File ........D-7
Editing the Palette ........................................D-8
Palette Reallocation......................................D-8
D.5.4 Downsampling ..............................................D-8
D.5.5 Saving the .osd File ......................................D-8
List of Tables
Table D.1: Resolution Modes ......................................................D-10
List of Figures
Figure D.1: Web Browser Interface ...............................................D-4
Figure D.2: File Download Dialogue Box.......................................D-4
Figure D.3: Files for OSD Creator and Loader ..............................D-5
Figure D.4: OSD Creator Screen Showing Example Logo............D-6
Figure D.5: OSD Loader Screen Showing Example Logo.............D-9
Figure D.6: 625 Line, OSD Co-ordinates in Active Picture (SD
Example) ....................................................................D-11
Figure D.7: 525 Line, OSD Co-ordinates in Active Picture (SD
Example) ....................................................................D-11
D.6 Downloading a Logo Using OSD Loader ..................D-9
D.7 Using the OSD Loader..............................................D-9
D.7.1 Start-up.........................................................D-9
D.7.2 Download an .osd File ................................D-10
D.7.3 Show and Hide Regions .............................D-12
D.7.4 Multiple Regions .........................................D-12
D.7.5 Region Interference ....................................D-12
D.8 Fault-finding ............................................................D-13
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-1
Creating and Downloading a Logo
BLANK
Page D-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
D.1
Introduction
The Encoder includes a logo overlay facility whereby an image can be
overlaid onto the active video prior to encoding. This enables broadcasters
to trademark or brand their material with a logo.
To overlay the material with a logo, the logo must first be downloaded into
the equipment using the Ethernet TFTP protocol. Once this has been done
the logo can be enabled or disabled. Contact TANDBERG Television for
further details.
D.2
Summary of Features
Up to 13 logos can be overlaid onto the active video. The space each logo
occupies is referred to as a region. If two logo regions share a horizontal
line they may interfere with each other, so this should be avoided, (see
Section D.7.5). i.e. logos may be placed adjacent vertically, but not
horizontally. Logos cannot be overlapped.
One logo can be downloaded into Flash memory and will still be present
after the Encoder has been powered OFF. All other logos are stored in
volatile memory and will be lost when the Encoder is powered OFF.
To create and download logos to the Encoder, two Windows applications
are required, Osd Creator and Osd Loader. Once a logo has been
downloaded to Flash it can be enabled/disabled from the front panel menu:
Setup/Video/Video source/Stored OSD. Logos downloaded to volatile
memory can only be controlled by the OSD Loader application running
from a PC.
Logos are defined at pixel resolution and include a red, green, blue and
transparency component. Logos can be positioned anywhere in the active
video and can be any size from 1x1 pixel to the full size of the active
picture. Logos are limited to a maximum of 256 colours, including different
levels of transparency.
The logo is overlaid onto the active picture prior to horizontal and vertical
down-sampling, noise reduction and video bandwidth filtering, if these are
used.
NOTE…
In HD, large OSDs can take a very long time to download due to the data size.
D.3
OSD Programs Built Into the Encoder
Two Windows applications are required for creating and downloading logos
to the Encoder, namely Osd Creator and Osd Loader. These programs are
stored permanently in the Encoder where they can be downloaded via the
Web Browser Interface. Further information is available in Chapter 5, Web
Browser Interface. These applications must be unzipped and saved to a PC
prior to use. This requires WinZip to be installed on the PC.
Using the Web Browser interface, see Figure D.1, select Option 2 Tools,
OSD Toolkit.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
Figure D.1: Web Browser Interface
The dialog box, see Figure D.2, will be displayed.
Figure D.2: File Download Dialogue Box
Clicking on option Open this file from its current location and Clicking
OK will open the .zip file, see Figure D.3. Clicking on option Save this file
to disk will allow the user to install the files on their local drive and then
open the .zip file as in Figure D.3.
Page D-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
Figure D.3: Files for OSD Creator and Loader
D.4
Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator
Osd Creator (creator.exe) is an application for creating logo files (.osd
format) for use with the Osd Loader application (osd.exe) to download
them to the Encoder. It accepts Windows Bitmap (.bmp) format files as
input. It includes the facility to introduce a mix component into the image,
so that when the image is superimposed onto video, some areas appear to
be transparent.
The application also includes the facility to downsample the image to the
desired size.
The application runs under Windows NT.
NOTE…
The OSD Creator program only has limited features for the manipulation of images. It is wise to carry
out any complex image editing using dedicated graphics software prior to importing the .bmp image file
into the OSD Creator.
D.5
Using OSD Creator
D.5.1
Overview
To create a logo (.osd) file:
1. Load a Bitmap (.bmp) file.
2. Add transparency in the desired areas.
3. Downsample to the desired size.
4. Save as an .osd file.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-5
Creating and Downloading a Logo
An example of a logo is shown in Figure D.4.
Left Mouse Button
Transparency
Value
Zoom
View
Change
Background
Colour
Transparency
Brush Size
Right Mouse
Button
Transparency
Value
Blue
Component
Of Pixel
Green
Component
Of Pixel
Image Properties
Red
Component
Of Pixel
Transparency
Component
Of Pixel
Figure D.4: OSD Creator Screen Showing Example Logo
D.5.2
Loading a .bmp File
Select File/Open from the menu, and choose a file with a .bmp extension.
The image is displayed in its own window. The application does not accept
compressed bitmaps or multi-planed bitmaps. If a 24-bit colour bitmap
image is loaded into Osd Creator it will be automatically converted down to
a 256 colour palette.
D.5.3
Creating Transparency
Overview
Each pixel in a .bmp file is represented by a red, green and blue
component, each with a value 0 to 255. Osd Creator adds a fourth
component for the transparency of the pixel. This is referred to as a mix or
transparency (T) value and is displayed in the bottom right status panel.
The transparency component also has a range of 0 to 255, where 0 is fully
transparent and 255 is fully opaque.
Page D-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
Osd Creator uses a colour palette with a maximum of 256 entries. Each
pixel in the image is mapped to an entry in the palette, which holds a
value for the red, green and blue and transparency component. The
transparency (or mix) is treated as a colour component, so for two colours
with identical red, green and blue values, but different transparency levels,
two entries will be generated in the palette.
When a bitmap image is loaded, all colours have a transparency value of
255 (opaque).
The area of the image that is to remain opaque is referred to as the active
area. The area of the image that is to be made transparent is called the
inactive area. Transparency can added manually, with a brush, or by
using a key file.
Adding Transparency Manually
The background colour within Osd Creator can be changed with the black,
red, green and blue buttons on the toolbar. This changes the background
colour of the editor window on which the logo is overlaid and not the logo
itself, which remains unaffected. This facility is useful to show the
transparency of different colours. It is best to start with a background
colour that contrasts sharply with the whole of the source image.
Using the options immediately below the toolbar, the mouse pointer can be
used as a brush to add transparency to an area. The left mouse button will
apply the transparency value set for the LButton Mix and the right mouse
button will apply the transparency value set for the RbuttonMix. At
start-up these are set so LButton Mix is 0, to make an area transparent,
and RButton Mix is 255, to make it opaque.
Different mix levels can be entered for intermediate levels of transparency.
Selecting a brush size from the drop-down list determines the size of the
area that is changed.
If the Changes Affect Palette box is checked, changing the transparency
of a pixel on the image also changes the palette entry on which the pixel is
based, and all the pixels that share that palette entry.
If the inactive area is mainly one colour, check the Changes Affect
Palette box, and left-click in the inactive area. All pixels of that colour
should become background-coloured. Repeat until the whole of the inactive
area is transparent. If parts of the active area have become transparent,
uncheck the Changes Affect Palette box, and paint with the right button
to correct these areas. Zoom in if necessary.
If there is no general colour for the inactive area, uncheck the Changes
Affect Palette box and paint the inactive area manually with the left
mouse button. Use the right button to correct mistakes. Trace around the
edge of the area with a medium brush, then use the large brush for wide
areas. Zoom in to do the fine corrections.
Adding Transparency Using a Key File
A key file is a Bitmap (.bmp) file of the same size as the source file, with
the active area of the image coloured white, the inactive area coloured
black, and intermediate levels of transparency coloured grey.
Create the key file using a drawing package. Colour the active area white,
and the inactive area black. Save as a .bmp file.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-7
Creating and Downloading a Logo
Click the Key File toolbar button. Select the key file. The inactive area of
the image should now be transparent (background-coloured). Change the
background colour to verify that the correct area is transparent.
Editing the Palette
The palette may be displayed alongside the image by clicking the
Show/Hide Palette toolbar button. The transparency of each palette
entry may be altered in the same way as the image itself, using the left
and right mouse buttons. Changes to the palette are shown immediately
on the image.
The Red, Green, Blue and Mix component of the pixel or palette entry
under the cursor can be seen on the status bar at the bottom of the
screen.
Palette Reallocation
When the level of transparency of a pixel in the image is changed, a new
colour is effectively created. Whenever the image is downsampled or
saved, the palette is rebuilt to reflect the actual colours in the image. As
part of this process, pixels which have a mix value of zero are mapped to
palette entry zero, which is defined as Red = Green = Blue = Mix = 0. The
original colour information is lost and the right mouse button will not
change the pixel back to its original colour.
To rebuild the palette during editing, click the Reallocate Palette toolbar
button.
D.5.4
Downsampling
Click the Downsample toolbar button. A dialog box appears asking for a
downsampling ratio. This can be specified directly, or by entering the
desired image size. Click OK to downsample the image. The downsampling
algorithm includes a filter, so the boundary between the active and inactive
areas softens slightly. Zoom in and check that the correct areas are
transparent, and make corrections if necessary.
NOTE…
Once the image has been downsampled, the process cannot be reversed to change the image back to
its original size.
D.5.5
Saving the .osd File
Select File/Save As/OSD file from the menu. Saving is possible at any
time, and it is advisable to save the image often while editing is in
progress. The file may also be saved in .bmp format, but this file will not
contain transparency information.
Page D-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
D.6
Downloading a Logo Using OSD Loader
The Osd Loader application (osd.exe) is used for downloading logo (.osd)
files to the Encoder and controlling which are displayed.
The application runs on a PC with Windows NT. A network connection is
required. The target Encoder's IP address must be visible from the host
PC.
The application uses the .osd file format for images. These can be derived
from Windows .bmp files using the OSD Creator application (see
Section D.4, Creating a Logo Using OSD Creator).
An example of an OSD Loader screen is shown in Figure D.5.
Figure D.5: OSD Loader Screen Showing Example Logo
D.7
Using the OSD Loader
D.7.1
Start-up
Activate the application (osd.exe). The application attempts to connect to
the last known Encoder address. If the address is not correct, click the
Abort button and enter the IP address of the target Encoder. This can be
found on the Encoder front panel by selecting Setup/System/Remote
Control. To test the connection, click the Remove All button (you will be
prompted for confirmation – Remove all OSD Regions Yes/No). The
communications box (at the top of the screen) should read Transfer
Completed OK.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-9
Creating and Downloading a Logo
The Resolution Mode must be set to match the video resolution being
used. This adjusts the preview screen to the dimensions of the active
video.
Table D.1: Resolution Modes
D.7.2
Resolution Mode
Video Standard
576
Standard Definition 625 line
480
Standard Definition 525 line
480p
High Definition
576p
High Definition
720p
High Definition
1080i
High Definition
Download an .osd File
Choose an On-screen Display file with the Choose File button. You will be
prompted for a file with an .osd extension. The image will be displayed in
the OSD File box.
Position the image on the screen by dragging the white cursor box around
the main placement window. The position can also be adjusted by editing
the co-ordinates boxes.
A logo can be overlaid anywhere in the digital active picture. When a logo
is positioned in the main placement window, the co-ordinates are shown
for the top left corner of the logo. The co-ordinates that the Osd Loader
uses include an offset. Figure D.6 and Figure D.7 illustrate how these
co-ordinates relate to the active picture for SD mode.
When the logo is correctly positioned, click the Download button.
Transferring Data… appears in the communications box. The image will
be displayed in the main window. Wait for Transfer Completed OK to
appear in the communications box. After a short delay, the image should
appear on the output from the Receiver.
If the Auto Store box is checked, when the logo is downloaded to the
Encoder, it will be stored in Flash memory and will still be present after the
Encoder has been powered off. Only one logo can be stored in Flash at any
time. The maximum logo file size that can be stored in Flash is 65 279
bytes. The file size will be affected by the size of the logo and its
complexity (number of colours and levels of transparency). For example
this is roughly equivalent to a logo 200 x 145 pixels with 256 colours
(62 567 bytes).
If the Auto Store box is left unchecked, the downloaded logo will be
stored in volatile memory and will be lost when power is removed from the
Encoder.
Page D-10
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (139,44)
Field 1
1
2
Line 23
336
24
337
25
338
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (148,44)
Pixel
720
720 Pixels Digital Active Picture
576
Lines
702 Pixels Analogue Active Picture
310
623
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (858,619)
Figure D.6: 625 Line, OSD Co-ordinates in Active Picture (SD Example)
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (133,38)
Field 1
1
2
Line 23
286
24
287
25
288
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (142,38)
Pixel
720
720 Pixels Digital Active Picture
480
Lines
702 Pixels Analogue Active Picture
262
525
OSD Loader Co-ordinates (852,517)
Figure D.7: 525 Line, OSD Co-ordinates in Active Picture (SD Example)
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-11
Creating and Downloading a Logo
D.7.3
Show and Hide Regions
The Download button defines a Region in the Encoder, which remains
until the Encoder is turned off, the Remove button is clicked, or the
Region is Downloaded again. The Region may be in the Shown or Hidden
state, which determines whether it appears in the video stream. If the
Auto Show box is checked, the initial state is Shown. Use the Show,
Hide, Fade Up and Fade Down buttons to change the state of the region.
Shown regions have a green border in the main window, Hidden regions
have a red border.
NOTE…
Remove or Remove all does not erase a logo that has been stored in Flash memory. It will be
removed from the video picture, but will still be available from the front panel Stored OSD On/Off
menu option.
D.7.4
Multiple Regions
Multiple Regions may be displayed. To define an additional Region, change
the Region Number at the top of the Region Operations box, and repeat
the Download procedure. Buttons in the Region Operations box only
affect the current Region number (with the exception of Remove All). The
current Region can also be changed by double-clicking on the image in the
main window. The current region has a brighter border in the main
window. Uncheck the Images box to display the Region number in the
main window instead of the image.
D.7.5
Region Interference
If two Regions share a horizontal line, they may interfere. This means that
when both Regions are Shown, only one actually appears in the video
stream. The application warns if this is the case. When one of the Regions
is Hidden, the other may be Shown as normal.
Page D-12
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Creating and Downloading a Logo
D.8
Fault-finding
If there appears to be a problem creating or downloading a logo check the
following:
•
If the Communications box reads ‘Error Creating Socket’, there may be
a problem with the PC's network set-up, or another application may be
using the TFTP socket number.
•
If the Communications box reads ‘Waiting For Response’ for a long
time, the target Encoder is either busy or not visible on the network.
Abort the transfer before changing the IP address.
•
Large images take time to appear due to network transfer rates and
image processing.
•
If the download completes, but the OSD image does not appear on
video, the image may be too near the edge of the screen – try moving
it towards the centre. Make sure the correct line standard is selected.
•
Make sure the image is visible on a typical domestic television. Make a
note of the co-ordinates where the image is required.
•
If precise timing is required, Download the image in advance with
Auto Show off, then click Show when display is required.
•
To move the current Region, reposition the white cursor, check that
the OSD File box has the correct image, and click Download.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page D-13
Creating and Downloading a Logo
BLANK
Page D-14
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex E
E. Band Plans
Contents
E.1 Channels and Centre Frequencies ...........................E-3
List of Tables
Table E.1: Australia .......................................................................E-3
Table E.2: Europe VHF .................................................................E-4
Table E.3: EuropeCATV ................................................................E-4
Table E.4: Italy...............................................................................E-4
Table E.5: Morocco .......................................................................E-4
Table E.6: New Zealand ................................................................E-5
Table E.7: China............................................................................E-5
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Table E.8: OIRT.............................................................................E-5
Table E.9: Ireland ..........................................................................E-6
Table E.10: South Africa................................................................E-6
Table E.11: French Overseas PIA.................................................E-6
Table E.12: France ........................................................................E-7
Table E.13: Japan..........................................................................E-7
Table E.14: USA............................................................................E-8
Table E.15: CCIR...........................................................................E-8
Page E-1
Band Plans
BLANK
Page E-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Band Plans
E.1
Channels and Centre Frequencies
The Output Menu has options called Band Plan and Channel (see Chapter
4, Operating the Equipment Locally).
Once a country has been selected in the Band Plan option then the
required channel should be selected in the Channel option. Each channel
number corresponds to a particular frequency.
NOTE…
Only those frequencies associated with a channel number can be selected.
This Annex contains the channel IDs and centre frequencies for the band
plans in the Output Menu.
If the Manual band plan option is selected then the required frequency
must be selected manually.
Table E.1: Australia
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
0
48.500
32
557.500
52
697.500
1
59.500
33
564.500
53
704.500
2
66.500
34
571.500
54
711.500
3
88.00
35
578.500
55
718.500
4
97.500
36
585.500
56
725.500
5
104.500
37
592.500
57
732.500
5A
140.500
38
599.500
58
739.500
6
177.500
39
606.500
59
746.500
7
184.500
40
613.500
60
753.500
8
191.500
41
620.500
61
760.500
9
198.500
42
627.500
62
767.500
9A
205.500
43
634.500
63
774.500
10
212.500
44
641.500
64
781.500
11
219.500
45
648.500
65
788.500
12
226.500
46
655.500
66
795.500
27
523.500
47
662.500
67
802.500
28
529.500
48
669.500
68
809.500
29
536.500
49
676.500
69
816.500
30
543.500
50
683.500
31
550.500
51
690.500
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page E-3
Band Plans
Table E.2: Europe VHF
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
E2
50.500
E8
198.500
E3
57.500
E9
205.500
E4
64.500
E 10
212.500
E5
177.500
E 11
219.500
E6
184.500
E 12
226.500
E7
191.500
Table E.3: EuropeCATV
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
S4
128.500
S 13
247.500
S5
135.500
S 14
254.500
S6
142.500
S 15
261.500
S7
149.500
S 16
268.500
S8
156.500
S 17
275.500
S9
163.500
S 18
282.500
S 10
170.500
S 19
289.500
S 11
233.500
S 20
296.500
S 12
240.500
Table E.4: Italy
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
A
56.000
F
194.500
B
64.500
G
203.500
C
84.500
H
212.500
D
177.500
H1
219.500
E
186.000
H2
226.500
Table E.5: Morocco
Page E-4
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
M4
165.500
M8
197.500
M5
173.500
M9
205.500
M6
181.500
M 10
213.500
M7
189.500
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Band Plans
Table E.6: New Zealand
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
1
47.500
6
191.500
2
57.500
7
198.500
3
64.500
8
205.500
4
177.500
9
212.500
5
184.500
10
219.500
Table E.7: China
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
1
52.500
18
514.000
35
690.000
52
826.000
2
60.500
19
522.000
36
698.000
53
834.000
3
68.500
20
530.000
37
706.000
54
842.000
4
80.000
21
538.000
38
714.000
55
850.000
5
88.000
22
546.000
39
722.000
56
858.000
6
171.000
23
554.000
40
730.000
57
866.000
7
179.000
24
562.000
41
738.000
58
874.000
8
187.000
25
610.000
42
746.000
59
882.000
9
195.000
26
618.000
43
754.000
60
890.000
10
203.000
27
626.000
44
762.000
61
898.000
11
211.000
28
634.000
45
770.000
62
906.000
12
219.000
29
642.000
46
778.000
13
474.000
30
650.00
47
786.000
14
482.000
31
658.000
48
794.000
15
490.000
32
666.000
49
802.000
16
498.000
33
674.000
50
810.000
17
506.000
34
682.000
51
818.000
Table E.8: OIRT1
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
RI
52.500
R VII
186.000
R II
62.000
R VIII
194.000
R III
80.000
R IX
202.000
R IV
88.000
RX
210.000
RV
96.000
R XI
218.000
R VI
178.000
R XII
226.000
1
Organisation that co-ordinated TV standards and programme interchange among the Eastern–block countries of
Europe.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page E-5
Band Plans
Table E.9: Ireland
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
IA
48.500
IF
194.000
IB
56.500
IG
202.000
IC
64.500
IH
210.000
ID
178.000
IJ
218.000
IE
186.000
Table E.10: South Africa
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
4
178.000
9
218.000
5
186.000
10
226.000
6
194.000
11
234.000
7
202.000
(12)
242.000
8
210.000
13
250.180
Table E.11: French Overseas PIA
Page E-6
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
4
178.000
7
202.000
5
186.000
8
210.000
6
194.000
9
218.000
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Band Plans
Table E.12: France
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
A
45.000
2
186.750
B
53.000
3
194.750
C
61.000
4
202.750
C1
57.750
5
210.750
1
178.750
6
218.750
Table E.13: Japan
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
J1
93.000
18
503.000
35
605.000
52
707.000
J2
99.000
19
509.000
36
611.000
53
713.000
J3
105.000
20
515.000
37
617.000
54
719.000
J4
173.000
21
521.000
38
623.000
55
725.000
J5
179.000
22
527.000
39
629.000
56
731.000
J6
185.000
23
533.000
40
635.000
57
737.000
J7
191.000
24
539.000
41
641.000
58
743.000
J8
195.000
25
545.000
42
647.000
59
749.000
J9
201.000
26
551.000
43
653.000
60
755.000
J 10
207.000
27
557.000
44
659.000
61
761.000
J 11
213.000
28
563.000
45
665.000
62
767.000
J 12
219.000
29
569.000
46
671.000
63
773.000
13
473.000
30
575.000
47
677.000
14
479.000
31
581.000
48
683.000
15
485.000
32
587.000
49
689.000
16
491.000
33
593.000
50
695.000
17
497.000
34
599.000
51
701.000
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page E-7
Band Plans
Table E.14: USA
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
A 02
57.000
23
527.000
44
653.000
65
779.000
A 03
63.000
24
533.000
45
659.000
66
785.000
A 04
69.000
25
539.000
46
665.000
67
791.000
A 05
79.000
26
545.000
47
671.000
68
797.000
A 06
85.000
27
551.000
48
677.000
69
803.000
A 07
177.000
28
557.000
49
683.000
70
809.000
A 08
183.000
29
563.000
50
689.000
71
815.000
A 09
189.000
30
569.000
51
695.000
72
821.000
A 10
195.000
31
575.000
52
701.000
73
827.000
A 11
201.000
32
581.000
53
707.000
74
833.000
A 12
207.000
33
587.000
54
713.000
75
839.000
A 13
213.000
34
593.000
55
719.000
76
845.000
14
473.000
35
599.000
56
725.000
77
851.000
15
479.000
36
605.000
57
731.000
78
857.000
16
485.000
37
611.000
58
737.000
79
863.000
17
491.000
38
617.000
59
743.000
80
869.000
18
497.000
39
623.000
60
749.000
81
875.000
19
503.000
40
629.000
61
755.000
82
881.000
20
509.000
41
635.000
62
761.000
83
887.000
21
515.000
42
641.000
63
767.000
22
521.000
43
647.000
64
773.000
Table E.15: CCIR2
2
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
UHF
Channel
Centre
Frequency
in MHz
21
474.000
38
610.000
55
746.000
22
482.000
39
618.000
56
754.000
23
490.000
40
626.000
57
762.000
24
498.000
41
634.000
58
770.000
25
506.000
42
642.000
59
778.000
26
514.000
43
650.000
60
786.000
27
522.000
44
658.000
61
794.000
28
530.000
45
666.000
62
802.000
29
538.000
46
674.000
63
810.000
30
546.000
47
682.000
64
818.000
31
554.000
48
690.000
65
826.000
32
562.000
49
698.000
66
834.000
33
570.000
50
706.000
67
842.000
34
578.000
51
714.000
68
850.000
35
586.000
52
722.000
69
858.000
36
594.000
53
730.000
37
602.000
54
738.000
CCIR is now know as International Telecommunications Union-Radiocommunications Study Groups.
Page E-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex F
F. Audio Modes
Contents
F.1 Analogue Audio......................................................... F-3
F.2 Digital Audio.............................................................. F-3
F.3 Embedded Audio on the SDI..................................... F-4
List of Figures
Figure F.1: Analogue Audio Modes ............................................... F-3
Figure F.2: Digital Audio Modes .................................................... F-3
Figure F.3: Embedded Audio and Stereo Pairs............................. F-5
F.4 Detail of Encoder Operation...................................... F-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page F-1
Audio Modes
BLANK
Page F-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Audio Modes
F.1
Analogue Audio
Figure F.1 shows the coding methods that may be used with the analogue
audio input.
Linear PCM
Analogue Audio
MUSICAM
Code to Linear
PCM
Internal Coding
Dolby (AC-3)
Independent of Encoder Clock Source
Figure F.1: Analogue Audio Modes
F.2
Digital Audio
When a digital audio source is used, consideration must be given to the
choice of clock source used by the Encoder. To ensure correct operation
the Encoder and the audio may need to be genlocked. Figure F.2 shows
the clock source that is appropriate for a given audio coding mode. The
two main clock sources are internal and external (derived from the H SYNC
input).
Dolby E
Pre-encoded
DTS
Dolby (AC-3)
Embedded
(SDI)
*
Linear PCM
Digital Audio
Pre-encoded
Linear PCM
(via SRC) – SD Only
Linear PCM
(Direct)
Internal Coding
*
Dolby (AC-3)
Dolby E
DTS
Dolby (AC-3)
Audio Port
AES/EBU
MUSICAM
*
or
*
Linear PCM
Linear PCM
(via SRC) – SD Only
Linear PCM
(Direct)
Internal Coding
EITHER (preferred method for stability)
The entire system must be genlocked to studio reference black and burst. That is,
set Encoder clock source AND the upstream audio coding equipment to HSYNC.
MUSICAM
*
Dolby (AC-3)
*
OR
Set the E57xx Encoder clock set to “Video”. The upstream audio equipment MUST
also be locked to video.
Lock Dolby (AC-3) Encoder to AES/EBU reference from Encoder. Independent of
Encoder clock source.
*
Independent of Encoder clock source.
Figure F.2: Digital Audio Modes
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page F-3
Audio Modes
F.3
Embedded Audio on the SDI
Figure F.3 shows the audio signal flow on the Base Board. While eight
audio stereo pairs are available, only two stereo pairs can be processed by
the Base Board at any one time.
Audio can be embedded on a SDI video feed. The specified groups are:
1, 2, 3, 4. Each group contains two stereo pairs, hence each SDI can carry
a maximum of 2 x 4 = 8 stereo pairs, or 16 mono channels.
Each group has an associated Data Identifier (DID). The standard DIDs are
typically:
SD
•
•
•
•
F.4
HD
Group 1 = 0x2FF
0x2E7
Group 2 = 0x1FD
0x1E6
Group 3 = 0x1FB
0x1E5
Group 4 = 0x2F9
0x2E4
Detail of Encoder Operation
The Encoder can de-embed any two DIDs at any one time, thus giving a
total of four embedded audio sources: embedded audio 1-4.
The default DID for embedded audio 1-2 is (SD) 2FFh or (HD) 0x2E7
(Group 1).
The default DID for embedded audio 3-4 is (SD) 1FDh or (HD) 0x1E6
(Group 2).
The DIDs are located in ancillary packets in the data stream.
NOTE…
Default DIDs are selected when a DID value ≥1024 is set.
Page F-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Audio Modes
Audio groups
taken from SDI (HD or SD)
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
4:1
SDI Embedded 1
De-embedder
SDI Embedded 2
1
Audio
Router
n
User DID Selection
(Default=0x2FF) for SD
(Default=0x2E7) for HD
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
4:1
SDI Embedded 3
De-embedder
SDI
Embedded 4
2
User DID Selection
(Default=0x1FD) for SD
(Default=0x1E6) for HD
Stereo Pair A
Stereo Pair B
15-way D-type
Connector
To Option
Modules
Audio
Channel A
Channel A Audio
Interface
and
Conversion
Channel B Audio
Audio
Channel B
Base Card Audio
Audio option module (M2/EOM2/AUDLIN2) is
required if more than two channels of audio
require processing.
Figure F.3: Embedded Audio and Stereo Pairs
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page F-5
Audio Modes
BLANK
Page F-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex G
G. Accuracy of Frequency Sources
This equipment is based around ISO/IEC 13818 specifications (commonly
known as MPEG-2) and within these specifications all timing is derived
from a 27 MHz system clock. The system clock is required to have an
accuracy of better than ±30 ppm.
An oven-controlled crystal oscillator (OCXO) within this equipment
achieves the ±30 ppm accuracy within five minutes of applying power. This
accuracy is maintained over the specified operating temperature range for
the life of the product without further adjustment.
Composite television systems such as PAL and NTSC have traditionally
used high precision oscillators for colour sub-carrier. Many different
specifications are in common use and a required accuracy in the range
±0.2 ppm to ±2 ppm is common. Typically an entire TV studio runs from a
central frequency standard, with all equipment being fed with a Black and
Burst reference signal.
Generally, individual items of equipment are not capable of the required
accuracy in the absence of this reference. Where a suitable reference is not
available (e.g. outside broadcast or intercontinental programme exchange)
the specifications allow a relaxed accuracy.
When this equipment is used to source a timing reference which is used to
generate a composite video output (for instance the PAL or NTSC output of
a TANDBERG Television Receiver/Decoder) the accuracy of the resultant
sub-carrier is directly traceable to the 27 MHz system clock in this
equipment.
To ensure continuing accuracy, the system clock in this equipment can be
locked to an appropriate frequency reference by feeding a Black and Burst
signal to the H SYNC input. Alternatively, the system clock can be locked
to the video input. In either case, the system clock is frequency-locked to
the source sync pulses, and hence the composite video sub-carrier is as
accurate as the frequency reference.
Where an accurate reference signal is not available, the OCXO in this
equipment must be used. The OCXO is adjusted to better than ±0.2 ppm
during manufacture, but due to natural ageing of the OCXO, regular
calibration is required to keep the OXCO within ±0.2 ppm if composite
video accuracy is to be maintained. Calibration intervals depend on the
requirements of the particular composite video specification in force.
Please contact TANDBERG Television Customer Services for advice.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page G-1
Accuracy of Frequency Sources
BLANK
Page G-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex H
H. Use of Remux Card in ATSC
Contents
H.1 Remux Card In ATSC With Internal PSIP.................H-3
H.2 Remux Card In ATSC With External PSIP................H-3
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page H-1
Use of Remux Card in ATSC
BLANK
Page H-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Use of Remux Card in ATSC
H.1
Remux Card In ATSC With Internal PSIP
The Encoder automatically remuxes ATSC streams arriving at its inputs, as
in DVB. The Encoder uses the PAT (Program Association Table) and PMT
(Program Map Table) to work out all the associated PIDs (Packet
Identifier), and attempt to extract the short name, the long name, and the
Service Type from the VCT (Virtual Channel Table).
NOTE…
If more than one program is present on any input the Encoder may be unable to extract any
information from the VCT on that input.
The Encoder then maps the PIDs using the program paradigm based upon
the program number. If possible, the program number of the input is
preserved. In Intelligent mode the Encoder automatically remaps the
program number/PIDs if a clash occurs. If an active program is overwritten
by another, the program number/PIDs of the first program are changed to
non-clashing values. In Dumb mode the Encoder requires a user to remap
clashing program numbers/PIDs to prevent overwriting an active program.
The Encoder generates all PSIP (Program System Information Protocol)
tables for the output stream. It generates a minimum set of tables
containing a minimum amount of data. The tables constructed are the:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MGT (Master Guide Table)
CVCT (Cable Virtual Channel Table) or
TVCT (Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table)
STT (System Time Table)
RRT (Rating Region Table)
EIT (Event Information Table) 0, 1, 2, and 3
PAT
CAT (Conditional Access Table)
PMT
The program paradigm is applied to any input program which has a
program number of less than 256. If the program number is greater than
255 any PID may be used for each stream. If a non-ATSC service is
detected then that may also be passed through the Remux card as an
ATSC program. The program paradigm will be applied to such a service if
possible and if the program number is less than 256.
H.2
Remux Card In ATSC With External PSIP
The Encoder only provides a minimum amount of information within the
PSIP tables. If more sophisticated tables are required then the PSIP may
be fed in externally using an ASI input on the Remux card. The user is able
to specify a PID range via a minimum and maximum PID. The user then
selects a port to use and chooses a Service Info level of ‘On (Ext. PSIP)’.
All PIDS between the maximum and minimum are then mapped directly to
the output.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page H-3
Use of Remux Card in ATSC
In this configuration the Encoder generates the PAT, CAT and PMT for all
programs but it is the responsibility of the user to provide all the PSIP for
the associated programs. Any programs present on the same input as the
external PSIP are not detected and are not referenced in the PAT.
This mode may be also be used for passing data through the Remux card.
NOTE…
It can take a long time to map a range of PIDs using the Remux card, and for usability the range
should be kept to a minimum. For instance, it takes approximately 80 seconds to map 4000 PIDs.
If the External PSIP input port is changed, the Encoder may fail to correctly
map the PIDs on the new port. This can be resolved by rebooting the
Encoder.
Page H-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex I
I. EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders
(SD Only)
Contents
I.1
EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders .......................... I-3
List of Tables
Table I.1: EDH Capability Matrix for E57xx Encoders.................... I-3
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page I-1
EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders (SD Only)
BLANK
Page I-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders (SD Only)
I.1
EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders
Table I.1 contains EDH capability for different mux firmware versions. To
find the mux firmware version for a particular Encoder refer to Summary
Screen/More/Advanced/Setup/System/Build Menu.
Table I.1: EDH Capability Matrix for E57xx Encoders
Mux F/W V14 and below
Base Card
Not Modified
Base Card
Modified
Mux F/W V15
Base Card H/W Mod Strike 11 and below
Base Card H/W Mod
Strike 12 and above
Software
versions 2.0.0
and above
(excluding 3.0.1)
EDH does not work, no errors
reported
EDH works, but unreliably
EDH works, but unreliably
•
•
•
Software
versions 3.0.1
and above
EDH does not work, no errors
reported
EDH works partially, converts edh errors to
eda, does not report all errors
•
•
•
•
Software aware that EDH is
not supported
Software aware that EDH is
not supported
Various EDH status flags
available in the menus (all
inactive)
•
UES (Unknown Error Status)
flags active
•
EDH support only partially implemented in
software
EDH support only
partially implemented in
software
EDH works as per
specifications
Gennum chip modifies EDH data in incoming
SDI stream
If EDH is not present in incoming stream,
Gennum chip inserts it; therefore the Encoder
thinks EDH was there all along. Error
detection in this case is unreliable as the
CRCs and checksums are calculated AFTER
the errors have occurred.
If EDH is present in incoming stream (the most
likely scenario) the Gennum chip detects CRC
and checksum errors (edh), turns those errors
into edas and recalculates CRCs. In this case
the Encoder reports the wrong type of errors,
which would make fault-finding very confusing
for an operator trying to find a fault in the SDI
chain.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page I-3
EDH Capability for E57xx Encoders (SD Only)
BLANK
Page I-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex J
J. Setting of the Remux Card for
Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
Contents
J.1
Setting the Remux Card Inputs................................. J-3
List of Tables
J.2
The DVB-Subtitles Input Mode.................................. J-3
J.2.1 Overview....................................................... J-3
J.2.2 The Setting Sequence .................................. J-4
J.3
The DATA Input Mode .............................................. J-4
J.3.1 Overview....................................................... J-4
J.3.2 The Setting Sequence .................................. J-5
Table J.1: DVB-Subtitles Descriptors ............................................ J-3
Table J.2: Sourcing the PSIP/PSI Tables...................................... J-5
Table J.3: Example 1 - Everything on One ASI Stream ................ J-7
Table J.4: Example 2 - PSI on one ASI Input, Data on Other
Inputs............................................................................ J-8
J.4
The PSIP Input Mode................................................ J-5
J.4.1 Overview....................................................... J-5
J.4.2 The Setting Sequence .................................. J-6
J.4.3 The Setting Sequence when an Encoder
is Upgraded from an Earlier Build Version ... J-6
J.5
Examples of Complex Setups................................... J-7
J.5.1 Example 1 - Everything on One ASI Input.... J-7
J.5.2 Example 2 – PSIP and data on different
inputs ............................................................ J-7
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page J-1
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
BLANK
Page J-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
J.1
Setting the Remux Card Inputs
All the required settings are applied from a single menu, the Service Info
sub-menu on the System menu.
Each input mode of one Remux card is selected independently using:
Remux input # in mode (where the character: ‘#’ is a placeholder for
the numbers: 1, 2 and 3).
NOTES:
1. The transition between ‘SERVICE’ and data modes (namely: ‘DATA’, ‘PSIP’, ‘Off’ and ‘DVBSubtitles’) requires that the Encoder’s PID-mapping features are fully operational. The same is
required by a change of: SI Level. In such circumstances, the value of: PID Remap (under the
Remux module sub-menu on the Mux menu) cannot be: ‘Lock PID Mapping’
2. It is not possible to set all remux inputs to ‘Off’. This setting is reserved for the special ‘SCPC’
mode available in Voyager units.
J.2
The DVB-Subtitles Input Mode
J.2.1
Overview
The DVB-Subtitles input mode allows adding a maximum of four
DVB-Subtitles elementary streams to the Encoder host service.
Each DVB-Subtitles elementary stream will be linked to one
stream-identifier descriptor and one subtitling-descriptor in the PMT table
of the Encoder host service.
Also one component-descriptor will be added in the EIT table for each
DVB-Subtitles elementary stream.
The content of the descriptors must be manually specified.
CAUTION…
It is the user's responsibility to ensure that the DVB-Subtitles elementary streams match the content of
the descriptors.
Table J.1: DVB-Subtitles Descriptors
Input:
Description:
DVB-Subt. PID #
The PID value for the elementary stream.
Subt.Lang.#
The ISO 639-2 three-character language code for the elementary stream.
Type #
The subtitling type for the elementary stream.
DVB-Subt. Tag #
The DVB component tag for the elementary stream.
Comp. page ID #
The composition page ID for the elementary stream.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page J-3
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
NOTES…
1. The ‘DVB-subtitles’ input mode will be available only when the syntax is: DVB.
2. Only one Remux card input can be in ‘DVB-Subtitles’ mode at any time.
3. The ‘DVB-Subtitles’ elementary streams will be output only if every configured PID value differs
from 0. The set of the allowed PID values includes 0 and the range of values from 32 to 8190.
4. The ‘stream identifier descriptor’ will be generated only if the value of: ‘DVB-Subt. Tag #’ differs
from 0.
By default, the Ancillary page ID for each DVB-Subtitles elementary stream
equals the value of the Composition page ID.
J.2.2
The Setting Sequence
1. Identifiy the Remux card input which will supply the DVB-Subtitles
elementary streams
2. For the selected input, change Remux input # in mode to Off.
3. Configure the value of DVB-Subtitles (up to four streams are
possible).
4. Configure the descriptors for all the selected DVB-Subtitles
elementary streams.
5. Finally, change Remux input # in mode to DVB subt.
J.3
The DATA Input Mode
J.3.1
Overview
The DATA input mode allows the mapping a set of elementary streams
directly to the output of the Remux card.
The set of elementary streams is defined, for each Remux card input, by a
range of PID values.
NOTES…
1. The ‘DATA’ input mode will be available when the syntax is: DVB and ATSC.
2. Any Remux card input can be in DATA mode at any time.
3. The set of the allowed PID values ranges from 0 to 8190.
4. The Encoder will not reference any data streams in its internally generated PSI. If this is required,
switch internal PSI off by setting SI Level to Off
CAUTION…
It is the user’s responsibility to supply PSI on a Remux input.
Page J-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
J.3.2
The Setting Sequence
1. Identify the Remux card input that will be used to supply the DATA
elementary streams.
2. For the selected input, change: Remux input # in mode to Off.
3. Configure the values of DATA # Min PID and DATA # Max PID to
include the set of the supplied elementary streams.
4. Finally, change Remux input # in mode to Data.
J.4
The PSIP Input Mode
J.4.1
Overview
The PSIP mode can be used to source PSIP and PSI tables from an external
generator via a remux input, rather than the Encoder itself generating
these tables. If this generator also produces other elementary streams,
these too can, optionally, be passed through the Encoder.
The relevant menu entries in the Service info menu are:
•
Remux input <X> in mode: the particular remux input chosen to
source the stream must be set to PSIP.
•
SI Level: This defines which PSIP and PSI tables are sourced from the
Remux input and which are generated internally by the Encoder, as
shown in Table J.2.
Table J.2: Sourcing the PSIP/PSI Tables
SI Level value:
Input source for the PSIP tables
(MGT, STT, TVCT, CVCT)
Input source for the PSI tables
(PAT, CAT, PMT)
On (PSIP).
Encoder motherboard
Encoder motherboard
On (Ext.PSIP)
PSIP input
Encoder motherboard
Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI)
PSIP input
PSIP input
•
PSIP Min PID/PSIP Max PID: These two entries define what additional
elementary streams are passed through. Any streams with PIDS falling
within this range are passed through.
NOTE…
When sourcing PSI from the PSIP input this range must include the PMT and EIT PIDs.
•
PSIP PID Status: This shows the PIDs which are actually passed
through and would normally correspond to the min/max range set,
once the SI Level has been set to one of the ext.PSIP modes.
NOTES...
1. The ‘PSIP’ input mode will be available only when the syntax is: ATSC.
2. Only one Remux card input can be in ‘PSIP’ mode at any time.
3. The set of the allowed PID values ranges from 2 to 8190.
4. The mapping of the PSI/PSIP elementary streams does not take place until ‘SI Level’ is configured.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page J-5
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
J.4.2
The Setting Sequence
1. Identify which Remux card input will supply the PSIP elementary
streams.
2. For the selected input, change Remux input # in mode to Off.
3. Change the value of SI Level to Off.
4. Configure the values of PSIP Min PID and PSIP Max PID to include
all the externally supplied PMT, EIT tables and elementary streams.
5. Change the value of Remux input # in mode to PSIP.
6. Finally, change the value of SI Level to On (Ext.PSIP) or
Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI) according to Table J.2.
J.4.3
The Setting Sequence when an Encoder is Upgraded
from an Earlier Build Version
If the Encoder was running a version prior to V3.8.0 and was already setup
to source PSIP via the Remux card, it is necessary to make some minor
adjustments once the software upgrade is complete.
The entry Ext. PSIP Source has been substituted by the three entries
Remux input # in mode. All that is required is to set the appropriate
input in the menu.
NOTE…
If the Encoder is not behaving as expected, a complete re-setup can be done by following the
sequence in Para J.4.1.
Page J-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
J.5
Examples of Complex Setups
J.5.1
Example 1 - Everything on One ASI Input
In this example, an external generator provides both PSIP, PSI tables and
other data on other elementary streams on one ASI input.
NOTE…
This was already possible on Encoder builds prior to 3.8.0. where the SI level setting
Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI) was available.
Assume the PID map shown in Table J.3.
Table J.3: Example 1 - Everything on One ASI Stream
PSI data
PMT PID = 0x20 (program number 2 is being used)
The Encoder’s SI is switched off to
allow external PSI insertion.
Video PID = 0x21
Audio 1 PID = 0x24
Audio 2 PID = 0x25
PSIP
EIT, ETT, MGT, VCT follow the ATSC standard.
Other data
PID range from 500 to 1300, typically only 5 active
PIDs at a time but the PID values change regularly.
In this case, the setting sequence is as follows:
1. The host service is configured in order to match the requested PID
values for: PCR, Video, Audio-1 and Audio-2.
2. Assuming that the Remux card input number 1 is the only active input,
set Remux input # in mode to PSIP and the other two input modes
to Off.
3. Set the SI Level to Off.
4. Set the value of PSIP Min PID to 32 and the value of PSIP Max PID
to 8147.
(The data PID range is from 500 to 1300 and the PMT pid value and
the default EIT range is from 8144 to 8147.)
5. Set the SI Level to Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI).
J.5.2
Example 2 – PSIP and data on different inputs
This example can be considered an evolution of the previous one in
para J.5.1.
The Remux card input number 1 is used for PSI/PSIP data, number 2 and 3
are both used for other data.
NOTE…
This was not possible on Encoder builds prior to 3.8.0.
Assume the following PID map:
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page J-7
Setting of the Remux Card for Data/PSIP and DVB-Subtitles Input
Table J.4: Example 2 - PSI on one ASI Input, Data on Other Inputs
Port 1
PSI data
PMT PID = 0x10 (program number 2 is being used)
Video PID = 0x11
The Encoder’s SI is switched off to
allow external PSI insertion.
Audio 1 PID = 0x14
Audio 2 PID = 0x15
PSIP
EIT, ETT, MGT, VCT follow the ATSC standard
Port 2
ACAP data
PID range from 8000 to 8100, typical use of 5 active
PIDs at a time. The PID values change regularly.
Port 3
Net data
PID range 6656-6911 and bandwidth is 200 k –
500 kbit/.
In this case, the setting sequence is:
1. Configure the host service to match the requested PID values for: PCR,
Video, Audio-1 and Audio-2.
2. Set the SI Level to Off.
3. Set the value of DATA 2 Min PID to 8000 and the value of DATA 2
Max PID to 8100.
(The ACAP-data PID range is from 8000 to 8100.)
4. Set the value of DATA 3 Min PID is set to 6656 and the value of
DATA 3 Max PID is set to 6911.
(The Net-data PID range is from 6656 to 6911.)
5. The value of PSIP Min PID is set to 16 while the value of PSIP Max
PID is set to 8147. It is assumed that ETT, MGT, VCT are on the PID
number 8187.
6. Set the entry Remux input 1 in mode to PSIP.
7. Set the entry Remux input 2 in mode to DATA.
8. Set the entry Remux input 3 in mode to DATA.
9. Set the SI Level to Off (Ext.PSIP/PSI).
CAUTION…
In this example, the pid values of port-1 and port-2 are partially overlapped.
Care must take to avoid any conflict.
Page J-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex K
K. Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP
Streaming in E57xx Encoders
Contents
K.1 Introduction ...............................................................K-3
K.2 Pro-MPEG FEC ........................................................K-3
K.2.1 Introduction...................................................K-3
K.2.2 Configuring Pro-MPEG FEC.........................K-4
Protocol/Pro-MPEG FEC Option ..................K-4
Nbr of Columns (L) Option............................K-4
Nbr of Rows (D) Option ................................K-4
K.2.3 Pro-MPEG FEC Constraints.........................K-4
K.2.4 Recommendations for use of Pro-MPEG
FEC ..............................................................K-5
Overview.......................................................K-5
Column-Only Mode Performance .................K-5
Row and Column Mode Performance ..........K-5
Size of the Matrix..........................................K-5
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
List of Figures
Figure K.1: Columns and Rows.....................................................K-3
Page K-1
Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders
BLANK
Page K-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders
K.1
Introduction
With the V3.8.1 software release of the E57xx encoder, IP streaming
corresponding to the Pro-MPEG FEC protocol is possible.
This annex provides supplementary information on setting up Pro-MPEG
FEC only.
NOTES...
1. The current IP streamer option card is NOT capable of being upgraded to support Pro-MPEG FEC.
A new card must be installed (M2/EOM2/IP/PROFEC).
2. Only one IP streamer card may be installed in an E57xx encoder.
K.2
Pro-MPEG FEC
K.2.1
Introduction
The Pro-MPEG Forward Error Correction(FEC) scheme is designed to
recover lost or corrupted packets caused when transferring MPEG-2
transport streams, or newer MPEG standards encapsulated as an MPEG-2
transport streams, over an IP network.
The Pro-MPEG FEC scheme has been implement to the Pro-MPEG Code of
Practice #3 release 2.
FEC packets are generated for every column and optionally for every row.
To generate the FEC packets, RTP frames based on their Sequence
Numbers are arranged in a rectangle of dimensions D * L. The Payload of
the FEC packet generated is the ExOR of the row/column it protects.
CoLumns (L)
Rows (D)
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
7
8
9
10 11 12
7
13 14 15 16 17 18 13
19 20 21 22 23 24 19
25 26 27 28 29 30 25
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure K.1: Columns and Rows
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page K-3
Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders
K.2.2
Configuring Pro-MPEG FECProtocol/Pro-MPEG FEC Option
When Pro-MPEG FEC is enabled this setting allows the IP output of the
E57xx to be configured to work in FEC Column only mode or FEC Row and
Column mode.
When either of these settings is selected the MPEG transport stream is set
to operate in RTP mode.
If FEC Column only mode is selected a FEC stream is sent out on the same
IP address as the MPEG transport stream but with the UDP destination port
set to + 2 from the MPEG transport stream.
If FEC Row and Column mode is selected two FEC streams are sent out on
the same IP address as the MPEG transport stream but with the Column
FEC stream’s UDP destination port number set to + 2 and the Row FEC
stream’s UDP destination port number set to + 4 from the MPEG transport
stream.
Nbr of Columns (L) Option
This setting configures the number of Columns in the matrix, and
determines the number of MPEG packets used when calculating the Row
FEC packets.
Nbr of Rows (D) Option
This setting configures the number of Rows in the matrix, and determines
the number of MPEG packets used when calculating the Column FEC
packets.
K.2.3
Pro-MPEG FEC Constraints
Matrix Limitations in Columns only mode:
L * D ≤ 100
1 ≤ L ≤ 20
4 ≤ D ≤ 20
Matrix Limitations in Rows and Columns mode:
L * D ≤ 100
4 ≤ L ≤ 20
4 ≤ D ≤ 20
Column only Overheads:
Overhead = L + (D * L) = 1 + 1
(D * L)
D
Worst case is 4 rows = (1/4) + 1 = 25%
Best case is 20 rows = (1/20) + 1 = 5%
Row and Column Overheads:
Overhead = D + L + (D * L)
(D * L)
Worst case is 4x4 = (4+4+16) / 16 = 50%
Page K-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders
Best case is 10x10 = (10+10+100) / 100 = 5%
K.2.4
Recommendations for use of Pro-MPEG FEC
Overview
There are no official recommendations within the Pro-MPEG Code of
Practice #3 release 2 regarding which parameters give the best results.
The first decision to be made is which Encapsulation mode to use, as this
has a large effect on the added overhead. Column only or Row and Column
mode, this decision will be determined by the packet loss characteristics of
the network and the importance of data integrity over the network. This
information will be different for every network and service provider,
therefore TANDBERG Television cannot offer recommendations in this
reference guide.
The following information has been added to help demonstrate the
difference in data protection provided by each FEC scheme.
Column-Only Mode Performance
For every 10 fold improvement in Channel Packet Loss Ratio (PLR) there is
approximately a 100 fold improvement in the outgoing PLR.
Row and Column Mode Performance
For every 10 fold improvement in Channel PLR there is approximately a
1000 fold improvement in the outgoing PLR.
Size of the Matrix
The final decision to be made is the size of matrix to be used. Simply by
adding a Column only FEC scheme, irrespective of dimension reduces the
Mean Time To Failure (MTBF) massively. The difference in coding gain
between a small matrix and a big matrix is small compared to the massive
gain of actually adding a FEC scheme. A large matrix would therefore
probably be preferred for most service providers as the IP packet overhead
is lower. However using a large matrix means that the latency to decode
the transport stream is increased. Using a small matrix will reduce the
latency of the system but will obviously significantly increase the overhead.
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page K-5
Pro-MPEG FEC Support for IP Streaming in E57xx Encoders
BLANK
Page K-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Annex L
L. Alarm List
The following table lists the alarm and failure identifiers generated within the Encoder.
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
00000000
LCD Not Found
Failed to initialise the LCD Front Panel.
Alarm
General
00000004
Temp Sensor Busy
No response from Temperature Sensor Device
Alarm
General
00000005
Temp Sensor Comms
"Incorrect Data, or failure in CRC read from Device"
Alarm
General
00000009
FPGA Boot Fail
Failed to boot the internal FPGA/Mux.
Alarm
General
00000010
Over Temperature
Over 55° Centigrade
Alarm
General
00000011
Under Temperature
Under 0° Centigrade
Alarm
General
00000014
Invalid Option
Modules
"The combination of option modules fitted, does not match any of
the allowed configurations for the Backplane."
Fail
General
00000015
Test Error
For Debug use only
Alarm
General
00000016
Video Module
The encoder was unable to either detect or initialise the MPEG-2
Video Module.
Alarm
General
00000017
Audio A Module
The encoder was unable to either detect or initialise the
Motherboard Audio A Module.
Alarm
General
00000018
Audio B Module
The encoder was unable to either detect or initialise the
Motherboard Audio B Module.
Alarm
General
00000019
Option Slot 1
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000020
Option Slot 2
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000021
Option Slot 3
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000022
Option Slot 4
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000023
Option Slot 5
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000024
Option Slot 6
"Valid Dual Port RAM found, but the option module is either
unknown, or was not booted successfully."
Alarm
General
00000025
Duplicate PMT PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
General
00000026
Invalid PMT PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
General
00000027
Duplicate PCR PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
General
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Level
Source Module
Page L-1
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
00000028
Invalid PCR PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
General
00000029
System Clock Not
Locked
Input clock not locked to the External Sync Source.
Alarm
General
00000030
Mux PCR not
incrementing
The internal PCR counter is not incrementing. The FPGA/Mux has
stopped running.
Fail
General
00000031
FPGA (Mux) Code
Missing From Flash
The FPGA/Mux code is not in Flash Memory. Unable to initialise
the Device.
Fail
General
00000032
NVRam Battery Fault
NVRam battery low or disconnected.
Fail
General
00000035
PCR/VITC Ethernet
Send
Failed sending the MHP/VITC data over UDP/IP.
Alarm
General
00000036
Invalid Firmware
Version
The FPGA/Mux code is not valid for the option modules detected.
Please upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Fail
General
00000037
Duplicate Splice
(SCTE-35) PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
General
00000038
Invalid Splice (SCTE35) PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
General
00000041
SNMP Undo Fail
Error when processing an SNMP SET command and error
restoring the Encoder configuration.
Alarm
Remote Control
00000042
SNTP Server Not
Found
No reply received from the SNTP Server.
Alarm
Remote Control
00000080
SI Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000081
VBI Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000082
Audio 1 Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000083
Audio 2 Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000084
Video Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000085
Backplane Stream 1
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000086
Backplane Stream 2
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000087
Backplane Stream 3
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000088
Backplane Stream 4
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000089
Backplane Stream 5
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000090
Backplane Stream 6
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000091
RS232 Data (Mbd)
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000092
RS422 Data (Mbd)
Packet Error
Incomplete packet detected by the internal Mux.
Alarm
Mux
00000120
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
a new config download as a result of an error."
Alarm
Video Source
00000121
Video
Lock(Composite)
Composite video input unlocked.
Alarm
Video Source
00000122
Video Lock (SDI)
Digital video input unlocked.
Alarm
Video Source
00000123
Video Line Standard
Incorrect video line-standard.
Alarm
Video Source
00000124
EDH Full Field Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000125
EDH Full Field
Unknown Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Masked
Video Source
00000126
EDH Full Field Internal
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
Page L-2
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
Error Already
00000127
EDH Full Field Error
Already
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000128
EDH Picture Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000129
EDH Picture Unknown
Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Masked
Video Source
00000130
EDH Picture Internal
Error Already
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000131
EDH Picture Error
Already
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000132
EDH Anc. Data Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000133
EDH Anc. Data
Unknown Error
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Masked
Video Source
00000134
EDH Anc. Data
Internal Error Already
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000135
EDH Anc. Data Error
Already
Error on the video (SDI) input.
Alarm
Video Source
00000136
Composite Input
Calibration
The composite video input is not calibrated.
Alarm
Video Source
00000137
Freeze Frame on
Input
The number of still video frames exceeds the configured value of
Video Source/Max Still Period.
Alarm
Video Source
00000138
Freeze Frame and
Audio Silence
Freeze frame on the input combined with audio silence.
Alarm
Video Source
00000139
Video Lock (HD SDI)
Digital video input (HD) unlocked.
Alarm
Video Source
00000140
SD Video Loss (HD)
Digital video input unlocked (HD).
Masked
Video Source
00000160
Duplicate VBI PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000161
Invalid VBI PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000162
Duplicate Teletext PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000163
Invalid Teletext PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000164
Closed Caption (Line
21) Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Masked
VBI/Userdata
00000165
Closed Caption (Field
2) Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000166
Nielsen/AMOL I
Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000167
Nielsen/AMOL II
Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000168
VPS Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000169
WSS Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000170
VITC Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000171
Video Index Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000172
No Teletext Data
Detected
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000173
No Inverted Teletext
Data Detected
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000174
VBI PID Delay too
long
Insufficient space in the buffers to delay the VBI. The maximum
VBI delay is 120 frames.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000175
VITC Different on
each field
Each field of a video frame has a different time code. This
prevents the Splice Point insertion from working correctly.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000176
Serial Closed
Captions Data
Serial interface errors.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page L-3
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
00000177
Too many
Monochrome 4:2:2
lines
A maximum of 2 lines per frame are permitted.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000178
Video Index/WSSAFD not set in VBI
"The AFD is configured in the Video Module, but the Encoder is
not configured to decode AFD from the VBI."
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000179
Gemstar2x Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000180
NABTS Data
Detection
Detection failure on the configured video line/s.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000181
VITC CRC Error
CRC error on the VITC stream.
Alarm
VBI/Userdata
00000200
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
a new config download as a result of an error."
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000201
Config Update
Mismatch between the requested and the actual configuration of
the Video Encoder.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000202
VCM Stopped
Option card general failure.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000203
Bad Parameters
At least one configuration parameter is incorrect.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000204
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000205
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000206
"VBI, Bit-rate too low"
The Video bit-rate is less than 4.5 MBits/s. This may cause errors
when passing VBI information as part of the picture.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000207
"VBI, Hor Res too low"
The Video is less than full resolution. This may cause errors when
passing VBI information as part of the picture.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000208
Mux Bit-rate too low
"The output bit-rate is too low. The Video Encoding will be
switched off, until the output bit-rate is high enough to allow for the
minimum video bit-rate."
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000209
No Interrupt
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000210
DSP Overrun
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000211
Boot Fail
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000212
Bad Frame Rate
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000213
Rate Buffer OF/UF
Error reported by the Video Module. Overflow or Underflow.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000214
DSP Health
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000215
Bad Filter Coeffs
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000216
Repeated PCR
Resync
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000217
Coding Mode Error
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000218
PCR Error
The Video Module detected discontinuity in the PCR count.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000219
No PowerUp Tests
Error reported by the Video Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000220
No Reflex Messages
"While in reflex mode, the period between consecutive messages
is longer than 1 second."
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000221
Invalid Reflex Bit-Rate
"While in reflex mode, the reflex bit-rate is too low."
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000222
"Reflex Msgs, Not
Enabled"
The licenced reflex feature is not enabled while receiving valid
messages.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000223
"Reflex Msgs, No VBR
Licence"
The reflex feature is not licenced while receiving valid messages.
Alarm
Video Encoder
00000280
Module Fault
Applies to the Motherboard modules only. The audio module has
failed to boot.
Alarm
Audio A
00000281
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
a new config download as a result of an error."
Alarm
Audio A
00000282
Config Update
The audio module is not responding correctly to the requested
config.
Alarm
Audio A
00000284
Incorrect Parameters
One or more parameters are incorrect.
Alarm
Audio A
Page L-4
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
00000285
PCR Error
Unable to read the internal PCR count.
Alarm
Audio A
00000286
Silence Timeout Left
The audio level of the left channel was below the silence threshold
longer than the programmed timeout.
Alarm
Audio A
00000287
Silence Timeout Right
The audio level of the right channel was below the silence
threshold longer than the programmed timeout.
Alarm
Audio A
00000288
Level Clipping Left
The audio level of the left channel is above the clipping threshold.
Alarm
Audio A
00000289
Level Clipping Right
The audio level of the right channel is above the clipping
threshold.
Alarm
Audio A
00000290
Embedded Source 1
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio A
00000291
Embedded Source 2
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio A
00000292
Embedded Source 3
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio A
00000293
Embedded Source 4
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio A
00000294
AC-3 Input Invalid
No input stream when the coding is Dolby digital AC3 pass-thru.
Alarm
Audio A
00000295
No Digital Input
Too many errors on the digital audio input.
Alarm
Audio A
00000296
Mux FIFO Overflow
Error on the internal Mux input. The audio channel will be reset.
Alarm
Audio A
00000297
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Audio A
00000298
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Audio A
00000299
Mux Bit-rate too low
The output bit-rate is too low. The audio output will be switched
off.
Alarm
Audio A
00000300
Audio Un-Calibrated
The analog audio input is not calibrated.
Alarm
Audio A
00000301
Lip Sync Error
The requested delay exceeds the maximum value allowed for the
current coding standard and hardware.
Alarm
Audio A
00000302
Invalid Sampling Rate
The sampling frequency is incompatible with the coding mode
Dolby digital AC3 pass-thru.
Alarm
Audio A
00000303
ADS Input Invalid
Unable to detect valid MPEG-2/Audio Descriptor Service on input.
Alarm
Audio A
00000304
DTS Input Invalid
Unable to detect a valid DTS Audio stream on input.
Alarm
Audio A
00000320
Module Fault
Applies to the Motherboard modules only. The audio module has
failed to boot.
Alarm
Audio B
00000321
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
a new config download as a result of an error."
Alarm
Audio B
00000322
Config Update
The audio module is not responding correctly to the requested
config.
Alarm
Audio B
00000324
Incorrect Parameters
One or more parameters are incorrect.
Alarm
Audio B
00000325
PCR Error
Unable to read the internal PCR count.
Alarm
Audio B
00000326
Silence Timeout Left
The audio level of the left channel was below the silence threshold
longer than the programmed timeout.
Alarm
Audio B
00000327
Silence Timeout Right
The audio level of the right channel was below the silence
threshold longer than the programmed timeout.
Alarm
Audio B
00000328
Level Clipping Left
The audio level of the left channel is above the clipping threshold.
Alarm
Audio B
00000329
Level Clipping Right
The audio level of the right channel is above the clipping
threshold.
Alarm
Audio B
00000330
Embedded Source 1
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio B
00000331
Embedded Source 2
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio B
00000332
Embedded Source 3
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio B
00000333
Embedded Source 4
The embedded audio input source is missing.
Alarm
Audio B
00000334
AC-3 Input Invalid
No input stream when the coding is Dolby digital AC3 pass-thru.
Alarm
Audio B
00000335
No Digital Input
Too many errors on the digital audio input.
Alarm
Audio B
00000336
Mux FIFO Overflow
Error on the internal Mux input. The audio channel will be reset.
Alarm
Audio B
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page L-5
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
00000337
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Audio B
00000338
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Audio B
00000339
Mux Bit-rate too low
The output bit-rate is too low. The audio output will be switched
off.
Alarm
Audio B
00000340
Audio Un-Calibrated
The analog audio input is not calibrated.
Alarm
Audio B
00000341
Lip Sync Error
The requested delay exceeds the maximum value allowed for the
current coding standard and hardware.
Alarm
Audio B
00000342
Invalid Sampling Rate
The sampling frequency is incompatible with the coding mode
Dolby digital AC3 pass-thru.
Alarm
Audio B
00000343
ADS Input Invalid
Unable to detect valid MPEG-2/Audio Descriptor Service on input.
Alarm
Audio B
00000344
DTS Input Invalid
Unable to detect a valid DTS Audio stream on input.
Alarm
Audio B
00000440
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Data C - Ethernet
Data
00000441
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Data C - Ethernet
Data
00000442
PID MissMatch
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Data C - Ethernet
Data
00000443
Mux FIFO Full
No space left in the mux FIFO.
Alarm
Data C - Ethernet
Data
01000000
Overflow on Input 1
Input overflow (ASI external input).
Alarm
Remux Module
01000001
Overflow on Input 2
Input overflow (ASI external input).
Alarm
Remux Module
01000002
Overflow on Input 3
Input overflow (ASI external input).
Alarm
Remux Module
01000003
Overflow Motherboard
O/P
Input overflow (backplane internal input).
Alarm
Remux Module
01000004
Remux Card Stopped
Option card general failure.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000005
Motherboard O/P TS
The input effective bandwidth exceeds the output.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000006
Motherboard O/P to
Remux Not Locked
The output from the option module cannot lock to the motherboard
reference bit-rate.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000007
Remux ASI Input 1
Not Locked
The service input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000008
Remux ASI Input 2
Not Locked
The service input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000009
Remux ASI Input 3
Not Locked
The service input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000010
PSIP/DATA Input 1
Not Locked
The external PSIP/DATA input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000011
PSIP/DATA Input 2
Not Locked
The external PSIP/DATA input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000012
PSIP/DATA Input 3
Not Locked
The external PSIP/DATA input is unlocked.
Alarm
Remux Module
01000360
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
a new config download as a result of an error."
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000361
Config Update
The data module is not responding correctly to the requested
config.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000362
Processor Stopped
Too many configuration errors.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000363
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000364
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000365
Mux Bit-rate too low
The output bit-rate is too low. The mux stream is not active.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000366
Mux FIFO Full
No space left in the mux FIFO.
Alarm
Data A - RS232
01000400
Comms Error
"Not set in normal operation. For use with MEM controller, to force
Alarm
Data B - RS422
Page L-6
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Alarm List
Alarm Id
Alarm Name
Alarm Description
Level
Source Module
a new config download as a result of an error."
01000401
Config Update
The data module is not responding correctly to the requested
config.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000402
Processor Stopped
Too many configuration errors.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000403
Duplicate PID
The selected PID value clashes with another.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000404
Invalid PID
The selected PID value is out of range.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000405
Mux Bit-rate too low
The output bit-rate is too low. The mux stream is not active.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000406
Data Overflow
Input overflow in the data module.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000407
Data Underflow
Input underflow in the data module.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
01000408
Input not Locked
The data input was unlocked longer than 5 seconds.
Alarm
Data B - RS422
05000001
IRD TS Lock
Input source not locked.
Masked
IRD Module
05000002
IRD Demod Lock
Demod. input source not locked.
Masked
IRD Module
05000003
IRD BER
The BER of the demod. input source is above the configured
threshold.
Masked
IRD Module
05000004
IRD Video
Video not running or video source missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000005
IRD Audio1
Audio not running or audio source stream missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000006
IRD Audio2
Audio not running or audio source stream missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000007
IRD Sync Data
Sync. data source missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000008
IRD Async Data
Async. data source missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000009
IRD Subtitles
Subtitles source stream missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000010
IRD Teletext
Teletext source stream missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000011
IRD VBI
VBI source stream missing.
Masked
IRD Module
05000012
IRD Demod Tracking
While in tracking mode the modulation type or the FEC scheme
do not match the demod. hardware.
Masked
IRD Module
05000013
IRD Demod ASI Lock
The demod. ASI input is not locked.
Masked
IRD Module
07000033
CA Module Not
Present
CA feature enabled and the CA module is absent.
Masked
General
07000034
CA Module Boot Fail
The download of the CA module has failed.
Alarm
General
XXXXX10
E4 No Response
Error reported by the E4 Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX11
Initialisation Error
Error reported by the E4 Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX12
PCR Error
The Video Module detected discontinuity in the PCR count.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX13
Rate Buffer OF/UF
Error reported by the Video Module. Overflow or Underflow.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX14
Rate Buffer Empty
Error reported by the E4 Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX15
E4 Has Reset
Error reported by the E4 Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXX16
HD MultiPass Error
HD configuration failure.
Alarm
Video Encoder
XXXXXX0
ATM Interface
Internal error with the module interface.
Alarm
ATM Module
XXXXXX0
Tx Loss of Sync
No response error.
Fail
G.703 Output
XXXXXX0
No Response
Internal error with the module interface.
Alarm
IP Streamer
XXXXXXX1
Link Down
No valid network detected at the output of the IP Streamer option
module.
Alarm
IP Streamer
XXXXXXX2
ARP Unresolved
Error reported by the option module.
Masked
IP Streamer
XXXXXXX3
Out Of Sync
Error reported by the option module.
Alarm
IP Streamer
XXXXXXX4
Packets Discarded
Error reported by the option module.
Alarm
IP Streamer
XXXXXXX9
E4 Comms Sequence
Number
Error reported by the E4 Module.
Alarm
Video Encoder
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3
Page L-7
Alarm List
Page L-8
Reference Guide: Voyager E5784 and E5788 HD DSNG Encoder
ST.RE.E10137.3